OF

PRINCIPLES
INSTRUCTIONAL

FOURTH EDITION
ROBERT M. GAGN
LESLIE J. BRIGGS
WALTER W. WAGER
Principles of
Instructional
Design
Principles of
Instructional
Design
Fourth Edition

Robert M. Gagne
Professor Emeritus, Florida State University

Leslie J. Briggs
Professor Emeritus (deceased), Florida State University

Walter W. Wager
Professor, Florida State University

Harcourt Brace College Publishers

Fort Worth Philadelphia San Diego
New York Orlando Austin San Antonio
Toronto Montreal London Sydney Tokyo
Publisher Ted Buchholz
Acquisitions Editor Jo- Anne Weaver
Project Editor Catherine Townsend
Production Manager Annette Dudley Wiggins
Art &
Design Supervisor John Ritland
Cover Design Sok James Hwang
Text Design Greg Draper

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Gagne, Robert Mills, 1916-

Principles of instructional design / Robert M. Gagne,
Leslie J. Briggs, Walter W. Wager. — 4th ed.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-03-034757-2
1. Instructional systems —Design. 2. Learning. I. Briggs,
Leslie Wager, Walter W., 1944-
J. II. in. Tide.
LB1028.38.G34 1992
371.3—dc20 91-27787
CIP
ISBN: 0-03-034757-2

Copyright © 1992, 1988, 1979, 1974 by Holt, Rinehart and

Winston

All rights reserved. No

part of this publication may be repro-
duced or transmitted any form or by any means, electronic
in
or mechanical, including photocopy, recording, or any informa-
tion storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing
from the publisher.

Requests for permission to make copies of any part of the work

should be mailed to: Permissions Department, Harcourt Brace
& Company, 6277 Sea Harbor Drive, Orlando, Florida 32887-6777.

Address for Editorial Correspondence: Harcourt Brace & Company,

301 Commerce Street, Suite 3700, Fort Worth, TX 76102

Address for Orders: Harcourt Brace & Company, 6277 Sea Harbor
Drive, Orlando, FL 32887-6777

Printed in the United States of America

7 8 9 12 3 4 5 6 016 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
Dedicated to the memory of
our friend and colleague

LESLIE J. BRIGGS
 CONTENTS

Preface

Part One: Introduction to Instructional Systems

1. Introduction 3
Basic Assumptions about Instructional Design 4
Some Learning Principles 6
The Conditions of Learning 8
The Rationale for Instructional Design 14
What This Book Is About 16
Summary 18
References 18
2. Designing Instructional Systems 20
InstructionalDesign 21
Educational System Design 31
Summary 34
References 35

Part Two: Basic Processes in Learning and Instruction

3. The Outcomes of Instruction 39

Instruction and Educational Goals 39
Five Categories of Learning Outcomes 43
Designing Instruction Using Human Capabilities .. 50
Summary 50
References 52
4. Varieties of Learning: Intellectual Skills and Strategies 53
Types of Intellectual Skills 54
Cognitive Strategies 66
Metacognition 71
Varieties of Intellectual Skills in School Subjects ... 73
Summary 74
References 75
5. Varieties of Learning: Information, Attitudes, and Motor
Skills 77
Verbal Information (Knowledge) 77
The Learning of Verbal Information 80
viii Contents

Attitudes 85
Motor Skills 92
Summary 95
References 97
6. The Learner 99
Learner Characteristics 100
Memory Organization 105
Schemas 106
Learners as Participants in Instruction 110
Summmary 117
References 119

Part Three: Designing Instruction

7. Defining Performance Objectives 125

Achieving Precision in Objectives 126
Examples of Objectives 136
Using Objectives in Instructional Planning 141
Summary 143
References 144
8. Analysis of the Learning Task 145
Scope of the Analysis 146
Types of Task Analysis 147
Prerequisites in Learning Intellectual Skills 151
Learning-Task Analysis and Other Learning
Types 156
Summary 162
References 163
9. Designing Instructional Sequences 165
An Example of Course Organization 167
Learning Hierarchies and Instructional Sequence . 177
Integrating Multiple Objectives 179
Summary 183
References 183
10. The Events of Instruction 185
The Nature of Instruction 185
The Events of Instruction in a Lesson 200
Summary 202
References 203
11. Selecting and Using Media 205
Selection vs. Development of Media 205
Media and the Learning Situation 207
Media Selection Procedures 210
A Method of Media Selection 216
 Contents ix

Summary 222
References 222
12. Designing the Individual Lesson 224
Lesson Planning and Module Design 225
Establishing a Sequence of Objectives 226
Lesson Planning for Learning Outcomes 234
Steps in Lesson Planning 237
Integrative Goals: Lesson Planning for Multiple
Objectives 245
Roles and Activities in Instructional
Development 251
Summary 252
References 252
13. Assessing Student Performance 254
Purposes of Performance Measures 255
Procedures for Objective-Referenced Assessment . 257
The Concept of Mastery 260
Criteria for Objective-Referenced Assessment 263
Norm-Referenced Measures 273
Summary 275
References 276

Part Four: Delivery Systems for Instruction

14. Group Instruction 281

Characteristics of Group Instruction 282
Instruction in the Two-Person Group 284
Instruction in the Small Group 288
Instruction in the Large Group 293
Features of Tutoring in Large Groups 297
Summary 299
References 300
15. Individualized Instruction 302
Nationally Diffused Systems 303
Locally Developed Systems 304
Varieties of Activities 305
Implementing Instructional Events 306
Systems for Older Students 309
Varieties of Individualized Instruction 310
Management of Individualized Instruction 311
Use of Materials in Individualized Instruction 316
Teacher Training for Individualized Instruction ... 322
Media Development for Individualized
Instruction 326
Summary 327
References 329
x Contents

16. Evaluating Instruction 331

Educational Evaluation 332
Evaluation of Instruction: Two Major Roles 335
Evaluation of Instructional Programs 340
Interpreting Evaluative Evidence 344
Examples of Evaluation Studies 348
Summary 355
References 355
Index 357
 Preface

T, hese are exciting times for the field of instructional

systems. Society in general has determined that our school systems are not
meeting current needs, and we are in a movement toward restructuring. More
importandy, however, instructional systems practitioners are setting new direc-
tions in these efforts and are promoting a systems view for the problems facing
education.
With advances in computer technology, we see revitalized efforts in the fields
of knowledge engineering, expert systems, and multimedia educational technol-
ogy. These emerging technologies will not only affect delivery systems, but also
the way we study learning and conceive of the learning process. The discovery of
instructional systems by industry, and the movement toward performance systems
technology will affect our perceptions of the role of the instructional designer and
the training of instructional systems professionals.
There is an increasing move to apply cognitive psychology to instructional
systems. This places more emphasis on learner analysis, cognitive strategies,
motivational strategies, and information presentation strategies. John Keller's
ARCS model of motivational design stresses the need to look not only at what
we teach, but how we teach it so as to make learning more meaningful (see
Chapter 6). Robert M. Gagne and M. David Merrill have expanded their
conceptualizaton of integrated goals and have introduced the concept of enter-
prise schema (see Chapter 9). The elaboration of schema theory seems sure to
continue in the near future, and it surely will have an influence on how learning
xii Preface

environments are structured. The aim of this edition is to include discussion of

these new technologies and their contributions to the principles of instructional
design.
Another aim of this edition is to include an expanded set of examples for
lesson design (see Chapter 12). These examples show how instructional princi-
ples can be applied in a number of specific situations. In addition, there are
expanded sections on designing instruction in the affective domain and the
motor domain (Chapter 5). Last, since appearance of the previous edition,
skills

Holt Rinehart and Winston has published a Learner's Guide for this text. The
Learner's Guide includes objectives for each chapter, practice exercises for each
objective, feedback for the practice exercises, application exercises,
and examples
of student answers for these exercises. Students who use this as a course text will
find the Learner's Guide of inestimable help.
Overall, our purpose in this edition remains the same as in previous editions.
That is, describing a rationally consistent basis for instructional design. The
procedures we suggest are more accurately viewed as "what to do" rather than
specifically "how to do it." This approach reflects the belief that instructional
design efforts must meet intellectually convincing standards of quality and that
such standards need to be based on scientific research and theory in the field of
human Methods of instructional design should go as far as possible in
learning.
defining the learning purposes of each design step. At that point, however,
other considerations take over. The designer must ultimately deal with the
details of print, pictures, and sound, and these elements have their own tech-
nologies. We trust that the instructional designer who follows the principles
described here can be assured that the details of instruction, however arrived at,

will have a sound foundation in research and theory.

It is our expectation that this fourth edition will fill a need in courses of

education for teachers and instructors at both undergraduate and graduate

levels. With its current scope and emphasis, the book may find a place in courses
that deal with instructional systems, including those that approach the selection
of media as a part of educational technology. Instructors of courses in teaching
methods, instructional planning, curriculum theory, and classroom techniques
should find the book useful. In graduate-level education, the text may be of use
in these same areas and in courses on learning and educational psychology.
This book has four parts, and we have attempted to make the transitions
between them apparent. Chapter 1, an introductory chapter, is followed by a
chapter outlining the nine stages of instructional design, beginning with the
identification of instructional goals and continuing through the conduct of
evaluation.
Part Two describes the major classes of learning outcome, including in-
tellectual skills, cognitive strategies, verbal information, attitudes, and motor
skills. An account is given of the conditions of learning applicable to the
acquisition of these capabilities, and the implications of those conditions for the
design of instruction are pointed out. The knowledge, skills, and abilities of
 Preface xiii

learners and how the differences among learners affect instructional planning
constitute other topics are covered in this section.
Part Three, which comprises Chapters 7 through 13, deals directly and
intensively with the procedures of design. These begin with an account of
and classification. Procedures are identi-
instructional objectives, their analysis,
fied for determining desirable sequences of instruction, for deriving the events
of instruction for the single lesson, and for relating events to the selection of
appropriate media. Chapter 13 describes procedures for assessing student per-
formance through the use of criterion- and norm-based measures.
Delivery systems for instruction is the general topic of Part Four. This
includes the application of design products and principles to group instruction
and to varieties of individualized instruction. The closing chapter, Chapter 16,
deals with procedures for evaluating instructional programs.

Robert M. Gagne

Walter W. Wager

Tallahassee, Florida
Principles of
Instructional
Design
Part One
Introduction to
Instructional
Systems
 —

Introduction
1

i nstruction is ahuman undertaking whose purpose is to

help people learn. Although learning may happen without any instruction, the
effectsof instruction on learning are often beneficial and usually easy to observe.
When is designed to accomplish a particular goal of learning, it may
instruction
or may not be successful. The general purpose of this book is to describe what
characteristics instruction must have to be successful, in the sense of aiding
learning.
Instruction is a set of events that affect learners in such a way that learning is
facilitated. Normally, we think of these events as being external to the learner
eventsembodied in the display of printed pages or the talk of a teacher.
However, we also must recognize that the events that make up instruction may
be partly internal when they constitute the learner activity called "self-

instruction."
Why do we speak of instruction rather than teaching? It is because we wish to
describe of the events that may have a direct effect on the learning of a human
all

being, not just those set in motion by an individual who is a teacher. Instruction
may include events that are generated by a page of print, by a picture, by a
television program, or by a combination of physical objects, among other
things. Of course, a teacher may play an essential role in the arrangement of any
of these events. Or, as already mentioned, the learners may be able to manage
instructional events themselves. Teaching, then, may be considered as only one
form of instruction, albeit a signally important one.
4 Principles of Instructional Design

Considered in this comprehensive sense, instruction must be planned if it is to

be effective. In detail, of course, a teacher mav not have much time to plan
instruction on a moment-to-moment basis. Each new event of the classroom
requires one or more decisions on the part of a teacher. However, instruction is
usually planned, which means that it is designed in some systematic way.
Despite varying moment-to-moment decisions, a teacher follows the plan of a
lesson design. The lesson is part of the larger design involved in the presentation
of a topic (a course segment), and this topic in turn makes up part of a still more
comprehensive design of the course or curriculum.
The purpose of designed instruction is to activate and support the learning of
the individual student. This aim is characteristic of instruction wherever it
occurs, whether between a tutor and a single student, in a school classroom, in
an adult interest group, or in an on-the-job setting. Instruction for the support
of learning must be something that is planned rather than haphazard. The
learning it aids should bring all individuals closer to the goals of optimal use of
their talents, enjoyment of life, and adjustment to the physical and social
environment. Naturallv, this does not mean that the planning of instruction will
have the effect of making different individuals more alike. On the contrary,
diversity among individuals will be enhanced. The purpose of planned instruc-
tion is to help each person develop as full}' as possible, in his or her own
individual direction.

BASIC ASSUMPTIONS ABOUT INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN

How is How can one approach such a task, and how

instruction to be designed?
begin There must surely be alternative ways. In this book, we describe one
it?

way that we believe to be both feasible and worthwhile. This way of planning
and designing instruction has certain characteristics that need to be mentioned
at the outset.
First, we adopt the assumption that instructional design must be aimed at
aiding the learning of the individual. We
are concerned here neither with "mass"
changes in opinion or capabilities nor with education in the sense of "diffusion"
of information or attitudes within and among societies. Instead, the instruction
we describe is oriented to the individual. Of course, we recognize that learners
are often assembled into groups; but learning nevertheless occurs within each
member of a group.
Second, instructional design has phases that are both immediate and long-
range. Design in the immediate sense is what the teacher does in preparing a
lesson plan some hours before the instruction is given. The longer-range aspects
of instructional design are more complex and varied. The concern will more
likely be with a set of lessons organized into topics, a set of topics constituting a
course or course sequence, or perhaps with an entire instructional system. Such
design is sometimes undertaken by individual teachers as well as groups or teams
 Introduction 5

of teachers, by committees of school people, by groups and organizations of

curriculum planners, by textbook writers, and by groups of scholars represent-
ing academic disciplines.
The immediate and long-range phases of instructional planning are best
performed as separate tasks and not mixed together. The job of the teacher in
*
carrying out instruction is highly demanding in terms of time, effort, and
intellectual challenge.The teacher has a great deal to do in planning instruction
on an immediate, day-to-day or hour-to-hour basis. Such a task can be greatly
facilitated when the products of careful long-range instructional design are made
available in the form of textbooks, teachers' guides, audiovisual aids, and other
materials. Trying to accomplish both immediate and long-range instructional
design, while teaching 20 or 30 students, is simply too big a job for one person,
and can readily lead to the neglect of essential teaching functions. This is not
it

to suggest, however, that teachers cannot or should not undertake long-range

instructional design, either on their own or as part of a larger team. Teachers
have essential contributions to make to long-range instructional design, and
such contributions are best made during nonteaching periods.
Our third assumption in this work is that systematically designed instruction can
human development. Some educational writings (for
greatly affect individual
example, Friedenberg, 1965; Barth, 1972) indicate that education would per-
haps be best if it were designed simply to provide a nurturing environment in
which young people were allowed to grow up in their own ways, without the
imposition of any plan to direct their learning. We consider this an incorrect line
of thinking. Unplanned and undirected learning, we believe, is very likely to lead
to the development of many individuals who are in one way or another in-
competent to derive personal satisfaction from living in society, present or
future. A fundamental reason for instructional design is to ensure that no one is
"educationally disadvantaged" and that all students have equal opportunities to
use their individual talents to the fullest degree.
The fourth idea to which we give prominence is that instructional design
should be conducted by means of a systems approach. This is discussed more fully in
Chapter 2. Briefly, the systems approach to instructional design involves the
carrying out of a number of steps beginning with an analysis of needs and goals
and ending with an evaluated system of instruction that demonstrably succeeds
in meeting accepted goals. Decisions in each of the individual steps are based
upon empirical evidence, to the extent that such evidence allows. Each step leads
to decisions that become "inputs" to the next step so that the whole process is as
solidly based as is possible within the limits of human reason. Furthermore, each
step is checked against evidence that is "fed back" from subsequent steps to
provide an indication of the validity of the system.
Our fifth and final point, to be expanded in Part II and throughout the book,
is that designed instruction must be based on knowledge of how human beings learn.

In considering how an individual's abilities are to be developed, it is not enough

to state what they should be; one must examine closely the question of how they
6 Principles of Instructional Design

can be acquired. Materials for instruction need to reflect not simply what their
author knows, but also how the student is intended to learn such knowledge.
Accordingly, instructional design must take full}' into account learning conditions
that need to be established in order for the desired effects to occur.

SOME LEARNING PRINCIPLES

At seems appropriate to expand upon the idea of basing in-

this point, it

structional designon knowledge of the conditions of human learning. What sort

of knowledge of these conditions is needed in order to design instruction?
Changes in the behavior of human beings and in their capabilities for particu-
lar behaviors take place following their experience within certain identifiable
situations. These situations stimulate the individual in such a way as to bring
about the change in behavior. The process that makes such change happen is
called learning, and the situation that sets the process into effect is called a
learning situation.
When examined closely, it is apparent that a learning situation has two
parts —one and the other internal to that person. The
external to the learner
internal part of the learning situation, it appears, derives from the stored
memories of the learner. A person mav experience the external stimulation that
conveys the information that presidential elections in the United States are held
on the first Tuesday after the first Monday in November. If that fact is to be
learned, however, it is evident that certain internal conditions, provided by
memory from previous must also be present as part of the situation.
learning,
The learner must have knowledge from memory, such as (1) the
access to
meanings of Monday, Tuesday, and November as designations of times; (2) the
meaning of presidential election as the identification of an event; and (3) the basic
skills involved in comprehending an English sentence. The person who possess-

es these internal capabilities (and certain others we will mention later), and who
is presented with the statement about presidential elections in oral or printed
form, is potentially in a learning situation and likely to learn from it. The person
who experiences that statement as the external part of the learning situation, but
who lacks the internal part, will not learn what is being presented.
The process of learning has been investigated by the methods of science
(mainly by psychologists) for many years. As scientists, learning investigators

are basically interested in explaining how learning takes place. In other words,
their interest is in relating both the external and internal parts of a learning
situation to the process of behavior change called learning. The relationships
they have found, and continue to find, between the situation and the behavior
change may be appropriately called the conditions of learning (Gagne, 1985).
These are the conditions, both external and internal to the learner, that make
learning occur. If one has the intention of making learning occur, as in planning
instruction, one must deliberately arrange these external and internal conditions
of learning.
 Introduction 7

In the course of pursuing knowledge about how learning takes place, theories
are constructed about structures and events (generally conceived as occurring in
the central nervous system) that could operate to affect learning. The effects of
particular events on learning may be, and usually are, checked again and again
under a variety of conditions. In this way, a body of facts about learning is
collected along with a body of principles that hold true in a broad range of
situations. The aspects of learning theory that are important for instruction are
those that relate to controlled events and conditions. If we are concerned with
designing instruction so that learning will occur efficiendy, we must look for
those elements of learning theory that pertain to the events about which an
instructor can do something.

Some Time-Tested Learning Principles

What are some of the principles derived from learning theory and learning
research that may be relevant to instructional design? First, we mention some
principles that have been with us for many years. Basically, they are still valid,
but they may need some new interpretations in the light of modern theory.

Contiguity

The principle of contiguity states that the stimulus situation must be presented
simultaneously with the desired response. One has to think hard to provide an
example of a violation of the principle of contiguity. Suppose, for example, one
wants a young child to learn to print an E. An unskilled teacher might be
tempted to do it as follows: First, give the verbal instruction, "Show me how
you print an £." Following this, show the child a printed £ on a page, to
illustrate what it looks like, and leave the page on the child's table. The child
then draws an E. Now, has the child learned to print an £? Referring to the
principle of contiguity, one would have to say, probably not yet. What has been
made contiguous in this situation is:

Stimulus situation: a printed E

Child's response: printing an E

whereas the intended objective of the lesson was:

Stimulus situation: "Show me how you print an E"

Child's response: printing an E.

Somehow, in order for the principle of contiguity to exert its expected effect,
the first set of events must be replaced bv the second bv a staged removal of the
intervening stimulus (the printed E). In the first case, the verbal instructions
were remote from the expected response, rather than contiguous with it.
8 Principles of Instructional Design

Repitition

The principle of repetition states that the stimulus situation and its response
need to be repeated, or practiced, for learning to be improved and for retention
to be made more certain. There are some situations where the need for repeti-
tion is very apparent. For example, if one is learning to pronounce a new French
word such as variete, repeated trials certainly lead one closer and closer to an
acceptable pronunciation. Modern learning theory, however, casts much doubt
on the idea that repetition works by "strengthening learned connections."
Furthermore, there are many situations in which repetition of newly learned
ideas does not improve either learning or retention (cf. Ausubel, Novak, and
Hanesian, 1978; Gagne, 1985). It is perhaps best to think of repetition not as a
fundamental condition of learning, but merely as a practical procedure (prac-
tice) which may be necessary to make sure that other conditions for learning are

present.

Reinforcement

Historically, the principle of reinforcement has been stated as follows: Learning

of a new act is when the occurrence of that act is followed by a
strengthened
satisfying state of affairs (that is, a reward) (Thomdike, 1913). Such a view of
reinforcement is still a lively theoretical issue, and there is a good deal of
evidence for it. For instructional purposes, however, one is inclined to depend
on another conception of reinforcement that may be stated in this form: A new
act (A) is most readily learned when it is immediately followed by an old act (B)
that the individual likes to do and performs readily in such a way that doing B is
made contingent upon doing A (Premack, 1965). Suppose a young child is fond
of looking at pictures of animals, and his parents desire that he learn how to
make drawings of animals. The new capability of animal drawing, according to
this principle, will be most readily learned if one connects it to looking at
additional animal pictures. In other words, the opportunity to look at animal
pictures is made contingent upon drawing one or more animals. In this form, the
principle of reinforcement is a most powerful one.

THE CONDITIONS OF LEARNING

As the study of human learning has proceeded, it has gradually become apparent

that theories must be increasingly sophisticated. Contiguity, repetition, and

reinforcement are all good principles, and one of their outstanding characteris-
tics is that they refer to controllable instructional events. The designer of

instruction, and also the teacher, can readily devise situations that include these
principles. Nevertheless, even when all these things are done, an efficient learn-
ing situation is not guaranteed. Something seems to be missing.
 Introduction 9

It appears that instruction must take into account a whole set of factors that
influence learning, and that collectively may be called the conditions of learning
(Gagne, 1985). Some of these conditions, to be sure, pertain to the stimuli that
are external to the learner. Others are internal conditions, to be sought within
the individual learner. Theyof mind that the learner brings to the
are states
learning task; in other words, thev are previously learned capabilities of the
individual learner. These internal capabilities appear to be a highlv important set
of factors in ensuring effective learning.

The Processes of Learning

In order to take account of the conditions of learning, both external and

internal, we must begin with a framework, or model, of the processes involved in
an act of learning. A model widely accepted by modern investigators that
incorporates the principal ideas of contemporarv learning theories is shown in
Figure 1-1. This model conceives of learning as information processing.
Stimulation from the learner's environment (at left in Figure 1-1) activates the
receptors and is transmitted as information to the central nervous svstem. The
information attains a brief registration in one of the sensory registers and is then
transformed into recognizable patterns that enter the short-term memory. The
transformation that occurs at this point is called selective perception, or feature
perception. The visually presented marks on a page of print become the letters

r\ EXECUTIVE CONTROL EXPECTANCIES

RESPONSE

GENERATOR

LONG-TERM

SHORT-
MEMORY
TERM
MEMORY

\J
FIGURE 1-1 A Basic Model of Learning and Memory, Underlying Modern Cognitive (Information-
Processing) Theories
(From R. M. Gagne &
M. P. Driscoll, Essentials of learning for instruction, 2nd ed., copyright 1988, p. 13.
Reprinted by permission of Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.)
10 Principles of Instructional Design

a, b, and so on, when they are stored in short-term memory: A set of particular
angles, corners, and horizontal and vertical lines becomes a rectangle.
Storage of information in the short-term memory has a relatively brief dura-
tion, less that 20 seconds, unless it is rehearsed. The familiar example is
remembering a seven-digit telephone number long enough to dial it. Once it is
dialed (or punched in), it disappears from short-term memory; but if it must be
remembered longer, this can be done by internal rehearsal. Another aspect of the
short-term memory of considerable importance for learning is its limited capac-
ity. Only few separate items, perhaps as few as four, can be "held in mind" at
a
one time. Since short-term storage is one stage of the process of learning, its
capacity limits can strongly affect the difficulty of learning tasks. For instance,
the process of mentally multiplying 29 x 3 requires that the intermediate
operations (30 x 3; 90 - 3) be held in short-term memory. This requirement
makes the learning of such a task considerably more difficult than, sav, 40 x 3.
Information to be remembered is again transformed bv a process called
semantic encoding to a form that enters long-term memory. When encoded,
information in long-term memory is meaningful; much of it has the form of
propositions, that of language possessing sentencelike subjects and
is, entities
predicates. In this form, informationmay be stored for long periods of time. It
mav be returned to short-term memory bv the process of retrieval, and it appears
that such retrieved items may combine with others to bring about new kinds of
learning. When functioning in this manner, the short-term memory is often
referred to as a working memory.
Information from either the working memory or the long-term memory,
when and is transformed into action. The
retrieved, passes to a response generator
message activates the effectors (muscles), producing a performance that can be
observed to occur in the learner's environment. This action is what enables an
external observer to tell that the initial stimulation has had its expected effect.
The information has been "processed" in all of these ways, and the learner has
indeed learned.

Control Processes

Two important structures shown in Figure 1-1 are executive control and ex-
pectancies. These are processes that activate and modulate the flow of informa-
tion during learning. For example, learners have an expectancy of what they will
be able to do once they have learned, and this in turn may affect how an external
situation is perceived, how it is encoded in memory, and how it is transformed
into performance. The executive control structure governs the use of cognitive
which mav determine how information is encoded when it enters
strategies,

long-term memory, or how the process of retrieval is carried out, among other
things (see Chapter 4 for a fuller description).
The model in Figure 1-1 introduces the structures underlying contemporary
learning theory and implies a number of processes made possible thereby. All of
 Introduction 11

these processes compose the events that occur in an act of learning. In summary,
the internal processes are as follows:

1. Reception of stimuli by receptors

2. Registration of information by sensory registers
3. Selective perception for storage in short-term memory (STM)
4. Rehearsal to maintain information in STM
5. Semantic encoding for storage in long-term memory (LTM)
6. Retrieval from LTM to working memory (STM)
7. Response generation to effectors

8. Performance in the learner's environment

9. Control of processes through executive strategies

Events outside the learner can be made to influence the processes of learning,
particularly those numbered 3 through 6. These internal processes can be
enhanced by events that take place in the learning environment. For example,
the selective perception of the features of a plant can be aided by emphasizing
them in a diagram. The semantic encoding of a prose passage can be more
readily done if the passage opens with a topic heading.

Instruction and Learning Processes

If instruction is to bring about effective learning, it must somehow be made to
influence the internal processes of learning implied by the information flow
depicted in Figure 1-1. As the previous examples indicate, external events can
affect these processes in a variety of ways, some of which are supportive of
learning. If it is what kinds of events can provide such
possible, then, to discover
support, it should also be possible to select and put into effect those events that
will do the most effective job. This is what instruction attempts to do. Instruc-
tion, then, may be conceived as a deliberately arranged set of external events
designed to support internal learning processes.
We shall have occasion throughout this book to refer to the events of instruc-
tion(Gagne, 1985). When instruction is designed, it is these events that are
being considered, chosen, and represented in the communications and other
stimulation offered to the learner. These events, individually and collectively, are
what constitute the external conditions of learning. Their purpose is to bring
about the kinds of internal processing that will lead to rapid, obstacle-free
learning.
The events of instruction are more fully described in Chapter 9. In brief, these
events involve the following kinds of activities in roughly this order, relating to
the learning processes previously listed:

1. Stimulation xo gain attention to ensure the reception of stimuli

2. Informing learners of the learning objective, to establish appropriate expectancies
3. Reminding learners of previously learned content for retrieval from LTM
12 Principles of Instructional Design

4. Clear and distinctive presentation of material to ensure selective perception

5. Guidance of learning by suitable semantic encoding
6. Eliciting performance, involving response generation
7. Providing feedback about performance
8. Assessing the performance, involving additional response feedback occasions
9. Arranging variety of practice to aid future retrieval and transfer

These events will be more fully and precisely described in a later chapter. They
are presented here in this form to give a general impression of their relation to
the processes of learning.

The Contributions of Memory

Besides the external events of instruction, the conditions of learning include the
presence in working memory of certain memory contents. As previously noted,
these are retrieved from long-term memory during the learning episode, when
the learner is reminded of (or asked to recall) the contents learned on previous
occasions. For example, learners who are acquiring new knowledge about the
presidential election of 1980 will recall prior general knowledge about elec-
tions —
when they are held, what events they include, and so on. Learners who
are acquiring the skills for writing effective sentences will recall the skills they
learned previously for spelling, word sequence, and punctuation.
The contents of long-term memory, when retrieved to working memory,
become essential parts of the conditions of learning. These contributors to new
learning are of many kinds and have many sorts of specific relationships with
whatever is involved in the new learning. Our point of view, as reflected in
subsequent chapters, is that these contents of memory can best be differentiated
into five general categories. These are five classes of previously learned content,
which can be exhibited in a corresponding five kinds of performance outcomes.
On account of this latter quality, they may best be referred to as five kinds of
previously learned capabilities. They are memory contents that make the learner
capable of performing ways implied by their titles.
in
Obviously, the capabilities that were previously learned fall into the same
categories as those which are to be newly learned. Chapters 3, 4, and 5 describe
in detail the five categories of learned capabilities and the conditions of learning
that relate to them. Briefly, however, the five kinds of learned capabilities with
which this book deals are as follows:

1. Intellectual skills: Which permit the learner to carry out symbolically controlled
procedures
2. Cognitive strategies: The means by which learners exercise control over their
own learning processes
3. Verbal information: The facts and organized "knowledge of the world" stored in

the learner's memory

 Introduction 13

4. Attitudes: The internal states that influence the personal action choices a learner
makes
5. Motor skills: The movements of skeletal muscles organized to accomplish
purposeful actions

S. Concentrating instruction on any one type of these capabilities alone, or any

two in combination, is insufficient. Verbal information, in and of itself,
represents a highly inadequate instructional goal. Learning intellectual skills

leads to practical competence. Yet these, too, are insufficient for the totality of
new learning because such learning makes use of verbal knowledge as well.
Furthermore, the learning of intellectual skills does not by itself equip learners
with the cognitive strategies they need to become independent self- learners.
Cognitive strategies themselves cannot be learned or progressively improved
—
without the involvement of verbal information and skills thev must, in other
words, have "something to work on." Attitudes, too, require a substrate of
information and intellectual skills to support them. Finally, motor skills,
although a somewhat specialized area of school learning, are nevertheless of
recurring relevance to human development. In sum, multiple aims for instruction
must be recognized. The human learner needs to attain several varieties of
learned capabilities.

Intellectual Skills as Building Blocks for Instruction

For purposes of planning instruction in scope ranging from entire systems to

individual lessons, intellectual skills have a number of desirable characteristics as
components of a design framework (Gagne, 1985). An intellectual skill cannot
be learned bv being simplv looked up or provided to the learner by a verbal
communication. It must be learned, recalled, and put into use at the proper
time. As an example, consider the intellectual skill of spelling words containing a
long a sound. When the learner possesses this skill, he is able to perform such
spelling rapidlv and without the necessity of looking up a set of rules. His
performance shows that he is able to recall such rules and put them immediately
into effect. At the same time, learning the necessary rules for spelling words with
long a is not something that takes a period of many months to accomplish (as
seems to be true of cognitive strategies). Essentially flawless performance calling
upon such an intellectual skill can be established in a short time.
There are other advantages to intellectual skills as a major framework for
instruction and instructional design. Such skills come to be highly interrelated
to each other and to build elaborate internal intellectual structures of a cumula-
tive sort (Gagne, 1985). The learning of one skill aids the learning of other
"higher-order" skills. Suppose an individual has learned the skill of substituting
specific numerical values for letters in a symbolic expression such as the fol-
lowing:

2
o- - 2(X - m) 2 .
14 Principles of Instructional Design

Such of many kinds of advanced skills, not simply in

a skill will aid the learning
mathematics, but in many and social studies. Intellectual skills
areas of science
are rich in transfer effects, which bring about the building of increasingly
complex structures of intellectual competence.
Another advantage of intellectual skills as a primary component in instruction
is the relative ease with which they can be reliably observed. When a learner has

attained an intellectual skill, as, for example, "representing quantitative increases

graphically," it is relatively easy to show that the skill has indeed been learned.
One would provide the person with numerical values of any increasing variable
and ask him to construct a graph to show the changes in that variable. An
intellectual skill can always be defined in operational terms; that is, it can always
—
be related to a class of human performances to something the successful
learner is able to do.
The choice of intellectual skills as a primary point of reference in the design of
instruction, then, is based mainly upon practical considerations. In contrast to
factual information, skills cannot be simplv looked up or made available by
"telling," but must be learned. In contrast to cognitive strategies, intellectual
skills are typicallv learned over relatively short time periods and do not have to
be refined and sharpened by months or years of practice. Intellectual skills build
upon each other form increasingly elaborate in-
in a cumulative fashion to
tellectual structures. Through the mechanism of transfer of learning, they make
possible an ever broadening intellectual competence in each individual. And
finally, such skills can be readily observed so that it is easy to tell that they have
been learned.

THE RATIONALE FOR INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN

The design of instruction must be undertaken with suitable attention to the

conditions under which learning occurs —conditions which are both external
and internal to the learner. These conditions are in turn dependent upon what is
being learned.
To design instruction systematically, one must first establish a rationale for
what is to be learned. This requires going back to the initial sources that have
given rise to the idea of employing instruction to meet a recognized need. A
system of instruction may then be constructed step by step, beginning with a base
of information that reflects identified goals.
The planning of instruction in a highly systematic manner, with attention to
the consistency and compatibility of technical knowledge at each point of
decision, is usually termed the systems approach. This kind of design uses various
forms of information, data, and theoretical principles as input at each planning
stage. Furthermore, the prospective outcomes of each stage are checked against
whatever goals may have been adopted by those who manage the system as a
whole. It is within this systems framework that we seek to apply what is known
about the conditions of human learning to instructional design.
 Introduction 15

The Derivation of an Instructional System

The rational steps in the derivation of an instructional system, which we will
describe more completely in the next chapter, may be outlined briefly as follows:

1 1. The needs for instruction are investigated as a first step. These are then carefully
considered by a responsible group to arrive at agreements on the goals of
instruction. The resources available to meet these goals must also be carefully
weighed, along with those circumstances that impose constraints on in-
structional planning.
2. Goals of instruction may be translated into a framework for a curriculum and
for the individual courses contained in it. The goals of individual courses may

be conceived as target objectivesand grouped to reflect a rational organization.

3. Objectives of courses are achieved through learning. In this book, the lasting
effects of learning are defined as the acquisition of various capabilities by the

learner. As outcomes of instruction and learning, human capabilities are usually

specified in terms of the classes of human performance which they make possible.
We need to consider what kinds of capabilities may be learned. We shall
describe the varieties of human performance made possible to the learner by
—
each kind of learned capability intellectual skills, cognitive strategies, verbal
information, attitudes, and motor skills.
4. The identification of target objectives and the enabling objectives that support
them and contribute to their learning makes possible the grouping of these
objectives into units of comparable types. These can then be systematically
arranged to form the course.
5. The determination of types of capabilities to be learned, and the inference of
necessary learning conditions for them, make possible the planning of sequences
of instruction. This is so because the information and skills that need to be
recalled for any given learning task must themselves have been previously
learned. For example, learning the intellectual skill of using an adverb to modify
a verb requires the recall of "subordinate" skills of constructing adverbs from
adjectives, identifying verbs, identifying adjectives, and classifying action mod-
ifications. Thus, by tracing backward from the outcome of learning for a
particular topic, one can identify a sequence of intermediate (or prerequisite)
objectives that must be met to make possible the desired learning. In this way,
instructional sequences may be specified that are applicable to topics or to
courses.
6. Continuation of instructional planning proceeds to the design of units of
instruction that are smaller in scope and thus more detailed in character.
Consideration of target objectives and the skills and verbal information that

support them leads to a requirement for the delineation of precisely defined

objectives called performance objectives. These identify the expected or planned
outcomes of learning and, thus, fall into the categories of learned capabilities
previously mentioned. They represent instances of human performance that can
be reliably observed and assessed as outcomes of learning.
7. Once a course has been designed in terms of target objectives, detailed planning
of instruction for the individual lesson can proceed. Here again, the first refer-
ence for such planning is the performance objectives that represent the out-
comes of the lesson. Attention centers on the arrangement of external conditions
16 Principles of Instructional Design

that will be most effective in bringing about the desired learning. Consideration
must also be given to the characteristics of the learners since these will determine
many of the internal conditions involved in the learning. Planning the conditions
for instruction also involves the choice of appropriate media and combinations
of media that may be employed to promote learning.
8. The additional element required for completion of instructional design is a set
of procedures for assessment of what students have learned. In conception, this
component follows naturally from the definitions of instructional objectives.
The latter statements describe domains from which items are selected. These in
turn may be teacher observations or mav be assembled as tests. Assessment
procedures are designed to provide criterion-referenced measurement of learning
outcomes (Popham, 1981). They are intended as direct measures of what
students have learned as a result of instruction on specific objectives. This kind
of assessment is sometimes called objective referenced.
9. The design of lessons and courses with their accompanying techniques of
assessing learning outcomes makes possible the planning of entire systems.
Instructional systems aim to achieve comprehensive goals in schools and school
systems. Means must be found to fit the various components together bv wav
of a management svstem, sometimes called an instructional delivery system.
Naturally, teachers play kev roles in the operation of such a svstem. A particular
class of instructional svstems is concerned with individualized instruction, in-
volving a set of procedures to ensure optimal development of the individual
student. It is instructive to contrast these methods with others that characterize
group instruction.

Finally, attention must be paid to evaluation. Procedures for evaluation are

first applied to the design effort Evidence is sought for needed revisions
itself.

aimed at the improvement and refinement of the instruction (formative evalua-

tion). At a later stage, summative evaluation is undertaken to seek evidence of the

learning effectiveness of what has been designed.

WHAT THIS BOOK IS ABOUT

The design of instruction, the background of knowledge from which its pro-
cedures are derived, and the various ways in which these procedures are carried
out are described in the 16 chapters of this book, arranged as follows:

Introduction to Instructional Systems

Chapter 1, the introduction, outlines our general approach to instruction, and
includes an account of some principles of human learning that form the bases of
instructional design.
Chapter 2 introduces the reader to instructional systems and the systems
approach to the design of instruction. The stages of instructional system design
are described, to be developed further in subsequent chapters.
 —

Introduction 17

Basic Processes in Learning and Instruction

Chapter 3 introduces the reader to the five major categories of instructional

—
outcomes the human capabilities that are learned with the aid of instruction.
The varieties of human performance that these capabilities make possible are
described and distinguished.
Chapter 4 enters into an intensive description of the characteristics and
conditions of learning for two of these categories of learning outcomes
intellectual skills and cognitive strategies.
Chapter 5 extends this description of learned capabilities to the three addi-
tional categories, with definitions and examples of information, attitudes, and
motor skills.

Chapter 6 gives an account of the human learner, with emphasis on the

characteristics the individual learner and various groups of learners bring to the
learning situation. Planning instruction requires that provisions be made for
learner differences in these qualities.

Designing Instruction

Chapter 7 deals with the derivation and description of specific instructional

objectives (performance objectives). These are related on the one hand to the
categories of objectives previously defined and on the other to the particular
learned capabilities that are the focus of interest for instruction.
Chapter 8 describes procedures for task analysis, beginning with a considera-
tion of purposesand goals of instruction. The aim of analysis is the classification
of objectives for use in instructional planning. Prerequisites are identified for
various kinds of learning outcomes.
Chapter 9 describes procedures for constructing sequences of lessons in
making up larger units of instruction such as topics, modules and courses.
Chapter 10 deals with sequences of instructional events within single lessons
and shows how these may be related to the stages of information processing
involved in learning.
Chapter 1 1 discusses the important matter of media selection and provides a
systematic procedure for conducting such a step as a part of instructional design.
Chapter 12 gives an account of the design of individual lessons, including the
placement of parts of lessons in sequence, the arrangement of effective con-
ditions of learning, and the use of media for instructional delivery.
Chapter 13 deals with methods of assessing student performances as out-
comes of instruction, describing appropriate uses of criterion-referenced and
norm- referenced tests.

Delivery Systems for Instruction

Chapter 14 opens this part of the book by discussing the special features of
design needed when instruction is to be delivered to groups of various sizes.
18 Principles of Instructional Design

Chapter 15 presents a complementary account of how systematic procedures

may be designed to accomplish individualized instruction.
Chapter 16 describes the basic logic for evaluating designed products and
procedures, from lessons to systems.

SUMMARY
Instruction is planned for the purpose of supporting the processes of learning.
In this book, we describe methods involved in the design of instruction aimed at
the human learner. We assume that planned instruction has both short-range
and long-range purposes in its effects on human development.
Instructional design is based upon some principles of human learning, specifi-
cally, the conditions under which learning occurs. Some time-tested principles

of contiguit\ repetition, and reinforcement indicate some of the conditions

r
,

external to the learner that can be incorporated into instruction. A model of

information processing that identifies a number of internal processes underlies
contemporary theories of learning. These processes bring about several suc-
cessive stages in the transformation of information on its way to storage in the
long-term memory. The purpose of instruction is to arrange external events that
support these internal learning processes.
An act of learning is greatlv influenced by previously learned material re-
trieved from the learner's memory. The effectsof prior learning on new learning
is seen in the acquiring of verbal information, intellectual skills, cognitive
strategies, attitudes, and motor skills. These human capabilities, established by
learning, will be described in the chapters to follow. These varieties of learned
capabilities and the conditions for their learning constitute the basis for in-
structional planning. Derived from these principles is the rationale for a set of
practical procedures for the design of instruction.
Students who use this book will find it possible to follow up the ideas derived
from research on human learning with further exploration and study of the
references at the end of each chapter. Those who are interested in becoming
skillful in designing instruction will need to undertake practice exercises that

exemplify the procedures described. Because of the anticipated variety of par-

ticular courses and educational settings in which this book might be used, it has
been our general expectation that such exercises would be supplied by a course
instructor. Examples and exercises of particular relevance for such a purpose are
provided in a separately published Learner's Guide by Wager, Applefield, Earle,
and Dempsey (1990)/

References

Ausubel, D. P., Novak, J. D., & Hanesian, H. (1978). Educational psychology: A cognitive
view (2nd ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
 Introduction 19

Barth, R. S. (1972). Open education and the American school. New York: Agathon Press.
Friedenberg, E. Z. (1965). Coming of age in America: Growth and acquiescence. New
York: Random House.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions of learning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
^Popham, W. J. (1981). Modern educational measurement. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educa-

tional Technology Publications.

Premack, D. (1965). Reinforcement theory. In D. Levine (Ed.), Nebraska symposium on
motivation. Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.
Thomdike, E. L. (1913). The psychology of learning: Educational psychology (Vol. 2.). New
York: Teachers College Press.
Wager, W. W., Applefield, J. M., Earle, R. S., & Dempsey, J. V. ( 1990). Learner's Guide
to Accompany Principles of Instructional Design. Fort Worth: Holt, Rinehart and Win-

ston.
 Designing Instructional
2 Systems

A Ln instructional system may be defined as an ar-

rangement of resources and procedures used to promote learning. Instructional
systems have a variety of particular forms and occur in many of our institutions.
Public schools embodv the most widelv known forms of instructional systems.
The military services have, perhaps, some of the largest instructional systems in
the world. Businesses and industries have instructional systems that are often
referred to as training systems. Anv institution that has the express purpose of
developing human capabilities may be said to contain an instructional system.
Instructional systems design is the systematic process of planning instructional
systems, and instructional development is the process of implementing the
plans. Together, these two functions are components of what is referred to as
instructional technology. Instructional technology broader term than in-
is a
structional systems and may be defined as the systematic application of theory and
other organized knowledge to the task of instructional design and development.
Instructional technology also includes the quest for new knowledge about how
people learn and how best to design instructional svstems or materials (Heinich,
1984).
It should be evident that instructional systems design can occur at many
One could imagine a nationwide effort at planning and develop-
different levels.
ing instructional systems, as was the case with the Biological Sciences Curricu-
lum Study and the Intermediate Science Curriculum Study funded by the

20
 Designing Instructional Systems 21

National Science Foundation. These efforts centered on developing materials

within a subject area. It is also worthy of note that some programs for in-
dividualized instruction in several subject areas have been undertaken. These
systems, Project PLAN (Program for Learning in Accordance with Needs), IPI
(Individually Prescribed Instruction), and IGE
Guided Instruc-
(Individually
tion), are described in a book edited bv Weisgerber (1971).
Instructional designers don't always have a chance to work on projects of
national scope. They generally design smaller instructional systems such as
courses, units within courses, or individual lessons. Despite the differences in
sizeand scope, the process of designing an instructional svstem has features in
common at all levels of the curriculum. Instructional svstems design of the
smaller components is simply referred to as instructional design since the focus is
the piece of instruction itself, rather than the total instructional system.

INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN

Several models are suitable for the design of instruction of course units and
lessons.One widely known model is the Dick and Carey (1990) model pre-
sented in Figure 2-1. All the stages in any instructional systems model can be
categorized into one of three functions: (1) identifying the outcomes of the
instruction, (2) developing the instruction, and (3) evaluating the effectiveness
of the instruction. We shall focus on the activities of instructional design that
occur within the nine stages shown in Figure 2-1.

Stage 1 : Instructional Goals

A goal may be defined as a desirable state of affairs. For example, at a national

level, a desirable goal is that every adult at least be literate at a sixth-grade
reading level. Notice that this is also an instructional goal. An example of a
noninstructional goal might be that even' adult have adequate medical care. This
latter goal is not obtainable bv instruction. Global instructional goals must be
made more specific before systematic instruction can be designed to attain them.
One of an instructional designer is to recognize which goals are
responsibility
instructional goals and which are not. This is especially true in industrial or
vocational instructional courses where the goal may be related to employee
motivation or job satisfaction. At this stage, the instructional designer must ask,
"What goals will represent a desirable state of affairs?"
After goals have been stated, the designer may conduct a needs analysis. Recent
writers (Burton and Merrill, 1977; Kaufman, 1976) have defined a need as a
discrepancy or gap between a desired state of affairs (a goal) and the present
state of affairs. Therefore, needs can be determined after the stating of goals and
the analysis of the present state of affairs. In the case of public schools, the
desired state of affairs is usuallv established bv tradition — a consensus on what
 c
A
|1
?«I
-
10 lij

ill
331

1 3 5 9

: 3 uj
J

r I
1
t
t*
§15
a. ja

£«
2
» «
iil
t

(0
c
Q. >.

*ii
> i s
OiM
1 c
t
1
5
C -D
c

ll $ 5 -
&n
t
i«
B »

|H
128 *
r v
2 „ r -a

"3
B .2

— 3 O 1 "i
=
T3? J ic £B
O «> i -8
LU U
(

O£ «c s
i, 3 ,

— 1
E O

75
c
< -*

£
i"|j
ill
S3

22
 Designing Instructional Systems 23

school students ought to be learning and how well. Anv gap between the
students' achievement and the school's expectations identifies a need. For ex-
ample, for a group of seniors at a particular high school, the mean score on the
math portion of the SAT might be an indicator of how well the instructional
system at that school was meeting its needs.
Training needs in business or industry may be derived from a job analysis or
from data on the productivity of a particular department. Again, a discrepancy
between desirable performance and present performance identifies a need (Bran-
son, 1977). Other definitions of need include perceived or felt needs. These
needs are not the result of anv documented gap. Nevertheless, thev sometimes
are the basis for curricular decisions.As an example, parents mav decide that
their childrenshould learn computer programming in elementary school. This
felt need is not usually determined bv an analysis of goal deficiencies. The

prevailing view is that the general public should be involved in the process of
determining instructional goals, and these are often expressed as needs. Needs
and goals are further refined in stages 2 and 3 of the design process, instructional
analysis and learner analysis.

Stage 2: Instructional Analysis

Stages 2 and 3 in the model of Figure 2-1 can occur in either order or
simultaneously. We have chosen to discuss instructional analysis first. The
purpose of instructional analysis is to determine the skills involved in reaching a
goal. For example, if the goal happens to be that even healthy adult will be able
7

to perform cardiopulmonary resuscitation, an instructional analysis would reveal

what component skills would have to be learned. In this case, the designer
would use a task analysis (or procedural analysis), the product of which would be
a list of the steps and the skills used at each step in the procedure (Gagne, 1977).
Another kind of instructional analysis is an information-processing analysis,
which is designed to reveal the mental operations used bv a person who has
learned a complex skill. This analysis makes possible inferences regarding the
internal processes involved in an intended skill. It might be necessary to have a
learner "talk through" a procedure used in solving a problem to determine
whether appropriate skills and strategies are being applied. An important es-
timate to be made for each decision and action revealed by an information-
processing analysis is whether the intended learners enter with these capabilities
or whether they must be taught them (stage 3).
An important outcome of instructional analysis is task classification. Task
classification is the categorization of the learning outcome into a domain or
subdomain of tvpes of learning, as described in Chapters 3, 4, and 5. Gagne
(1985) describes five major tvpes of learning outcomes and some subtypes. Task
classification can assist instructional design in several ways. Classifying the target
objectives makes it possible to check whether anv intended purpose of an
instructional unit is being overlooked. Briggs and Wager (1981) have presented
24 Principles of Instructional Design

examples of how target objectives may be classified and then grouped into
course units in the form of instructional curriculum maps. The resulting maps
can then be reviewed to check whether necessary verbal information, attitudes,
and intellectual skills are included in the instructional unit. Learning outcome
classification also provides the conditions most effective for different types of
learning outcomes.
The final type of analysis to be mentioned is learning-task analysis. A learning-
task analysis is appropriate for objectives of instruction that involve intellectual
skills. If the aim is that fourth graders will be able to make change for a dollar, a
learning-task analysis would reveal the subordinate skills needed for adding,
subtracting, aligning decimals, carrying, and other skills that are related to this
skill. The purpose of a learning-task analysis is to reveal the objectives that are
enabling and for which teaching sequence decisions need to be made. One
possible product of a learning task analysis is an instructional curriculum map
(ICM) similar to the one shown in Figure 2-2. This ICM shows the targeted
objectives and their subordinate objectives for an instructional unit on word
processing.
A designer may need to apply any or all of these types of analysis in designing
a single unit of instruction. Chapter 7 expands our description of the different
types of analysis and the techniques for performing them.

Stage 3: Entry Behaviors and Learner Characteristics

As previously indicated, this step is often conducted in parallel with stage 2. The
purpose is to determine which of the required enabling skills the learners bring
to the learning task. Some learners will know more than others, so the designer
must choose where to start the instruction, knowing that it will be redundant

Demonstrates the
Chooses to use a
word processor 4 use of a word
processor to enter,
edit and print copy

Demonstrates use of
Demonstrates use Demonstrates use of
the filer to save,
the text editor to

A
of editor to enter,
load, copy and merge
and edit text format text.
text

Stales advantages
classifies typing
of usinga word classifies classifies load and
word-wrap mode as insert or
processor save commands
overtype.

States functions
of a word
processor
A reformat
classifies page
classifies character
classifies format
commands commands format commands

States advantages
of typed over
hand-writen copy

FIGURE 2-2 An ICM for a Unit on Word Processing

 Designing Instructional Systems 25

for some but necessary for others. The designer must also be able to identify
those learners for whom the instruction would not be appropriate so that they
may be given instruction that remediates. The lack of understanding of a target
audience can sometimes be seen in instructional design products. It is usually
not sufficient for a designer to guess what the skills of an intended audience will
be. A better procedure is to interview and test the skills of the target population
until you know enough about them to design the instruction appropriately.
Chapter 6 discusses the analysis of learner characteristics in more detail.
In addition to learner qualities such as intellectual skills, which are clearly
learned, the designer of instruction mav find it desirable to make some provision
for learner abilities and traits, which are usually considered to be less readily
alterable through learning. Abilities include such qualities as verbal comprehen-
sion and spatial orientation, for example. Instruction designed for learners who
are low comprehension would best deemphasize verbal presentations
in verbal
(such as printed texts). Instruction designed for learners who score high in
spatial orientation ability might be able to use this ability to advantage in a
course in architecture.
Traits of personality of learner capability that may need to
are another aspect
be considered in instructional design. Students who score high on the trait of
anxiety, for example, may be better able to learn from instruction that is leisurely
paced and that permits learners to choose optional next steps. As will be
indicated in Chapter 6, learner traits and abilities may affect some of the general
qualities of instruction, such as its employment of particular media and its
pacing. In this respect, abilities and traits contrast with such learner characteris-
tics as the possession of particular skills and verbal knowledge; the latter has

quite specific effects on the content of effective instruction.

Stage 4: Performance Objectives

At this stage, it is necessary to translate the needs and goals into performance
and detailed to show progress toward the
objectives that are sufficiently specific
goals. There two reasons
are working from general goals to increasingly
for
specific objectives. The first is
to be able to communicate at different levels to
different persons. Some people (for example, parents or a board of directors) are
interested only in goals, and not in details, whereas others (teachers, students)
need detailed performance objectives to determine what they will be teaching or
learning.
A second reason for increased detail is to make possible planning and develop-
ment of the materials and the delivery system. One thesis of this book is that
different typesof learning outcomes require different instructional treatments.
To design effective instructional materials and choose effective delivery systems,
the designer must be able to properly determine the conditions of learning
necessary for acquisition of new information and skills. Specification of per-
formance objectives facilitates this task. Once objectives are stated in perfor-
mance terms, the curriculum can be analyzed in terms of sequence and com-
26 Principles of Instructional Design

pleteness and the requirements of prerequisite skills. This work facilitates the
planning of an effective delivery svstem. The size of the system needed can be
estimated and development schedules can be planned to coordinate the work of
the design team, the teachers, the media production team, and the trainers of
teachers.
The final reason for eventually stating all objectives in terms of performance
(rather than content outlines or teacher activities) is to be able to measure
student performance to determine when the objectives have been reached.
Objectives are of such central importance to the design process that an entire
chapter of this book (Chapter 7) is devoted to their construction.
Performance objectives are statements of observable, measurable behaviors.
Prior to this stage, the designer has given much thought to how the needs and
goals may be translated into instructional plans at the course or unit level. It is
likely that there have been many drafts of instructional objectives, objective
groupings, and unit structures before this stage is reached. These modifications
enable the designer to define the performance objectives that are to guide all the
later work in developing lesson plans (or modules) and the measures to be used
in monitoring student progress and evaluating the instruction.
The functions of performance objectives are to (1) provide a means for
determining whether the instruction relates to the accomplishment of goals, (2)
provide a means for focusing the lesson planning upon appropriate conditions
of learning, (3) guide the development of measures of learner performance, and
(4) assist learners in their study efforts. Thus, the intimate relationships among
objectives, instruction, and evaluation are emphasized. Briggs (1977) referred to
these three aspects of instructional design as the anchor points in planning, and he
emphasized the need to make certain that the three are in agreement with one
another.
It is apparent that the objectives should guide the instruction and evaluation,

not the other way around. Therefore, the objectives should be determined
before the lesson plans or the evaluation instruments. Almost all instructional
design models follow this sequence. Practices differ with regard to the step
following the development of performance objectives. The model shown in
Figure 2-1 places the development of test items before the development of
instructional strategies. Briggs (1977) also placed the design of assessment
instruments before lesson development, on the grounds that (1) the novice is
more likely to stray from the objectives in developing tests than in preparing
lessons, and (2) a designer who had just finished developing lesson material
might inadvertendy focus on content rather than performance in constructing
tests. The experienced designer, however, might choose to develop lessons

before developing performance measures.

Stage 5: Criterion-Referenced Test Items

Since the design of measures of learner performance is discussed later on in

Chapter 13, we need here only to summarize the purpose of this design stage.
 Designing Instructional Systems 27

There are many uses for performance measures. First, thev can be used for
diagnosis and placement within a curriculum. The purpose of diagnostic testing
is to ensure that an individual possesses the necessary prerequisites for learning
new skills. Test items allow the teacher to pinpoint the needs of individual
students in order to concentrate on the skills that are lacking and to avoid
unnecessary instruction.
Another purpose is to check the results of student learning during the
progress of a lesson. Such a check makes it possible to detect any mis-
understandings the student may have and to remediate them before continuing.
In addition, performance tests given at the conclusion of a lesson or unit of
instruction can be used to document student progress for parents or administra-
tors.
These levelsof performance assessment can be useful in evaluating the in-
structional system itself, either lesson bv lesson or in its entirety. Evaluations

designed to provide data, wherebv instruction is to be improved, are called

formative evaluations. Thev are usually conducted while the instructional materi-
als are still being formed and reformed. When no further changes are planned

and when it is time to determine the success and worth of the course in its final
form, summative evaluations are conducted. Types of performance measures
suitable for these various purposes are discussed extensively in Chapter 13.
Some planning of performance measures mav well be undertaken before the
development of lesson plans and instructional materials because one wishes the
tests to focus on the performance objectives (what the learner must be able to

do) rather than on what the learner has read or what the teacher has done. Thus,
the performance measures are intended to determine if students have acquired
the desired skill, not to determine if thev merely remember the instructional
presentation. Earlv determination of performance measures helps to focus on
the goal of student learning and on the instruction needed to facilitate that
learning.

Stage 6: Instructional Strategy

Our use of the term strategy is nonrestrictive. We do not intend to imply that all
instruction must be self-contained instructional modules or mediated materials.
Teacher-led or teacher-centered instruction can also benefit from instructional
systems design. Bv instructional strategy, we mean a plan for assisting the
learners with their studv efforts for each performance objective. This may take
the form of a lesson plan (in the case of teacher-led instruction) or a set of
production specifications for mediated materials. The purpose of developing the
strategy before developing the materials themselves is to outline how in-

structional activities will relate to the accomplishment of the objectives.

When group-paced instruction is planned, teachers use the in-
teacher-led,
structional design process toproduce a guide to help implement the intent of
the lesson plan without necessarily conveying its exact content to the learners.
The teacher gives directions, refers learners to appropriate materials, leads or
28 Principles of Instructional Design

directs class activities, and supplements existing materials with direct instruc-
tion. On the other hand, when a learner-centered, learner-paced lesson is

planned, a module is tvpicallv presented to the learner. It usually presents a

learning objective, an activity guide, the material to be viewed or read, practice
exercises, and a self-check test for the learner. In this case, the instructions or activity
guide in the module is written for the student rather than for the teacher. Designers
can use the process for both teacher-led and modular materials.
The purpose of all view presented in this book, is
instruction, according to the
to provide the events of instruction. As discussed
Chapter 10, these events are
in
communications external to the learner that support the internal processes of
learning. They include such widely recognized functions as directing attention,
informing the learner of the objective, presenting the stimulus material, and providing
feedback. It matters little whether these events are performed by teachers or
materials, so long as they are successfully performed. It may be noted further
that these events of instruction are applicable to all domains of learning out-
comes, although the details of how thev are implemented imply somewhat
different sets of conditions for learning (see Chapters 4 and 5 of this text;
Gagne, 1985).
What become evident as this book progresses is that different in-
will
structional media have different capabilities for providing the various events of
instruction. For example, teachers are unbeatable for providing learning guid-
ance and feedback; however, videotape can be used to present stimulus situa-
tions (for example, a tour of Florence) that would be difficult for the classroom
teacher to present in any other way. It may now be appreciated that the choice of
the delivery system indicates a general preference for emphasizing certain agents to
accomplish instructional events; within such a general preference (such as for
individualized, learner-paced modules), specific agents or media can be
assigned, event by event, objective by objective. That is what we mean by
developing a strategy for instruction.
The planning of an instructional strategy' is an important part of the in-

structional design process. It is at this point that the designer must be able to
combine knowledge of learning and design theory with his experience of learn-
ers and objectives. Needless to sav, creativity in lesson design will enhance this
other knowledge and experience. Perhaps it is this component of creativity that
separates the art of instructional design from the science of instructional design.
It is clear that the best lesson designs will demonstrate knowledge about the

learners, the tasks reflected in the objectives, and the effectiveness of teaching
strategies. To achieve this combination, the designer most often functions as
part of a team of teachers, subject-matter experts, script writers and producers,
and perhaps others.

Stage 7: Instructional Materials

The word materials here refers to printed or other media intended to convey
events of instruction. In most traditional instructional systems, teachers do not
 Designing Instructional Systems 29

design or develop their own instructional materials. Instead, they are given
materials (or they select materials) that they integrate into their lesson plans. In
contrast, instructional systems design underscores the selection and develop-
ment of materials as an important part of the design effort. Teachers can be
5 hard-pressed to arrange instruction when there are no really suitable materials
available for partof the planned objectives. Often, they improvise and adapt as
best they can. Most often, however, teachers do find suitable materials. The
danger is that teachers sometimes choose existing materials for convenience, in
effect changing the objectives of the instruction to fit their available materials. In
such circumstances, the student may be receiving information or learning skills
that are unrelated to instructional goals.
The more well established are the objectives and hence the more preciselv
determined the content of the materials, the more likely it is that suitable
materials will already be on the market. Nevertheless, such materials are more
likely to be referenced bv content than bv objective (to say nothing of their
failure to address the events of instruction they provide). It is possible that
available materials will be able to provide some of the needed instruction. In this
case, a module could be designed to take advantage of the existing materials and
could be supplemented with other materials to provide for the missing objec-
tives. Materials production is a costly process, and it is desirable to take advan-

tage of existing materials when possible.

A few general principles begin to emerge. First, the more innovative the
objectives, the more likely it is that a greater portion of the materials must be
developed since they are not likely to be available commercially. Second, de-
veloping materials for a particular delivery system is almost always more ex-
pensive than making a selection from those available. Third, it is possible to save
development expenses by selecting available materials and integrating them into
a module providing coverage of all the desired objectives of instruction. Fourth,
the role of the teacher is affected by the choice of delivery system and the
completeness of the materials because the teacher will have to provide whatever
missing events may be needed by the learners.
Some new curricula and instructional systems have intentionally been planned
from the outset either to develop all new materials or to make as much use as
possible of existing materials. The reason in the first instance is probably to
ensure that a central concept, method, theme, or body of content is carefully
preserved. Since such programs are often recognized as experimental, the added
development costs may be justified to preserve purity of the original concept. In
the case of a decision to make maximum use of existing materials, cost is likely to
be the primary consideration. An example of this latter kind of decision was that
of Project PLAN (Flanagan, 1975). The design of that individualized system
called for maximum use of available materials so that funds would be available
for designing implementation plans, for performance measures to monitor
student progress, and for computer costs to save teachers' time in scoring tests
and keeping records.
It is beyond the scope of this book to describe how design teams operate to
30 Principles of Instructional Design

accomplish the various stages of instructional systems design including the

development of materials. Carey and Briggs (1977) and Branson and Grow
(1987) give a general account of the process, and Weisgerber (1971) gives some
of the details for specific systems.

Stage 8: Formative Evaluation

Formative evaluation provides data for revising and improving instructional

materials. Dick and Carey (1990) provide detailed procedures for a three-level
process of formative evaluation. First, the prototype materials are tried one on
one (one evaluator sitting with one learner) with learners representative of the
target audience. This step provides a considerable amount of information about
the structure and logistic problems the learners may have with the lessons. The
designer can interview the learner or have him "talk through" the thoughts he
has while going through the material. It has been estimated that the effective-
ness of instructional materials could be improved 50 percent simply through the
use of a few one-on-one evaluations. The second level is a small group tryout, in
which the materials are given to a group of six to eight students. Here, the focus
is on how the students use the materials and how much help is requested. This

information can be used to make the lesson more self-sufficient. It will also give
the designer a better idea of the materials' probable effectiveness in a large
group, the mean scores of the students being more representative than the scores
from the one-on-one student trials. The final step is a field trial in which the
instruction, revised on the basis of the one-on-one and small-group trials, is
given to a whole class.
The purpose of formative evaluation is to revise the instruction so as to make
it as effective as possible for the largest number of students. This stage in
materials development is probably one of the most frequently overlooked be-

cause comes late in the design process and represents a significant effort in
it

planning and execution. However, the use of systems feedback to correct the
system represents the essence of systems philosophy. Instructional design with-
out formative evaluation is incomplete. The feedback loop in Figure 2-1 shows
that formative evaluation data may call for the revision or review of products
because of information derived from any of the previous stages of design.

Stage 9: Summative Evaluation

Studies of the effectiveness of a system as a whole are called summative evalua-
tions, the basic form of which is described more fully in Chapter 16. As the term
implies, a summative evaluation is normally conducted after the system has
passed through its formative stage —when it is no longer undergoing point- by-
point revision. This may occur at the first field test or as much as five
time of the
years later, when large numbers of students have been taught by the new system.
If there is expectation that the system will be widely used in schools or class-
 .

Designing Instructional Systems 31

rooms throughout the country, summative evaluations need to be conducted

under an equally varied range of conditions.
A national agency, the Joint Dissemination Review Panel (JDRP), conducts
such reviews. The JDRP meets periodically to review evidence of effectiveness
of educational products identified as potentially "exemplary" and suitable for
dissemination. This is a form of summative evaluation, in which a team of
evaluators audits a pilot project to judge evidence of its effectiveness. 'The
evidence must be shown to be valid and reliable, the effects must be of sufficient
magnitude to have educational importance, and it should be possible to repro-
duce the intervention and its effects at other sites" (Tallmadge, 1977; p. 2). If
the project passes the panel's scrutiny, it may qualify for funds to support
dessemination from the National Diffusion Network.

EDUCATIONAL SYSTEM DESIGN

Many different models may be used to describe the process of instructional

design as applied to total educational systems. Models for the most com-
prehensive level must include analyses of needs, goals, priorities, resources, and
other environmental and social factors affecting the educational system. The
model outlined in Table 2-1 lists 14 stages in the design of instruction for total
systems of education.
In contrast to the nine-stage model we just described (Figure 2-1), Table 2-1
makes it apparent that additional factors and stages must be dealt with in

Table 2-1 Stages in Designing Instructional Systems

System Level
1. Analysis of needs, goals, and pnorities

2. Analysis of resources, constraints, and alternate delivery systems

3. Determination of scope and sequence of curriculum and courses; delivery system design

Course Level
4. Determining course structure and sequence
5. Analysis of course objectives

Lesson Level
6. Definition of performance objectives
7. Preparing lesson plans (or modules)

8. Developing, selecting materials, media

9. Assessing student performance (performance measures)

System Level
10. Teacher preparation
1 1 Formative evaluation

12. Field testing, revision

13. Summative evaluation

14. Installation and diffusion

32 Principles of Instructional Design

planning instruction for large curriculum design efforts and for total educational
systems. These include the analysis of resources, constraints, alternative delivery
systems, teacher preparation, and the installation and diffusion of newly de-
veloped instruction.

Resources, Constraints, and Alternative Delivery Systems

Once needs and goals are identified, instructional planners need to consider
issues such as: How will students learn the skills implied by the goals? From
whom will they learn? Where will they find the resources, materials, or help they
need? What resources will it take to teach the goals? Are the resources available?
Do we want to spend that much? Can the present system do this? Will instructor
training be needed? and, What alternative systems might be used? Once ques-
tions such as these are pursued, some alternative delivery systems suggest
themselves.
A deliver)' system includes everything necessary to allow a particular in-
structional system to operate as it was intended and where it was intended.
Thus, a system can be designed to fit a particular physical plant or to require a
new one. The basic decision about instructional deliver)' can directly affect the
kind of personnel, media, materials, and learning activities that can be carried on
to reach the goals. Can any of the resources or constraints be altered? This is a
key question at several stages of planning, including this one.
Should the new set of goals appear out of reach of any of the available delivery
systems, no further planning is possible until (1) some goals are changed, (2)
some resources and constraints are changed, or (3) another delivery system can
be conceived. Failure to do this may lead to piecemeal planning with generally
unsatisfactory results. Lack of resolution of these issues may lead to various
kinds of waste including (1) equipment and materials sitting unused because of
lack of supporting personnel, (2) laboratories not used because supplies were
not budgeted for, (3) learning activities disrupted because of bad scheduling,
and (4) goals not achieved because essential prerequisite learning experiences
were not provided.
Often, the estimate of resources and constraints call for the goals to be
achieved within a currendy existing deliver)' environment. In the case of schools,
this generally means the teacher-led classroom. In industry, it could mean the
use of videotaped instruction because the deliver)' system is already in place.
What must be considered is whether the existing deliver)' system is capable of
providing the environment needed for learning the new skills. Further discus-
sion of this point is contained in later chapters.

Teacher Preparation

The term, teacher preparation, as used here does not refer to the initial education
and training of new teachers, but rather to the special training of current
 Designing Instructional Systems 33

teachers in the development and dissemination of new instructional systems.

Teachers, as noted earlier, are generally important members of the design team.
They assist in all the stages of design and become trainers of other teachers or
demonstration teachers. If a new instructional system requires special skills
beyond those already possessed by teachers in service, special training must be
designed as part of the instructional systems design process to provide those
new skills. Special workshops are one common mode for such training, but visits

to schools where the system is first operating as a pilot test are an important
alternative. The teachers need to perceive that the new system will work in their
environment. Teachers are often skeptical of new approaches, and it is time-
consuming to switch to new curricula and materials; accordinglv, teachers must
approach the task with a positive attitude toward the new system. In visits to
schools adopting an individualized system of instruction, Briggs and Aronson
(1975) discovered that most teachers felt they needed a year of experience
beyond their initial training for them to prefer new svstems of instruction over
their prior practices.
The basic principle we want to stress is that teachers need to be prepared
before materials are distributed in order for a new unit of instruction to be
adopted. The more input teachers have along the way, the more likely new
materials will fit into the existing system, and the more likely they will be
adopted (Burkman, 1986).

Installation and Diffusion

This stage of instructional systems development was mentioned in some of the
preceding discussion. After an acceptable degree of merit is shown in one or
more summative evaluations, the new system (course, or curriculum) is ready
for widespread adoption and regular use.
In the course of operational installation, a number of practical matters receive
final attention or adjustment. For example, materials may have to be stored
differently in some schools than in others, owing to differences in building
design and available space. Time schedules for a new set of instruction may
require modifications to fit within existing patterns for a particular school.
There are inevitable logistical problems: the duplication and distribution of
expandable materials, for example. Even more important, according to Heinich
(1984), is the need to be aware of the nature of the system into which the
innovation is to be introduced. New technology is often perceived as a threat to
the existing svstem and is often blocked by those who should use it.

A frequent problem is securing enough adoptions of a new instructional

system to amortize the costs of development, marketing, and maintenance (an
often overlooked cost). Techniques relevant to the diffusion of educational
systems and innovations have generated a great many research studies. It is
beyond the scope of this book to discuss the merits of relevant techniques. As a
follow-up to the JDBT, the U.S. Office of Education created the National
34 Principles of Instructional Design

Diffusion Network (NDN) in 1974 for the purpose of providing educators

with information about exemplar)' programs. The NDN
supports demonstra-
tion projects that provide training, materials, and technical assistance to those
who adopt their programs. The NDN
also has "facilitators" in each state, usually
within the state's Department of Education; these are persons who help identify
suitable NDN programs. NDN estimates that it presently supports over 400
programs in more than 15,000 public schools. As a result of NDN's efforts,
more than 50,000 teachers and administrators have received in-service training,
which may in turn have affected over 1.5 million students (National Diffusion
Network,' 1986).
If diffusion is one of the goals of a development project, it must be considered
early in the design process. Collaboration with a publishing company is one
approach, but the operating procedures of the companv mav put constraints on
what the final product or deliver}' system can be. For example, a chosen delivery
system may be unacceptable to a publisher, and the design team may have to
accept a less desirable deliver}' system in order to achieve the adoption goals.
This may require rethinking the instructional goals, needs, or system design
objectives.

SUMMARY
The term instructional system design was defined along with a general description
of the design process. Stages of design are often presented as a flow diagram or
model to be followed in the design of instructional materials. The instructional
systems approach is a process of planning and developing instruction that makes
use of research and learning theory and employs empirical testing as a means for
the improvement of instruction.
The nine-stage model of design described in this chapter represents one of the
possible ways of conceptualizing the process. All design models focus attention
on the three "anchor points" of instruction: performance objectives, materials,
and evaluation instruments. The purpose of lesson planning, as we see it, is to
ensure that the necessary instructional events are provided to the learner. Key
steps in the planning process include (1) classifying the lesson objectives by
learning type, (2) listing the needed instructional events, (3) choosing a medium
of instruction capable of providing those events, and (4) incorporating appro-
priate conditions of learning into the prescriptions indicating how each event
will be accomplished by the lesson. Some events may be executed by the learner,
some by the materials, and some by the teacher.
The design process is iterative, and many of the earlier stages have to be
revisited and the products reworked based on findings or new information
uncovered during later stages. There is, then, much working back and forth as
the total design work progresses. The entire design approach outlined here is
considered to be internally consistent and in agreement with research findings
 Designing Instructional Systems 35

on how learning takes place. The resulting designs are amenable to both
formative and summative evaluations. Each design objective is stated in testable
form so that the success of the design can be evaluated.
More comprehensive levels of systematic instructional design are encountered
* in efforts to develop courses or curricula for entire educational systems. At such
levels, as many as and development may be involved.
14 stages of analysis
Procedures of design of resources and
at this level usually include considerations
constraints, requirements for teacher education, and techniques for installation
and diffusion. Evaluation of an entire system involves assessing the effectiveness
and viability of components of the system as a whole.

References

Branson, R. K. (1977). Military and industrial training. In L. J. Briggs (Ed.), In-

structional design: Principles and applications. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Tech-
nology Publications.
Branson, R. K., & Grow, G. (1987). Instructional systems development. In R. M.
Gagne (Ed.), Instructional technology: Foundations. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Briggs, L. J. (Ed.). (1977). Instructional design: Principles and applications. Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Briggs, L. J., & Aronson, D. (1975). An interpretive study of individualized instruction in
the schools: Procedures, problems and prospects. (Final Report, National Institute of
Education, Grant No. NIE-G- 740065). Tallahassee, FL: Florida State University.
Briggs, L. J., & Wager, W. W. (1981). Handbook ofprocedures for the design of instruction.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Burkman, E. (1986). Factors affecting utilization. In R. M. Gagne (Ed.), Instructional
technology: Foundations. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Burton, J. K., & Merrill, P. F. (1977). Needs assessment: Goals, needs, and priorites. In
L. J. Briggs (Ed.), Instructional design: Principles and applications. Englewood Cliffs,

NJ: Educational Technology Publications.

Carey, J., & Briggs, L. J. (1977). Teams as designers. In L. J. Briggs (Ed.), Instructional
design: Principles and applications. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology
Publications.
Dick, W., & Carey, L. (1990). The systematic design of instruction (3rd ed.). Glenview, IL:
Scott, Foresman.
Flanagan, J. C. (1975). Project PLAN. In H. Talmage (Ed.), Systems of individualized
education. Berkeley, CA: McCutchan.
Gagne, R. M. (1977). Analysis of objectives. In L. J. Briggs (Ed.), Instructional design:
Principles and applications. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publica-
tions.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions of learning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
Heinich, R. (1984). The proper study of instructional technology. Educational Com-
munications and Technology Journal, 32(2), 67-87.
Kaufman, R. A. (1976). Needs assessment: What it is and how to do it. San Diego, CA:
University Consortium on Instructional Development and Technology.
36 Principles of Instructional Design

National Diffusion Network. (1986). Educational prop/rams that work (ed. 12). Long-
mont, CO: Sopris West.
Tallmadge, G. K. (1977). The joint dissemination review panel IDEABOOK. Washington,
DC: U.S. Office of Education.
Weisgerber, R. A. (1971). Developmental efforts in individualized instruction. Itasca, IL:
Peacock.
Part Two
Basic Processes
in Learning
and Instruction
 The Outcomes of
3 Instruction

ward from its

T he best way to design instruction
expected outcomes.
is

Some ways of working backward and

to

implications of these procedures for the content of instruction are described in

work back-
the

this chapter.These procedures begin with the identification of human capabili-

ties The instructional outcomes, introduced and
to be established by instruction.
defined here in terms of five broad categories, run throughout the book as the
framework on which the design of instruction is built.

INSTRUCTION AND EDUCATIONAL GOALS

The is to make possible the attainment of

basic reason for designing instruction
a set of educational goals. The society in which we live has certain functions to
perform in serving the needs of its people. Many of these functions in fact, —
—
most of them require human activities that must be learned. Accordingly, one
of the functions of a society is to ensure that such learning takes place. Every
society, in one way or another, makes provision for the education of people in
order that the variety of functions necessary for its survival can be carried out.
Educational goals are those human activities that contribute to the functioning of
a society (including the functioning of an individual in the society) and that can
be acquired through learning.
Naturally, in societies whose organization is simple —often called "primitive"

39
40 Principles of Instructional Design

societies —the goals of education and the means used to reach them are fairly
easy to describe and understand. In a primitive society whose economy revolves
around hunting animals, for example, the most prominent educational goals
center upon the activities of hunting. The son of a hunter is educated in these
activities by his father or, perhaps, by other hunters of the village to which he

belongs. Fundamentally, educational goals have the same kind of origin in a

modern complex society. Obviously, though, as societies become more com-
plex, so must educational goals.
Every so often in our own society, we hold conferences, appoint committees,
or establish commissions to study educational goals. One of the most famous of
these bodies formulated a set of goals called the "Cardinal Principles of Second-
ary Education" (Commission on the Reorganization of Secondary Education,
1918). The key statement of this document was:

Education in a democracy, both within and without the school, should develop in
each individual the knowledge, interests, ideals, habits, and powers whereby he will
find his place and use that place to shape both himself and society toward ever
nobler ends, (p.9)

The composition of the "knowledge, interests, ideals, habits, and powers" was
considered by this commission to fall into the seven areas of (1) health, (2)
command of basic skills, (3) worth}' home membership, (4) pursuing a voca-
tion, (5) citizenship, (6) worthy use of leisure, and (7) ethical character.
You might suppose that these guidelines would lend themselves to more
specific objectives for education. This sort of analysis, however, an over-
is

whelming task, so great, in fact, that it has never really been attempted for our
society. Instead, we depend upon a number of different simplifications to
specify educational goals in detail. These simplifying approaches condense
information in several stages, therefore losing some information along the way.
Thus, it has come about that we tend to structure education in terms of
various kinds of "subject matters" that are actually gross simplifications of
educational goals rather than activities reflecting the actual functions of human
beings in society. It is as though the activity of shooting a bear in a primitive
society were to be transformed into a subject called marksmanship. We represent
an educational goal with the subject-matter name of English rather than with
the many different human activities that are performed with language. The
formulation of educational goals within various subject-matter fields has been

carried out bv the National Assessment of Educational Progress (Womer,

1970). Goals derived from analyses of contemporary educational needs are
discussed in books by Boyer (1983) and Goodlad (1984).

Goals as Educational Outcomes

The reflection of societal needs in educational goals is typically expressed in

statements describing categories of human activity. A goal is preferably stated,
 The Outcomes of Instruction 41

not as "health," but as "performing those activities that will maintain health."
The goal, or goals, are most inadequately conveyed by the term citizenship; thev
are better reflected in a statement such as "carries out the activities of a citizen in
a democratic society."
Although it has not yet been done, it would be helpful for educational
scholars to define the array of human capabilities that would make possible the
kinds of activities expressed in educational goals. It is these capabilities that
represent the proximate goals of instruction. To carry out the activities required
for maintaining health, the individual must possess certain kinds of capabilities
(knowledge, skills, attitudes). In most cases, these are learned through de-
liberately planned instruction. Similarly, to perform the various activities appro-
priate to being a citizen, the individual must have learned a variety of capabilities
through instruction.
Educational goals are statements of the outcomes of education. They refer
made possible by learning, which in turn is often
particularly to those activities
brought about by deliberately planned instruction. The rationale in our society
is not different from that of a primitive society. In the latter, for example, the

educational goal of becoming a hunter is achieved by a customary regimen of

instruction in the various component human capabilities (locating prey, stalk-
ing, shooting, and so on) that makes possible the total activity of hunting. The
difference, however, is an important one. In the more complex society, the
capabilities required for one activity may be shared by a number of others. Thus,

the human capability of "performing arithmetic operations" serves not only one
educational goal (such as making a family budget), but several, including
changing money and making scientific measurements.
To design instruction, one must seek a means of identifying the human
capabilities that lead to the outcomes called educational goals. If these goals were
uncomplicated, as in a primitive society, defining these human capabilities
might be equally simple. But such is not the case in a highly differentiated and
specialized society. Instruction cannot be adequately planned separately for each
educational goal necessary to a modern society. One must seek, instead, to
identify the human capabilities that contribute to a number of different goals. A
capability such as reading comprehension, for example, obviously serves several
purposes. The present chapter is intended to serve as an introduction to the
concept of human capabilities.

Courses and Their Objectives

The planning of instruction is often carried out for a single course rather than for
larger units of a total curriculum. There is no necessary fixed length of a course
or no fixed specification of "what is A number of factors may
to be covered."
influence the choice of duration or amount of content. Often, the length of time
available in a semester or year is the primary determining factor. In an}' case, a
course is usually defined rather arbitrarily by the designation of some topics
42 Principles of Instructional Design

understood within the local environment of the school. A course mav take on a
general title such as "American History," "Beginning French," "English 1," and
so on.
The ambiguity in meaning of courses with such tides is evident. Is "American
History" in grade 6 the same as or different from the course of the same tide in
grade 12? Is "English 1" concerned with composition, literature, or both? These
are by no means idle questions because they represent sources of difficulty for
many students in many places, particularly when thev are planning programs of
study. It is not entirely uncommon, for example, for a student to choose a course
such as "First-vear French," onlv to find that he should have elected "Beginning
French."
Ambiguity in the meaning of courses with title or topic designations can
readily be avoided when courses are described in terms of the objectives (Mager,
1975; Popham andBaker, 1970). Examples of objectives in many subject areas
are described by Bloom, Hastings, and Madaus (1971). Thus, if "English 1" has
the objective of having the student be able to "compose a unified composition
on any assigned single topic, in acceptable printed English, within an hour," it is
perfectly clear to everyone what a portion of the course is all about. It will not
help the student, in any direct fashion, to "identify imagery in modern poetrv"
or to "analyze the conflicts in works of fiction." It will, however, if successful,
teach him the basic craft of writing a composition. Similarly, if an objective of
"Beginning French" is that the student be able to "conjugate irregular verbs,"
this is obviously fairly clear. It will not readily be confused with an objective that
makes it possible for the student to "write French sentences from dictation."
As usually planned, courses often have several objectives, not just one. A
course in social studies may have the intention of providing the student with
several capabilities: "describing the context of (specified) historical events,"
"evaluating the sources of written history," and "snowing a positive liking for
the study of history." A course in science may wish to establish in the student the
ability "to formulate and test hypotheses," to "engage in scientific problem
solving," and also to 'Value the activities of scientists." Each of these kinds of
objectives within a single course mav be considered equally worthwhile. They
may also be differentiallv valued by different teachers. The main point to be
noted about them at this juncture, however, is that they are different. The most
important difference among them is that each requires a different plan for its
achievement. Instruction must be differentially designed to ensure that each
objective is attainable by students with the context of a course.
Are there a great many specific objectives for which individual instructional
planning must be done, or can this task be reduced in some manner? To answer
this question, one has to think of what common categories there may be among
all the different subject matter to be learned. For example, learning to describe
the size and composition of the Washington Monument in some sense is not
inherently different from learning to describe something else, such as the events
at the siege of Vicksburg. Applying the rules of trigonometry to triangles is a
 The Outcomes of Instruction 43

task comparable to applying the rules of grammar to sentences. Instructional

planning can be vastly simplified by assigning learning objectives to five major
categories of human capabilities (Gagne, 1985). Such categories can be formed
because each leads to a different class of human performance. (As will be seen
later, each category also requires a different set of instructional conditions for
Effective learning.) Within each of these five categories, regardless of the subject
matter of instruction, the same qualities of performance apply. Of course, there
may be subcategories within each of the five categories. In fact, there are some
subcategories that are useful for instructional planning, as the next chapter will
show. But for the moment, in taking a fairly general look at instructional
planning from the standpoint of courses, five categories provide the com-
prehensive view.

FIVE CATEGORIES OF LEARNING OUTCOMES

What are the categoriesof objectives expected as learning outcomes? A brief

definition and description of each is given in the following paragraphs. The
performances that may be observed as learning outcomes are considered to be
made possible by internally stored states of the human learner, called capabilities.
A fuller description of the usefulness of these capabilities will be given in a later
section; conditions necessary for their learning are described in following chap-
ters.

Intellectual Skills

Intellectual skills enable individuals to interact with their environment in terms

of symbols or conceptualizations. Their learning begins in the early grades with
the three R's, and progresses to whatever level is compatible with the in-
dividual's interests and intellectual ability. They make up the most basic and the
most pervasive structure of formal education. They range from elementary
language skills such as composing a sentence to the advanced technical skills of
science, engineering, and other disciplines. Examples of intellectual skills of the
latter sort would be finding the stresses in a bridge or predicting the effects of
currency devaluation. The five kinds of capabilities that are outcomes of learning
are listed in Table 3-1 along with the examples of the intellectual skills of
identifying a diagonal and demonstrating the rule of using pronouns in the
objective case following a preposition.
Learning an intellectual skill means learning how to do something of an
intellectual sort. Generally, what is learned is called procedural knowledge (An-
derson, 1985). Such learning contrasts with learning that something exists or
has certain properties. The latter is verbal information. Learning how to identify
a sonnet by its rhyme pattern is an intellectual skill, whereas learning what the
sonnet savs is an instance of verbal information. A learner mav, of course, learn
44 Principles of Instructional Design

Table 3-1 Five Kinds of Learned Capabilities

Capability Examples of Performance

Intellectual Skill Identifying the diagonal of a rectangle

Demonstrating use of objective case of pronoun following a preposition

Cognitive Strategy Using an image link to learn a foreign equivalent to an English word
Rearranging a verbally stated problem by working backward

Verbal Information Stating the provisions of the Fourth Amendment to the U.S. Constitution

Recounting the events of an automobile accident

Motor Skill Planing the edge of a board

Printing the letter E

Attitude Choosing to read science fiction

Choosing running as a regular form of exercise

both, and often does, but it is possible for a person to learn how to do the first

(identify a sonnet) without being able to do the second (state what a particular
sonnet says). Likewise, as teachers know well, it is possible for a student to learn
the second without being able to do the For these reasons, it is important
first.

to maintain this distinction between knowing how and knowing that, even while
recognizing that a particular unit of instruction may involve both as expected
learning outcomes.
Another example of an intellectual skill may be given here. A student of the
English language learns at some point in his studies what a metaphor is. More
specifically, if his instruction is adequate, he learns to use a metaphor. (In the
next chapter, we identify this particular subcategory of intellectual skill as a rule.)
In other words, it may be said that the student has learned to use a rule to show
what a metaphor is; or that he has learned to apply a rule. This skill, then, has
the function of becoming a component of further learning. That is to say, the
skill of using a metaphor now may contribute to the learning of more complex

intellectual skills, such as writing illustrative sentences, describing scenes and

events, and composing essays.
If one wishes to know whether the student has learned this intellectual skill,
one must observe a category of performance. Usually this is done by asking the
student to "show what a metaphor is" in one or more specific instances. In other
words, observations might be made to determine whether the student per-
formed adequately when asked to use a metaphor to describe (1) the cat's
movements, (2) a cloudy day, and perhaps (3) the moon's surface.

Cognitive Strategies

Cognitive strategies are special and very important kinds of skills. They are the
capabilities that govern the individual's own
remembering, and think-
learning,
ing behavior. For example, they control his behavior when he is reading with
the intent to learn; and the internal methods he uses to "get to the heart of a
problem." The phrase cognitive strategy is usually attributed to Bruner (Bruner,
 The Outcomes of Instruction 45

Goodnow, and Austin, 1956). Rothkopf (1971) has named them "mathema-
genic behaviors"; Skinner (1968) "self-management behaviors." One expects
improve over a relatively long period of time as the in-
that such skills will
dividual engages in more and more studying, learning, and thinking. An ex-
ample shown in Table 3-1 is the cognitive strategy of using images as links
\o connect words in the learning of foreign-language vocabulary (Atkinson,
1975).
Provided it has previously been learned, a cognitive strategy may be selected
by a learner as a mode of solving a novel problem. Often, for example, newly
encountered problems can be efficiendy approached by working backward in
stages beginning with the goal to be achieved by a solution. This "working
backward" approach is an example of a cognitive strategy. Intellectual skills
(such as basic arithmetic operations) frequently have to be recalled by the learner
and brought to bear upon a problem. But although these skills are essential, they
are not sufficient. A mode of seeking a solution must also be used bv the learner,
a cognitive strategy that he has practiced in the past, perhaps many times in a
varietyof situations.
The most commonly occurring cognitive strategies are domain specific. For
example, there are strategies for retaining information from reading, for aiding
the solution of word problems in arithmetic, for helping the composition of
effective sentences, and many others that focus on particular domains of learning
tasks. However, some cognitive strategies are more general, like the process
called inference or induction. Suppose that a student has become acquainted with
—
magnetic attraction in a bar magnet noting that a force is exerted by each pole
of the magnet on certain kinds of metal objects. Then, the student is given some
iron filings to sprinkle on a piece of paper placed over the magnet. When the
paper is tapped, the filings exhibit "lines of force" around each pole of the
magnet. The student then verifies this observation in other situations, perhaps
using other magnets and other kinds of metal objects. These observations,
together with other knowledge, may lead to the induction of the idea of a
magnetic of force surrounding each pole of the magnet. It is important to
field
note in this example that the student has not been told of the magnetic field
beforehand or given instruction in "how to induce." But this kind of mental
operation is carried out.
Learning a cognitive strategy such as induction, however, is apparently not
done on of capability develops over fairly
a single occasion. Instead, this kind
long periods of time. Presumablv, the learner must have a number of experi-
ences with induction in widely different situations for the strategy to become
dependably useful.
When a learner becomes capable of induction, this strategy may be used in a
great variety of other situations. Provided other requisite intellectual skills and
information have been learned, an induction strategy may be used to arrive at an
explanation of what makes smoke rise in the air, why pebbles in a stream are
rounded and smooth, or what intention a writer had in composing an editorial
46 Principles of Instructional Design

essay. In other words, the cognitive strategy of induction may be put to use in a
great many situations —
of thinking and learning situations that are enormously
varied in their describable properties. In fact, the performances that the learner
is able to exhibit in these situations mav be seen to resemble each other only in
the respect that they involve induction. And this, of course, is the basic reason
for believing that such a cognitive strategy exists —by an act of induction
it is

that one arrives at the presence of the cognitive strategy of induction in other
people.

Verbal Information

Verbal information is the kind of knowledge we are able to state. It is knowing

that, or declarative knowledge. All of us have learned a great deal of verbal
information or verbal knowledge. We have readily available in our memories
many commonly used items of information such as the names of months, days
of the week, letters, numerals, towns, cities, states, countries, and so on. We also
have a great store of more highly organized information, such as many events of
U.S. history, the forms of government, the major achievements of science and
technology, and the components of the economy. The verbal information we
learn in school is in part "for the course onh'" and in part the kind of knowledge
we are expected to be able to recall readily as adults.
The learner usually acquires a great deal of informationfrom formal instruc-
tion. Much is Such information is stored in
also learned in an incidental fashion.
the learner's memory, but it is not necessarily "memorized" in the sense that it
can be repeated verbatim. Something like the gist of paragraph-long passages is
stored in memory and recalled in that form when the occasion demands. The
example given in Table 3-1 refers to the performance of telling what the Fourth
Amendment says. A second example is a learner's description of a set of events,
such as might have taken place in an automobile accident. Students of science
learn much verbal information, just as students do in other fields of study. They
learn the properties of materials, objects, and living things, for example. A large
number of "science facts" may not constitute a defensible primary goal of science
instruction. Nevertheless, the learning of such facts is an essential part of the
learning of science. For example, a student may learn that "the boiling point of
water is 100°C." One major function of such information is to provide the
learner with directions forhow to proceed in further learning. Thus, in learning
about the change of state of materials from liquid to gaseous form, the learner
may be acquiring an intellectual skill (that is, a rule) that relates atmospheric
pressure to vaporization. In working with this relationship, a student may be
asked to apply the rule to a situation that describes the temperature of boiling
water at an altitude of 9000 feet. At this juncture, the information given in the
example must be recalled in order to proceed with the application of the rule.
One may be inclined to say this information is not particularly important
rather, the learning of the intellectual skill is the important thing. There is no
 The Outcomes of Instruction 47

disagreement over However, the information is

this point. essential to these
events. The learner must have such information available to learn a particular
application.
Information may also be of importance for the transfer of learning from one
situation to another. For example, a student of government may hit upon the
idea that the persistence of bureaucracy bears some resemblance to the growth
of an abscess in the human body. If he or she has some information about
abscesses, such an analogy may make it possible to think of causal relationships
pertaining to bureaucracies that would not otherwise be possible. A variety of
cognitive strategies and intellectual skills may now be brought to bear on this
problem by the student, and new knowledge is thereby generated. The initial
transfer in such an instance is made possible by an "association of ideas," in
other words, by the possession and use of certain classes of information.
Finding out whether students have learned some particular facts or some
of information is a matter of observing whether they
particular organized items
can communicate them. The simplest way to do this, of course, is to ask for a
is the basic method
statement of the information either orally or in writing. This
commonly employed by what information has been learned.
a teacher to assess
In the early grades, assessing the communications children can make may
require the use of simple oral questions. Pictures and objects that the child can
point to and manipulate may also be employed.

Motor Skills

Another kind of capability we expect human beings to learn is a motor skill

(Fitts and Posner, 1967; Singer, 1980). The individual learns to skate, to ride a
bicycle, to steer an automobile, to use a can opener, to jump rope. There are also
motor skills to be learned as part of formal school instruction, such as printing
letters (Table 3-1), drawing a straight line, or aligning a pointer on a dial face.
Despite the fact that school instruction is so largely concerned with intellectual
functions, we do not expect a well-educated adult to be lacking in certain motor
skills (such as writing) that may be used every day. A motor skill is one of the
most obvious kinds of human capabilities. Children learn a motor skill for each
printed letter they make with a pencil on paper. The function of the skill, as a
capability, is simply to make possible the motor performance. Of course, these
motor performances may themselves enter into further learning. For example,
students employ the skill of printing letters when they are learning to make (and
print) words and sentences. The acquisition of a motor skill can be reasonably
inferred when the students can perform the act in a variety of contexts. Thus, if
youngsters have acquired the skill of printing the letter E, they should be able to
perform this motor actwith a pen, a pencil, or a crayon, on any flat surface,
constructing letters with a range of sizes. Obviously, one would not want to
conclude that the skill has been learned from a single instance of an £ printed
with pencil on a particular piece of paper. But several £'s, in several contexts,
48 Principles of Instructional Design

observably distinct from Ps or /fs, provide convincing evidence that this kind
of capability has been learned.

Attitudes

Turning now to what is often called the affective domain (Krathwohl, Bloom,
and Masia, 1964), we identify a class of learned capabilities called attitudes. All
of us possess attitudes of many sorts toward various things, persons, and
situations. The effect of an attitude is to amplify an individual's positive or
negative reaction toward some person, thing, or situation. The strength of
people's attitudes toward some item may be indicated by the frequency with
which they choose that item in a variety of circumstances. Thus, an individual
with a strong attitude toward helping other people will offer help in many
situations, whereas a person with a weaker attitude of this sort will tend to
restrict offers of help to fewer situations. The schools are often expected to

establish socially approved attitudes such as respect for other people,

cooperativeness, personal responsibility, as well as positive attitudes toward
knowledge and learning, and an attitude of self-efficacy. A student learns to have
preferences for various kinds of activities, preferring certain people to others,
showing an interest in certain events rather than others. One infers from a set of
such observations that the student has attitudes toward objects, persons, or
events that influence the choice of courses of action toward them. Naturally,
many such attitudes are acquired outside of the school, and there are many that
schools cannot appropriately consider relevant to their instructional function.
As one possibility, though, school instruction may have the objective of es-
tablishing positive attitudes toward subjects being studied (for example, Mager,
1968). Often, too, school learning is successful in modifying attitudes toward
activities that provide esthetic enjoyment. One of the examples of Table 3-1 is a
positive attitude toward reading a particular kind of fiction.
Considered as a human capability, an attitude ismodi-
a persisting state that
fies the indiviual's choices of action. Atoward listening to
positive attitude
music makes the student tend to choose such activity over others, when such
choices are possible. Of course, this does not mean he or she will always be
listening to music, under all circumstances. Rather, it means that when there is
an opportunity for leisure (as opposed to other pressing concerns) the probabil-
ity of a choice to listen to music is noticeably high. If one were able to observe
the student over an extended period of time, one would be able to note that the
choice of this activity was relatively frequent. From such a set of observations, it
could be concluded that the student had a positive attitude toward listening to
music.
In practice, of course, making such a set of observations about a single
student, not to mention a class of students, would be an exceedingly time-
consuming and, therefore, expensive undertaking. As a result, inferences about
the possession of attitudes are usually made on the basis of "self- reports." These
 The Outcomes of Instruction 49

may be obtained by means of questionnaires that ask students what choices of

action they would make (or in some cases, did make) in a variety of situations.
There are, of course, technical problems in the use of self-reports for attitude
assessment. Since their intentions are rather obvious, students can readily make
s^lf-reports of choices that do not reflect realitv. However, when proper pre-
cautions are taken, such reports make possible the inference that a particular
attitude has been learned or modified in a particular direction.
Thus, the performance that is affected by an attitude is the choice of a course of
personal action. The tendency to make such a choice, toward a particular class of
objects, persons, or events, may be stronger in one student than in another. A
change in an attitude would be revealed as a change in the probability of
choosing a particular course of action on the part of the student. Continuing the
previous example, over a period of time or as a result of instruction, the
probability of choosing to listen to music may be altered. The observation of
such change would give rise to the inference that the student's attitude toward
listening to music had changed, that is, had become "stronger" in the positive
direction.

Human Capabilities as Course Goals

A single course of instruction usually has objectives that fit into several catego-
riesof human capability. The major categories, which cut across the "content"
of courses, are the five we have described. From the standpoint of the expected
outcomes of instruction, the major reason for distinguishing these five catego-
ries is that thev make possible different kinds of human performance.
For example, a course in elementary science may foresee as general objectives
such learning outcomes as (1) solving problems of velocity, time, and accelera-
tion; (2) designing an experiment to provide a scientific test of a stated
hypothesis; or (3) valuing the activities of science. Number one obviously
names intellectual skills and, therefore, implies some performances involving
intellectual operations the student can show he can do. Number two pertains to
the use of cognitive strategies since it implies that the student will need to exhibit
this complex performance in a novel situation, where little guidance is provided
in the selection and use of rules and concepts he has previously learned. Number
three has to do with an attitude, or possibly with a set of attitudes, that will be
exhibited in behavior as choices of actions directed toward science activities.
The human capabilities distinguished in these five categories also differ from
each other in another highly important way. They each require a different set of
The conditions necessary for
learning conditions for their efficient learning.
learning these capabilities efficiently, and the distinctions among these con-
ditions, constitute the subjects of the next two chapters. There, we give an
account of the conditions of learning that apply to the acquisition of each of
these kinds of human capability, beginning with intellectual skills and cognitive
strategies and following with the remaining three categories.
50 Principles of Instructional Design

DESIGNING INSTRUCTION USING HUMAN CAPABILITIES

The point of view presented in this chapter is that instruction should always be
designed to meet accepted educational goals. When goals are matched with
societal needs, the ideal condition exists for the planning of a total program of
education. Were such an undertaking to be attempted, the result would be, as a
first step, a list of human activities, each of which would have associated with it
an estimate of importance in meeting the needs of the society.
its

When human derived from societal needs are in turn analyzed, they
activities

yield a set of human capabilities. These are descriptions of what human adults in
a particular society ought to know and particularly what they ought to know how
to do. Such a of capabilities would probablv not bear a close resemblance to
set
the traditional subject matter categories of the school curriculum. There would,
of course, be a relationship between human capabilities and the subjects of the
curriculum, but it would probablv not be a simple correspondence.
Most instructional design, as currendv carried out, centers upon course plan-
ning and design. We shall use such a framework in this book. However, we shall
continue to maintain an orientation toward the goals of instruction. Learning
outcomes cannot always be well identified, it appears, by the topical tides of
courses. They can be identified as the varieties of learned human capabilities that
make possible different tvpes of human performances. Accordingly, the present
chapter has provided an introduction to the five major categories of capabilities,
which will serve throughout the book as the basic framework of instructional
design.
If the instructional designer thinks 'These five categories are all well and
good, but all I'm producing creative thinkers," he is fooling
really interested in is

himself. With the exception of motor skills, all of these categories are likely to be
involved in the planning of any course. One cannot have a course without informa-
tion, and one cannot have a course that doesn't affect attitudes to some degree. And
most importandy, one cannot have a course without intellectual skills.
There are a couple of reasons why intellectual skills play a central role in
designing the structure of a course of study. First, they are the kinds of capabili-
ties that determine what the student can do and, thus, are intimately bound up

with the description of a course in terms of its learning outcomes. A second

reason is that intellectual skills have a cumulative nature —they build upon each
other in a predictable manner. Accordingly, they provide the most useful model
for the sequencing of course structure. In the next chapter, we begin to look
more closelv at intellectual skills —what kinds are there, how can they be learned,
and how does one know when thev are learned?

SUMMARY
This chapter has shown that the defining of goals for education is a complex
problem. In part, this is because so much is expected of education. Some
 The Outcomes of Instruction 51

persons would like education to emphasize the importance of understanding the

history of mankind; some would like it to perpetuate the present culture or
present academic disciplines; some would stress the need to help children and
young adults adjust to a rapidly changing society; and others would hope that
i education could prepare students to become agents improving themselves and

the society in which thev live.

One source of complexity' in defining educational goals arises from the need
to translate goals from the very general to the increasingly specific. Many layers
of such goals would be needed to be sure that each topic in the curriculum
actually moves the learner a step closer to the distant goal. Probably, this
mapping has never been done completely for anv curriculum. Thus, there tend
to be large gaps from general goals to the specific objectives for courses in the
—
curriculum. A major problem then remains the need to define course objec-
tives in the absence of an entire network of connections between the most
general goals and the specific course objectives.
Despite the involved nature of this problem, means are available for classify-
ing course objectives into categories, that then make it possible to examine the
scope of types of human capabilities the course is intended to develop. One
purpose of such taxonomies (sets of performance categories) is to evaluate the
objectives themselves in their entirety. The taxonomy presented in this chapter
contains the following categories of learned capabilities:

1. Intellectual skills
2. Cognitive strategies
3. Verbal information
4. Motor skills

5. Attitudes

The usefulness of learning each of these types of capabilities has been discussed
and will be treated in greater detail in later chapters.
Uses of such a taxonomy, in addition to the evaluation of the variety of
capabilities a course is intended to produce in the learner, include the following:

1. The taxonomy can help to group specific objectives of a similar nature together
and, thus, reduce the work needed to design a total instructional strategy.
2. The groupings of objectives can aid in determining the sequence of segments of
a course of study.
3. The grouping of objectives into types of capabilities can then be utilized to plan
the internal and external conditions of learning estimated to be required for
successful learning.

Each performance objective of a course defines a unique performance ex-

pected as an outcome of the instruction. By grouping objectives into the five
categories of capabilities which have been described, one also can assess the
adequacy of coverage in each category, while capitalizing upon the fact that the
conditions of learning are the same for each objective within that category.
52 Principles of Instructional Design

Identification of the conditions of learning for each type of human capability is

the main topic of the next two chapters.

References

Anderson, J. R. (1985). Cognitive psychology and its implications (2nd ed.). San Francisco:
Freeman.
Atkinson, R. C. (1975). Mnemotechnics in second language learning. American Psycholo-
gist, 30, 821-828.

Bloom, B. S., Hastings, J. T., & Madaus, G. F. (1971). Handbook on formative and
summative evaluation of student learning. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Boyer, E. L. (1983). High school. New York: Harper 8c Row.
Bruner, J. S., Goodnow, J. J., 8c Austin, G. A. (1956). A study of thinking. New York:
Wiley.
Commission on the Reorganization of Secondary Education. (1918). Cardinal principles
ofsecondary education. Washington, DC: Department of the Interior, Bureau of Educa-
tion.
Fitts, P. M., &
Posner, M. I. (1967). Human performance. Belmont, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions oflearning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
Goodlad, J. I. (1984). A place called school. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., 8c Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of educational
objectives. Handbook U: Affective domain. New York: McKay.

Mager, R. F. (1968). Developing attitude toward learning. Belmont, CA: Fearon.

Mager, R. F. (1975). Preparing objectives for instruction (2nd ed.). Belmont, CA: Fearon.
Popham, W. J., 8c Baker, E. L. (1970). Establishing instructional goals. Englewood Cliffs,

NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Rothkopf, E. Z. (1971). Experiments on mathemagenic behavior and the technology' of
written instruction. In E. Z. Rothkopf 8c P. E. Johnson (Eds.), Verbal learning research
and the technology of written instruction. New York: Teachers College.
Singer, R. N. (1980). Motor learning and human performance (3rd ed.). New York:
Macmillan.
Skinner, B. F. (1968). The technology of teaching. New York: Appleton.
Womer, F. G. (1970). What is national assessment? Denver: Education Commission of
the States.
 Varieties of Learning
4
Intellectual Skills
and Strategies

skills, (2)
w hen one begins to think about the application
of learning principles to instruction, there is no better guide than to ask the
question, what is to be learned? We have seen that the answer to this question
may in any given instance fall into one of the general classes: (1) intellectual
cognitive strategies, (3) information, (4) motor skills, or (5) attitudes.
In this chapter, we intend to consider the conditions affecting the learning of
intellectual skills, which are of central importance to school learning and which in
addition provide the best structural model for instructional design. It is a
reasonable step to proceed, then, to a consideration of cognitive strategies, which
are a special kind of intellectual skill deserving of a separate categorization. In
the following chapter, we will consider the learning requirements for the
remaining three of human capabilities.
classes
An intellectual skill makes it possible for an individual to respond to his
environment through symbols. Language, numbers, and other kinds of symbols
represent the actual objects of the person's environment. Words "stand for"
objects. They also represent relations among objects, such as above, behind, and
within. Numbers represent the quantity of things in the environment, and
various symbols are used to represent relations among these quantities (+, =,
and so Other kinds of symbols, such as lines, arrows, and circles, are
forth).
commonly used to represent spatial relations. Individuals communicate aspects
of their experience to others by using such symbols. Symbol using is one of the
major ways people remember and think about the world in which they live. We

53
54 Principles of Instructional Design

need to provide here an expanded description of these intellectual skills. What

kinds of intellectual skills mav be learned? and how are thev learned?

TYPES OF INTELLECTUAL SKILLS

The by the individual during school years are many,

intellectual skills learned
surely numbering in the thousands. One can appreciate this fact by thinking of a
single —
domain language skills. Even topics of instruction such as oral reading,
expressive reading, sentence composition, paragraph construction, conversing,
and persuasive speaking contain scores of specific intellectual skills that must be
learned. This is also true of skills of number and quantification within the

various fields of mathematics. Many skills of spatial and temporal patterning

form a part of such subjects as geometry and phvsics. In dealing with intellectual
skills, one must be prepared to look at the "fine-grained" structure of human

intellectual functioning.
In whatever domain of subject matter they occur, intellectual skills can be
categorized by complexity. This means the intricacy of the mental process that
may be inferred to account for the human performance. For example, suppose
that a learner shown two novel and distinctive-looking objects and is told to
is

learn how to tell them apart when they are brought back at a later time. The kind
of mental processing required is not very complex. One can infer that what has
been learned in this situation and can later be recalled is a "discrimination.''
Quite a different level of complexity is indicated by the following example:
Following instruction, the learner is able to comprehend adjectives in the
German language that he has never before encountered, constructed by adding
the suffix lich (as with Gemut—gemiitlich). This kind of performance is often
referred to as rule governed because the kind of mental processing it requires is
"applving a rule." It is not necessarv for the learner to state the rule or even for
him to be able to state it. He is, however, performing in a way that implies he
must have learned an internal capability that makes his behavior regular or rule
governed. What he has learned is called a rule Obviously, such a process is more
.

complex than the discrimination referred to in the previous paragraph.

Different levels of complexitv of mental processing, then, make possible the
classification of intellectual skills. Such categories cut across and are independent
of types of subject matter. How many levels of complexity of intellectual
processing can be distinguished or need to be? For most instructional purposes,
the useful distinctions among intellectual skills are as shown in Figure 4-1.
Learning development of the individual in the manner
affects the intellectual
suggested by the diagram. In solving problems for which instruction has pre-
pared them, learners are acquiring some higher-order rules (that is, complex rules).
Problem solving requires that they recall some simpler, previously learned rules
and defined concepts. To acquire these rules, learners must have learned some
concrete concepts, and to learn these concepts, they must be able to retrieve some
previously learned discriminations. For example, the reader who is confronted
 Varieties of Learning 55

PROBLEM SOLVING

involves the formation of

HIGHER-ORDER RULES

which require as prerequisites

RULES
and
DEFINED CONCEPTS

which require as prerequisites

CONCRETE CONCEPTS

which require as prerequisites

DISCRIMINATIONS

FIGURE 4-1 Levels of Complexity in Intellectual Skills

with the problem of inferring the pronunciation of an unfamiliar printed word

must bring to bear on this problem some previously learned rules (decoding
skills), whose learning has in turn required the prerequisite of identifying the

word components called phonemes (defined concept) and printed letters (con-
crete concepts). The child who is learning to identify a letter such as a printed E
56 Principles of Instructional Design

must have previously learned to distinguish three horizontal lines = from two
=; that is, this discrimination must have been acquired as a prerequisite. Of
course, the teacher who is designing instruction to get children to identify E
may find it possible to assume that they already know two lines from three. If
this assumption is not correct, it may be necessary to design instruction so that
the learners "catch up" with specific capabilities that reflect the simpler forms of
intellectual skills.

Discriminations

A discrimination is the capability of making different responses to stimuli that

differ from each other along one or more physical dimensions. In the simplest
case, the person indicates by responding that two stimuli are the same or
different. Examples in secondary and adult education may occur with stimuli
encountered in art, music, foreign languages, and science. Industrial examples
pertain to the discrimination of differences in woods, metals, textiles, papers,
forms of printing, and a host of others.
Discrimination is often a regular part of instruction for children in early
school grades. Here, children are asked to distinguish between two "pictures,''
one having vertical lines and another horizontal lines or one having a circle and
the other a square. Matching to a sample is another variant form of the
discrimination task. The child may be asked to "select the block that has the
same color as this one" from a group of blocks of various colors. In beginning
music instruction, the child may be asked to learn to discriminate which of the
two tones is louder or which of two tone pairs contains tones that are the same
or different in pitch.
Discrimination is a very basic kind of intellectual skill. Deliberate instruction
in discrimination is undertaken most frequently for young children and for the
mentally retarded. As far as most school learning is concerned, relevant dis-
criminations are usually assumed to have been learned early in life. Every once in
a while, however, one is surprised to realize that certain elementary dis-
criminations may not have been learned and cannot be assumed. Does the
learner of the French miliar and frontal r actually hear this distinction (that is,
has it been learned as a discrimination)? Has the student microscopist actually
seen the distinction between the bright and dark boundary that will later be
identified as a cell wall? Can the untrained adult discriminate between the wood
grains of cherry and maple?
In describing the characteristics of a discrimination, as well as other types of
intellectual skills to follow, we need to account for three components of the
learning situation:

1. The performance that is acquired or to be acquired. What is it that the learner

will be able to do after learning that he was not able to do before?
2. The internal conditions that must be present for the learning to occur. These
consist of capabilities that are recalled from the learner's memory and that then
become integrated into the newly acquired capability.
 Varieties of Learning 57

3. The external conditions that provide stimulation to the learner. These may be
visually present objects, symbols, pictures, sounds, or meaningful verbal com-
munications.

For discrimination learning, these characteristics are described below.

Performance

There must be a response which indicates that the learner can distinguish stimuli
that differ on one or more physical dimensions. Often, this is an indication of
same or different.

Internal Conditions

On the senson' side, the physical difference must give rise to different patterns
of brain activity. Otherwise, the individual must have available only the re-

sponses necessary to indicate that the difference is detectable, as in saying same

and different. The required responses may be as simple as pointing, making a
checkmark, or drawing a circle around a pictured object.

External Conditions

The learning of discriminations involves external conditions reflected in some of

the most generally applicable learning principles. Continuity is necessary in that
the response must follow the stimulus within a short time. Reinforcement is of
particular importance to discrimination learning and is made to occur differently
for right and wrong responses. A response indicating a correct distinction
between same or different stimuli is followed by a pleasant familiar activity (for
example, circling other figures of the same sort), whereas an incorrect response is
not followed by such activity. When reinforcement occurs in this manner, the
discrimination will soon be learned. Repetition also plays a particular role. The
situation may need to be repeated several times, in order that the correct
stimulus difference is selected. Sometimes, this may happen in one trial, but
often a few repetitions may be necessary to permit reinforcement to take its

effect. Additional repetitions become necessary when multiple discriminations

are being learned, as when several different object shapes must be distinguished
at one time.

Concrete Concepts
A concept is a capability that makes it possible for an individual to identify a
stimulus as amember of a class having some characteristic in common, even
though such stimuli may otherwise differ from each other markedly. A concrete
concept identifies an object property or object attribute (color, shape, and so on).
Such concepts are called concrete because the human performance they require is
recognition of a concrete object.
58 Principles of Instructional Design

Examples of object properties are round, square, blue, three, smooth, curved,
flat,and so on. One can tell whether a concrete concept has been learned by
asking the individual to identify, by "pointing to," two or more members
belonging to the same object-property class; for example, by pointing to a
penny, an automobile tire, and the full moon as round. The operation of
pointing may be carried out practically in many different ways; it is a matter of
choosing, checking, circling, or grasping. Frequently, pointing is carried out by
naming (labeling). Thus, the particular response made by the individual is of no
consequence, so long as it can be assumed that he knows how to do it.
An important variety of concrete concept is object position. This can be con-
ceived as an object property since it can be identified by pointing. It is clear,
however, that the position of an object must be in relation to that of another
object. Examples of object positions are above, below, beside, surrounding,
right, left, middle, on, in front of. Obviously, one can ask that such positional
characteristics be "pointed to" in some manner or other. Thus, object positions
qualify as concrete concepts.
The distinction between a discrimination and a concept is easy to appreciate:
The first is "responding to a difference"; the second is identifying something by
name or other ways. A person may have learned to tell the difference between a
triangle and a rectangle drawn on a piece of paper. These may be seen as
different figures, by choosing, pointing, or otherwise responding differentially.
Such performance permits only the conclusion that the person can dis-
a
criminate between these particular figures. To test whether the concept triangle
has been learned, however, one would need to ask the person to identify several
figures exhibiting this property — figures that otherwise differ widely in their
other qualities such as size, color, border thickness, and so on. In other words,
acquiring a concrete concept means that the individual is capable of identifying
the of object properties.
class

The capability of identifying concrete concepts is fundamentally significant

for more complex learning. Many investigators have emphasized the importance
of "concrete learning" as a prerequisite to "the learning of abstract ideas." Piaget
(1950) made this distinction a key idea in his theory of intellectual development.
The acquisition of concepts by definition (to be described next) requires that the
learner be able to identify the referents of the words used in such definitions.
Thus, to acquire the concept rim by way of the definition "the edge of a round
thing," the learner must have as prerequisites the concrete concepts "edge" and
"round." If he is not able to identify these concepts concretely, it will not be
possible for him in any true or complete sense to "know the meaning" of rim.

Performance

The student of object properties, including object positions, by

identifies a class
"pointing to" two or more members of the class. The "pointing" may be done in

any of a number of ways (checking, circling, and so on) equivalent only in the
 Vaneties of Learning 59

sense that identification occurs. Examples: (1) display a set of objects made of
metal, plastic, and wood, and ask for identification of those made of wood; (2)
given a model of Old English type, ask for identification of this type in several
samples of print.

Internal Conditions

In acquiring a concrete concept, discriminations must be recalled. Thus, an

individual who is learning the concept two must be able to discriminate a
variation in object quality like this: 079 079, from one like this: |
|. For the
concept o to be learned, the difference between O and other physical forms of O
must have been discriminated. Examples in the previous paragraph require
discriminations of (1) surface appearances of wood, plastic, and metal; and (2)
the same letters printed in different type.

External Conditions

Instances of a concept are presented, varying widely in their nonrelevant charac-

teristics, and the individual is asked to identify each by pointing or picking out
from a group. For example, a concept like two may be identified by objects as
vastly different in other characteristics as two dots on a page, two persons, two
buildings, or two baseballs. The concept wooden may be displayed in a variety of
material objects of different sizes, colors, and shapes. Negative instances of the
concept (objects of metal or plastic) are included in order to reveal rejection of
their choice as an indicator of correct performance.

Defined Concepts

An individual is said to have learned a defined concept when he can demonstrate

the meaning of some of objects, events, or relations. For ex-
particular class
ample, consider the concept of a foreign country. An individual
alien, a citizen

who has learned such a concept will be able to classify a particular person in
accordance with the definition, bv showing that that person is currendy in a
country of which he is not a citizen and that he is a citizen of some other
country. The demonstration may involve verbal reference to the definition, and
thisis an adequate demonstration when one assumes that the individual knows

the meaning of the words citizen, other, and country. Should it be the case that
such knowledge cannot be assumed, it might be necessary to ask for the
demonstration in other terms, perhaps involving pointing to pictures of people
and maps of countries. Demonstration of the meaning distinguishes this kind of
mental processing from the kind involved in memorized verbal information such
as the statement "An alien is a citizen of a foreign country."
Many concepts can only be acquired as defined concepts and cannot be
identified by "pointing to" them, as can concrete concepts. Familiar examples
60 Principles of Instructional Design

are family, city, and abstractions like justice. However, some defined concepts
have corresponding concrete concepts that earn' the same name and possess
certain features in common. For example, many young children learn the basic
shape of a triangle as a concrete concept. Not until much later in studying
geometry' do they encounter the defined concept of triangle, "a closed plane
figureformed by three line segments that intersect at three points." The concrete
and defined meanings of triangle are not exactly the same, yet they overlap
considerably.
An example of a defined concept is boundary line,the definition of which may
be stated marking where an area ends." This concept must be
as "a line
demonstrated for an external observer to know that it has been learned. Such a
demonstration by the learner would consist, essentially, of (1) identifying an
area, either by pointing to a piece of ground, a map, or by drawing one on
paper; (2) identifying a line that shows the limits of the area; and (3) demon-
strating the meaning of end, by showing that passage of a moving object is
brought to a stop at the line.
Why doesn't one just ask the question, what does boundary line mean? Why
describe this elaborate procedure? As mentioned previously only by ensuring —
that the individual is capable of operations identifying the referents of the words
can one be confident that the meaning of a defined concept has been learned. In
practice, of course, the procedure of obtaining verbal answers to verbal ques-
tions is often used. But such a procedure is always subject to the ambiguity that
the learner may be repeating a verbalization and, therefore, may not know the
meaning of the concept after all. It is for this reason that we use the phrase
demonstrate a concept rather than a simpler phrase like state a definition or define.
We want to imply that the learner has a genuine understanding of a defined
concept rather than the superficial acquaintance indicated by reeling off a string
of words.

Performance

The learner demonstrates the concept by identifying instances of concepts that

are components of the definition and showing an instance of their relation to
one another. In the example just given, the concepts area and line are first
identified, followed by the meaning of the verb end (bringing a moving object
to a stop), which is the relation to be demonstrated. Example: A definition of
the physical concept mass is "the property of a body that determines how much
acceleration it would attain when subjected to a particular force." Ideally, a
performance demonstrating the possession of this concept would identify sever-
al bodies of different mass, indicated by differing accelerations resulting from the

same force. In quantitative terms, of course, a proportional relation between

mass and acceleration should be demonstrated, in accordance with the relation
a = fm.
It is instructive to note that the demonstration that a defined concept has been
 Varieties of Learning 61

attained goes far beyond repeating a definition in words. Obviously, a student

can learn to state a definition "Mass is the property that determines the
such as

amount of acceleration imparted to abody by a particular force," without

having an understanding of the concept. To assess the idea properly, one must
* devise questions that require identification of the component concepts, includ-
ing the relation between them. Thus, a question like the following does not do
the job required: "A body is acted on by a force of 1000 dynes and accelerates to
20 cm/sec/sec. What is its mass?" A question like the following would be a better
indicator: "A body is observed to accelerate at 20 cm/sec/sec. Describe two
different sets of conditions that could bring about this acceleration."

Internal Conditions

To acquire a concept by definition, the learner must retrieve all of the com-
ponent concepts included in the definition, including the concepts that
represent relations among them (such as end in the case of boundary line, or acts
upon in the case of force and mass).

External Conditions

A defined concept may be learned by having the learner watch a demonstration.

Laboratory exercises in elementary physics typically include a demonstration of
Most frequently, though, a defined concept is "demonstrated"
the concept mass.
by means of a verbally stated definition. Thus, the concept scum may be
communicated by the statement "a filmy covering floating on a liquid." Pro-
vided the learners' internal conditions are met, such a statement is sufficient to
induce learning of the concept. What must be retrieved by the learners are the
concepts filmy, covering, liquid, and floating on, not just the words.

Rules

A rule hasbeen learned when it is possible to say with confidence that the
learner's performance has a kind of "regularity" over a variety of specific situa-
tions. In other words, the learner shows that he is able to respond with a class of
relationships among classes of objects and events. When a learner shows that he
can sort cards marked X
into a bin marked A, and cards marked Y into a bin
marked B, this is insufficient evidence that his behavior is "rule governed." (He
may simply be exhibiting learning of the concrete concepts X
and Y.) But
suppose he has learned to put each X
card into any bin two positions away from
his last choice and each Y card one position away from his last choice. In that
case, he has learned a rule. He is responding to classes of objects (X and Y cards)
with classes of relationships (one position away, two positions away). His
behavior cannot be described in terms of a particular relation between the
stimulus (the card) and his sorting response to a bin.
62 Principles of Instructional Design

There many common examples of rule-governed behavior. In fact, most

are
behavior of human beings falls into this category. When we make a sentence
using a given word such as girl, as in 'The girl rode a bicycle," we are using a
number of rules. For example, we begin the sentence with The, not wither/,
employing a rule for the use of the definite article. The subject of the sentence is

followed with a predicate, a verb coming next in order —that is, we say 'The girl
rode" and not "Rode the girl." The verb is followed in turn by the object bicycle,

which, according to one rule, is placed in a particular order, and according to

another, it is preceded (in this case) by the indefinite article a. Finally, we

complete the sentence by bringing it to a close, which in written form involves a

rule for the use of a period. Since we have acquired each of these rules, we are
able to construct any sentence of the same structure, with any given words as
subject and object.
Principles learned in science courses are exhibited by the learner as rule-using
behavior. For example, we expect students who E=I have learned Ohm's law,
x R, embodied in this statement. A question like the following
to apply the rule
may be asked: "Assuming that an electric circuit has a resistance of 12 ohms, if
the current is increased from 20 amps to 30 amps, what change is required in the
voltage?"
Obviously, possessing the capability called a rule does not mean being able to
state it verbally. The student who can state 'Voltage equals current multiplied by
resistance" cannot necessarily apply the rule to a specific concrete problem. The
child performs the behavior of constructing oral sentences long before learning
grammatical rules. The observer of learning behavior may have to "state the
rule" being learned, in explanation of what
being talked about. There are
is

many instances, however, in which learners are quite unable to state a rule, even
though their performance indicates that they "know" it.

Now that we have indicated what a rule is, we can admit that a defined
concept, as previously described, is actually not formally different from a rule

and is learned in much same way. In other words, a defined concept is a

the
particular type of rule whose purpose it is to classify objects and events; it is a
classifying rule. Rules, however, include many other categories besides classify-

ing. They deal with such relationships as equal to, similar to, greater than, less
than, before, after, and many others.

Performance

The rule is demonstrated by showing that it applies to one or more concrete

instances. Examples: (1) The rule relating electrical resistance to cross-sectional
area of a conductor can be demonstrated by the decrease in ohms when wire of
larger diameter is governing the case
selected for an electric circuit. (2) The rule
of pronouns following prepositions can be demonstrated by a correct choice of
pronoun in completing the sentence: 'The secret was strictly between (she) (her)
and (I) (me)." (3) The rule for multiplying fractions can be shown by applica-
tion to an example such as x %. %
 Varieties of Learning 63

Internal Conditions

In learning a rule, the learner must retrieve each of the component concepts of
the rule, including the concepts that represent relations. The instructor needs to
assume that these concepts have been previously learned and can readily be
Recalled. In the example of resistance of a wire conductor, the learner must be able to
retrieve such concepts as "cross-section," "area," "conductor," and "decrease."

External Conditions

Usually, the external conditions for learning rules involve the use of verbal
communications. The rule may be communicated to the learner verbally,
although not necessarily in a precise manner. The purpose of such verbal
statements is to cue the arrangement of concepts in a correct order bv the
learner. They are not to teach the learner a formal verbal proposition represent-
ing the rule. Suppose, for example, a teacher intends to impart a particular rule
in the decoding of printed words (the rule for pronouncing words having
consonants followed by a final e) The teacher may say, "Notice that the letter a
.

has a long sound when followed by a consonant in a word that ends in e This . is

true in words that you know like made, pale, fate. When the word does not end
in e, the letter a has a short sound, as in mad, pal, fat. Now, tell me how to

pronounce the following words: dade, pate, kale.''''

The basic reasons for the verbal communication are ( 1 ) to remind the learner
of component concepts to be recalled (such as "long vowel sounds," "con-
sonants"); and (2) to get the learner to arrange component concepts in the
n
proper order (that is, "consonant followed by final e, not 'Vowel followed by
final consonant," nor 'Vowel followed by final e," nor "consonant followed by
final vowel," nor any other incorrect ordering).
It is evident that the verbal communication used in rule learning may be more

or less lengthy. Accordingly, more or less of the actual rule construction may be
left up to the learner. Another way to say this is that the external conditions for
instruction in a rule may provide different amounts oi learning guidance. When
minimal amounts of learning guidance are provided, instruction is said to
emphasize discovery on the part of the learner (Bruner, 1961; Shulman and
Keislar, 1966). Conversely, discover)' is deemphasized when the amount of
learning guidance provided is large, as tends to be true in more detailed verbal
communications. Studies of "discover}' learning" suggest that small amounts of
learning guidance have advantages for retention and transfer of the rules that are
learned (cf. Worthen, 1968). Often, techniques to bring about learning by
discovery incorporate the use of pointed questioning of the learner. These
questions lead to the discover)' of proper ordering of component concepts.

Higher-Order Rules -Problem Solving

Sometimes, the rules we learn are complex combinations of simpler rules.

Moreover, it is often the case that these more complex, or "higher-order," rules
64 Principles of Instructional Design

are invented for the purpose of solving a practical problem or class of problems.
The capabilityof problem solving is, naturally, a major aim of the educational
—
process most educators agree that the school should give priority to teaching
students "how to think clearly." When students work out the solution to a
problem that represents real events, they are engaging in the behavior of
thinking. There are, of course, many kinds of problems, and an even greater
number of possible solutions to them. In attaining a workable solution to a
problem, students also achieve a new capability. They learn something that can
be generalized to other problems having similar formal characteristics. This
means they have acquired a new rule or perhaps a new set of rules.
Suppose that a small car has been parked near a low brick fence and is
discovered to have a flat tire on one of its front wheels. No jack is available, but
there is a ten-foot two-by-four and a piece of sturdy rope. Can the front of the
car be raised? In this situation, a possible solution might be found by using the
two-by-four as a lever, the wall as a fulcrum, and the rope to secure the end of
the lever when
the car is in a raised position. This solution is invented to meet a
particular problem situation. It is evident that the solution represents a "putting
together" of certain rules that may not have been applied to previous similar
situations by the individual who is solving the problem. One rule pertains to the
application offeree on an end of the car to achieve a lifting of that end. Another
rule pertains to the use of the wall as a fulcrum that will bear an estimated
weight. And still another, of course, is the rule regarding use of the two-by-four
as a lever. All of these rules, in order to be used in an act of problem solving,
must be recalled by the individual, which means they must have been previously
learned. (Note once again that the rules to which we refer cannot necessarily be
verbalized by the problem solver, nor have they necessarily been learned in a
physics course.) These previously acquired rules are then brought together by
the individual to achieve the solution to the problem. And once the problem is
solved, the individual has learned a new rule, more complex than those used in
combination. The newly learned rule will be stored in the memory and used
again to solve other problems.
The invention of a complex rule can be illustrated with a problem in mathe-
2
Suppose a student has learned to add monomials such as 2x and 5x, Zx
matics.
32 3
and 4X 2x and 6x
, Now he is shown
. a set of polynomials, such as:

2
2x + Zx + 1
2 + Sx + 4X2 .

The student is asked, "What do you suppose is thesum of these two ex-
pressions?" This question asks for the solution of a new problem, which (we
assume) has not been previously encountered. Possibly, the student may make
some false starts that could be corrected. The chances are, however, that pre-
viously learned subordinate rules will permit her to think out the solution to this
2
problem (for example, the rule that the variable « added to the variable a results
 Varieties of Learning 65

in the sum a + a2 , adding monomials, such as 2a 2 + 3a 2 = So2

also the rule for .

It is probably not a problem for the student, therefore, to devise the

difficult
complex rule: Add variables with the same exponents; express the sum as a set of
terms connected by the + sign. Again, in this example, the problem solver has
remembered and "combined" simpler rules into a more complex rule to solve the
* problem.
The essential condition that makes
of learning a problem-solving
this sort
event is the absence of any learning guidance, whether in the
form of a verbal
communication or in some other form. The solution has been "discovered," or
invented. The learning guidance is provided by the problem solver alone, not by
a teacher or other external source. One may guess that some problem-solving
strategies, learned in quite different situations, are probably brought to bear. But
in any case, relevant rules are recalled and combined to form a new higher-order
rule.

Rules play an essential role in problem solving. It is impossible for a learner to

acquire all the rules needed for every situation. Concepts and rules must be
synthesized into new complex forms for the learner to cope with new problem
situations. Problem solving for a particular class of tasks is facilitated by adding
to a student's repertoire of intellectual skills relevant to those tasks. Problem
solving should be thought of as a human activity that combines previously
acquired concepts and rules and not as a generic skill. The ability to solve
problems mathematics does not automatically transfer to solving the mechan-
in
ical problems of an automobile.

Performance
Performance requires the invention and use of a complex rule to achieve the
solution of a problem novel to the individual. When the higher-order rule has
been acquired, it should also be possible for the learner to demonstrate its use in
other physically different but formally similar situations. In other words, the
new complex rule exhibits transfer of learning. Here are two examples of higher-
order rules developed in problem-solving situations: (1) to create a potting soil
mixture for greenhouse plants in a region having average humidity of 65 percent
requires the combining of component rules about soil components, plant nutri-
ents, and evaporation times; (2) in the absence of a conversion chart, the
problem of determining proper proportions for a substitute sweetener in a
recipe calling for sugar may require retrieval and combining of previously
learned rules about "sweetness quotients" in the combining of specific in-
gredients.

Internal Conditions

In solving a problem, the learner must retrieve relevant subordinate rules and
relevant information. It is assumed that these capabilities have been previously
learned.
66 Principles of Instructional Design

External Conditions

The learner is confronted with an actual or a represented problem situation not

previously encountered. Cues in the form of verbal communication are at a
minimum or may be absent entirely. In general, learners engage in discovery
learnings; they invent solutions that embodv a higher-order rule.

COGNITIVE STRATEGIES

A very special kind of intellectual skill, of particular importance to learning and

thinking, is the cognitive strategy In terms of modern learning theory, a cognitive
.

strategy is by which learners select and

a control process, an internal process
modify ways of attending, learning, remembering, and thinking (Gagne,
their
1985). Several of Bruner's writings (1961, 1971) describe the operation and
usefulness of cognitive strategies in problem solving. More recendy, many
different strategies have been identified that relate to the entire range of cogni-
tive processes of the learner (O'Neil and Spielberger, 1979).

Varieties of Learner Strategies

Although specific strategies may be used by the learner in dealing with all

conceivable kinds of learning tasks, it is convenient to classify them into a few

categories that indicate their control functions. The following categories are
suggested by Weinstein and Mayer (1986).

Rehearsal Strategies

By means of these strategies, learners conduct their own practice of the material
being learned. In simplest form, the practice is simply repeating to themselves
the names of items in an ordered list (for instance, the U.S. presidents or the
states). In the case of more complex learning tasks, such as learning the main
ideas of a printed text, rehearsal may be accomplished by underlining the main
ideas or by copying portions of the text.

Elaboration Strategies

In using the techniques of elaboration, the learner deliberately associates the

item to be learned with other readily accessible material. In learning foreign-
language vocabulary, for example, the foreign word may be associated with a
mental image of an English word that forms an "acoustic link" with the word
having the correct meaning (Atkinson, 1975; Levin, 1981). When applied to
learning from prose texts, elaboration activities include paraphrasing, summariz-
ing, note taking, and generating questions with answers.
 Varieties of Learning 67

Organizing Strategies

Arranging material to be learned into an organized framework is the basic

technique of these strategies. Sets of words to be remembered may be arranged
by the learner into meaningful categories. Relations among facts may be orga-
nized into a table, making possible the use of spatial arrangement cues to recall
the material. Outlining the main ideas in prose passages and generating new
organizations for the ideas is another method. Learners are able to acquire
strategies that organize passages of text into several particular kinds of relations
among ideas, such as "comparison," "collection," and "description" (Mever,
1981).

Comprehension Monitoring Strategies

These strategies, sometimes referred to as metocognitive strategies (Brown,

1978), pertain to the student's capability of setting goals for learning, estimating
the success with which the goals are being met, and selecting alternative strat-
egies to meet the goals. These are strategies having the function of monitoring,
the presence of which becomes evident in reading for understanding (Golinkoff,
1976). Students have been taught to develop their own statements and ques-
and controlling their performance
tions to be used in guiding in the comprehen-
sion of prose (Meichenbaum and Asarnow, 1979).

Affective Strategies

These techniques may be used by learners to focus and maintain attention, to

control anxiety, and to manage time effectively. Such strategies can be taught by
making students aware of their operation and providing ways for them to
practice their use (Dansereau, 1985; McCombs, 1982).

Other Organizational Systems

West, Farmer, and Wolff (1991) organize cognitive strategies into families
including chunking, spatial, bridging, and multipurpose. Each of these broad
categories includes subclasses of cognitive strategies. For example, under the
multipurpose category are rehearsal and mnemonic strategies. In turn, each
subclass contains one or more specific strategies, for example, mnemonic strat-
egies include key word, chain, and loci. Altogether these authors identify and
categorize over 28 different strategies that have been the subject of research
studies.
One might speculate that cognitive strategies serve particular functions dur-
ing the process of information processing. Table 4-1 lists stages of the in-
formation-processing model presented in Chapter 1 in the left column, and
strategies that may support each of those stages in the right column. For
68 Principles of Instructional Design

Table 4-1 Functions of Cognitive Strategies in Support

of Stages of Information Processing

Learning Processes Supportive Strategies

Selective Perception Highlighting

Underlining

Advance organizers
Adjunct questions

Outlining

Rehearsal Paraphrasing

Note taking
Imagery
Outlining

Chunking
Semantic Encoding Concept maps
Taxonomies
Analogies

Rules/Productions

Schemas
Retneval Mnemonics
Imagery
Executive Control Metacognitive strategies

(see goal schemas, Chapter 9)

example, selective perception for a verbal learning task may be focused by

underlining or highlighting important words. Selective perception for in-
mav be facilitated by creating an expectation about the
tellectual skills tasks
outcomes of the learning task. This expectation may be accomplished through
the use of outlining, adjunct questions, or advance organizers.
Strategies may support other stages of information processing. We know, for
instance, that information is lost from short-term memory unless it is rehearsed.
We also know that the capacitv of short-term memory is limited to approximate-
ly seven separate items. It would seem that the strategies of imagery and
paraphrasing might serve a rehearsal function. The strategy' of outlining may
serve both functions of selective perception and rehearsal. Chunking strategies
may also be employed to reduce the number of separate items held in short-term
memory by organizing them into more general categories.
Semantic encoding is the process involved in moving information from
short-term to long-term memory. This process involves making the information
meaningful by tying it to previously learned information structures (schemas) or
establishing new structures. Linkages of this sort would seem to be facilitated
through the use of concept maps whereby the learner is enabled to see the
structure of the material to be learned. Concept maps may be especially helpful
where the existing structure is weak or nonexistent. Analogies, on the other
hand, are only likely to work by linking new information with existing struc-
 Varieties of Learning 69

tures. Still another aid to encoding may be schemas in the form of stories that
provide an elaborated context for the new information to be learned.
Retrieval is the process of moving information from long-term to short-term
memory. While in short-term memorv, it may be combined with newly per-
ceived information to bring about new kinds of learning. It then raav be acted
on or reencoded and returned to long-term memorv. It is likely that the
mnemonics and imager)' support the retrieval process.
Executive control processes include metacognitive strategies. These are pro-
cesses that activate and modulate the flow of information during learning. These
strategies probably govern the learner's selection of cognitive strategies in an
unstructured learning environment. Think- aloud protocols have been used to
determine what learners do during the process of solving problems. What they
do depends upon their expectancies or goals and upon strategies thev have used
in the past to achieve these goals. The particular strategies that will be selected
are governed by goal schemas (Gagne and Merrill, 1990). For example, if a
student is going to study for a test (taking the test would be the goal), he will
probably use a different strategy than if he were preparing to teach a skill
(teaching would be the goal). Goal schemas and integrated goals are discussed
more fully in Chapter 9.
We consider cognitive strategies as learned capabilities that are the outcomes
of instruction. One might consider cognitive strategies as instructional tech-
niques for use in designing instruction, especiallv with regard to presenting
stimulus materials to the learner. As previously noted, there are a number of
different strategies which seem more or less appropriate at different stages in the
instructional process. Embedding the strategies into the instructional materials
is not the same as teaching the strategies. The embedded strategies serve a
specific function, whereas the learned strategies allow the students to provide
this function for themselves. However, it mav be necessary to have the students
apply the strategies within a content area in order to learn them. For example,
consider outlining as a cognitive strategy. Outlining probably serves the func-
tion of providing a selective focus and of structuring main and subordinate
relationships in textual discourse. Students who must construct an outline of a
text are probably learning something different from students who study the text
using a prepared outline. But what are thev learning? What test would show the
acquired differences? Do students who construct the outline become better at
outlining? Are thev better able to differentiate between superordinate and
subordinate concepts? Do thev applv the skill across subjects as a learning
strategy? These and similar questions require answers from empirical research.
It is possible for designers to view the use of cognitive strategies in materials

as helpful to the learner because they serve a supplemental or redundant func-

tion in some phase of the learning process. However, if the goal is to teach the
learner cognitive strategies (as outcomes) designers must take account of the
conditions necessary for learning these skills, just as they would with any other
type of learning outcome.
70 Principles of Instructional Design

Learning Cognitive Strategies

A cognitive strategy is a cognitive skill that selects and guides the internal
processes involved in learning and thinking. Notice that it is the object of the skill

that differentiates cognitive strategies from other intellectual skills. The latter,

concepts and rules, are oriented toward environmental objects and events, such
as sentences, graphs, or mathematical equations. In contrast, cognitive strategies
have as own cognitive processes. Undoubtedly, the
their objects the learner's
efficacy of an individual's cognitive strategies has a crucial effect upon the
quality of information processing. A learner's cognitive strategies may de-
termine, for example, how readily he. learns, how well he recalls and uses what
has been learned, and how fluently he thinks.
Statements of educational goals often give the highest priority to cognitive
strategies. Many statements of goals for school learning give a prominent place
to "teaching students how to think." Although it would be difficult to find
disagreement with the importance of such a goal, it seems wise to temper one's
enthusiasm with a few facts concerning the feasibility of reaching it. First, one
should realize that genetic factors, not amenable to the influence of education,
are likely to play an important part in the determination of creative thought (cf.
Tyler, 1965; Ausubel, Novak, and Hanesian, 1978, Chap. 16). In other words,
there are bound to be enormous differences in intellectual capacity among
people, which can never be completely overcome by environmental influences
such as education. Second, the internally organized nature of cognitive strat-

egies means that the conditions of instruction can have onlv an indirect effect
upon their acquisitionand improvement. In the case of other types of in-
one can plan a sequence of learning events so as to increase the
tellectual skills,
probability of certain internal events; and these in turn determine the learning of
the cognitive strategy. Accordingly, the design of instruction for cognitive
strategies has to be done in terms of "favorable conditions." Generally, the
favorable conditions are those xh^x. provide opportunities for development and use of
cognitive strategies. In other words, to "learn to think," the student needs to be
given opportunities to think.
Deny and Murphy (1986) describe a system of learning-strategies training
that begins with direct instruction of such strategies as reading comprehension
monitoring, problem solving, and control of affect. Following the initial train-

ing, the same of learning situations over an

strategies are practiced in a variety
extended period, using distinctive cues that remind the learner in each instance
of an appropriate useful strategy. The method thus incorporates the idea of
spaced and varied practice, which is considered to be desirable for the learning
of these higher-order strategies.

Performance
The performance of cognitive strategies cannot be observed directly but must be
inferred from performances calling for the use of other intellectual skills. In-
 Varieties of Learning 71

vestigators usually discover strategies bv asking learners to "think aloud" while

they are learning, remembering, or solving problems (Ericsson and Simon,
1980). However, inferences about the quality of reading comprehension reveal
the use of comprehension strategies; inferences about the quality of learning
new rules of trigonometry (for example) reveal the use of organizing strategies;
and inferences about the quality of problem solving reveal the use of thinking
strategies.

Internal Conditions

Prior knowledge (that is, intellectual skillsand verbal information) relevant to

the subject matter to be learned or thought about must be retrievable, just as is
true for other intellectual skills. However, it should be noted that cognitive
strategies often intrinsically possess a simple structure (for example, "underline
main ideas," "divide the problem into parts").

External Conditions

Strategies may often be suggested to learners by verbal communications or

demonstrated to them in simple form. Even young children, for example, can
respond appropriately to the suggestion that they use an organizing strategy like
classifying lists of words into meaningful categories. In other instances, cogni-
from learning by discovery. Favorable conditions always
tive strategies result
depend upon the provision of opportunities for practice.

METACOGNITION

The internal processing that makes use of cognitive strategies to monitor and
control other learning and memory processes is known generally as metacogni-
tion (Flavell, 1979). In confronting problems to be solved, learners are able to
select and regulate the employment of relevant intellectual skills and bring to
bear task-oriented cognitive strategies. Such metacognitive strategies, which gov-
ern the use of other strategies, are also spoken of as "executive" or "higher level."
Learners may also become aware of such strategies and may be able to describe
them, in which case they are said to possess metacognitive knowledge (Lohman,
1986). Planning models for direct training in metacognitive knowledge are
involved in many schemes for study skills and general problem solving.
Broadly speaking, there are two different viewpoints about the origins of
metacognitive strategies (Derrv and Murphy, 1986). One is that they may be
acquired by learners through the communication of metacognitive knowledge
(that is, by verbal information) followed by practice in their use. This approach
is exemplified by courses in problem-solving strategies, such as that described bv

Rubinstein (1975). The second view proposes that metacognitive strategies

arise from the generalization of a number of specific task-oriented strategies,
72 Principles of Instructional Design

by the learn-
usually after a considerable variety of problem-solving experiences
er. This view appears to be supported by the weight of evidence (Derry
latter

and Murphy, 1986), and we have therefore adopted it in our discussion.

Strategies for Problem Solving

Often, of particular interest in instructional design are those cognitive strategies

called into play when the learner defines and thinks out a solution to a highly
novel problem. Although such strategies are often of primary interest in educa-
tional programs, our knowledge of how to ensure their learning is weakest
(Gagne, 1980; Poison and Jeffries, 1985). A number of strategies employed by
adults in solving verbally stated problems are described by Wickelgren (1974).
These include (1) of the "givens," (2)
inferring transformed conceptions
classifying action sequences rather than randomly choosing them, (3) choosing
actions at any given state of the problem that get closer to the goal ("hill
climbing"), (4) identifying contradictions that prove the goal cannot be attained
from the givens, (5) breaking the problem into parts, and (6) working backward
from the goal statement. Strategies like these are obviously applicable to "brain
teaser" problems of an algebraic or geometric sort.
Programs designed to teach problem-solving strategies are critically reviewed
by Poison and Jeffries (1985). They point out the existence of three different
models of problem solving that rest upon different assumptions, and are cur-
rendy irreconcilable with each other. Model 1 makes the assumption that
general problem-solving skills (such as those mentioned previously) can be
directly taught and will exhibit generalization to other situations. Model 2
maintains that general problem-solving skills can be taught but not directly.
Instead, general strategies are most likely to develop indirectly by generalization
from task-specific strategies. There is, of course, dependable evidence that the
latter kinds of strategies (such as strategies for solving mechanical problems or
for constructing geometric proofs) can readily be acquired. Model 3 argues that
direct instruction in general problem-solving strategies is effective in establish-
ing only weak strategies that help problem solving very little, even though they

are broadly generalizable ("break the problem into parts" is an example). Con-
sequently, although the strategies viewed by model 3 are teachable, they are not
very useful.
In estimating the value of general problem-solving strategies for an in-
structional program, one should take into consideration the findings of studies
contrasting the capabilities of experts with those of novices, in various fields
(Gagne and Glaser, 1986). In general, these studies indicate that experts do not
necessarily use better problem-solving strategies than do novices but that they
approach problems with larger and better organized knowledge bases. The
organized knowledge of the expert includes verbal information as well as in-
tellectual skills.
 Varieties of Learning 73

VARIETIES OF INTELLECTUAL SKILLS IN SCHOOL SUBJECTS

The range of human skills includes the varieties of

capabilities called intellectual
discriminations, concrete concepts, denned concepts, rules, and the higher-
order rules often acquired in problem solving. An additional category of in-
ternally organized skills is cognitive strategies, which govern the learner's be-
havior in learning and thinking and, thus, determine its quality and efficiency.
These varieties of learning are distinguishable by (1) the class of performance they
make possible, (2) the internal and external conditions necessary for their occur-
rence, and (3) the complexity of the internal process they establish in the in-
dividual's memory.
Any school subject may at one time or another involve any of these types of
learned capabilities. However, the frequency with which they are encountered in
various school subjects varies widely. Examples of discriminations can be found
in such elementary subjects as printing letters and reading music. In contrast,
there are few examples of this tvpe, and many more of defined concepts, in a
history course. However, quite a few examples of discriminations also occur in
the beginning study of a foreign language, which may be undertaken in the
ninth grade. In the same grade, the writing of compositions very frequently
involves denned concepts and rules but seems not to require the learning of
discriminations or concrete concepts. In this case, the necessary learning of these
simpler skills has been accomplished years ago.
Any school subject can be analyzed to reveal the relevance of all of these kinds
of learning. But this is not always a practical course of action because the
presentation of the subject in a particular grade may begin with the assumption
that simpler kinds of learning have already been accomplished. Thus, dis-
crimination of from is certainly relevant to the study of algebra. But one
• •

doesn't begin the study of algebra with the learning of discriminations because it
is possible to assume these discriminations have been previously learned. In

science, however, certain discriminations, such as those involved in using a

microscope or spectrophotometer, may have to be newly acquired. Such simple
skills must be learned before the student can progress to the concepts, rules, and

problem solving that may represent the major aims of the course.
Adult education in technical and professional subjects sometimes exhibits
objectives representing a limited range of intellectual skills, sometimes the entire
range. Personal counseling, for example, partakes of few of the simpler in-
tellectual skills except those involved in reading and the understanding of
language. In contrast, the processing of lumber and wood products requires
training that may need to begin with discriminations of wood textures and
proceed to concrete concepts of wood grain before instruction on the character-
istics and uses of various woods can reach an advanced stage.

Is there, then, a structure of intellectual skills that represents the "path of

greatest learning efficiency" for even' subject in the curriculum? In theory, yes.
Do we know what this structure is? Only vaguely, as yet. After all, teachers,
74 Principles of Instructional Design

curriculum specialists, and textbook writers try to represent structure in their

lesson and curriculum plans. Nevertheless, on the whole their efforts must be
characterized as partial and inadequate. The purpose of this book is to describe a
systematic method for approaching the problem, as free of culs-de-sac as possi-
ble. Suchmethod will also be subject to empirical verification, revision, and
a
refinement. The application of the method to be described can lead to de-
scriptions of the "learning structure" of anv subject taught in the school. This
structure mav be represented as a kind of map of the terrain to be covered in
progressing from one point in human development to anv other point.
The mapping of learning structures does not lead to "routinization" or
"mechanization" of the process of learning. A map indicates starting points,
destinations, and alternative routes in between; it does not tell how to make the
journey. Making the "learning journey" requires a different set of internal events
for each and every individual. In a fundamental sense, there are as manv learning
"styles" as there are individuals. Describing the learning structures for a progres-
sion of objectives within anv school subject does not lead to prescribing how the
individual student must learn. On the contrary, learning structures are simply
descriptions of the accepted goals, or outcomes of learning, together with sub-
ordinate steps along the way.

SUMMARY
Starting with the need to identifv goals as the desired outcomes of the educa-
tional system, Chapter 3 proposed that in attempting to design specific courses,
topics, and lessons, thereis a need to classify performance objectives into broad

categories: intellectualskills, cognitive strategies, verbal information, motor

and attitudes. Doing so, it was shown, facilitates (1) review of the
skills,

adequacy of the objectives, (2) determination of the sequencing of instruction,

and (3) planning for the conditions of learning needed for successful instruc-
tion.
The present chapter has begun the account of the nature of the performance
capabilities implied by each of the five categories of learned capabilities, begin-
ning with intellectual skills and cognitive strategies. For each of these two

domains, this chapter has (1) presented examples of learned performances in

terms of different school subjects, (2) identified the kinds of internal conditions
of learning needed to reach the new capabilitv, and (3) identified the external
conditions affecting its learning.
For intellectual skills, several subcategories were identified: discriminations,
concrete and defined concepts, rules, and the higher-order rules often learned by
problem solving. Each represents a different class of performance, and each is

supported by different sets of internal and external conditions of learning.

Cognitive strategies were not broken down into subcategories as intellectual
skills were. Research in the future mav suggest that this can and should be done.
 Varieties of Learning 75

An important distinction is made between cognitive strategies relating to

specific domains of knowledge (such geometry or poetry) and those that are
as
more general in their relevance. The latter are sometimes called executive or
metacognitive strategies because their function is to govern the use of other
strategies, and they apply generally to information processing independendy of
specific knowledge domains. It may be that metacognitive strategies can be
directly taught; more likely, they are generalized by learners from their experi-
ence with a variety of specific task-oriented strategies.
The next chapter gives a corresponding kind of treatment to the remaining
kinds of learned capabilities: information, attitudes, and motor skills. The
purpose of Chapter 4 and 5 is to move one more step toward specification of an
orderly series of steps to be used in the actual design of instruction for a lesson, a
unit, a course, or an entire instructional system. Specifically, these chapters
identify the appropriate internal and external conditions of learning for each
kind of learned capability. They lead to suggestions of how to proceed with two
aspects of instructional design: (1)how to take account of the prior learning
assumed to be necessary for the learner to undertake the new learning, and (2)
how to plan for the new learning in terms of the appropriate external conditions
needed for the attainment of each type of learning outcome. In later chapters,
these conditions will be translated into guidelines for instructional planning.

References

Atkinson, R. C. (1975). Mnemotechnics in second language learning. American Psycholo-

gist, 30, 821-828.

Ausubel, D. P., Novak, J. D., & Hanesian, H. (1978). Educational psychology: A cognitive
view (2nd ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
Brown, A. L. (1978). Metacognitive development and reading. In R. J. Spiro, B. C.
Bruce, & G. W. F. Brewer (Eds.), Theoretical issues in reading comprehension. Hillsdale,
NJ: Erlbaum.
Bruner, J. S. (1961). The act of discover}'. Harvard Educational Review, 31, 21-32.
Bruner, J. S. (1971). The relevance of education. New York: Norton.
Dansereau, D. F. (1985). Learning strategy research. In ]. Segal, S. Chipman, & R.
Glaser (Eds.), Thinking and learning skills (Vol. 1). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Deny, S. J., &
Murphy, D. A. (1986). Designing systems that train learning ability:
From theory to practice. Review of Educational Research, 56, 1-39.
Ericsson, K. A., &
Simon, H. A. (1980). Verbal reports as data. Psychological Review, 87,
215-251.
Flavell, J. H. (1979). Metacognition and cognitive monitoring: A new area of psycho-
logical inquiry. American Psychologist, 34, 906-911.
Gagne, R. M. (1980). Learnable aspects of problem solving. Educational Psychologist,

15(2), 84-92.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions of learning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart
and Winston.
76 Principles of Instructional Design

Gagne, R. M., & Glaser, R. (1986). Foundations in research and theory. In R. M. Gagne
(Ed.), Instructional technology: Foundations. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Gagne, R. M. & Merrill, M. D. (1990). Integrative goals for instructional design.
Educational Technology Research and Development, 35(1), 23-30.
A
Golinkoff, R. A. (1976). good and
comparison of reading comprehension processes in
poor comprehenders. Reading Research Quarterly, 11, 623-659.
Levin, J. R. (1981). The mnemonic '80s: Keywords in the classroom. Educational
Psychologist, 16(2), 65-82.
Lohman, D. F. (1986). Predicting mathemathanic effects in the teaching of higher-order
thinking skills. Educational Psychologist, 21, 191-208.
McCombs, B. L. (1982). Transitioning learning strategies research into practice: Focus
on the student in technical training. Journal ofInstructional Development, 5(2), 10-17.
Meichenbaum, D., & Asarnow, J. (1979). Cognitive-behavior modification and meta-
cognitive development: Implications for the classroom. In P. C. Kendall & S. D.
Hollon (Eds.), Cognitive-behavioral intervention: Theory, research and procedures. New
York: Academic Press.
Meyer, B. J. F. (1981). Basic research on prose comprehension: A critical review. In D.
F. Fisher & C. W. Peters (Eds.), Comprehension and the competent reader. New York:
Praeger.
O'Neil, H. G., Jr., & Spielberger, C. D. (Eds.). (1979). Cognitive and affective learning
strategies. New York: Academic Press.
Piaget, J. (1950). The psychology of intelligence. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Jovanovich.
Poison, P. G., & Jeffries,
R. (1985). Instruction in general problem-solving skills: An
analysis of four approaches. In J. Segal, S. Chipman, &
R. Glaser (Eds.), Thinking and
learning skills (Vol. 1). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Rubinstein, M. F. (1975). Patterns of problem solving. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall.
Shulman, L. S., & Keislar, E. R. (1966). Learning by discovery: A critical appraisal.

Chicago: Rand McNally.

Tyler, L. E. (1965). The psychology of human differences (3rd ed.). New York: Appleton.
Weinstein, C. E., & Maver, R. E. (1986). The teaching of learning strategies. In M. C.
Wittrock (Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed.). New York: Macmillan.
West, E. K., Farmer, J. A., &
Wolff, P. M. (1991) Instructional Design: Implications from
cognitive science. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Wickelgren, W. A. (1974). How to solve problems. San Francisco: Freeman.
Worthen, B. R. (1968). Discovery and expositor}' task presentation in elementary
mathematics. Journal of Educational Psychology, Monograph Supplement, 59(1), Part 2.
 Varieties of Learning
5
Information, Attitudes, and
Motor Skills

in this chapter, we need to continue our description of

the varieties of human capabilities that may be learned. Courses and lessons are,
of course, not always aimed at developing intellectual skills or cognitive strat-
egies, as discussed in the previous chapter. Furthermore, a topic, course of
study, or even an individual lesson may have more than one class of objective as
a learning outcome. Instruction is typically designed to encompass several
objectives in any given unit of instruction and to achieve a suitable balance
among them.
We shall be describing here the conditions applicable to these outcomes: the
learning of verbal information, the establishment or changing of attitudes, and
the acquisition of motor skills. These three outcomes of learning are obviously
very different from each other and of differing importance within particular
instructional programs. For each of them, as in the previous chapter, we need to
consider three aspects of the learning situation:

1. The performance to be acquired as a result of learning

2. The internal conditions that need to be present for learning to occur
3. The external conditions that bring essential stimulation to bear upon the learner

VERBAL INFORMATION (KNOWLEDGE)

Verbal information is also called verbal knowledge; according to theory, it is

stored as networks of propositions (Anderson, 1985; E. D. Gagne, 1985) that

77
78 Principles of Instructional Design

conform to the rules of language. Another name for it, intended to emphasize
the performance capability it implies, is declarative knowledge.
A great deal of information is learned and stored in memory as a result of
school instruction. Of course, an enormous amount is acquired outside of
school as well, from the reading of books, magazines, newspapers, and by way
of radio and television programs. From this very fact, it is apparent that special
means of instruction do not have to be provided for a large amount of learning
to occur. The communications provided by the various media bring about
learning in many people, provided of course that those who hear or see or read
these communications possess the basic intellectual skills for interpreting them.
In school learning, however, there are many circumstances in which one
desires greater certainty of learning than can ordinarily be expected from various
extraschool communications. The literate individual may gain much informa-
tion from a radio lecture on modern developments in chemistry. The amount of
information learned by this means may van gready among different individuals,
r

depending on their interests and previous experience. A formally planned course

in chemistry, in contrast, may have the aim of teaching all students certain
information deemed essential for further study of the subject, such as the names
of elements, the physical states of matter, and so on. Similarly, the purpose of a
course in U.S. government may be to teach all students the content of the
articles of the Constitution. Planned instruction in school subjects is undertaken

because of this need for certainty of learning particular bodies of information.

Two primary reasons exist for desiring a high degree of certainty in the
learning of information. As previously mentioned, particular information may
be needed for a learner to continue learning a topic or subject. Of course, some
of the necessary detailed information may be looked up in a book or other
source. A great deal of it, however, may need to be recalled and used again and
again in pursuing stud}' within a subject. Thus, there is typically a body of
information that is basic in the sense that future learning will be more efficiently
conducted if it is acquired and retained.
A second reason for learning information is that much of it may be con-
tinually useful to the individual throughout life. All people need to know the
names of letters, numerals, common objects, and a host of facts about them-
selves and their environment in order to receive and give communications. A
great deal of such factual information is acquired informally without any formal
planning. In addition, an individual mav acquire unusual quantities of factual
information in one or more areas of particular interest (a mass of facts about
flowers or automobiles or the game of baseball). The problem faced in design-
ing school curricula in any area is one of distinguishing between information
that is more or less essential. Some may be used by the individual for com-
munication throughout his lifetime. Other information may be personally in-
teresting but not essential. The former category is one for which the standard of
certainty of learning becomes the concern of formal education. There seems to
be no reason to limit the information a person wishes to learn because of
particular interests or desire for further learning.
 Varieties of Learning 79

When information is organized into bodies of meaningfully interconnected

facts and generalizations, it is usually referred to as knowledge. Obviously, the
information possessed by individuals within their own particular field of work
or study is usually organized as a body of knowledge. Thus, we expect a chemist,
for example, to have learned and stored a specialized body of knowledge about
chemistry; and similarly, we expect a cabinetmaker to possess a body of knowl-
edge about woods and joints and tools. Besides these masses of specialized
knowledge, one must face the question of whether there is a value to acquiring
knowledge that may be called general. It may be noted that most, if not all,
human societies have answered this question affirmatively. In one way or
another, means have been found to pass on the accumulated knowledge of the
society from one generation to the next. Information about the origins of the
society, tribe, or nation, its development through time, its goals and values, its
place in the world, is usuallv considered a body of knowledge desirable for
inclusion in the education of each individual.
In the past within our ownsociety, there was a body of general knowledge,
fairly well agreed upon, thatwas considered desirable for the "educated class"
(those who went to college) to learn. It was composed of historical information
about Western culture extending back to early Greek civilization, along with
related information from literature and the arts. As mass education progressively
replaced class education, there was for a while an accompanying reduction in the
amount of general cultural knowledge considered desirable for all students to
learn. More recently, however, the "back-to-basics" movement has revived
interest in the learning of general cultural information as a contributor to
societal stability.
What function does general cultural knowledge serve in the life of the in-

dividual? Evidently, such knowledge serves the purpose of communication,

particularlv in those aspects of life pertaining to citizenship. Knowing the facts
about the community, the state, and the nation and the services they provide, as
well as the responsibilities owed them, enables the individual to participate as a
citizen. Cultural and historical knowledge may also contribute to the achieve-
ment and maintenance of the individual's "identity" or sense of self- awareness of
his origins in relation to those of the society to which he belongs.
A much more critical function of general knowledge can be proposed,
although evidence concerning it is incomplete. This is the notion that knowl-
edge is the vehicle for thought and problem solving. In the previous chapter, we
saw that thinking in the sense of problem solving requires certain prerequisite
intellectual skills as well as cognitive strategies. These are the tools individuals
possess that enable them to think clearly and precisely. How does one think
broadly? How can a scientist, for example, think about the social problem of the
isolation of aged people? Or how can a poet capture in words the essential
conflict of youthful rebellion and alienation? It is probable that these individuals
need to possess bodies of knowledge shared by many other people to solve these
problems. The thinking that takes place is "carried" by the associations,
metaphors, and analogies of language within these bodies of knowledge. The
80 Principles of Instructional Design

importance of a "knowledge background" for creative thought has been dis-

cussed bv many writers, including Polanvi (1958), and more recentiv bv Glaser
(1984).
In summary, it is number of important reasons can be identified
evident that a
for the learning of information, whether this is conceived as facts, generaliza-
tions, or as organized bodies of meaningful knowledge. Factual information is
needed in learning the increasingly complex intellectual skills of a subject or
discipline. Such information may in part be looked up but is often more
conveniendy stored in memorv. Certain types and categories of factual informa-
tion must be learned because it is necessary for communication pertaining to the
affairs of everyday living. Information is often learned and remembered as

organized bodies of knowledge. Specialized knowledge of this sort may be

accumulated by the individual learner while pursuing a field of study or work.
General knowledge, particularly that which reflects the cultural heritage, is often
considered desirable or even essential in making possible the communications
necessary for functioning as a citizen of a community or nation. In addition,
however, it seems likely that such bodies of general knowledge become the
carrier of thought for the human being engaged in reflective thinking and
problem solving.

THE LEARNING OF VERBAL INFORMATION

Verbal information may be presented to the learners in various ways. It may be

delivered to their ears in theform of oral communications or to their eyes in the
form of printed words and illustrations. There are many interesting research
questions relating to the effectiveness of communication media (Bretz, 1971;
Clark and Salomon, 1986), and some of their implications for instructional
design will be discussed in a later chapter. At this point, however, we attend to a
different set of dimensions, which cut across those of communication media.
Verbal information presented for learning may vary in amount and in organ-
ization. Some variations along these dimensions appear to be more important
than others for the design of instruction. From this point of view, it seems
desirable to distinguish three kinds of learning situations. The first concerns the
A second pertains to the learning of isolated or single
learning of labels or names.
which may or may not be parts of larger meaningful communications. The
facts,
third is the learning of organized information. The latter two types are often
referred to as declarative knowledge.

Learning Labels

To learn a label simply means to acquire the capability of making a consistent

verbal response to an object or object class in such a way that it is "named." The
 Varieties of Learning 81

verbal response itself may be of almost any variety

—"* - 1," "petunia," "pocket
dictionary," or "spectrophotometer." Information in this form is simply a short
verbal chain. Reference to the substantial body of research on the learning of
verbal paired associates mav be found in manv texts (for example, Hulse, Egeth,
and Deese, 1980; Kausler, 1974).
Learning the name of an object in the sense of a label is quite distinct from
learning the meaning of that name. The latter phrase implies the acquisition of a
concept, which has been described previouslv. Teachers are well acquainted with
the distinction between "knowing the name of something" and "knowing what
the name means." A student knows a label when he can simply supply the name
of a specific object. To know that object as a concept (that is, know its
meaning), he or she must be able to identify examples and nonexamples that
serve to define and delimit the class.
In practice, a name for a concept is often learned at the time the concept itself
is learned or just prior to that time. Although the task of name learning may be

easy for one or two objects at a time, difficultv increases rapidly when several
different names for several objects or many names for many objects must be
learned at once. Such a situation arises in school learning when students are
asked to acquire the names of a set of trees, a set of leaves, or the set of members
in a president's cabinet. Students engaged in such tasks may accurately be said to
be memorizing the names, but there is scarcely harm in that, and students often
enjoy doing it. In any case, label learning is a highly useful activity. Among its
other uses, it establishes the basis for communication between the learner and
the teacher or between the learner and a textbook.
Learning of sets of names can often be aided by the use of mnemonic tech-
niques, most of which have been known for many years. In associating words in
pairs, such as car —wolf, the learner may be encouraged to make up a sentence,
'The car chased the wolf,'''' and to treat each pair similarly with other sentences.
This strategy usually brings about remarkable improvements in paired associate
learning (Rohwer, 1970). The learning of foreign-language vocabulary is an-
other example of a task in which mnemonic techniques can be put to good use
(Pressley, Levin, and Delaney, 1982). The strategy called the keyword method
involves the use of learner-generated images to cue the retrieval of English
equivalents to foreign words. For example, for the Spanish word carta, the
keyword cart can be used as part of an image serving as a link: 'The cart was
used to deliver the letter.'"

Learning Facts

A fact is a verbal statement that expresses a relation between two or more named
objects or events.An example is, 'The book has a blue cover." In normal
communication, the relation expressed by the fact is assumed to exist in the
natural world. Thus, the words that made up the fact have referents in the
environment of the learner. The words refer to those objects and to the relation
82 Principles of Instructional Design

between them. In the example given, the objects are book and blue cover, and the
relation is has. It is of some importance to emphasize that a fact, as employed
here, is defined as the verbal statement and not the referent or referents to which
it refers. (Alternative meanings of a common word hkefact may readily be found

in other contexts.)
Students learn a host of facts in connection with their studies in school. Some
of these are isolated in the sense of being unrelated to other facts or bodies of
information. Others form a part of a connected set, related to each other in
various ways. For example, children may learn the fact "the town siren is
sounded at noontime," and this may be a fairly isolated fact that is well
remembered, even though not directly related to other information. Isolated
facts may be learned and remembered for no apparent reasons; in studying
history, a student and remember that Charles G. Dawes served as vice
may learn
president in the administration of Calvin Coolidge and at the same time learn
the names of other vice presidents. Most frequently, though, a specific learned
fact is related to others in a total set or to a larger body of information. For
example, a student may learn a number of facts about Mexico that are related to
each other in the sense that they pertain to aspects of Mexico's geography,
economy, or culture. Such facts mav also be related to a larger body of informa-
tion including facts about the culture, economy, and geography of other coun-
tries, including the student's native country.
Whether isolated or connected with a larger set, learned facts are of obvious
value to the student for two major reeasons. The first is may be
that they
essential to everyday living. Examples are the fact that many stores and banks are
closed on Sunday, or the fact that molasses is sticky, or the fact that the student's
birthday is the tenth of February. The second and more obvious reason for the
importance of learned facts to students is that they are used in further learning.
To find the circumference of a circle, for example, one needs to know the value
of pi. To
complete a chemical equation, the student may need to know the
valence of the element sodium.
With regard to the function of facts as elements in the learning of skills or
additional information, it is evident that such facts can be looked up in con-
venient reference books or tables when this further learning is about to take
place. There are many instances when looking up may be proper and desirable.
The alternative is for the student to learn the facts and store them in his memory
so that he may then retrieve them whenever he needs them. This alternative is

often chosen as a matter of convenience and efficiency. Facts that are likely to be
used again and again might as well be stored in —
memory the student would
likely find the constant looking up a nuisance. The designer of instruction,
however, has the obligation of deciding which of a great many facts in a given
course are (1) of such infrequent usage that they had better be looked up, (2) of
such relatively frequent reference that learning them would be an efficient
strategy, or (3) of such fundamental importance that they ought to be remem-
bered for a lifetime.
 Varieties of Learning 83

Performance

The performance that indicates a fact has been learned consists of stating, either
orally or in writing, relations that have the syntactic form of a sentence.

internal Conditions

For acquisition and storage, an organized network of declarative knowledge

needs to be accessed in memory, and the newly acquired fact must be related to
this network D. Gagne, 1985). For example, to learn and remember that
(E.
Mount Whitney the highest peak in the continental United States, an orga-
is

nized network of propositions (which may differ for each individual learner)
needs to be accessed, which may include a classification of mountain peaks and
ranges, a set of categories of mountains in the United States, and information
about the range of mountains that includes Mount Whitney. The new fact is
associated by the learner with a number of other facts within this larger network.

External Conditions

Externallv, a verbal communication, picture, or other cue is presented to remind

the learner of the larger network of organized knowledge with which the new
fact will be associated. The new fact is then presented, usually by means of a
verbal statement. The communication may also suggest the association to be
acquired, as in conveying the idea that Mount Whitney
up highest" in
"sticks
the Sierra Nevada range. Imagery of the mountain and its name may help
retention of the fact. Elaboration of the new fact may be advantageous by
presenting other facts relating Mount Whitney to mountain ranges. Provision
also needs to be made for the rehearsal of the new fact or repetition of it in the
form of a spaced review.

Learning Organized Knowledge

Larger bodies of interconnected facts, such as those pertaining to events of

history or to categories of art, science, or literature, may also be learned and
remembered. As is the case with the learning of single facts, the networks of
propositions that constitute the new knowledge become linked to the larger
memory. Larger bodies of knowledge
propositional networks already existing in
are organized from smaller units so that they become meaningful wholes.
The key to remembering bodies of knowledge appears to be one of having
them organized in such a way that they can be readily retrieved. Organizing
verbal information appears to require generating new ideas that relate sets of
information already stored in memory. Such organizing, when carried out
during learning, aids in the later retrieval of information by providing affective
cues to retrieval (E. D. Gagne, 1985). The periodic table of chemical elements,
84 Principles of Instructional Design

for example, besides having a theoretical rationale, also helps students of chemis-
try to remember names and properties of a large number of elements.
the
of U.S. history may have acquired a framework of historical
Similarly, students
periods into which many individual facts can be fitted for learning and
remembering. The more highly organized this previously acquired information,
the easier it is for a student to acquire and retain any given new fact that can be
related to this organized structure.

Performance

The substance of paragraphs or longer passages of connected prose appears to

be learned and retained in a way that preserves the meaning but not necessarily
the detailed component facts contained in the paragraphs or passages (Reynolds
and Flagg, 1977). The more general ideas appear to be recalled better than the
more specific ones (Meyer, 1975). Details are often "constructed" by the
learner, apparently in accordance with a general schema (Spiro, 1977) that
represents the gist of a story or passage.

Internal Conditions

As in the case of individual facts, the learning and storage of larger units of
organized verbal information occurs within the context of a network of in-
terconnected and organized propositions previously stored in the learner's mem-
ory. It may be newly learned knowledge is subsumed into larger meaningful
that
structures (Ausubel, Novak, and Hanesian, 1978), or it may be that the new
information is linked to a network of propositions already in the learner's
memory (R. M. Gagne, 1985).

External Conditions

The external conditions that favor the learning and retention of organized sets of
verbal information pertain primarily to the provision of cues. Such cues enable

the learner to search successfully for the information at a later time and, thus, to
retrieve it for use.
Cues need to be as distinctive as possible in order to avoid interference among
stored propositions. Distinctiveness of cues can be ensured by introducing
readily memorable stimuli (such as rhymes) within the material to be learned
and by reducing the confusion with other, similar ideas. Organizing component
ideas into tables or spatial arrays is another method of increasing the distinctive-
ness of cues (Holley and Dansereau, 1984). Elaboration is another technique
that enhances retrieval. By adding related information to the new ideas to be
learned, the learner adds more cues for retrieval. The cues may be within the
learner's environment, as when parts of a room are used to recall the sequence of
ideas in a speech. More frequendy, though, the cues are themselves retrieved
from the learner's memory as words, phrases, or images.
 Varieties of Learning 85

Another external condition that plays a part in the retention of meaningful

proseis the adoption of an attentional strategy by the learner. Suggestions of

"what to look for" or "what to remember" may be made to a learner before

learning begins; these may have the effect of activating a cognitive strategy for
learning. A suggestion may be given directly or indirectly by questions inserted
m a text (cf. Frase, 1970). Another method involves the use of an advance
organizer (Ausubel, Novak, and Hanesian, 1978; Mayer, 1979), a brief passage
given before the text to be learned, which has the effect of orienting the learner
to what is to be remembered in a subsequent passage.
Repetition has long been known to have a marked effect on the remembering
of information, and this is true whether one is dealing with isolated facts or with
larger bodies of information. The effective employment of repetition, however,
is in providing spaced occasions for the learner to recall the information he has

learned. The processes put into effect when information is retrieved from

memory are apparently the most important factors in the remembering of such
information.

ATTITUDES

We now shift gears again to consider the achievement of a very different kind of
learning outcome, one which partakes not so much of knowledge as it does of
emotion and action. This is the acquired state of the learner called attitude.
It would be difficult to overemphasize the importance of attitudes in school
learning. In the first place, as is so evident to those who teach, students' attitudes
toward attending school, toward cooperating with instructor and fellow stu-
dents, toward giving attention to the communications made to them, and
toward the act of learning itself are all of great significance in determining how
readily the students learn.
A second large class of attitudes are those that institutions (such as schools)
aim to establish as a result of instruction. Attitudes of tolerance and civility
toward other people are often mentioned as goals of education in the schools.
Positive attitudes toward the seeking and learning of new skills and knowledge
are usually stated as educational goals of far-reaching importance. More specific
likings for various subjects of instruction, whether science, literature, salesman-
ship, or labor negotiations, are usually conceived as objectives of high value
within each subject area. And finally, there are attitudes of broad generality,
often called values, to which schools and other societal institutions are expected
to contribute and influence. These are attitudes pertaining to such social be-
haviors as are implied by the words fairness, honesty, charitableness, and the more
general term morality (cf. R. M. Gagne, 1985, pp. 226-228).
Regardless of the great variety exhibited by the content of these types of
attitudes, one must expect that they all resemble each other in their formal
properties. That is to say, whatever the particular content of an attitude, it
functions to affect "approaching" or "avoiding." In so doing, an attitude in-
86 Principles of Instructional Design

fluences a large set of specific behaviors of the individuals. It is reasonable to

suppose, then, that there are some general principles of learning that applv to
the acquisition and changing of attitudes.

Definition of Attitude

Attitudes are complex human behavior toward people, things,

states that affect
and events. Many investigators have studied
and emphasized in their writings
the conception of an attitude as a svstem of beliefs (Festinger, 1957). These
views serve to point out the cognitive aspects of attitudes. Other writers deal with
their affective components, the feelings they give rise to or that accompany them,
as in liking and disliking. Learning outcomes in the "affective domain" are
described by Krathwohl, Bloom, and Masia (1964).
There are several varieties of theorv concerning the nature and origin of
attitudes. A comprehensive review of the major theories and their implications
for instruction is presented by Martin and Briggs (1986). These authors de-
scribe procedures for instructional design that integrate affective and cognitive
objectives.
For a number of reasons, including practical ones, it seems desirable in the
present context to give emphasis to the aspect of attitudes relating to action.
Acknowledging that an attitude mav arise from some complex of beliefs and that
it may be accompanied and invigorated by emotion, the important question

would appear to be, "What action does it support?" The general answer to this
question is that an attitude influences a choice ofpersonal action on the part of the
individual. A definition of attitude, then, is an internal state that affects an

individual's choice of personal action toward some object, person, or event (R.
M. Gagne, 1985).
Portions of this definition require some comments. An attitude is an internal
state, inferred from observations (or often, from reports) of the individual's
behavior; it is not the behavior itself. If one observes a person depositing a gum
wrapper in a waste basket, an inference cannot be made from that single instance
alone that the person has a positive attitude toward disposing of personal trash,
or a negative attitude toward pollution, and certainly not an attitude toward
gum wrappers. A number of instances of behavior of this general class, however,
may occur in a number of different situations, making possible an inference
about that person's attitude. The inference is that some internal state affects a
whole class of specific instances, in each of which the individual is making a
choice.

This choice, which is inferred to be affected by the attitude, is of a personal

action. Thus, a person mav choose to throw awav a gum wrapper or to hold it
until a trash basket is handv. Another person may choose to vote for or against a
presidential candidate —the choice indicates the attitude. A white may
student
choose to speak in a friendlv manner to a black classmate or may not so
speak —again, an indicator (along with other instances) of the student's attitude.
 Varieties of Learning 87

In following this definition, one cannot answer the question, "What is this
person's attitude toward black Americans?" because that is altogether too gener-
al a question to be answered sensibly. Instead, one asks, "What is this person's
attitude toward working with black people or living near black people or sitting
beside a black person?" It is the choice of a personal action in each case that is
\ffected by an attitude. In connection with school learning, one may be in-
terested in a student's attitude toward reading books, doing scientific ex-
periments, writing stories, or constructing an art object.
This definition implies that attitudes should be measured in terms of the
personal actions chosen by the individual. In some instances, such measurement
can be done by observation over a period of time. For example, a teacher may
record observations of an elementary pupil over a weekly period, recording the
number of times that pupil helps his classmates as opposed to interfering with
their activities (cf. Mager, 1968). A proportion of this sort, recorded over
several such periods, can serve well as a measure of the* student's "attitude
toward helping others." Of course, such direct indicators of choice cannot
always be obtained. For example, the teacher would find it difficult to obtain
behavioral measures of the pupil's "attitude toward listening to classical music,"
or her "attitude toward reading novels" because many choices in these areas are
made outside of the school environment. Attitude measures are therefore fre-
quently based upon self-reports of choices in situations described in question-
naires. Typical questions, for example, may ask the student to use a 10-point
scale to answer a variety of questions, such as: "When choosing a book from the
public library to read on a summer afternoon, how likely are you to pick a novel
about adventure on the seas?" This method of attitude measurement, emphasiz-
ing choices of action, has been described in the work of Triandis (1964).

Attitude Learning

The conditions favoring the learning of attitudes and the means of bringing
about changes in attitudes are rather complex matters, about which much is yet
to be discovered. A number of contrasting views on the effectiveness of attitude-
change methods are reviewed by Martin and Briggs (1986). Certainly, the
methods of instruction to be used in establishing desired attitudes differ con-
siderably from those applicable to the learning of intellectual skills and verbal
information (R. M. Gagne, 1985).
How does the individual acquire or modify an internal state that influences
his choices in a particular area of action? One way that this is not done,
according to a great deal of evidence, is solely by the use of persuasive com-
munication (McGuire, 1969). Perhaps most adults would recognize the in-
effectiveness of repeated use of such maxims as "Be kind to others," or "Learn to
appreciate good music," or "Drive carefully." Even more elaborate com-
munications, however, often have equally poor such as those that make
effects,

emotional appeals or those that are developed by a careful chain of reasoning.

88 Principles of Instructional Design

Apparently, one must seek more sophisticated means than these for changing
attitudes and more elaborately specified conditions for attitude learning.

Direct Methods

There are direct methods of establishing and changing attitudes, which some-
times occur naturally and without prior planning. On occasion, such direct
methods can also be employed
deliberately. At least, it is worthwhile to un-
derstand how change can come about by these means.
attitude
A conditioned response of the classical sort (cf. R. M. Gagne, 1985, pp.
24—29) may establish an attitude of approach or avoidance toward some par-
ticular class of objects, events, or persons. Many years ago, Watson and Rayner
(1920) demonstrated that a child could be conditioned to "fear" (that is, to
shrink away from) a white rat he previously had accepted and petted. This type
of response was also made to other small furry animals. The unconditioned
stimulus used to bring about this marked change in the child's behavior was a
sudden sharp sound made behind the child's head, when the animal (the
conditioned stimulus) was present. Although this finding may not have specific
pedagogical usefulness, it is important to realize that attitudes can be established
in this way andsome of the attitudes students bring
that to school with them
may be dependent upon earlier conditioning experiences. A tendency to avoid
birds or spiders or snakes, for example, may be an instance of attitudes having
their origin in a prior event of conditioning. In theory, almost any attitude
might be established in this way.
Another direct method of attitude learning having more usefulness for school
situations is based upon the idea of arranging contingencies of reinforcement
(Skinner, 1968). If a new skill or element of knowledge to be learned is followed
by some preferred or rewarding activity, in such a way that the latter is
contingent upon achieving the former, this general situation describes the basic
prototype of learning, according to Skinner. In addition, the student who
begins with a liking for the second activity (called a reinforcer) will, in the course
of this act of learning, acquire a liking for the first task. Following this principle,
one might make a preferred activity for an elementary pupil, such as examining a
collection of pictures, contingent upon her asking to see the pictures by means
of a complete sentence ("May I look at the pictures?") as opposed to asking by
blurting out a single word ("Pictures?"). Continuation of this practice in a
consistent way and in a variety of situations will likely result in the child's using
complete sentences when making a request. The child will also come to enjoy
the newly learned way of asking for things because of experiencing success in
doing so. In other words, an attitude toward "using complete sentences" will
take a positive turn.
Generalizing somewhat from this learning principle of reinforcement con-
tingencies, it would appear that success in some learning accomplishment is likely
to lead to a positive attitude toward that activity. Young people acquire de-
finitely positive attitudes toward ice skating when they achieve some success at
 Varieties of Learning 89

it. Students develop positive attitudes toward listening to classical music when
they realize that they are able to recognize the forms and themes the music
contains.

iAn Important Indirect Method

A method of establishing or changing attitudes of great importance and wide-
spread utility is human modeling (Bandura, 1969, 1977). We regard this method
as indirect because the chainof events that constitutes the procedure for learning
is longer than that required for more direct methods. Furthermore, as its name

implies, this method operates through the agency of another human being, real
or imagined.
Students can observe and learn attitudes from many sorts of human models.
In early years, one or both parents serve as models for actions that are instances
of fairness, sympathy, kindness, honesty, and so on. Older siblings or other
members of the family may play this role. During school one or more
years,
teachers may become models for behavior, and this remains a possibility from
kindergarten through graduate school. But the varieties of human modeling are
not confined to the school. Public figures may become models,
as may promi-
nent sports people, or famous scientists, or not essential that people
artists. It is

who function as human models be seen or known personally they can be seen —
on television or in movies. In fact, they can even be read about in books. This
latter fact serves to emphasize the enormous potential that printed literature has

for the determination of attitudes and values.

The human model must, of course, be someone whom the learners respect; or
as some writers would have it, someone with whom they can identify. In
addition, desirable characteristics of the model are to be perceived as credible and
powerful (Gagne, 1984). Observation must be made of the model making the
desired kinds of choices of personal action, as in exhibiting kindness, rejecting
harmful drugs, or cleaning up litter. A teacher model may be seen to dispense
praise consistently and impartially. Having perceived the action, whatever it
may be, the learner also must see that such action leads to satisfaction or pleasure
on the part of the model. This step in the process is called vicarious reinforcement
by Bandura ( 1969). A sports figure may receive an award or display his pleasure
in breaking a record; a scientist may exhibit his satisfaction in discovering
something new or even The teacher may
in getting closer to such a discovery.
show that she is glad to have helped a slow-learning child to acquire a new skill.
The essential characteristics of attitudes and the conditions for their learning,
using human modeling, are summarized in the following paragraphs.

Performance

An attitude is indicated by the choice of a class of personal actions. These actions

can be categorized as showing either a positive or negative tendency toward
some objects, events, or persons.
90 Principles of Instructional Design

Internal Conditions

An of respect for or identification with the human model must prefer-

attitude
ably be already present in the learner. If it is not, it needs to be established as a

first step in the process. Intellectual skills and knowledge related to the behavior

exhibited by the model must have been previouslv acquired for this behavior to
be imitated. For example, an attitude of rejection of harmful drugs must be
preceded by knowledge of the common names of the drugs and the situations in
which they may be available. It may be noted, however, that such prerequisite
knowledge does not in itself engender the attitude.

External Conditions

External conditions may be described as the following sequence of steps:

1 Presentation of the model and establishment of the model's appeal and credi-
bility

2. Recall by the learner of knowledge of the situations to which the attitude

applies
3. Communication or demonstration bv the model of the desired choices of
personal action
4. Communication or demonstration that the model obtains pleasure or satisfac-
tion with theoutcome of the behavior. This step is expected to lead to vicarious
reinforcement on the part of the learner.

Of course, modification of these steps is possible when the human model is

not directly seen and when the desired performance cannot be directly observed.
The essential conditions mav still be present when the learner is viewing televi-
sion or reading a book. Other variations on the human modeling theme may
also be noted (R. M. Gagne, 1985, p. 239).One form that human modeling can
take is role playing, in which the actor models action choices after those of an

imagined rather than an actual person. A student playing the role of a fair-
minded work supervisor is influenced bv the choices made by that (imaginary)
person. Human modeling also takes place during class discussions bearing upon
social or personal problems. In such situations, more than one point of view
toward personal action choices is likely to be presented. Discussion leaders
become, in effect, the human models that influence the establishment of atti-
tudes.
The modification of attitudes undoubtedly takes place all the time in every
portion of a student's dailv life. Models with whom the student comes in contact
bear a tremendous responsibility for the determination of socially desirable
attitudes and the development of moral behavior (R. M. Gagne, 1985, pp.
226/f) . Teachers obviously need to appreciate the importance of the human
modeling role if for no other reason than to be able to appreciate the large
proportion of time spent bv students in their presence. It is likely that those
 Varieties of Learning 91

teachers the student later remembers as "good teachers" are the ones who have
modeled positive attitudes.

Some Guidelines for Changing Attitudes

i
The following list of guidelines should be taken into consideration when atti-

tude objectives are the intended outcomes of instruction:

1. Provide the learners with information about possible alternative choices. One
of the first problems in changing attitudes is that the learners may not know of
available options. For instance, if you are trying to convince midlevel manag-
ers to choose to use participative management principles, they must be aware
of these principles.
2. Provide the learner with the pros and cons associated with the desired choice
behavior. Most current behavior occurs because it has positive consequences
for the individual or because it has become habituated. The learner must know
what the consequences of the desired choice behavior will be. This is especially
true if the desirable consequences are long-term since behaviors with short-
term benefits are often competing. For this reason, it is important to discuss
the costs and the long-term benefits associated with the new behaviors.
Information about the costs and benefits can be presented as verbal informa-
tion, or the consequences may be experienced by the learner in a simulated-
learning situation.
3. Provide relevant models for the desired behavior. "Do not as
as I say," is
effective a message as "Do as I do." The reason companies get
that advertising
sports heroes to promote their oat flakes is that human models form a very
important part of choice behavior. The more saliency the human model has
for the learner, the greater the likelihood that the learner will adopt the choice
behavior displayed by the model.
4. Ensure that the environment supports the desired choice behavior. If the
behavior, for example, is that the learner will choose to return all customer
calls before leaving for the day, the opportunity for doing so must be provided
(time must be left at the end of the day to do this). There are obvious
implications as to the viability of the desired choice behavior if the environ-
mental conflict is seen as unmodifiable.
5. Fit the desired behavior into a larger framework of values if possible. Attitudes
are reflective of values. If, for instance, individuals value themselves as impor-
tant parts of a company (or class), they will make different choice behaviors
than if they feel unimportant. For example, a worker might choose to work
overtime to meet an unusual deadline as a part of the overall value he or she
places on "responsibility as a professional."
6. Identify and teach the skills that make the desired choice behavior possible.
This may seem too obvious. People cannot choose to eat low-cholesterol food
if they are unable to identify which foods contain cholesterol.
7. Recognize and reward choice behavior when it is exhibited. Again, this seems
obvious. If teachers want students to "choose to be self-directed," they must
recognize and reward this behavior.
92 Principles of Instructional Design

8. Don't inadvertently punish the desired behavior. This is the corollarv to the
previous guideline. For example, rewarding work with more work should be
avoided since it inevitably leads to resentment by students. The schedule of
reinforcement should be arranged such that the student wants to do more and
thus becomes even more productive.
9. Allow learners to set their own goals with regard to desired behavior. There
are several different stages in acquiring affective behavior. These include
awareness, acceptance, and valuing. In addition, effective behaviors are relative-
ly resistant to change, and any changes tend to occur very slowly. One
technique is to have learners set their own goals, report on their own progress,
and periodically reevaluate their goals. In terms of Keller's (1987) ARCS
model, this develops greater confidence in the learners as thev move toward
more desirable behaviors.
10. Use alternative instructional strategies such as simulations, role playing, col-
laborative processes, or other involving experiences in which benefits from the
desired behavior become obvious. These types of experiences complement or
supplement modeling experiences.
11 Don't inadvertently pair a behavior you want to change with one that is not
related to that behavior. For example, choice behavior related to smoking is
not directly related to the choice behavior of dieting. Since habituation and
other attitudes often form "behavior complexes" in humans, it is important to
identify' and prioritize the most important behaviors for instructional in-
terventions.

MOTOR SKILLS

Sequences of unitary motor responses are often combined into more complex
performances called motor skills. Sometimes, these are referred to as perceptual-
motor skills or psychomotor skills, but these phrases appear to earn no useful added 7

meaning. They imply, of course, that the performance of motor skills involves
the senses and the brain as well as the muscles.

Characteristics of Motor Skills

Motor skills are learned capabilities that underlie performances whose outcomes
smoothness of bodily movement.
are reflected in the rapidity, accuracy, force, or
In the school, these skills are interwoven throughout the curriculum at every age
and include such diverse activities as using pencils and pens, writing with chalk,
drawing pictures, painting, using a variety of measuring instruments, and, of
course, engaging in various games and sports. Basic motor skills such as printing
numerals on paper are learned in early grades and are assumed to be present
thereafter. In contrast, a motor skill like tying a bowline knot may not pre-
viously have been learned by a fifth grader and so would conceivably constitute a
reasonable objective for instruction at that age or later.

As motor skills are practiced, they appear to give rise to a centrally organized
 Varieties of Learning 93

motor program that controls the skilled movements without feedback from the
senses (Keele, 1973). However, this is not the whole story. The increased
smoothness and timing that result from practice of a motor skill are considered
by Adams (1977) to be dependent on feedback that is both internal and
external. Internal feedback takes the form of stimuli from muscles and joints that
make up a perceptual trace, a kind of motor image that acts as a reference against
which the learner assesses error on successive practice trials. External feedback is
often provided by knowledge of results, an external indication to the learner of the
degree of error. As practice proceeds, improvement in the skill comes to depend
increasingly upon the internal type of feedback and to a lesser degree upon
externally provided knowledge of results.
Usually, motor skills can be divided into part skills that constitute the total
performance in the sense that they occur simultaneously or in a temporal order.
Swimming the crawl, for example, contains the part skills of foot flutter and arm
stroke, both of which are carried out at the same time and also the part skill of
turning the head to breathe, which occurs in a sequence following an arm
stroke. Thus, the total performance of swimming is a highly organized and
precisely timed activity. Learning to swim requires the integration of part skills
of various degrees of complexity, some of them as simple as motor chains. The
integration of these parts, as well as the component part skills themselves, must
be learned.
Learning to integrate part skills that are already learned has been recognized
by investigators of motor skills as a highly significant aspect of the total learning
required. Fitts and Posner (1967) refer to this component as an executive
subroutine, using a computer analog}' to express its organizing function. Sup-
pose, for example, an individual learning to drive an automobile has already
mastered the part skills of driving backward, of turning the steering wheel to
direct the motion of the car, and of driving (forward or backward) at minimal
speed. What does such a person still need to learn in order to turn the car around
on a straight two-lane street? Evidently, he needs to learn a procedure in which
these part skills are combined in a suitable order so that by making two or three
backward and forward motions, combined with suitable turning, the car is
headed in the other direction.
This instructive example of turning a car around shows the importance of the
intellectual component of a motor skill. Obviously, the executive subroutine is
not in itself motor at all; instead, it is a procedure, conforming to the qualities of a
procedural rule as described in the previous chapter. The rule-governed aspect of
the motor skill performance is what controls the sequence of action which —
movement is executed first, which second, and so on (R. M. Gagne, 1985, pp.
202-212).
Swimming provides an interesting comparison. It, too, has an executive
subroutine pertaining to the timing of flutter kicks, arm movements, and head
turning to breathe. But in this case, the smooth performance of these part skills
is usually being improved by practice at the same time that the executive routine
94 Principles of Instructional Design

is being exercised. Many

studies have been performed to find out whether
practicing the part of various motor skills first is more advantageous than
skills

practicing the whole skill (including the executive subroutine) from the outset
(Naylor and Briggs, 1963). No clear answer has emerged from these studies,
and the best that can be said is that it depends on the skill; sometimes, part skill
practice is an advantage, and sometimes not. It is clear, however, that both the
executive subroutine and the part skills must be learned. Practice on either
without the other has many times been shown to be ineffective for the learning
of the total skill.

Learning Motor Skills

The learning of motor skills is best accomplished by repeated practice. There is

no easy way of avoiding practice if one seeks to improve the accuracy, speed, and
smoothness of motor skills. In fact, it is interesting to note that practice
continues to bring about improvement in motor skills over very long periods of
time (Fitts and Posner, 1967; Singer, 1980), as performers in sports, music, and
gymnastics are well aware.

Performance

The performance of a motor skill embodies the intellectual skill (procedure) that
constitutes a movement sequence of muscular activity. When observed as a
motor skill, the action meets certain standards (either specified or implied) of
speed, accuracy, force, or smoothness of execution.

Internal Conditions

The executive subroutine that governs the procedure of the motor skill must be
retrieved from prior learning or must be learned as an initial step. For example,
the part skills of "backing" and "turning" in an automobile must be previously
acquired and retrieved to enter into the skill of "turning the car around on a
street." As for the part skills that will make up the total skill, they will depend
upon the retrieval of individual responses or unitary motor chains.

External Conditions

For the learning of the executive subroutine, the instructor provides one of several
different kindsof communications to the learner. Sometimes, verbal instructions
are used. ("Bend your knee and put the weight on your left foot.") In fact, any
of the kinds of verbal communications intended for encoding of a procedure
(see previous chapter) may be employed. A checklist showing the sequence of
required movements can be presented, with the expectation that it will be
learned as a part of practice. Pictures or diagrams may be used to show the
 Varieties of Learning 95

required sequence. For the improvement of accuracy, speed, and quality of part
skills, as well as the total skill, the learner engages in practice, repeating the
movements required to produce the desired outcome in each case. The skill is
improved by continued practice with the accompaniment of informative feed-
back (Singer, 1980).

Short example:
Given a jump rope, the student will execute jumping rope to the criterion of 100
continuous jumps.

Part skills:

1. Jumping straight up and down with knees slightly bent

2. Swinging the rope with the wrists with the arms close to the body and
with wrists at the waist
3. Timing the jump so that the rope doesn't hit the feet

Executive subroutine:
Swing the rope, as it comes by your nose, jump about an inch. This could be
learned as a rhyme:
Swing the rope;
'Round it goes;
Jump an inch;
As it passes your nose.

SUMMARY
The present chapter has been concerned with a description of three different
kinds of learning —verbal information, attitudes, and motor skills. Although
they have some features in common, their most notable characteristic is that
they are in fact different. They differ, first, in the kinds of outcome performances
which they make possible:

1. Verbal information: Verbally stating facts, generalizations, organized knowl-

edge
2. Attitude: Choosing a course of personal action
3. Motor skill: Executing a performance of bodily movement

As our analysis of the conditions of learning has shown, these three kinds of
learning differ markedly from each other in the conditions necessary for their
effective achievement. For verbal information, the key condition is the provision
of external cues that relate the new information to a network of organized
knowledge from prior learning. For attitude, although such a network of knowl-
edge indicates the situational limits, one must either ensure direct reinforcement
of personal action choices or depend upon human modeling to bring about
vicarious reinforcement of the learner. And for the learning of motor skills,
96 Principles of Instructional Design

besides the early learning of the executive subroutine and provision for the
integration of part skills, the important condition is practice with frequent
information feedback to the learner.
The kinds of performances associated with these capabilities and the con-
ditions for their learning are also obviously different from those described in the
previous chapter pertaining to intellectual and cognitive strategies. Are the
skills

types of learning outcomes dealt with in this chapter in some ways less impor-
tant than intellectual skills? Assuredly not. The storage and accessibility of verbal
information, particularly in the form of organized knowledge, is a legitimate and
desirable objective of instruction in both formal and informal educational
settings. The establishment of attitudes is widely acknowledged to be a highly
significant objective of many courses of study, and some would accord prosocial
attitudes the highest importance of all. Motor skills, although they often appear
to contrast with the cognitive orientation of schools, individually have their own
justification as fundamental components of basic skills, of art and music, of
science, and of sports.
The contrasting features of these kinds of learned capabilities, as compared
with those of intellectual skills, do not reside in their differing importance for
programs of instruction. Instead, these capabilities differ with respect to the
internal conditions that must be assumed and the external conditions that must
be arranged for instruction to be effective. Included in these differences are the
enabling prerequisite relationships that intellectual skills have with each other, as
described in the previous chapter, as compared with the supportive effects of
prior learning on the varieties of learned capabilities covered in this chapter (cf.

R. M. Gagne, 1985, pp. 286-272). This characteristic has particular im-

plications for the determination of desirable sequences of instruction, as will be
seen in a later chapter.
The system of instructional design being developed in this book is one that
suggests that first priority be given to intellectual skills as central planning
components. That is, the fundamental structures of instruction are designed in
terms of what the student will be able to do when learning has occurred, and this
capability is in turn related to what has previously been learned. This strategy of
instructional design typically leads to the identification of intellectual skills as a
first step, followed by analysis and identification of their prerequisites. To this

basic sequence may then be added, at appropriate points, the cognitive strategies
which these basic skills make possible. In other instances, the primary objective
of instruction may be a particular body of verbal information, or the changing of
an attitude, or the mastery of a motor skill. These cases also require analysis to
reveal the supportive effects of prior learning. Most typical of all, as will be seen
later, are instances of instruction that require provisions for multiple objectives.
Several of the following chapters directly address procedures for designing
instruction. In large part, the techniques we describe are derived from the
knowledge of varieties of learning outcomes which we have detailed, and
represent direct applications of this knowledge.
 Varieties of Learning 97

References

Adams, A. (1977). Motor learning and retention. In M. H. Marx & M. E. Bunch

J.

(Eds.),Fundamentals and applications of learning. New York: Macmillan.

Anderson, J. R. (1985). Cognitive psychology and its implications (2nd ed.). New York:
Freeman.
Ausubel, D. P., Novak, J.D., &
Hanesian, H. (1978). Educational psychology: A cognitive
view (2nd ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
Bandura, A. (1969). Principles of behavior modification. New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
Bandura, A. (1977). Social learning theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Bretz, R. (1971). A
taxonomy ofcommunication media. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational
Technology Publications.
Clark, R. E.,' & Salomon, G. (1986). Media in teaching. In M. C. Wittrock (Ed.),
Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed.). New York: Macmillan.
Festinger, L. (1957). A theory of cognitive dissonance. New York: Harper & Row.
Fitts, P. M., & Posner, M. I. (1967). Human performance. Monterey, CA: Brooks/

Cole.
Boundary conditions for mathemagenic behavior. Review of Educa-
Frase, L. T. (1970).
337-347.
tional Research, 40,
Gagne, E. D. (1985). The cognitive psychology of school learning. Boston: Little, Brown.
Gagne, R. M. (1984). Learning outcomes and their effects. American Psychologist, 39,
377-385.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions of learning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
Glaser, R. (1984). Education and thinking: The role of knowledge. American Psycholo-
gist, 39, 93-104.
Holley, C. B., & Dansereau, D. F. (1984). Spatial learning strategies: Techniques, applica-
tions, and related issues. New York: Academic Press.
Hulse, S. H., Egeth, H, & Deese, J. (1980). The psychology of learning (5th ed.). New
York: McGraw-Hill.
Kausler, D. H. (1974). Psychology of verbal learning and memory. New York: McGraw-
Hill.
Keele, S. W. (197'3). Attention and human performance. Pacific Palisades, CA: Goodyear.
Keller, J. M. (1987). The systematic process of motivational design. Performance and
Instruction, 26(9), 1-8.
Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., & Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of educational
objectives. Handbook II: Affective domain. New York: McKay.
Mager, R. F. (1968). Developing attitude toward learning. Belmont, CA: Fearon.
Martin, B. L., & Briggs, L. J. (1986). The affective and cognitive domains: Integration for
instruction and research. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Mayer, R. E. (1979). Can advance organizers influence meaningful learning? Review of
Educational Research, 49, 371-383.
McGuire, W. J. (1969). The nature of attitudes and attitude change. In G. Lindzey E. &
Aronson (Eds.), Handbook of social psychology (Vol. 3, 2nd ed.). Reading, MA:
Addison- Wesley.
Meyer, B. J. F. (1975). The organization of prose and its effects on memory. New York:
Elsevier.
98 Principles of Instructional Design

Naylor, J. C, & Briggs, G. E. (1963). Effects of task complexity and task organization on
the relative efficiency of part and whole training methods. Journal of Experimental
Psychology, 65, 217-224.
Polanyi, M. (1958). Personal knowledge. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
M., Levin, J. R.,
Pressley, &
Delaney, H. D. (1982). The mnemonic keyword method.
Review of Educational Research, 52, 61-91.
Reynolds, A. G., &
Flagg, P. W. (1977). Cognitive psychology. Cambridge, MA:
Winthrop.
Rohwer, W. D., Jr. (1970). Images and pictures in children's learning: Research results

and educational implications. Psychological Bulletin, 73, 393—403.

Singer, R. N. (1980). Motor learning and human performance (3rd ed.). New York:
Macmillan.
Skinner, B. F. (1968). The technology of teaching. New York: Appleton.
Spiro, R. J. (1977). Remembering information from text: The "state of the schema"
approach. In R. C. Anderson, R. J. Spiro, 8c W. E. Montagne (Eds.), Schooling and the
NJ: Erlbaum.
acquisition of knowledge. Hillsdale,
Triandis, H. C. (1964). Exploratory factor analyses of the behavioral component of
social attitudes. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 68, 420-430.
Watson, J. &
Rayner, R. (1920). Conditioned emotional reactions. Journal of
R.,
experimental Psychology, 3, 1—14.
 The Learner
6

as
w hatever it is that gets learned can be identified
one or another of the capabilities described in the two previous chapters or as
some combination of them. Learners may be expected to learn a set of in-
tellectual skills involving mathematical operations, for example, and perhaps also
a positive attitude toward the use of these operations. Or, learners may be asked
to acquire some organized verbal information about the history of the zipper
fastener plus some intellectual skills about how to assemble such a fastener.
Young learners who encounter a zipper fastener for the first time will doubtless
need to learn the motor skill required for its operation.
This range of learning tasks is undertaken by learners who themselves exhibit
diversity that is enormous in scope and detail. The learners who approach new
learning tasks are all quite different in their characteristics as learners. In the face
of this almost bewildering diversity, the procedures of instructional design must
do the following things:

1. Discover a rational means of reducing the great diversity of individual learner

characteristics to a number small enough to make instructional planning feas-
ible.

2. Identify those dimensions of common learner characteristics that earn' different

implications for instruction and that can lead to design differences that in-
fluence learning effectiveness.
3. Once common learner characteristics have been taken into account, provide a
design appropriate for those learner variations that can be shown to make a
difference in learning results.
100 Principles of Instructional Design

We intend in this chapter to address these questions and in so doing to convev

the knowledge that will lead to good decisions in instructional design. Our
discussion will be based upon considerations of what learners are and what
like,
different sets of learners are like. Instructional design needs to take account of
the learners who are to participate in the activities that constitute instruction.

LEARNER CHARACTERISTICS

Learners possess certain qualities that relate to instruction — for example, thev
are able to hear orally deliveredcommunications and to read communications
printed on the page. Each of these common qualities varies in degree from
—
learner to learner one person mav be able to read pages of printed text rapidlv,
whereas another reads slowlv and haltinglv. Regardless of variations in degree,
the characteristics of concern to instructional design are those that affect the
entire information-processing chain of learning. These are qualities that may
pertain to sensory input, to the internal processing, storage, and retrieval of
information, and finally to the organization of learner responses.

The Nature of Learner Qualities

Some of the human individual that relate to learning are innately

qualities
determined. For example, visual acuity, although it may be aided by artificial
lenses, is a fundamental property of a person's sensory system that is "built in"
and that cannot be changed by learning. Such a property needs to be considered
in instruction, however, only under certain extreme conditions, leading to the
avoidance of fine print or fuzzy projection images.
Other learner qualities, however, may affect learning at junctures of informa-
tion processing that are more critical to instructional planning. For example, it
has been proposed that the capacity of the working memory, where to-be-
learned material is taken in and processed for memory storage, may have innate
capacity limits. The number of items that can be "held in mind" at any one time
is shown by the immediate memory span of seven plus or minus two. The speed
with which previouslv learned concepts can be retrieved and identified may be
measured bv requiring individuals to respond as rapidlv as possible to indicate
whether pairs of letters match when the letters are physically different (as A,« or
B,b). Because of the physical difference, the letters must be retrieved as concepts
in order tobe matched (Hunt, 1978). The speed and efficiency of this process is

another individual quality that may be innately determined.

For these and other learner characteristics that are genetically determined,
instructional design cannot have the aim of altering these qualities by means of
learning. Instead, instruction must be designed in such a way as to avoid
exceeding human capacities. For example, in the earlv stages of learning to read, it
is possible that some decoding tasks may exceed children's working memory
 The Learner 101

capacity, when words of many letters are encountered. For readers in general,
long sentences place demands upon working memory that may exceed the limits
of capacity. The design technique to be used in such instances is to use words,
sentences, diagrams, or other varieties of communication that stay well within
the capacity of the working memory and thus avoid testing its limits.

Qualities That Are Learned

Besides qualities that may be innate, and therefore impervious to change by

learning, there is a large set of characteristics that are learned. Many of these
have critical effects upon learning. It is these that constitute the internal con-
ditions described in previous chapters in connection with each of the learning
varieties.

Intellectual Skills

The typical intellectual skill, a rule, is considered to be stored as a set of concepts

that are syntactically organized. Specifically, it is believed that a rule has the
functional form called a production by Newell and Simon (1972). An example of
production is:

IF the goal is to convert x inches to centimeters,

THEN, multiply x by 2.54.

Concepts can similarly be represented as productions, as in the following

example:

IF the closed two-dimensional figure has all sides equal,

THEN, classify the figure as a polygon.

Obviously, we are describing procedures, and that is why the phrase pro-
cedural knowledge is customarilv used to refer to stored sets of intellectual skills.

It is also true that productions, considered as stored entities, have the syntactic
and semantic properties of propositions. The complex rules that are typical
intellectual skills are composed of simpler rules and concepts. The latter are
usually learned as prerequisites to the skill that is the targeted instructional
objective. When retrieved from memory, the complex skill readily activates these
simpler prerequisite skills since they are actual components. The example in
Figure 6-1 shows the component skills that have entered into the learning of the
target skill of "pronouncing multisyllable printed words."

Cognitive Strategies

Since strategies are mental procedures, they are a form of intellectual skill.

Accordingly, they may be conceived as productions and represented in that

102 Principles of Instructional Design

Pronounces total printed

words composed of
sequences of consonant-
vowel combinations
according to regular
rules

Pronounces regular
"spelling patterns"
involving same vowels
In different phonemic
values (mat-mate) Reproduces orally
presented words
and word sounds
of several syllables
Pronounces two- in length
and three-letter
vowel-consonant
combinations
("blending")
*

Pronounces Pronounces single Reproduces orally

single vowels. consonants and presented single
with alternate diphthongs, with syllables
phonemic values alternate phonemic
values

Identifies printed
letters, by sound

Reproduces single letter sounds

FIGURE 6-1 A Learning Hierarchy, Showing Prerequisite Skills, for the Skill of Pronouncing Multisyllable
Printed Words

manner. For example, youngsters mav acquire a cognitive strategy that enables
them to "self-edit" their writing of sentences and, by so doing, generate sen-
tences that are more mature. Thus, an original sentence such as "John went to
the store," when acted upon by a strategy of question asking, may be expanded
to the sentence "In the morning, John walked to the hardware store in the center
of town."
The production (strategy) in this case may be represented somewhat as
follows:
 The Learner 103

IF the goal is to revise a sentence to achieve full communication,

THEN, add component phrases that answer when, how, where, and why.

Two characteristics of cognitive strategies are particularly notable. First, they

$re procedures that govern the selection and use of intellectual Thus, the skills.

strategy of "self-editing" can be used only when the of sentence

intellectual skills
making and phrase making are already known. And second, it may be noted that
—
the structure of the strategy is not itself complex it is simply a matter of asking
four well-known questions. The typical cognitive strategy has broad generality;
in this case, it is applicable to virtually any sentence, of whatever subject. Yet it is
—
domain specific it is a strategy relevant to sentence editing and revision and not
to something else.

Verbal Information

Knowledge in this declarative form may be stored as individual propositions

(facts) or as networks of propositions, organized around central ideas or generic
concepts. As indicated in Figure 6-2, the fact that "igneous rock is very hard

FIGURE 6-2 A Network of Interrelated Propositions, Including Many Items of Verbal Information and
Interspersed Intellectual Skills (Productions), Shown Here as Boxes
(From E. D. Gagne, The cognitive psychology of school learning, copyright 1985 by Little, Brown; Boston. Reprinted
by permission.)
104 Principles of Instructional Design

because it has been subjected to high temperature and pressure" is connected

with a very large network of other interrelated propositions (E. D. Gagne,
1985). Furthermore, elements of this complex network make connections at
various points with productions (intellectual skills) (see Figure 6-2).
When a search of memory makes contact with a single proposition, other
interconnected propositions are "brought to mind" as well. The process is

known as spread of activation (Anderson, 1985) and is considered to be the basis

for the retrieval of knowledge from the long-term memory store. When the
learner attempts to recall a single idea, the initial search activates not only that
idea but many related ones also. Thus, in searching for the name Helen, one may
be led by spreading activation through Troy and Poe and Greece and Rome and
theEmperor Claudius to the Battle of Britain and to many things in between.
Spreading activation not only accounts for what we perceive as random
thoughts, as in free association, but is also the basis for the great flexibility that is
apparent when we engage in reflective thinking.

Attitudes

An attitude in memory appears to be somewhat complex and, therefore, difficult

to represent in a schematic fashion. For an attitude, what is stored in memory
would appear to include (1) the choice of personal action, as exhibited by a
human model; of a standard of conduct for the self that
(2) a representation
reflects the standard of the human model; and (3) a feeling of satisfaction
derived from reinforcement of the chosen action or from vicarious reinforce-
ment, as described in the previous chapter. Overlaid on these stored memories
may be an emotional disposition arising from the need to resist contrasting ideas
or dissonant beliefs.
Attitudes, too, are likely to be embedded within a complex of interconnected
propositions. It has often been observed that internal states affecting choices of
personal action are strongly influenced by situational factors. It may be supposed,
therefore, that attitudes occur within propositional networks that are organized
by situation. A person may have an attitude of neatness, for example, that
applies to the situation of storing kitchen tools but that does not apply to the
storage of papers on a working desk. When memory of the situation is revived,
retrieval of the objects and events usually brings with it a revival of the attitude
as well. Thus, for many older Americans, even the word depression can reactivate
a fairly strong attitude along with memories of a set of situational factors
pertaining to the 1930s.
Of particular importance to the representation of attitude in memory is a
human model's report (or demonstration) of personal action choices. The
human model is remembered as an admirable person and one who is both
credible and powerful (R. M. Gagne, 1985). Memory storage also includes the
model's action choices: The model may be remembered as rejecting harmful
drugs, or as liking running as exercise, or as preferring to listen to classical
 The Learner 105

music. When these memories are retrieved along with the situational factors
appropriate to each, conditions become right for the choice of personal action
that reveals an attitude.

Motor Skills

The core memory of a motor skill appears to consist of a highly organized and
centrally located motor program Such a program is established
(Keele, 1968).
by practice, attains automaticity, and becomes only incidentally responsive to
variations in external stimulation and in kinesthetic feedback. In addition, a
motor skill has some prerequisites, as is the case with intellectual skills. One set

—
of simpler components of a motor skill mav be its part skills sometimes easy to
identify, and sometimes not. In threading a needle, for example, one can detect
the part skills of (1) holding the needle steady, (2) inserting the thread in the
hole, and (3) grasping the end of the thread after insertion.
Even more essential as an aspect of motor skill storage is its procedure, or
executive subroutine, usually learned as the earliest component of a motor skill
(Fitts and Posner, 1967). The basic sequence of movement, having no requisite
smoothness and timing, has the character of an intellectual skill (a procedural
rule). Such a procedure may have been acquired as a prerequisite to the motor

skill or learned in an early stage of practice. When a motor skill has been unused

for many years, the executive subroutine is likely to remain intact, even though
the performance has become hesitant and rough. A person will remember how
to finger a clarinet, even though the musical quality of the performance may
show the effects of vears of disuse.

MEMORY ORGANIZATION
The unitary things that are learned and stored in long-term memory may be
conveniently thought of as propositions (both declarative and procedural) and
images and motor programs. These unitary entities are organized into in-
terconnected networks that may be searched out and retrieved by the learner to
serve the requirements of some activity or of further learning.
The networks representing various kinds of learned capabilities often assume
a form called a. schema, in which ideas are organized in terms of a general topic or
use function. As
writers on the subject have pointed out (Rumelhart, 1980;
Schank and Abelson, 1977), we carry around with us knowledge structures
organized in terms of such general topics as "going to a restaurant" and
"shopping in a supermarket."
An even more general conception of the stored capabilities of human learners
is the notion of ability. Abilities are measured by psychological tests, which

sample the quality of performance in a number of areas of activity. Some

well-known ability areas are verbal, numerical, visual, and spatial. These are
106 Principles of Instructional Design

usually differentiated into more specific abilities such as verbal fluency, numer-
ical reasoning, memory for visual form, spatial orientation, and the like (Cron-
bach, 1970; Guilford, 1967). Still other general characteristics of human learn-
ers in the affective and personality domains. The}' are often referred to as
belong
traitsand include such qualities as anxiety and motivation to learn (Tobias, 1986).
The importance of abilities and traits as human qualities lies in the possibility
that they may affect learning differently depending upon differences in the
nature of instruction. Thus, learners with high verbal ability mav respond well
to instruction consisting of tersely written printed text. Learners who are very
anxious may learn best from instruction that has a highly organized structure.
These are simply examples and will be further discussed in a later section.

SCHEMAS

A schema is an organization of memory

elements (propositions, images, and
attitudes) representing a large set of meaningful information pertaining to a
general concept (Anderson, 1985). The general concept mav be a category of
objects like house, office, tree, furniture. Or the concept may be of an event, as in
going to a restaurant or watching a baseball game. Regardless of subject, a schema
contains certain features common to the set of objects or events contained in
that category. Thus, the schema for house contains information on certain
well-understood features, such as construction material, rooms, walls, roofs,
windows, and the function of human dwelling. These features are called slots, to
imply that the values they take are there to be "filled in" (how many windows,
what kind of roof, and so on).
Event schemas have similar properties, including slots. Thus, the slots to be
filled in in a restaurant schema (Schank and Abelson, 1977) include such actions
as entering the restaurant, deciding where to sit, examining a menu, ordering
from a waiter or waitress, eating food, receiving the bill, paying the bill, leaving
a tip, and leaving the restaurant. Thus, everyone who has had sufficient experi-
ence in dining in a restaurant carries around in memory a schema of roughly this
sort, containing slots into which from new experiences are fitted.
new facts
Obviously, depending on his experience, one person's "restaurant schema" will
differ from that of another person. Schemas may differ in their comprehensive-
ness as well as in the details stored in their slots. These differences may have a
particular importance to the planning of instruction whose content is related to
the schemas.
In approaching learning from newly presented instruction, learners come to
the task with various schemas already in their memories. Thus, in beginning a
lesson on the period of U.S. history encompassed by the presidential terms of
Franklin Delano Roosevelt, learners are likely to have available schemas that
contain such interconnected concepts as the Great Depression, the New Deal,
and World War II. These and other features are filled out with more elaborate
 The Learner 107

historical information by the new lesson. In learning to solve arithmetic word

problems, youngsters may solve certain problems
bv reference to schemas of
change, combine, or compare (Riley, Greeno, and Heller, 1983). For instance, a
combine schema is applicable to the kind of problem that states: "Joe and Charles
have 8 pennies together; Joe has 5 pennies; how many pennies does Charles
nave?" A learner schema of air pollution, besides containing information about
the oxides of sulfur and nitrogen and their possible origins, is likelv to include
also an attitude that influences personal choices of action toward votes on
legislation pertaining to this subject.
West, Farmer, and Wolff (1991) differentiate between knowledge (state) sche-
ma and process schema. West (1981) believes that schemas control perception.
That is, an individual sees an event or stimulus only in reference to a schema.
The schema directs attention to relevant stimuli (or perhaps more accurately,
makes a stimulus relevant); and in conjunction with existing knowledge, it gives
meaning to an event. This view implies that learning is a highly personal act.
However, to the extent that schemas are learned as a function of growth
experiences in a more or less homogeneous society, we might expect that
individuals will possess and activate similar process schemas. For example, in the
United States, we are taught a procedure for subtraction that involves a com-
ponent procedure we call borrowing. However, in Australia, children are taught a
different algorithm for subtraction that does not involve borrowing. So, with
regard to arithmetic, the word subtraction would evoke one process schema in
the United States, and quite a different one in Australia.
What the instructor should realize is that individuals do possess different
knowledge and process schemas. Therefore, what may be obvious to most
students may not make any sense at all to another. A careful analysis of a
particular individual's knowledge schema may show that there are important
prerequisite skills or knowledge missing which make it difficult or impossible to
give the present stimulus meaning. The instructional solution in this case is to
teach the prerequisites previous to the primary instructional intervention.

Abilities and Traits

In addition to the organization resulting from specific instances of learning and

experience, it has long been apparent that human performance is affected in

qualitv by even more broadly influential structures called abilities. Over a period
of manv years, these factors relating to how well new problems can be solved have
been differentiated from the original purpose of assessing general ability (Cron-
bach, 1970). In general, the abilities that can be assessed by psychological
testing tend to be stable characteristics of each human individual, persisting over
long periods of time, and not readilv changed by regimens of instruction or
practice focused upon them.
Other qualities of the performing human individual reflect personality and are
usually referred to as traits. These aspects of human performance, like abilities,
108 Principles of Instructional Design

are also persistent over relatively long periods and not readily influenced by
instruction aimed changing them. Examples of traits are introversion, con-
at
scientiousness, impulsiveness, self-sufficiency. So many traits have been assessed in so

many ways, that it is difficult and perhaps pointless to keep track of them.
Nevertheless, the possibility exists that differences in one or more traits will
exhibit an influence on learning that makes desirable the adaptation of in-
structional approaches to these differences. For example, perhaps anxious learn-
ers willbe better served by instruction that differs from the kind used with the
nonanxious learner.

Differential Abilities

It is still an unanswered question as to whether it is most useful to measure

individual differences in general ability (or intelligence) or to measure a number
of differential abilities. Scores on the latter kinds of tests show positive correla-
tions with each other, and low-to-moderate correlations with measures of
intelligence obtained from tests of general ability (such as the Stanford-Binet or
the Wechsler Scales). Such abilities, therefore, are not truly distinctive one from
another. And those who favor a view of intelligence as a general ability take
satisfaction in noting that the various measures of different abilities all contain a

g factor (for general intelligence). Various factors of differential ability have

been proposed and investigated. Among the best known systems for classifying
abilities are those of Thurstone (1938) and Guilford (1967). Some of the best

known differential abilities are contained in the following list, which includes an
indication of the kind of system used to measure each.

Reasoning: Completing nonsense syllogisms

Verbal comprehension: Comprehension of printed prose
Number facility: Speeded tests of addition, division
Spatial orientation: Identifying rotated figures
Associative memory: Recalling object or number pairs
Memory span: Immediate recall of digit lists

There are several varieties of commercially available tests designed to measure

of these sorts among others. A description of ability tests may be found
abilities

in Anastasi (1976), Cronbach (1970), and Thorndike and Hagen (1985).

Traits

The tendencies of people to respond in characteristic ways to a broad variety of

particular situations give rise to the inference that they possess certain relatively
stable personality traits (Cronbach, 1970; Corno and Snow, 1986). Many kinds
of personality traits have been defined and studied in students of a variety of
ages and types. In recent years, a great deal of research has been done on a few
 The Learner 109

traits that appear to have strong conceptual relation to human abilities as well as
to academic achievement. Some of the most widely studied traits of this sort are
achievement motivation (McClelland, 1965), anxiety (Tobias, 1979), locus of
control (Weiner, 1980), and self-efficacy (Bandura, 1982).
Research on achievement- related traits often takes the form of a search for
aptitude treatment interactions (ATI). The hypothesis being investigated is that
some varietyof instruction (called a treatment) will differ in its effectiveness for
learners scoring high and learners scoring low on a trait. In line with this idea,
studies have shown such relations with several of the traits mentioned previously
(Cronbach and Snow, 1977; Snow, 1977). Thus, learners with high achieve-
ment motivation appear to achieve better than those with low motivation when
the instruction permits a considerable degree of learner control (Corno and
Snow, 1986). Another example of ATI comes from studies of the anxiety trait.
Anxious students who were given the option of reviewing instruction on
videotape were found to learn more than anxious students who viewed the same
tapes in groups without the review option (Tobias, 1986). Some students feel
that external factors (such as luck) are responsible for the results of their
learning, whereas others attribute outcomes to their own efforts. This personal-
ity difference is called locus of control. Students with an internal attribution might
be expected to work harder and to have an active orientation to learning; this
hypothesis may account for findings of ATI with respect to this trait.

Summary of Memory Organization

The unitary things that are learned and stored in human memory may be
conceived of as learning outcomes and are called learned capabilities (R. M. Gagne,
1985). These learning capabilities are intellectual skills, verbal information,
cognitive strategies, attitudes, and motor skills. They can be acquired through
learning in a reasonably short time as a result of suitably designed instruction.
These unitary capabilities (such as particular concepts, rules, or verbal proposi-
tions) are stored in memory of larger complexes called schemas.
as part
A schema is a network of memory with each other through
entities associated
propositions, relating to an organizing general concept. There are event schemas
(shopping in a supermarket), object and place schemas (your living room),
problem schemas (elapsed clock time), and many others in the repertory of the
average person. Schemas are characterized by commonly existing features,
sometimes called slots, into which newly learned information is fitted. Thus, a
supermarket schema may contain such slots as grocery cart, produce area, bread
counter, meat counter, refrigerator, check-out counter, and the like. Newly
acquired information about any particular shopping experience tends to be
stored in these slots.

In addition to the large complexes of learned information and skills repre-

sented by schemas, there are even more general dispositions that can be revealed
by psychological tests abilities and traits. These features of human perform-
110 Principles of Instructional Design

ance, although influenced bv learning over long periods of time, are usually
considered relatively stable characteristics that are not readilv affected bv instruc-
tion. An ability like spatial orientation mav, however, have an effect on the ease
with which particular learners acquire the skills of map reading. Likewise, a
personality- trait such as anxiety may affect the readiness for learning of certain
learners when faced with a task that has severe time constraints. Relations of this
sort are studied in investigations of aptitude treatment interaction (ATI). In
practical terms, this typeof research seeks ways in which instruction can be
adaptively designed to allow for individual differences in abilities and traits.

LEARNERS AS PARTICIPANTS IN INSTRUCTION

Learners come to learning situations and to new learning tasks with certain
performance tendencies already present. In the simplest case, learners may
approach instruction on some subject or topic thev alreadv know. More fre-
quently, however, the new material may be only partially known, and gaps in
knowledge may need to be filled. Frequently also, learners may have back-
ground knowledge or knowledge that is prerequisite to the learning of new
material. Besides these direct relationships between the stored effects of prior
learning and new learning, there may be more general abilitv differences in
learners, or in groups of learners, that can profitablv be taken into account in the
design of instruction.

Designing Instruction for Learner Differences

As might be expected from our previous discussion, each of the kinds of learner
characteristics carries different implications for the design of instruction. The
most of the memorv storage of prior learning can be seen in the
direct effects
entities called learned capabilities, which include intellectual skills, verbal in-
formation, cognitive strategies, attitudes, and motor skills. Retrieval of these
previously acquired kinds of memories by the learner has a specific influence on
the learning of new material. Similar effects result from the recall of organized
information in the form of schemas, which mav provide direct support to the
accomplishment of a new learning task. Effects that are more indirect, however,
are provided by learner abilities and traits. These dispositions do not enter
directly into the new learning, but they may greatly influence the ease with
which learning processes are carried out.
When a new learning task is undertaken, the learner begins with several
varieties of memorv structures which are available for retrieval
alreadv in place,
as part of the processing of the new learning. The kinds of effects exerted by
what has been learned previously depend primarily on the objective of the new
learning (Gagne, 1980). It will be clearest, therefore, to consider how new
learning is affected by prior learning in terms of the expected outcomes of the
 The Learner 111

new learning. We shall deal with this question in the following paragraphs, in
terms of the learning outcomes that may be the principal objectives of new
learning.

£Jew Learning of Intellectual Skills

The learning of intellectual skills is most clearly influenced by the retrieval of

other intellectual skills that are prerequisite. Usually, these are simpler skills and
concepts that, when analyzed, are revealed to be actual components of the skill

to be newly learned (R. M. Gagne, 1985). Results of analysis of this sort may be
expressed as a learning hierarchy, an example of which is shown in Figure 6-3.

For the of calculating velocity from a position-time graph, the various skills
skill

in subordinate boxes are prerequisites. As the studies of White (1973) have

shown, the retrieval of these prerequisite skills has a direct supporting effect on
the learning of the targeted intellectual skill. In fact, the absence of any of the
skills in a subordinate box markedly decreases the ease of learning the superior

skill to which it is connected. Clearly, for intellectual skills, the most direct effect
of prior learning is through the retrieval of other intellectual skills that are
prerequisite components.
To be the most effective for new learning, prerequisite skills must be thor-
oughly learned, that is, learned to mastery. Presumably, this degree of learning
makes the prerequisite skills easier to recall and, therefore, more readily acces-
sible for new learning. Another condition that affects ease of retrieval is the
number of cues available to the memory search process. Aids to memory search
are provided by the cues of a schema. Accordingly, embedding the prerequisite
skill (or skills) within the organized network of a schema may be expected to

have a beneficial effect on instruction.

How will the presence of abilities and traits affect the learning of intellectual
skills? This question deserves a separately headed section since its answer applies
generally to other kinds of learning outcomes as well as to intellectual skills.

Effects of Abilities and Traits on New Learning

Human abilities are likely to affect new learning by contributing strategic
techniques of processing the learning task and its material. For example, the
ability called numerical facility, when possessed in a high degree, makes the
processing of mathematics material easier and more rapid than it is for those
whose numerical facility is low. The verbal comprehension ability has a similar
facilitative effect on the processing of material presented in the form of con-
nected prose. Spatial orientation as an ability aids in the processing of learning
tasks that include information presented as figures and spatial arrays. In each
case, the ability contributes to learning in an indirect fashion by making the
learning process easier. This effect contrasts with that of learned capabilities and
of schemas, which enter direcdy into the new learning in a substantive manner.
112 Pnnciples of Instructional Design

12. Calculates velocity

from straight-line
position-time graph

1 1 . Calculates
slope of a line
m pos. or neg.
units.

6. Calculates pos.
or neg. displace-
ment from one
point to another

2. Calculates time
interval between
two points 5. Calculates dis- 10. Calculates
placement from slope of a line
one point to given vertical
1 . Finds time after another in given and horizontal
start of a given pos. or neg. intercepts (pos.
point section or neg. section)

4. Finds displace-
ment of a point
from origin

3. Finds displace-
ment from ori-

gin of a point
on position
axis

FIGURE 6-3 A Learning Hierarchy Showing Relationships of Prerequisite Skills to the Task: Calculating
Velocity from a Straight-Line Graph of Position and Time (subordinate skills 7, 8, and 9 were found to be
invalid prerequisites and are not shown here)
(Based on a description in R. T. White &
R. M. Gagne, Formative evaluation applied to a learning hierarchy,
Contemporary Educational Psychology, 1978, 3, 87-94.)

Traits may also be expected to have an indirect effect upon the learning of
intellectual skills (and other learning outcomes). Learners who are very anxious
may be reassured by frequent feedback on their performances during practice of
a newly learned skill, and they accordingly learn more readily than under
conditions of infrequent feedback. Learners with high achievement motivation
may learn rapidly when challenged by discovery learning, whereas learners with
low achievement motivation may perform poorly.
 The Learner 113

An account of abilities and traits in instruction by Corno and Snow (1986; p.

618) conceives of their effects in the following manner. Abilities and traits in the
individual learner give rise to an aptitude complex for performance in a particular
situation. This complex engenders an attitude of purposive striving. Together
with the learner's intellectual abilities, this prevailing attitude affects the quality
or learning; along with personality traits, purposive striving influences the
quantity of learning activity ("level of effort" and "persistence"). The combined
effect of these factors of quality and quantity is to determine learner engagement,
which in turn leads to learner achievement. Quite evidently, Corno and Snow see
abilities and traits as having indirect effects upon learning. That is, these

qualities of individuals influence how they go about learning, although they do

not enter into the substance of the learning itself.
Bearing this point in mind, how can instructional design take abilities and
traits into account? Corno and Snow suggest two alternatives: (1) by
circumventing lack of aptitude, and (2) by developing aptitude. The first of
these may be simply exemplified by instructional design that uses easily read text
and elaborate learning guidance for learners exhibiting a lack of aptitude in
verbal comprehension. Developing aptitude is the other route, and it involves
instruction and practice in cognitive strategies (O'Neil, 1978; Snow, 1982).
Although much progress has been made in this area of investigation, a con-
servative view is that cognitive strategies applicable to specific task domains
are readily learnable, but generalizable strategies may require many years to
develop.

New Learning of Cognitive Strategies

As is true for intellectual skills, cognitive strategies in their initial learning call
upon previously learned memories. One would expect that there might be
readily identifiable prerequisite skills whose retrieval would aid the learning of
new cognitive strategies. For example, could a strategy such as "remembering a
list of names by associating each name in order with an object of furniture in its

place around a familiar room" be aided by retrieval of some prerequisite skills?

The answer is, of course, that prerequisite skills do in fact support this cognitive
strategy. But note the fact that these prerequisite skills are often very simple and
well known. The prerequisite skills are simply (1) identifying familiar furniture
pieces, (2) imaging familiar furniture pieces, and (3) matching the sounds of
names and objects (such as Haire and chair). Actually, it would seem that the
more general the cognitive strategy, the simpler its prerequisites. For example, a
general problem-solving strategy' is to "work the problem in steps backward
from the goal." To acquire this strategy, the learner must make use of previous
skills of the following sort: (1) identify the problem goal, and (2) place a set of

steps in backward order.

Do schemas come into play as recalled entities in the new learning of a
cognitive strategy'? Again, as in the case of intellectual skills, a schema may
provide cues for the retrieval of a strategy and its prerequisite skills. The familiar
114 Principles of Instructional Design

room is itself a schema and is useful because it is easy

in the list-learning strategy
to retrieve from memory. The "working backward" strategy, or others more
specifically oriented toward task domains, may be retrieved because it is analo-
gous to the strategy employed in another, different problem. The entire schema
representing the previously encountered problem may be retrieved to reveal the
analogy.
As for abilities and traits, they may be assumed to operate in the manner
described in the previous section. They have indirect effects on the learning of
new cognitive strategies. Some investigators propose that the aim of instruction
in cognitive strategies is to bring about aptitude development. In that case,
instruction may begin with a task that uses an
ability that has been only partially
developed and proceed to develop For example, the ability to "men-
it further.
tally rotate figures" (spatial visualization) might be initially assessed as poorly
developed in particular individuals. By instruction composed mainly of practice
and feedback, the development of this ability could be attempted. A successful
demonstration of training in spatial visualization has been conducted by Kyl-
lonen, Lohman, and Snow (1981).

New Learning of Verbal Information

The new learning and storage of verbal information requires a number of
intellectual skills relevant to the understanding and use of language. These are
skills including the employment of synonvms and metaphors in word meanings,
the rules of syntax in the formation of sentences, and the logical sequencing of
ideasamong related propositions. It is these basic skills of language comprehen-
sionand usage that strongly affect how readilv learners will acquire new knowl-
edge of the declarative variety and, ultimately, what quantity of such knowledge
will be available in their long-term memories.
The learning of new verbal information is strongly affected by retrieval of
previously learned information. The cues provided by the to-be-learned in-
formation are believed to activate concepts in the long-term memory that spread
to other items in a propositional network —the process known as spreading
activation (Anderson, 1985). Presumably, the more such ideas have been subject
to elaborative processing, the more readily will the retrieval of knowledge take
place. And the greater the elaboration of knowledge — that is, the larger and
more intricate the complex of ideas is that can be retrieved from prior learning
the more readily new verbal information will be learned and remembered.
The complex of previously learned verbal information that is retrieved to
incorporate new information occurs most often in the form of a schema. This
form of verbal information carries the meaning of an organizing concept (such
as "takingan airplane trip"). Schemas contain slots into which new information
and these help to ensure later recall. Designing instruction of the verbal
is fitted,

information sort, thus, requires that you attempt to determine what schemas are
 The Learner 115

already available to the prospective student. Learning new information about

Queen Elizabeth I, for example, is best undertaken with a readily accessible
schema that includes at least previously learned information about English royal
succession during that era.
^ As you might expect, the most important set of abilities affecting the learning
of new verbal information falls in the category of verbal comprehension. Measures
of this ability appear to evaluate cognitive strategies relating to the facile
understanding and use of language. Obviously, measures of verbal comprehen-
sion also assess, in part, the intellectual skills of word usage and syntactic and
semantic language facility, as previously mentioned. It is littie wonder, then,
that this ability has been shown in many studies to predict the ease with which
new verbal knowledge is acquired (Cronbach, 1970). If it were possible to
obtain only a single ability test score for a group of students about to learn new
verbal information, verbal comprehension would be the one to choose.

New Learning of Attitudes

When learners acquire new of certain relevant intellectual
attitudes, the retrieval
skills and verbal information may be For example, an attitude regard-
essential.

ing safety in handling certain chemical substances may require the kinds of
intellectual skills that make possible the estimation of concentrations of those
substances. The attitude involved in following a dietary prescription may re-

quire the use of previously learned intellectual skills that make possible the
For a number of reasons, verbal information may
calculation of caloric intake.
also be of importance to the learning of modification of attitudes. If a human
model is used to communicate the choice of personal action (see Chapter 5),
previously learned information must be available that identifies the model as a
familiar, respected person and attests to his or her credibility.
The most typical form for essential verbal information in the learning of
attitudes is the schema. In this case, schemas have the function of representing
the situation or situations in which the attitude will be displayed. For example, an
attitude toward association with people of different ethnic origins is evidenced
by choices of action made in a number of situations (R. M. Gagne, 1985). Is the
association likely to be in a large crowd, in an intimate family group, or on the
job? Each of these possibilities is a different situation in which the attitude
might be displayed. Schemas representing each of these situations must be
accessible in memory for the new (or reactivated) attitude to be learned. An-
other example of the necessity of situational schemas may be illustrated by the
attitude "declining to drive after drinking." The social situations that make this
attitude a desirable what need to be represented as schemas parties
one are —
with friends, extended after-dinner meetings, and the like. The attitude of
refusing to drive will be most effective if the situational schemas can be readily
recalled at the time of learning.
Are there abilities and traits that make attitude learning easier or more rapid?
116 Principles of Instructional Design

Abilities have perhaps no different effects on attitude learning than they do for
other types of learned capabilities. An ability like verbal comprehension natural-
ly facilitates the understanding and learning of verbal communications used in
instruction. As for traits, it is possible that traits such as sociability and external
locus of control may affect the ease with which learners acquire an attitude
communicated by a human model. Little evidence is available on these rela-
tionships, however, and they
judged not to be of great significance. In any
are
case, it is evident that these effects are of the indirect sort previously described.

New Learning of Motor Skills

Two kinds of prior learning are likelv to be of importance in the new learning of
motor skills. One kind consists of the part skills that are components of the total
skill being acquired. The kicking part of swimming the crawl may have been
learned separately for retrieval and use in combination with other part skills in

the learning of the total skill. When children learn to print letters, the drawing of
curved parts and straight-line parts mav be previously learned as part skills. If
already present as a result of prior learning, they may be retrieved and integrated
with the total letter-printing skill.
The other kind of prior learning essential to learning a new motor skill is
actually an intellectual skill a procedural rule (see Chapter 5). This is the aspect
of motor skill learning that Fitts and Posner (1967) identified as an early
cognitive learning stage. The skill of throwing darts at a target, for example,
requires retrieval of the procedure of holding the dart, balancing for the throw,
aiming, and releasing the dart. Whatever degree of skill may come from practice,
the procedure must always be followed for improvement to occur.
skill

Although itself an intellectual skill, the procedure mav occur and be retrieved as
part of a schema. It is reasonable to suppose, for example, that the tennis
backhand and the golf swing may be conceived as schemas.
Abilities have their usual function in the learning of motor skills. Abilities
such as speed of movement and motor coordination may be found to aid the learning
of some motor skills. Also, motor skill learning can often be shown to be
affected by spatial abilities such as spatial visualization and space relations. Cor-
relations between these abilities and motor skill learning are usually found to be
low to moderate in value.

Learner Motivation

One characteristic that should be taken into consideration when designing

instruction is learner motivation. Motivation is defined by Good and Brophy

(1990) as "... a hypothetical construct to explain the initiation, direction,

intensityand persistence of goal-directed behavior" (p. 360). In other words,
there are forces which cause a learner to engage in study behavior, focus
attention on a particular learning goal, or do extra work on an assignment.
 The Learner 117

Motivation cannot be measured directly, but we infer motivation by observing

the student's behavior.
Causes of motivation are classified as either extrinsic (external) or intrinsic
(internal) to the learner. One
type of intrinsic motivation is curiosity. Another,
quite different intrinsic motivator is social approval. By understanding what
internal factors motivate people, we can design instruction to be motivating. We
can build in questions to arouse curiosity, or we can add opportunities for social
interaction and social approval. Like the external events of instruction, external
conditions activate motivational processes or states. However, not all in-
dividuals are motivated by the same things. That is, a particular situation may
motivate one individual because of prior learning, experience, or expectations,
but not another. However, investigators of motivation have described many
principles or conditions that seem generalizable enough to warrant their con-
sideration in the design of instructional materials. Keller (1987) has developed a
model of motivational design he calls ARCS, an acronym for the following
categories of motivational conditions: attention, relevance, confidence, and satis-

faction. The ARCS model is of propositions and guidelines from

a synthesis
many different motivation theories. As shown in Table 6-1, each ARCS cate-
gory implies certain questions that a designer might ask in attending to the
problem of learner motivation. For example, under the category of attention,
the teacher or designer might capture the student's interest by showing a
cartoon or colorful graphic. To make the lesson highly relevant, one might have
the learner set his or her own goals with regard to the topic to be studied. To
build learner confidence, there should be a provision for practice with a high
degree of success; and to give the learner a feeling of satisfaction, the instruction
should provide for a reward for good performance. These are only a few specific
suggestions that can be derived from applying Keller's model. The objective of
the ARCS model is to make the theory and research in the field of motivation
more easily applied in actual instruction. The objective in attending to motiva-
tion within instructional design is to get the students to give the time and
intensity of effort necessary in order to learn the required knowledge and skills.

Applications to Instructional Design

This review of relations between characteristics of the learner and the ease and
effectiveness of learning has a number of implications for the practical task of
instructional design. The designer needs to take account of the outcomes of
learning, as indicated in Table 6-2.

SUMMARY
Learner characteristics that affect the learning of new instructional material
assume several kinds of organization in human memory. The learned capabilities
118 Principles of Instructional Design

Table 6-1 Motivational Categories of the ARCS Model

Categories and
Subcategories Process Questions

Attention

A.1. Perceptual arousal What can I do to capture their interest?

A.2. Inquiry arousal How can I stimulate an attitude of inquiry?

A.3. Variability How can I maintain their attention?

Relevance
R.1. Goal orientation How can I best meet my learners' needs? (Do I know their needs?)
R.2. Motive matching How and when can I provide my learners with appropriate choices,

responsibilities, and influences?

R.3. Familiarity How can I tie the instruction to the learners' expenences?

Confidence

C.1. Learning requirements How can I assist in building a positive expectation for success?
C.2. Success opportunities How will the learning experience support or enhance the students'

beliefs in their competence?

C.3. Personal control How will the learners clearly know their success is based on their efforts

and abilities?

Satisfaction

5.1. Natural consequences How can I provide meaningful opportunities for learners to use their

newly acquired knowledge/skill?

5.2. Positive consequences What will provide reinforcement to the learners' successes?

5.3. Equity How can I assist the students in anchonng a positive feeling about their

accomplishments?

of intellectual skills, cognitive strategies, verbal information, and attitudes,

motor skills have direct effects on the learning ofsame new instances of these
kinds of capabilities. Another kind of memory organization is represented by the
notion of abilities, which are measured by psychological tests (such as those of
Reasoning and Number Facility)- These are measures of human qualities that
predict how well certain general types of performances will be accomplished by
different individuals. Still, other characteristics of human learners fall in the
domain of traits (such as anxiety, locus of control). Abilities and traits affect new
learning in indirect ways.
Relations between characteristics of the learner and the ease and effectiveness
of learning have a number of implications for the practical task of instructional
design. The designer needs to take account of the outcomes of learning, as
described in the preceding chapter, and be cognizant of how these different
outcomes may be brought about in different learners. After all, various types of
learners may be addressed by instruction. They may be children or adults and
may, therefore, differ in the amount of prior learning they have experienced.
They may have different learned capabilities, different schemas, and different
abilities and traits. The main implications of these differences are summarized in

Table 6-2.
 The Learner 119

Table 6-2 Instructional Design for Different Learner Characteristics

Learner Characteristics Design Procedure for New Learning

Intellectual Skills Stimulate retrieval of (1 ) prerequisite skills as components of new skill, (2)

subordinate skills essential to cognitive strategies, and (3) basic skills involved

in verbal information learning, attitude learning, and motor skill learning

Cognitive Strategies Provide for retrieval when available

Verbal Information Stimulate recall of propositions that may cue retrieval of newly learned intellectual

skills. Provide retrieval of a meaningful context (schema) for new learning of

verbal information. Stimulate retrieval of situational context for attitude learn-

ing

Attitudes Activate for learning motivation

Motor Skills Recall essential part skills

Schemas Activate retrieval of schemas consisting of complex networks of propositions to

aid new learning of intellectual skills, cognitive strategies, verbal information,

attitudes, motor skills

Abilities Adapt instruction to differences in ability whenever possible. Example: Use easily

read printed text for learners low in verbal comprehension

Traits Adapt instruction to learner differences in traits when possible. Example: Provide

detailed learning guidance and frequent feedback for learners of high anxiety

As can be seen from the table, intellectual skills and cognitive strategies are

usually of help to new learning, and their retrieval needs to be provided for in
design. Stimulating the recall of verbal information makes provision for cue
retrieval and the activation of a meaningful context within which new informa-
tion can be subsumed. Previously acquired positive attitudes contribute to
motivation for learning. Motor skills that are part skills need to be retrieved as

components of the learning of new skills.

Many of these previously learned capabilities are incorporated into meaning-
ful complexes called schemas. These networks of meaningful propositions and

concepts are of considerable importance to new learning. Instructional design

procedures include provisions for detecting the presence of relevant schemas
and activating them by means of questions, advance organizers, or other devices.
Instruction for new learning can be adapted for learner differences in abilities

and traits to the extent that feasibility considerations permit. When instructions
are verbal in nature, ease of verbal comprehension is of particular importance in
the instructional design.

References

New York: Macmillan.

Anastasi, A. (1976). Psychological testing (4th ed.).
Anderson, J. R. (1985). Cognitive psychology and its implications (2nd ed.). New York:
Freeman.
Bandura, A. (1982). Self-effkacv mechanism in human Agency. American Psychologist, 37,
122-148.
120 Principles of Instructional Design

Corno, L., & Snow, R. E. (1986). Adapting teaching to individual differences among
learners. In M.
C. Wittrock (Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed.). New
York: Macmillan.
Cronbach, L. J. (1970). Essentials ofpsychological testing (3rd ed.). New York: Harper &
Row.
Cronbach, L. J., &
Snow, R. E. (Eds.). (1977) Aptitudes and instructional methods. New
.

York: Irvington.
Fitts, P. M., &
Posner, M. I. (1967). Human performance. Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Gagne, E. D. (1985). The cognitive psychology of school learning. Boston: Little, Brown.
Gagne, R. M. (1980). Preparing the learner for new learning. Theory into Practice, 19(1),
6-9.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions oflearning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
Good, T. L., &
Brophy, J. E. (1990). Basic concepts of motivation. In T. L. Good J. &
E. Brophy (Eds.), Educational psychology: A realistic approach (4th Ed.). New York:
Longman.
Guilford, J. P. (1967). The nature of human intelligence. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Hunt, E. B. (1978). Mechanics of verbal ability. Psychological Review, 85, 271-283.
Keele, S. W. (1968). Movement control in skilled motor performance. Psychological
Bulletin, 70, 387-^03.
Keller, J. M. (1987). The systematic process of motivational design. Performance and
Instruction, 26(9), 1-8.
Kyllonen, P. C, Lohman, D. F., & Snow, R. E. (1981). Effects of task facets and strategy
training on spatial task performance (Tech. Rep. No. 14). Stanford, CA: Stanford
University, School of Education.
McClelland, D. C. (1965). Toward a theory of motive acquisition. American Psychologist,
20, 321-333.
Newell, A., & Simon, H. A. (1972). Human problem solving. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall.
O'Neil, H. F., Jr. (1978). Learning strategies. New York: Academic Press.
Riley, M. S., Greeno, J. G, & Heller, J. I. (1983). Development of children's problem-
solving ability in arithmetic. In H. P. Ginsburg (Ed.), The development of mathematical
thinking. New York: Academic Press.
Rumelhart, D. E. (1980). Schemata: The building blocks of cognition. In R. J. Spiro, B.
C. Bruce, &
W. F. Brewer (Eds.), The theoretical issues in reading comprehension.
Hillsdale,NJ: Erlbaum.
Schank, R. C, &
Abelson, R. P. (1977). Scripts, plans, goals, and understanding. Hill-
sdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Snow, R. E. (1977). Individual differences and instructional theory. Educational Re-
searcher, 6(10), 11-15.
Snow, R. E. (1982). The training of intellectual aptitude. In D. K. Detterman & R. J.

Sternberg (Eds.), How and how much can Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
intelligence be increased.

Thorndike, R. L., & Hagen, E. (1985). Measurement and evaluation in psychology and
education (5th ed.). New York: Wiley.
Thurstone, L. L. (1938). Primary mental abilities. Psychometric Monographs, No. 1.

Tobias, S. (1979). Anxiety research in educational psychology. Journal of Educational

Psychology, 71, 573-582.
Tobias, S. (1986). Learner characteristics. In R. M. Gagne (Ed.), Instructional technology:
Foundations. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
 The Learner 121

Weiner, B. (1980). Human motivation. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
West, C. K. (1981). The social and psychological distortion of information. Chicago, IL:
Nelson Hall.
West, C. K., Farmer, J. A., & Wolff, P. M. (1991) Instructional design: Implications from
.

cognitive science. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

White, R. T. (1973). Research into learning hierarchies. Review of Educational Research,
43, 361-375.
Part Three
Designing
Instruction
 Defining Performance
7 Objectives

mance objectives
T.
and task
he next two chapters discuss the topics of perfor-
According to the Dick and Carey (1990)
analysis.
model for instructional design, performance objectives are written after the
process of task analysis. Actually, they are written during the process of task
analysis in order to clarify target objectives and to classify the skills to be learned
so that further analysis is possible. For that reason, we have chosen to present
the topic of performance objectives before discussing task analysis.
Instructional design technology involves correction and revision of instruc-
tion based upon the results of empirical testing. Therefore, it is essential that the
desired outcomes of the designed instruction be clearly and unambiguously
stated. These outcomes are variously referred to as behavioral objectives, learning
objectives, or performance objectives.

We define performance objective as a precise statement of a capability that,

a
if possessed by the learner, can be observed as a performance. The question the

designer must be able to answer before starting the development of any instruc-
tion is, "What will these learners be able to do after the instruction, that they
couldn't (didn't) do before?" or "How will the learner be different after the
instruction?"
Precision in the definition of objectives meets the need for communication of
the purposes of instruction and the need for evaluation of instruction. Objec-
provide a common technical basis for meeting
tives that are precisely defined
both of these needs. The instructor wants to communicate the intended out-

125
126 Principles of Instructional Design

comes of instruction to students, teachers, and parents (when appropriate).

Although these communications usually differ from one another in the wavs
they are stated, the instructor nevertheless wants all of them to express the same
idea. This goal can be best achieved by having available a technicallv complete
definition of the objective. Likewise, the instructor wants the observations (or
test) used in evaluating the outcome of learning to reflect the commonlv
understood idea of this outcome. Again, this can best be achieved by reference
to a technically adequate definiton of the outcome. Precise definitions of objec-
tives become the specification for "domains" from which items for achievement
testing are drawn (Popham, 1975). Objective definitions, thus, ensure that what
is evaluated and what is communicated as an intended learning outcome have a

common meaning.
As has often been suggested, the procedure for overcoming the ambiguitv of
course purpose statements, and therebv achieving greater precision, runs some-
what as follows: "All right, I will accept this statement as reflecting upon one of
the purposes of the course. The question now is, 'How will I know when this
"
purpose has been achieved?'
How will one know that the student "understands the principle of com-
mutativity"?
How will it be known that the student "appreciates allegorv in A Midsummer
Nighfs Dream"?
How can it be discerned that the student "comprehends spoken French"?
How can one know that the student "reads short stories with enjoyment"?
Statements regarding course purposes mav be quite successful in com-
municating general goals to fellow teachers, yet they are often not sufficiently
precise for unambiguous communication of the content and outcomes of in-
struction. The key to their ambiguity is simply that they do not tell how a person
could observe what has been accomplished without being present during the
lesson itself. Another teacher, who accepts the general purpose of the course,
may wish to know how to tell when it has been accomplished. It may be of
interest to a parent who may not know exactiy what "commutative" means but
wishes to assure himself that his son or daughter can in fact use this principle in
performing arithmetic operations. It is likely to be of interest to students who
want to be able to tell when their own performance reaches the goal that the
teacher or textbook had in mind.

ACHIEVING PRECISION IN OBJECTIVES

An objective is precisely described when it communicates to another person what

would have to be done to observe that a stated lesson purpose has in factbeen
accomplished. The statement is imprecise if it does not enable the other person
to think of how to carry out such an observation. Consider the following
instances:
 Defining Performance Objectives 127

1. "Realizes that most plant growth requires sunshine." Such a statement doesn't
say or imply how such an outcome would be observed. Does it mean that the
teacher would be satisfied with the answer to the question, "Is sunshine
necessary for the growth of most plants?" Evidently not. How, then, would
such an objective be observed?
i 2. "Demonstrates that sunshine affects plant growth." This statement implies that
the teacher must observe instances in which the student shows that he knows
the relation between sunshine and plant growth. The observation assumes the
relation between sunshine and plant growth. The observation might be made in
various ways (by using actual plants, pictures, or verbal statements). The main
point is that it tells in a general way what sort of observation is required.

A number of types of capabilities (learning outcomes) have been described in

previous chapters. In writing objectives to specify these outcomes, we use a
convention that we call the five-component objective. The five-component objec-
tive specifies the situation in which the performance is performed; the type of
learned capability; the object of the performance; the specific action the learner
takes in employing the capability; and the tools, constraints, or special con-
ditions associated with the performance. This chapter discusses the five-

component convention and the classification of objectives by learning type.

Components of Objectives

One purpose for unambiguous objectives is to enable the designer to determine

which conditions of learning should be included in the instructional materials.
The five-component objective is more specific than the definitions suggested by
other authors (Mager, 1975; Popham and Baker, 1970). The reason for greater
specificity is to communicate more information about the type of learning
outcome that is desired. We cannot directly observe that someone has acquired a
new capability. We can only infer that the capability has been attained through
the observation of satisfactory performance by the learner on a task that employs
that capability. Often, the particular performance (action) exhibited by the
learner is confused with the capability The five-component method of writing
.

objectives seeks to avoid this confusion by specifying two verbs: one to define
the capability, and a second to define the observable action. Each component of
a five-component objective serves an express purpose as described in the follow-
ing paragraphs.

Situation

What is the stimulus situation faced by the student? For example, when asked to
"type a letter," is the student given parts of the letter in longhand copy? Is the
letter to be produced from an auditory message or from notes? Obviously, what
the student actually does is highly dependent on the situation. An objective

must specify the features of this situation.

128 Principles of Instructional Design

Sometimes, it may be desirable for the objective to include a description of the

environmental conditions under which the behavior is to be performed on the
job. For example, in the case of typing a letter, is this to be done in a quiet room
with no other disturbances, or is it more likely that it will be in a bus}' office with
phone interruptions, people walking by, or other tasks coming in? For many
types of learned behavior, the environment in which the behavior is performed
may not be terribly important. However, for other performances, for example,
donning a gas mask, it may be critical.

Learned Capability Verb

Some of the problems with the use of behavioral objectives arise from ambiguity
about what type of learning outcome the demonstrated behavior actually
represents. For example the statement, "Given an IBM typewriter, types a
business letter in 15 minutes or less" tells us very little about the type of learned
capability intended. It might mean "types a copy of a letter from handwritten
draft," or it might mean a quite different capability, "composes a business
letter." This ambiguity can be reduced bv including within the objective an
indicator of the type of learned capability being demonstrated.
There are nine different learned capability verbs as shown in Table 7-1. These
pertain to four of the learned capabilities described in previous chapters and to
skills. These verbs mav be used to classify
the five subordinate types of intellectual
each of the nine types of learning outcomes. Bv including one of these verbs in
the objective, the intended behavior is more clearly communicated, and the
conditions of learning appropriate to that type of learning outcome are more
readily applied.

Table 7-1 Standard Verbs to Describe Human Capabilities, with Example of Phrases Incorporating Action

Verbs
Capability Capability Verb Example
(Action Verb in Italics)

Intellectual Skill

Discnmination discnminates discnminates by matching French sounds of u and ou

Concrete Concept identifies identifies by naming the root, leaf, and stem of representative
plants

Defined Concept classifies classifies by using a definition, the concept family

Rule demonstrates demonstrates by solving verbally stated examples, the addition

of positive and negative numbers
Higher-Order Rule generates generates by synthesizing applicable rules, a paragrpah de-

(Problem Solving) scnbing a person's actions in a situation of fear

Cognitive Strategy adopts adopts a strategy of imagining a U.S. map, to recall the states,

in writing a list

Verbal Information states states orally the major issues in the presidential campaign of

1932
Motor Skill executes executes by backing a car into a driveway

Attitude chooses chooses by playing golf as a leisure activity

 Defining Performance Objectives 129

Object

The object component indicates the content of the learner's performance. For
example, if the learned capability is the procedure for calculating the sum of two
three-digit numbers (a rule), the learned capability and its object might be stated
as "demonstrates (the learned capability verb) the calculation of the sum of two
three-digit numbers (the object)."
The example given previously could be stated as "generates a business
letter

letter" (problem solving) or "executes the typing of a business letter" (motor

skill). However, there is still some ambiguity in the objective "how is generation

of the business letter to be observed?" An indicator of the observable perfor-

mance is needed, and this is the function of the action verb.

Action Verb

The action verb describes how the performance is to be completed: "executes a

copy of a business letter by typing" describes the action one would observe (the
typing). For the problem-solving objective, the observable behavior is also
typing: "generates a business letter by typing a reply to a job inquiry." There are
innumerable action verbs: matching, writing, speaking, discussing, pointing,
selecting, drawing, and so on. Table 7-1 demonstrates how the learned capabil-

ity verbs and action verbs work together to describe a task. We will describe the
process of writing performance objectives shortly, but keep one rule in mind:
never use one of the nine learned capability verbs as an action verb. This will avoid
confusion when sequencing the objective later on.

Tools, Constraints, or Special Conditions

In some situations, the performance will require the use of special tools, certain
constraints, or other special conditions. For example, the letter may have to be
typed using a Savotti Model 11 Teletypewriter. Notice that the objective is not
aimed of skill with the Savotti; instead, it is a special condition
at the acquisition
placed on the performance of typing the letter. An example of a constraint could
be a criterion of performance; a letter might have to be completed within a
specified time, with fewer than three errors. As is true of the situation, the
indication of anv special conditions or tools may imply other prerequisite skills
that must be learned before the target skill can be adequately evaluated.

Generating Five-Component Objectives

As implied by the tide of this section, writing a five-component objective is a

problem-solving task. There are many must be applied. The first
rules that
problem to be solved is deciding what type of learning outcome the instruction
aims to produce. The next section of this chapter will discuss how five-
component objectives would be written for each of the nine types of learning,
beginning with the five subordinate kinds of intellectual skills.
130 Principles of Instructional Design

Discrimination

Discrimination performance always involves being able to see, hear, or feel

sameness or differences between stimuli. There are many reasons persons cannot
discriminate; for example, a person who is color blind cannot discriminate red
from blue. However, even persons who are physically able must learn important
discriminations. For example, sighted people must learn to discriminate a b from
a d if they are to learn to read. Objectives for this type of skill would read like the
following. (The acronym LCV is used for learned capability verb.)

[Situation] Given an illustration of three plane figures, two the same and one
different, [LCV] discriminates [object] the figure that is different [action] by
pointing to it.

Another discrimination objective might be:

[Situation] Given an illustration of the letter b and instructions to select other

illustrations that look the same from a set containing d, p, b, and q, [LCV]

discriminates [object] b [action] by circling it.

Not all cUscriminations are visual; they may also be aural, tactile, or olfactory.
For example, a cuscrimination objective that might be appropriate for someone
becoming a chef might be:

[Situation] Given a piece of fresh beef as a reference, [LCV] discriminates [object]

the smell of fresh from the smell of beef that is on the verge of spoiling [action] by
indicating that the smells are the same or different.

Notice that in the previous objective the situation did not include a descrip-
tion of the environment in which the action is to take place. Is it important that

this be specified? Maybe in an operating kitchen there are likely to be many

smells of food in preparation that would make the discrimination more difficult
than it would be in an isolated situation.

Concrete Concept

Concrete concepts require that the student be able to identify one or more
instances of a class of items. For example, how would you know if a student
understood the concept bodkin? You could ask him to describe a bodkin. If he
could describe it you might infer that he indeed knew the concept bodkin.
However, he may know what a bodkin is without being able to describe it. You
could ask him to point to, touch, or select a bodkin. You could ask for the
recognition of pictures of bodkins. All these are acceptable, although different,
ways to demonstrate that the learner possesses the concept bodkin.
The learned capability verb [LCV] used in conjunction with concrete concepts
 Defining Performance Objectives 131

is identify. Of course, in order to identify anything, the student must be able to

discriminate critical physical attributes. How could a blind person acquire the
concept bodkin? Obviously, he must distinguish the essential characteristic
physical attributes through a sense of touch.
An example of a concrete concept objective requiring multiple discrimina-
^tions might be:

[Situation] Given a set of 10 radiographic negatives of the abdomen, [LCV]

identifies [object] the gall bladder on the negatives [action] by circling it with a wax
pencil.

DeSned Concept
A defined concept is a rule that classifies objects or events (Gagne, 1985). By rule,

we mean a definition that expresses the relationships among the concept's

attributes and its function. For example, a dish is a class of things including
saucers, cups, plates, etc. A saucer might be described as a dish designed to hold
a cup. In this case, a dinner plate is not a saucer (even though it may hold a cup)
because that is not its express purpose.
The LCV associated with defined concepts is classify since what the learner has
to do is classify some instance into one or more categories, based on a verbal
description of its attributes and function, or to be able to appropriately apply the
concept when classifying an instance.
Boundary is a defined concept. If we want to express the objective of de-
termining whether the student possesses the concept boundary, we might say:

[Situation] When asked to tell what a boundary is, [LCV] classifies [object]
boundary [action] by describing or illustrating a boundary by reference to its

definition (a line indicating a limit or extent).

Another way to approach the objective would be to see whether the student
could recognize the attributes of the boundary concept, as in the following:

[Situation] Given descriptions of instances of lines which do and lines which do not
indicate the extent of an area, [LCV] classifies [object] boundaries [action] by
selecting those which conform to the definition.

Still another way to observe whether students possess a defined concept is to

have them apply it (use it) properly in a sentence; for example, 'The boundary
of a lake is marked by the line of its shore when the lake is full."

Rule

A ruleis an internal capability that governs one's behavior and enables one to

demonstrate a relationship among concepts in a class of situations (Gagne,

132 Principles of Instructional Design

1985). The inferred capability is that of demonstrating an appropriate response

to a class of stimulus situations possessing established relationships. For ex-
ample, a student applies a rule when confronted with the stimulus (236/4 = n).
The same rule applies when the stimulus is different (515/5 = n). Rules are
often given names. In this case, the rule might be called "short division," and the
student possessing the capability of applying this rule would be able to show
master\ by solving any
r
number of short division problems.
The learned capability verb associated with rules is demonstrate. A typical
example of an objective for rule outcomes is:

[Situation] Given a set of 10 numerical expressions indicating short division (abcld),

[LCV] demonstrates [object] division [action] by writing the answers [tools and
constraints] with 90% accuracv, using no special aids.

Is the objective representative of the examples of short division given above?

It is not specific enough if the problems are to be limited to the tvpe shown. A
more would be "short division of three-digit numbers
accurate object statement
by a one-digit number, with no remainder." Are the rules different for division
by a number that leaves a remainder? To the extent they are, it is desirable to be
specific so that the components of the task can be accurately described and
appropriate instruction accordingly designed.
To learn this rule, the student must be familiar with rules of multiplication
and subtraction. To multiplv, the student must be familiar with rules of addi-
tion. One reason that most rules are complex is that they require previously
learned concepts and rules.

Problem Solving
Gagne (1985) defines a problem as one in which the learner selects and uses
rules to find a solution in a novel situation. What the learner acquires during the
process of problem solving is a new higher-order rule. The new rule is a synthesis
of other rules and concepts. This higher-order rule may then be used by the
learner to solve other problems of the same tvpe.
One problem in writing learning outcomes associated with problem-solving
skills is separating the process of problem solving from the statement of a

desired learning outcome. The desired learning outcome is an expression of

relationships among other rules and concepts. The student must generate this
higher-order rule and also apply it in order to achieve a solution to a novel
problem. We suggest that when writing statements of learning outcomes, the
instructor focus on what is being constructed by the learner.
The verb we associate with problem solving is generate. An example of a
problem- solving objective is:

[Situation] Given the description of a construction project in a playground, [LCV]

generates [object] an expression regarding the relationship between the time it takes
 Defining Performance Objectives 133

to do a task and the number of workers performing the task [action] explaining the
rule orally to the teacher.

Problem-solving objectives are not always easy to write, mainly because

problem-solving skills are usually not formally taught. Instead, most teachers
present problem-type situations and then verify whether or not the student has
the problem-solving skill. A source of confusion among novice designers may
occur in differentiating between rule-using and problem-solving objectives. The
distinction can be kept clear by asking the questions "demonstrate what rule?"
and "generate what rule?" If the learners are given the rule and asked to apply it,
the skill is rule learning; if they must generate the new rule or develop a
synthesis of already existing rules, it is problem solving.

Cognitive Strategy

By cognitive strategies, we mean internally directed control processes that regulate

and moderate other learning processes. Gagne (1985) describes a number of
types of cognitive strategies, including those which control attending, encoding,
retrieval, and problem solving. Bruner (1971) distinguishes between the skills of
problem solving and problem finding, the latter of which is a cognitive strategy
requiring the location of "incompleteness, anomaly, trouble, inequity, and
contradiction" (p. 111). Again, it is important to differentiate between the
product of a cognitive strategy and the statement of the strategy itself as an
outcome of instruction. For example, most persons can memorize a list of 10
items if given enough time. However, some can memorize the list much faster
and remember it longer. Perhaps this is the result of their having a more efficient
and effective encoding strategy. Research has demonstrated (Rohwer, 1975)
that encoding strategies that facilitate learning can readily be suggested to the
learner.
When learners acquire new ways of focusing their attention,
encoding materi-
al may be using
to be learned, or retrieving previously learned knowledge, they
novel cognitive strategies that they have discovered themselves. Otherwise,
strategies may be acquired by being directiy described to learners and sub-
sequently practiced. Generally, students apply existing strategies that have
worked in the past. A verb to describe such a process is adopt. That is, learners
may adopt as control processes the kinds of strategies that aid various other
processes relevant to particular learning tasks.
Using the verb adopt, a cognitive strategy related to encoding may be stated
as:

[Situation] Given a list of 10 items to be memorized, [LCV] adopts [object] the

key-word mnemonic technique [action] for memorizing the list, using no mechani-
cal aids, within 30 seconds, and with a retention for at least 49 hours.
134 Principles of Instructional Design

Notice that this objective does not give the student the mnemonic. Instead, it
implies that the student will adopt a mnemonic using an already known tech-
nique. Can a student actually "originate" a cognitive strategy? The answer to
this question is probably yes, but we suggest that this would be an instance of
problem solving —the student would be "generating a strategy" which, if it is

effective, could be implemented for similar learning For instructional

tasks.
purposes, we are usually more interested in the adoption of strategies rather
than in their generation.

Verbal Information

Verbal information refers to information (names, facts, propositions) that can

be verbalized. It is also called declarative knowledge (Anderson, 1985). According
to Gagne (1985), a distinction should be made between the learning of verbal
chains and the learning of verbal information. The former is a tvpe of association
learning, where each element of the chain must be previously learned before the
entire chain can be reconstructed. Individuals can learn extremely long verbal
chains and recall them verbatim, without having any comprehension of what the
words mean. An essential characteristic of verbal information learning, on the
other hand, is that it consists of propositions that are semantically meaningful.
The verb we associate with verbal information is states. We differentiate the
learned capability of stating from the actions of stating, either "in writing" or
"orally." An example of a verbal information objective is:

[Situation] Given a verbal question, [LCV] states [object] three causes of the Civil
War [action] orally or in writing [constraints] without references.

Could students memorize three causes of the Civil War as a verbal chain and
lead the teacher to conclude that they had mastered the above objective? Yes,
and many students probably do this because the teacher doesn't require that
they present the information in any other way. A modification of this objective
would be to add the condition "in your own words" to the objective. However,
the fact that the student may recall something verbatim does not necessarily
mean that it is not stored in memory as a set of meaningful propositions. The
proof of this would come when the student is required to use the same
information in some meaningful way. For example, the student might learn that
hamsters eat grain. If a teacher asked, "What do hamsters eat?" a possible answer
would be "grain" as a verbal chain. However, the same answer to a different
question, "What will you feed the hamster?" shows that the student has acquired
the information in a meaningful way.

Motor Skills

Some behaviors require their expression in coordinated, precise muscular move-

ments. Examples of these kinds of performances would be gymnastic skills such
 Defining Performance Objectives 135

as a back- flip or a jack-knife dive. Less obvious are common skills like walking or
riding a bicycle.Forming a letter on paper, using a pen, requires the coordinated
use of muscles, and most teachers recognize that some students have greater
proficiency at this skill than do others.
• The verb we associate with motor skills is execute. A typical objective might
be:

[Situation] At a swimming pool on

a 3-meter board [LCV] executes [object] a
jack-knife dive [action] by diving [constraints] with smooth and continuous move-
ment, entering the water in a vertical position. Notice that the statement of the
action, "by diving," is redundant here because there is only one way to demonstrate
execution of the dive.

Study the following objective: "Given a blood pressure apparatus, the student
executes the procedure of taking someone's blood pressure." Is this a motor
skill?Probably not because the student already has the requisite motor skills and
is only applying a procedure (rule learning). However, "Given a hypodermic

syringe, executes an intravenous injection, missing the vein no more than one
time in twenty" probably is a motor skill, in that precision, timing, and
coordination of muscular performance are involved.

Attitude

When an attitude is specified as the desired learning outcome, it is a choice of

personal action that the learner is expected to exhibit. For example, a description
of behavior might be "the student will choose to vote when the opportunity
presents itself." Obviously, the concept of choice means that people are free to
"not vote" if they many determinants of attitudes, including
so desire. There are
situational factors.For instance, one person may choose to vote if it is physically
convenient but choose not to vote if it is inconvenient. It might be said that a
person has a positive attitude toward voting as long as it is not inconvenient. We
might wish, as an alternative, to specify an attitude change that would involve
learner inconvenience: "will choose to vote even if it is inconvenient."
The learned capability verb used to classify attitude objectives is choose. A
typical attitude objective that could be the focus of an educational program
might be:

[Situation] When harmful drugs are being used by peers [LCV] chooses [action] to
refuse [object] drugs when offered.

Martin and Briggs (1986) point out that many cognitive behaviors have
affective components. For example, mathematical operations are taught as
cognitive skills, but it is hoped that the learner will choose to feel that mathemat-
ics knowledge is important to learn (for reasons other than a course grade). If

designers attempt to specify the attitudinal components, they will likely pay
136 Principles of Instructional Design

attention to the context in which the cognitive skills are presented, attempting

to make the newly learned skill meaningful (relevant) for the learner and
building as much reinforcement into the learning situation as possible.

Statements of Objectives and Criteria of Performance

Some systems of writing performance objectives (Mager, 1975) require the

inclusion of a criterion of performance in the objective.The system we suggest
does not. That is, do not necessarily describe
the objective statements themselves
"how many times the student is to demonstrate the addition of mixed numbers,"
or how many "errors" will be permitted. There are two reasons why a designer
might wish to avoid including the criterion statement in the objective. First, the
necessary criteria are likely to be different for each type of human capability, and
it is desirable to avoid the error of thinking they can be the same. For example, if

a skill is prerequisite to learning another skill, the level of performance specified

to denote master)' might have to be higher than if the skill is not prerequisite to
learning another skill. Second, the question of criteria of performance is a
measurement question and should be considered with assessment procedures.
At the point in instructional planning when objectives are being described, it is
potentially confusing to be concerned with assessment procedures. (Such pro-
cedures are described in Chapter 13.)
However, if the criteria of performance for a given task are already known at
the time of writing the objective, the criterion statement can become a com-
ponent of the objective, falling under the category of "tools, constraints, and
special conditions." It would be perfectly acceptable to have an objective like the
following:

Given a 3-page handwritten manuscript, executes typing of the manuscript within

20 minutes with fewer than six errors.

EXAMPLES OF OBJECTIVES

One of the first questions from new learners of the five-component format is, "Is
it really practical to require that all five components be specified?" Our answer is

that an objective statement is written for the purpose of unambiguous com-

munication of intent. If you can communicate unambiguously without all five

components, then do so. For example, take the objective, "States the names of
the 50 states in the United States of America." This seems like a pretty un-
ambiguous statement, and all that is included is the learned capability verb and
the object. But notice that even in this objective there are many assumptions: a
classroom situation, a verbal question, 100% recall, and a written or oral
response. There is nothing wrong with the objective as stated, but it leaves some
of the components open for interpretation.
 Defining Performance Objectives 137

The following examples show how the five-component format can be used in
a number of different subject areas to make vaguely stated objectives more
specific.

Examples in Science Instruction

Suppose that the instructional designer formulates in a written statement the

purposes to be accomplished by a course of instruction. If the lesson is one of
science, the following purposes might be considered. These have been ab-
stracted from a list of objectives for junior high school science instruction
prepared by the Intermediate Science Curriculum Study (1973).

1 Understanding the concept of an electric circuit

2. Knowing that a major advantage of the metric system in science is that its units
are related by factors of 10
3. Taking personal responsibility for returning equipment to its storage places

Objective No. 1 —The Concept of an Electric Circuit

Objective 1 is a fairly The first question

straightforward purpose for instruction.
to be asked by an instructional designer "What kind of capability am I
is,

looking for here?" Do I mean by "understanding" something like "stating what

an electric circuit is?" No, that would not be convincing since it might merely
indicate that the student had acquired some verbal information which he could
repeat, perhaps in his own words. Do I mean "distinguishing an electric circuit
from a noncircuit when shown two or more instances?" No, I cannot be sure
that the student has the understanding I wish in this case because he may simply
be able to pick up the cue of an open wire in the instances shown him and
respond on that basis. What I actually want the student to do is to show me that
he can use a rule for making an electric circuit in one or more specific situations.

The do with the flow of electric current from a source

rule to be learned has to
through a connected set of conductors and back to the source. The student
could be asked to exhibit this performance in one or more situations.
The result of this line of reasoning is an objective statement that puts together
the necessary components as follows:

[Situation] Given and socket, and pieces of wire, [LCV]

a battery, light bulb
demonstrates [object] the making of an by connecting wires
electric circuit [action]

to battery and socket and [constraint] testing the lighting of the bulb.

Objective No. 2 —Knowing Something About the Metric System

The statement of purpose in objective 2 implies that some verbal information is

to be learned. Again, the first question to be asked by the instructional designer

138 Principles of Instructional Design

is, "What do I mean by 'knowing' this fact about the metric system? What will
convince me that the student 'knows'?" In this instance, the designer may readily
come to the conclusion that "knowing" means being able to state the particular
fact about the metric system. Accordingly, the identification of the required
capability as verbal information is fairly straightforward. The resulting objective
can then be constructed as follows:

[Situation] Given the question, "What major advantage for scientific work do the
units of the metric system have?" [LCV] states [object] the "tens" relationship
among units [action] by writing [constraints] in his own words.

Objective No. 3 —Taking Responsibility for Equipment

In thinking over the instructional purpose for objective 1, the designer will
immediately realize that it is not concerned with whether the students are able to
put equipment back in its place but rather with whether they tend to do so on all

appropriate occasions. The word responsibility implies that the actions of a

student may occur at any time and are not expected to result from any specific
direction or questions. The designer must ask, "What would convince me that
The answer to this question
1

the student is 'taking responsibility of this sort?"

implies that the objective in this case deals with choices of personal action, in
other words, with an attitude.
The standard method of constructing the objective would, therefore, take this
form:

[Situation] Given occasions when laboratory activities are completed or terminated

[LCV] chooses [object] courses of action [action] returning equipment to its

storage places.

An Example from English Literature

A second example of the procedure for constructing statements of objectives

comes from a hypothetical course in English literature. Suppose that a set of
lessons in such a course had the following purposes:

1. Identifying the major characters in Hamlet

2. Understanding Hamlet's 'To be, or not to be" soliloquy
3. Being able to recognize a metaphor

Objective No. 1 —Identifying the Major Characters in Hamlet

Objective 1, according to our model, involves using definitions to classify. In
this case, the student is being asked to Hamlet in accor-
classify characters in

dance with their functions within the plot of the play. Under most circum-
stances, it would be assumed that doing this by way of verbal statements would
 Defining Performance Objectives 139

be convincing. That is, the student answers a question like "Who was Claudius?"
by denning Claudius as the king of Denmark, Hamlet's uncle, who is suspected
by Hamlet of having killed his father. The objective can be constructed as
follows:

i
[Situation] Given oral questions about the characters of Hamlet (such as "Who was
Claudius?") [LCV] classifies [object] the characters [action] by denning their
relationship to the plot.

Objective No. 2 — Understanding Hamlet's Soliloquy

Objective 2 has a much more interesting and presumably more important
instructional purpose. The instructional designer needs to ask, "How will I
know if the student 'understands' this passage?" In all likelihood, the answer to
this question is to "ask the student to express the thoughts of the passage in
words that simplify or explain their meaning." (An example would be explaining
that 'To be, or not to be" means "to remain living or not.") To accomplish such
a task, the student must solve a series of problems, bringing a number of
intellectual skills to bear upon them such as rules for using synonyms, rules for
defining, and the concepts of figures of speech. In sum, the student will be asked
to generate a paraphrase of the soliloquy. It is, then, a problem-solving task, or

more precisely a whole

of problems, in which subordinate rules must be
set
applied to the generation of higher-order rules. The latter cannot be exacdy
specified, of course, since one does not know exacdy how the student will solve
each problem.
As a result of this analysis, the following objective might be composed:

[Situation] Given instructions to interpret the meaning of Hamlet's 'To be, or not
to be" soliloquv in simple terms [LCV] generates [object] an alternative com-
munication of the soliloquy [action] by writing appropriate sentences of simple
content.

Objective No. 3 —Recognizing Metaphors

Even in its expression, objective 3 has the appearance of representing a some-
what less complex purpose than objective 2. It ma}' be evident, also, that if

students are able to generate a paraphrased soliloquy, they must be able to detect
the metaphoric meaning of such phrases as "to take arms against a sea of
troubles." In this simpler example of a purpose, then, the question for the
instructional designer is, "What will convinvce me that the student can 'recog-
nize' ametaphor?" Obviously, a metaphor is a concept, and since it is not
something that can be denoted by pointing, it must be a defined concept. The
performance to be expected of the student, then, will be one of classifying a
metaphor in accordance with a definition.
140 Principles of Instructional Design

The resulting objective might be stated as follows:

[Situation] Given a list of phrases, some of which are metaphors and some not,
[LCV] classifies [object] the metaphors [actions] bv picking out those that conform
to the definition, rejecting those that do not.

An alternative objective (and possibly a better one) for this instructional

purpose would be:

[Situation] Given a phrase containing a verb participle and an object (as "resisting
corruption") [LCV] classifies [object] a metaphor bv selecting an example
[action]
which accords with the definition (as "erecting a bulwark against corruption").

An Example from Social Studies

A course in social studies in junior high school might have the following
purposes:

1. Knowing terms of office for members of the two houses of Congress

2. Interpreting bar charts showing growth in agricultural production
3. Applying knowledge of the "judicial review" process of the Supreme Court

Objective No. 1 —Terms of Office for Congress

The intended outcome in this case is information. It is, of course, rather simple
information and, therefore, something that might be learned in grades before
high school. As an objective, this purpose may be stated as follows:

[Situation] Given the question, "In what terms of office do members of both houses
of Congress serve?" [LCV] states [object] the terms for House and Senate members
[action] orally.

Objective No. 2 —Interpreting Bar Charts

Often, an important kind of objective in social studies is an intellectual skill.

Interpreting charts is There may be several such skills of

a rule-using skill.

increasing complexity to be learned. Consequendy, particular attention has to be

paid to the description of the situation. More complex charts may require several
intellectual skills or a combination of them. This objective may be illustrated by
the following example:

[Situation] Given a bar chart showing production of cotton balesby year during the
period 1950-1960 [LCV] demonstrates [object] the finding of years of maximal
and minimal growth [action] by checking appropriate bars.
 Defining Performance Objectives 141

Objective No. 3—Applying Knowledge of Judicial Review

The statement of this goal is somewhat ambiguous. It might best be interpreted
as one of solving problems pertaining to the Supreme Court's judicial review
function and exhibiting knowledge by so doing. Such an objective might be
istated in the following way:

[Situation]Given the statement of an issue of constitutionality contained in a

Act of Congress and reference to the constitutional principle to be in-
fictitious
voked, [LCV] generates [object] a proposed judicial opinion [action] in written
form.

USING OBJECTIVES IN INSTRUCTIONAL PLANNING

When instructional objectives are defined in the manner described here, they
reveal the fine-grained nature of the instructional process. This in turn reflects
the fine-grained characteristics of is learned. There may be scores of
what
objectives for the single topic of a course and several for each individual lesson.
How does the instructional designer employ these objectives in his develop-
ment of topics, courses, or curricula? And how does the teacher use objectives?
Can the teacher, as the designer of an individual lesson, make use of lengthy lists
of objectives? Many such lists are available, it may be noted, for a variety of
subjects in all school grades.

Objectives and Instruction

The instructional designer, or design team, faces the need to describe objectives
as part of each individual lesson. Typically, there will be several distinct objec-
tives for a lesson.Each may then be used to answer the question, "What kind of
a learning outcome does this objective represent?" The categories to be de-
termined are those corresponding to the major verb indicating capability. That
is, the objective may represent verbal information, an intellectual skill in one of

its subvarieties, a cognitive strategy, an attitude, or a motor skill. Having

determined the categories of a lesson's objectives, the designer will be able to

make decisions about the following matters:

1 Whether an original intention about the lesson's purpose has been overlooked
or inadequately represented
2. Whether the lesson has a suitable "balance" of expected outcomes
3. Whether the approach to instruction is matched to the type of objective in each
case

The Balance of Objectives

The objectives identified for each lesson are likely to represent several different
categories of learning outcome. First, it may be possible to identify a primary
142 Principles of Instructional Design

objective —one without which the lesson would seem hardly worthwhile. In
addition, however, there are necessarily bound to be other objectives that must
be learned prior to the desired objective. Thus, the lesson that has an intellectual
skill as its primary objective is likely to be supported by other objectives

or attitudes. As an example, one

classifiable as cognitive strategies, information,
might expect having as its primary objective the intellectual skills of
a lesson
"demonstrating chemical equations for the oxidation of metals" to also include
objectives pertaining to information about common metallic oxides and to
include favorable attitudes toward possessing knowledge about metallic oxides.
How to reflect these several objectives in lesson design is a subject for later
chapters. The first step, however, is to see that a reasonable balance of the
expected outcomes is attained.

Designing Instruction

Clearly, then, the systematic designof lessons making up a topic or course will
result in the development of of statements of objectives.
a sizeable collection
This collection will grow as lessons are developed and assembled into topics.
Decisions about the correspondence of these objectives with original intentions
for the topic and course, and judgments about the balance of objectives, can also
be made with reference to these larger instructional units. As in the case of the
individual lesson, these decisions are made possible by the categorization of
objectives into types of capabilities to be learned.
The teacher's design of the single lesson also makes use of individual state-
ments of objectives and the classes of capabilities they represent. The in-
structional materials available to the teacher (textbook, manual, or whatever)
may identify the objectives of the lesson directly. More frequently, the teacher
may need to (1) infer what the and (2) design the lesson so that
objectives are
the objectives represented in the textbook are supplemented by others. For
purposes of planning effective instruction, the determination of categories of
expected learning outcomes is as important to the teacher as it is to the design
team. The teacher, for tomorrow's lesson, needs to make decisions about the
adequacy with which the lesson's purpose is accomplished and about the relative
balance of the lesson's several expected outcomes.

Objectives and Assessment

Fortunately, the of individual objectives developed in a systematic design

lists

effort have a second use. Descriptions of objectives, as we have said, are

descriptions of what must be observed to verify that the desired learning has
taken place. Consequently, statements of objectives have direct implications for
assessing student learning (see Chapter 13).
The teacher may use objective statements to design situations within which
student performance can be observed. This is done to verify that particular
outcomes of learning have in fact occurred. Consider the objective: "Given a
 Defining Performance Objectives 143

terrain map of the United States and information about prevailing winds,
demonstrates the location of regions of heavy rainfall bv shading the map
[applying a rule]." This description more or less directly describes the situation a
teacher can use to verify that the desired learning has taken place. A student or
.
group of students could be supplied with terrain maps, prevailing wind informa-
tion, and asked to perform this task. The resulting records of their performances
would serve as an assessment of their learning the appropriate rule.
With comparable adequacy, statements of objectives can serve as bases for the
development of teacher-made tests. These in turn mav be employed for formal
kinds of assessment of student performance, when considered desirable by the
teacher. Alternatively, they can be used as "self-tests" that students employ when
engaging in individual study or self-instruction.
The classes of objectives described in this chapter constitute a taxonomy that
is applicable to the design of many kinds of assessment instruments and tests. A
somewhat although not incompatible, taxonomy of objectives is de-
different,
scribed in thework of Bloom (1956) and in that of Krathwohl, Bloom, and
Masia (1964). The application of this latter taxonomy to the design of tests and
other assessment techniques is illustrated in many subject-matter fields in the
volume edited by Bloom, Hastings, and Madaus (1971). This work describes in
detail methods of planning assessment for most areasof the school curriculum.
Further discussion of methods for developing tests and test items based on
the categories of learning outcomes described in this chapter is contained in
Chapter 13.

SUMMARY
The and definition of performance objectives is an important step
identification
in the design of instruction. Objectives serve as guidelines for developing the
instruction and for designing measures of student performance to determine
whether the course objectives have been reached.
Initiallv, the aims of instruction are frequently formulated as a set of purposes

for a course. These purposes are further refined and converted to operational
terms bv the process of defining the performance objectives. These describe the
planned outcomes of instruction, and they are the basis for evaluating the
success of the instruction in terms of its intended outcomes. It is recognized, of
course, that there are often unintended or unexpected outcomes, judged, when
laterobserved, to be either desirable or undesirable.
This chapter has presented a five-component guide to the writing of perfor-
mance objectives. The five elements are:

1 Situation
2. Learned capability
3. Object
4. Action
5. Tools and constraints
144 Principles of Instructional Design

Examples are given, showing how these components can be used to make
unambiguous statements of objectives for different school subjects. The ex-
amples chosen also illustrate objectives for various categories of learned capa-
bilities.

Special attention is called to the need for care in choosing action verbs suitable
both for describing the learned capability inferred from the observed perfor-
mance and for describing the nature of the performance itself. Table 7-1
presents a convenient summary of major verbs and action verbs.
The kinds of performance objectives described for the various categories of
learned capabilities play an essential role in the method of instructional design
presented in this book. Precisely formulated definitions of objectives within
each category serve as a technical base from which unambiguous com-
munications of learning outcomes can be derived. Different communications of
objectives, conveving approximately a common meaning, may be needed for
teachers, students, and parents. At the same time, precisely denned objectives
relate the same common meanings to the construction of tests for evaluation of
student performance, as will be indicated later in Chapter 13.

References

Anderson, J. R. (1985). Cognitive psychology and its implications (2nd ed.). New York:
Freeman.
Bloom, B. S. (Ed.). (1956). Taxonomy of educational objectives. Handbook I: Cognitive

domain. New York: McKay.

Bloom, B. S., Hastings, J. T., & Madaus, G. F. (Eds.). (1971). Handbook on formative
and summative evaluation of student learning. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Bruner, J. S. (1971). The relevance of education. New York: Norton.
Dick, W., & Carey, L. (1990). The systematic design of instruction (3rd ed.). Glenview, IL:
Scott Foresman.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions of learning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
Intermediate Science Curriculum Study (1973). Individualizing objective testing. Tallahas-
see, FL: ISCS, Florida State University.
Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., &
Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of educational
objectives. Handbook II: Affective domain. New York: McKay.

Mager, R. F. (1975). Preparing objectives for instruction (2nd ed.). Belmont, CA: Fearon.
Martin, B., & Briggs, L. J. (1986). The cognitive and affective domain. Englewood Cliffs,

NJ: Educational Technology Publications.

Popham, W. J. (1975). Educational evaluation. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Popham, W. J., & Baker, E. L. (1970). Establishing instructional goals. Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Rohwer, W. D., Jr. (1975). Elaboration and learning in childhood and adolescence. In
H. W. Reese (Ed.), Advances in child development and behavior (Vol. 8). New York:
Academic Press.
 Analysis of the Learning
8 Task

clarity in
D esigning instruction for a course or topic must
surely begin with an idea of the purpose of what
conception of the outcomes of instruction
is being designed. The greatest
is achieved when human
performances are described in the form of objectives. The question initially
asked by the designer is not, "What will the students be studying?" but rather,
"What will students be doing after they have learned?" This means that design
begins with a consideration of the instructional objectives.
In describing a procedure for instructional design, it is difficult to decide
whether all the objectives (of a course or topic) should be specified as a first step
or only some of them. This difficulty arises because there are at least two kinds of
objectives involved in instructional design: (1) those to be attained at the end of
a course of study, and (2) those that must be attained during a course of study
because they are prerequisites to the former type. The first kind may be called
target objectives and the second enabling objectives. In a course in reading,
"classifying the main idea of a paragraph" is a target objective, whereas "classify-
ing the meaning of unfamiliar words from context" might be considered an
enabling objective.
The procedure adopted for description here is one that begins with the target
objectives. A "top-down" procedure is then employed to determine what ena-
bling objectives are prerequisite to the attainment of the target objective.

145
146 Principles of Instructional Design

SCOPE OF THE ANALYSIS

When doing an instructional task analysis, the scope of the task must be taken
into consideration. Is the analysis related to a course (generally containing many
skills), or is it related to a lesson (generally a particular skill)? Actually, the
process of task analysis is the same for both, but the scope of the analysis and the
number of steps in the analysis are different.
Starting with a course, it is necessary to identify the purposes of the course. At

this stage of course development it isn't necessary to attempt to formulate

specific five-component objectives; however, many of the same guidelines apply
to defining purposes.

1. The statement of purpose of a course should be concerned with what the

student will be like after what he
doing during the course.
the instruction, not is

For example, the statement 'To provide the learner experience with chemical
apparatus" describes what the student will be doing in the course, not what he
will be learning. What is the purpose of experience with chemical apparatus?
One might be 'To be able to state the names of different kinds of chemical
apparatus." Another might be 'To be able to assemble apparatus for chemical
experiments."
2. In stating cause purposes, avoid the tendency to identify those that are too far
removed, too far in the future. Purposes should be stated in expected current
outcomes of instruction. For example, rather than a purpose such as "acquires a
lifelong respect for chemistry," it would be more realistic to say "states how
chemistry is important for an understanding of the world around us." There is

nothing wrong with the lifelong goal, but it is probably not going to occur as
the result of a single course, which is but a part of all instruction leading to
lifetime respect.

In summary, a good way to start the task analysis process for a course is to define
the course purpose. Examples of acceptable course purposes include:

1. Understands commutative properties in multiplication

2. Can recognize tonal differences among different instruments of the same family
3. Reads with enjoyment short stories with a simple plot

As discussed in Chapter 7, these course purposes can be translated into more

specific learning outcome statements, such as:

1. Demonstrates that A x B is equivalent to B x A, by example, citing the

commutative property
2. Presented with a recording of a violin, viola, or cello, identifies each instrument
by writing its name
3. During free reading, chooses to read short stories with a simple plot as

evidenced by a reading log

 Analysis of the Learning Task 147

These examples show how course purposes, even though originally broadlv
stated, can be classified by type of outcome and stated so that the outcomes of
instruction are clear.

*TYPES OF TASK ANALYSIS

There are two major classes of task analysis. The first is generally referred to as a
procedural task analysis but is also sometimes called an information-processing
analysis. The second type of task analysis is called a learning-task analysis.

Procedural Task Analysis

A procedural task analysis describes the steps in performing a task, for example,
the steps in the process of changing a tire or balancing a checkbook. A specific
example of a procedural task analysis for making sentences with indefinite
pronouns is shown in Figure 8-1.
Such an analysis involves breaking the task down into steps that the learner
must perform to complete the task. Notice that the task shown in Figure 8-1 has
both observable steps (write the indefinite pronoun) and mental steps (recall a
verb and make a decision whether to use a singular or plural form). Therefore,
the analysis goes beyond the observed behaviors, and it accounts for the in-
tellectual skills that are components of the total task. No doubt, this accounts for
the off-used name of this analysis method as "information processing."
The distinction between choice and action implies that a diagram of the
resulting analysis needs to identify more than a series of steps it needs to —
distinguish different kinds of steps. Thus, a more traditionally represented
flowchart would be one like that of Figure 8-2.
Although the conventions of such flowcharts vary, the symbol of a trapezoid
is often used to represent an input, a rectangle an action, and a diamond a choice

or decision.

Another example of an information-processing analysis is shown in Figure

8-3, for the task of subtracting two-place numbers. Information- processing

Write
Singular
Write Recall Is
form of Recall
Action Subject verb Object-
indefinite .

pronoun (Verb) Singular? concept

Concept Write
plural
form of
verb

FIGURE 8-1 Steps in the Process of Making Sentences with Indefinite Pronouns as Subjects
148 Principles of Instructional Design

diagrams of a number of other tasks in mathematics learning are described by

Resnick (1976) and by Greeno (1976). An analysis of reading, including both
decoding and comprehension skills, has been made by Resnick and Beck
(1977). The application of this type of analysis to the task of balancing a
checkbook has been described by Merrill ( 1971). A more complete discussion of
this and alternative task-analysis techniques may be found in Jonassen, Han-
num, and Tessmer (1989).

Uses of Information-Processing Analysis

Two primary kinds of information come from information-processing analysis.

First, such an analysis, and the diagram which results from it, provide a clear
description of the target objective, including the steps involved in the procedure.
Figure 8-3, for example, describes the performance of subtracting in a way that
reveals its sequential steps. This which conveys more informa-
is a description
tion than the objective statement "Given two numbers, demonstrates the pro-
cess of subtraction." A flow chart of the procedure makes it possible for the

Write plural Write singular

form of verb form of verb
I

FIGURE 8-2 Beginning Portion of a Flowchart Applicable to the Target Objective: Writing Sentences with
the Pronoun "everyone" as Subject
 Analysis of the Learning Task 149

to A

^nput

Subtract Record
Add 10 right difference in
to n column right column

Record
Subtract left
difference in
column End
left column

Square boxes
represent
action

FIGURE 8-3 An Information-Processing Analysis of the Subtraction of Two-Place Numbers

(From R. M. Gagne, Analysis of objectives. In L.Briggs (Ed.), Instructional design. Copyright 1977 by
J.

Educational Technology Publications, Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Reprinted by permission.)

instructional designer to specify the sequence of the target performance for

presentation to the learner.
A second use of information-processing analysis arises from its revelation of
the individual steps that might not otherwise be obvious. This is particularly
true of the decision steps since they are, after of internal processing
all, instances
rather than of overt behavior. For example, the decisions indicated by the
diagram of Figure 8-3 imply that the learner must be able to distinguish the
larger from the smaller of two numbers in order to earn' out the task of
subtraction. This is a specific skill which must be acquired if it is not known
already. It becomes one of the target objectives which make up the total task of
subtracting two-place numbers.
After an information-processing analysis is completed, the component skills

can be written as five-component objectives. These become the target objectives

for the lesson or lessons. Writing five-component objectives requires that the
designer classify the target skills according to type of learning outcome. This
150 Principles of Instructional Design

makes it possible to perform the second kind of task analysis, a learning-task

analysis.

Learning-Task Analysis

When the target objectives have been specified, thev mav be submitted to
another analysis to identify prerequisite competencies or enabling skills. Thus,
one is from target objectives to enabling objectives. Both these
able to progress
types of objectives must be incorporated into designed instruction.
In its most general meaning, a prerequisite is a task which is learned prior to
the learning of a target objective and which "aids" or "enables" that learning.
Any given task may, of course, be a target objective for a particular lesson and, at
the same time, be an enabling objective for a subsequent lesson because it is a
prerequisite of the task to be learned in the later lesson. For example, the target
objective of finding the diagonal distance across a rectangular plot of land
obviously has as prerequisites theskills of (1) measuring the distance along the

sidesof the rectangle and (2) applying the rule for computation of the
hypotenuse of a right triangle. These two enabling capabilities may have been
learned some years prior to the lesson designed to teach the target objective
(finding the diagonal distance), or thev mav have been learned immediately
before or even during the same lesson.

Types of Prerequisites

It may help to classify prerequisite objectives into one of two types: essential
prerequisites and supportive prerequisites.
Examples of essential prerequisites mav be found by analyzing the task of
"supplying the definite article" for a noun in writing a sentence in the German
language. In acquiring such a capabilitv, a student must learn the prior tasks of
(1) identifying gender, (2) identifving number (singular or plural), and (3)
applving grammatical rules of case. Such capabilities may have been learned as a
result of formal instruction or, in an incidental fashion, by experience with the
language. However, the latter possibilitv is not a relevant fact if one is concerned

with the svstematic design of instruction. What is relevant is that these "sub-
ordinate" capabilities are actually part of the total of supplying the definite
skill

article. This means that they are essential prerequisites, not merely helpful or

supportive. These component skills must be learned if the total task of supplying
the definite article is to be learned and performed correcdy. Early or late in the
course of instruction, thev must be acquired prior to the learning of the
objective.
A prerequisite mav, however, be simply supportive. This means that the
prerequisite may aid the new
making it easier or faster. For example,
learning by
a positive attitude toward learning to compose proper German sentences may
have been acquired bv the learner because of an anticipated visit to Germany.
 Analysis of the Learning Task 151

Such an attitude is likely to be helpful to the learner of the language. In other

words, it is supportive of the learning, although not essential. Another example
is provided by the possibility that the learner has previouslv acquired a cognitive

strategy forremembering the gender of German nouns. Such a strategy might

uwolve associating each newly encountered noun with a visual image represent-
ing, respectively, masculine, feminine, or neuter. Again, such a strategy could be a
supportive prerequisite because makes learning easier and faster.
it

For each category of task (as by task classification), one can identify
identified
both essential and supportive prerequisites. However, these prerequisites are
considerably different in character for each task category. Keeping these differ-
ences straight is important for instructional design. This is one of the major
reasons for conducting task classification and for determining such task catego-
ries before one attempts to identify prerequisites. In the following sections, our

discussion of prerequisites begins with those that are essential and proceeds to
describe some that are supportive.

PREREQUISITES IN LEARNING INTELLECTUAL SKILLS

Intellectual skills, like other kinds of learning, are affected by both essential and
supportive prerequisites. For this class of learning task, however, essential
prerequisites are particularly evident and also likely to be directly involved in the
planning of individual lessons.

Essential Prerequisites for Intellectual Skills

A target objective representing an intellectual skill is typically composed of two

or more subordinate and simpler skills. These latter skills are prerequisites to the
learning of the target skill, in the sense that they must be learned first, before the
target skill is "put together." The prior learning of prerequisites may have
occurred some considerable time previously. Often, though, it occurs just prior

to the learning of the targetskill, within the same lesson.

An example of the meaning of essential prerequisites is provided by Gagne

(1977) for the task of subtracting whole numbers. Such a task may be repre-
sented by problems such as the following:

(a) 473 (b) 2132 (c) 953 (. d) 7204

-342 -1715 -676 -5168

A commonly taught method of performing subtraction is by borrowing, and

we assume that is the method to be learned as part of the target skill. The four
examples illustrate four prerequisite skills (rules) that are involved in the skill of
subtracting whole numbers. Example (a), the simplest, is "subtracting one -place
numbers in successive columns, without borrowing." Example (b) is "subtract-
152 Principles of Instructional Design

ing when several borrowings are required, in nonadjacent columns." Example

(c) may be described as "successive borrowing in adjacent columns"; borrowing
must be done in the first column on the right so that 6 can be subtracted from
13 and again in the next column so that 7 can be subtracted from 14. Example
(d) is the prerequisite skill "borrowing across 0."

Each of these prerequisite skills represents a rule that is involved in the total
skill of subtracting whole numbers. The latter task cannot be learned in any

complete sense without the prior learning of these subordinate skills. They
therefore deserve to be called essential prerequisites.
Other examples of prerequisites for intellectual skills may be found by ex-
amination of the results of the information-processing analyses described earlier
in this chapter. The analysis of subtraction, of course, includes the borrowing
.kill, which is comparable to Example (a). When the objective is writing

sentences with the subject everyone, the essential prerequisites indicated by the
diagram of Figure 8-1 are (1) identifying verb names for actions and (2) using
rules to make verbs singular or plural.

Hierarchies of Prerequisite Skills

Although learning-task analysis is often concerned with the prerequisite of a

target skill, the analysis may be applied to the enabling skills as well since these
skills themselves have prerequisites. Accordingly, it is possible to continue the
learning-task analysis until a point is reached at which the skills identified are
quite simple (and perhaps assumed to be known by all students).
When a learning-task analysis is carried out on successively simpler com-
ponents of a target skill, the result is (Gagne, 1985). This
a learning hierarchy
outcome may be displayed as a diagram containing boxes describing the suc-
cessively identified subordinate skills (that is, essential prerequisite skills). Fig-
ure 8-4 is an example of a learning hierarchy for the target objective of "subtract-
ing whole numbers." At a first level of analysis, this learning hierarchy in-
corporates the four prerequisite skills involved in subtracting, as described in the
previous section (numbered VII, VIII, IX, and X). Proceeding from that point,
analysis makes possible the identification of the simpler skill VI, "subtracting
when a singleborrowing is required, in any column." This can readily be
perceived as an essential prerequisite to the more complex skills of borrowing
(VIII, IX, and X). Skill VI, however, may also be analyzed to reveal the
prerequisites described in the boxes labeled IV and V. The process may be
continued to the level of simple subtraction "facts" (I).
The learning hierarchy produced by a learning-task analysis displays a pattern
of progressively simpler intellectual skills. These skills are enabling objectives for
a given target objective (which is also an intellectual skill). Furthermore, any
particular skill, which may itself be an enabling objective for a target skill, is
composed of other subordinate skills.
When instructional design interest centers upon an intellectual skill as an
 Analysis of the Learning Task 153

SUBTRACTION
(XI)

Subtract whole numbers

of any size

(VIII) (IX) (X)

Subtracting when Subtracting when Subtracting when

several borrowings successive borrow- "double borrowing"
are required in ing Is required, Is required (across
non-adjacent columns in adjacent columns 0)

(VII) (VI)

Subtracting in Subtracting when a

successive columns. single borrowing is
without borrowing required. In any
column

(V) (IV)

Subtracting o one- Identifying where

digit number, with borrowing is to be
borrowing done

(II) (III)

Subtracting in Subtracting when

successive columns, a is understood
where each requires ("bringing down")
a simple subtraction
(no "bringing down")

(I)

Simple subtraction
("facts")

FIGURE &4 A Learning Hierarchy for Subtracting Whole Numbers

154 Principles of Instructional Design

objective, the enabling skills of primary relevance are the immediate pre-
requisites.Thus, the most important questions to be answered by a learning-task
analysis come from any two adjacent levels of the learning hierarchy. Is there,
then, any usefulness to the display of the entire pattern of enabling skills,
involving several levels? The main uses for a fully worked-out learning hierarchy
are (1) guide in the design of a sequence of instruction (Cook and
as a
Walbesser, 1973), and (2) as a guide for student and teacher in the planning of
instructional assignments.

Conducting a Learning-Task Analysis for Intellectual Skills

Intellectual skill analysis is carried out by "working backward" from a target

skill. Obviously, the purpose of the analysis is to reveal the simpler component
skills that constitute the target skill. Often, there is a correspondence at the first
level of between the component steps resulting from an information-
analysis
processing analysis and the component skills revealed by a learning- task analysis.
But the distinction between sequential steps and subordinate skills should be
carefully maintained. The steps are what an individual does in sequence when
exhibiting a target performance, the capability of which has been learned. In
contrast, the subordinate skills are what the individual must learn, in a sequence
beginning with the simplest.
Subordinate skills are derived by asking a question of any given intellectual
skill: "What simpler skill(s) would a learner have to possess to learn this skill?"
(Gagne, 1985). Once the first set of subordinate (enabling) skills is identified,
the process may be repeated by addressing the same question to each of these.
Of course, the subordinate skills so generated become simpler and simpler.
Normally, the process stops at a point that is determined pragmatically. One
decides, on the basis of knowledge about student characteristics, that the skills at

the lowest level of the hierarchy are already known and do not have to be
learned. Naturally, this stopping point varies with the educational background
A learning hierarchy on grammatical rules in a foreign language,
of the students.
for example,would have many more levels for students who had learned few
grammatical rules of their native language than for students who had learned
many of these rules.

Supportive Prerequisites for Intellectual Skills

A number of kinds of learning, when undertaken on a prior basis, may be

supportive in the acquisition of an intellectual skill. This means that the pre-
viously acquired capability may be helpful, although not essential, for the

learning of a target skill.

Verbal information, for example, is often useful to the learner in acquiring

presumably because it facilitates the verbal communications
intellectual skills,
that are a part of instruction. Some good examples of the relation of verbal
 Analysis of the Learning Task 155

information to the learning of an intellectual skill occur in a study by White

(1974). White developed and validated a learning hierarchy for the intellectual
skill "finding velocity at a prescribed point on a curved graph relating position
(of an object) and time." In its initial form, the trial hierarchy included capabili-
ties of the information sort, such as "states that the slope of a position-time
graph is velocity" and "states units of slope in units labeling axes." The results of
White's investigation showed that although these capabilities may have been
helpful for intellectual skill learning, they did not reveal themselves as being
essential. In this, they contrasted markedlv with other subordinate components
of the intellectual skill category. Further verification of the supportive nature of
information, contrasting with prerequisites that are essential, is provided in a

study by White and Gagne (1978).

The instructional designer may find it desirable to take into account several
kinds of supportive prerequisites. Depending on other circumstances, these may
be introduced into a single lesson, or they may be given a place in the sequence
of a topic or course. The major possibilities of supportive prerequisites for
intellectual skill learning would appear to be as follows:

Information as Supportive Prerequisites

As our previous example illustrates, verbal information mav support the learn-
ing of intellectual by aiding the communication of instruction. Often,
skills

examples of this function take the form of labels for the concepts involved in rule
learning. Another possible function of verbal information is as a context provid-
ing cues for retrieval of the intellectual skill (Gagne, 1985). Normally, when
intellectual skills are being learned, a fair amount of information is included at
the same time (see, for example, any typical science textbook). Presumably, a
supportive function is being performed by the latter sort of material. The
circumstance to be avoided in design is not the "mixing" of intellectual skills and
information during instruction, but the potential confusion of these two types
of learning as target objectives.

Cognitive Strategies as Supportive Prerequisites

The learning of intellectual skills may be aided in a supportive sense by the use of
cognitive strategies. For example, if students learning to "add positive and
negative integers" have available the cognitive strategy of imagining a "number
line," their learning of the requisite rules may be facilitated. Generally speaking,
cognitive strategies mav speed the learning of intellectual skills, make them
easier to recall, or aid their transfer to novel problems. Although these actions of
cognitive strategies have broad acceptance, it must be said that empirical evi-
dence of the effectiveness of their support is, as yet, scanty and still sorely
needed.
156 Principles of Instructional Design

Attitudes as Supportive Prerequisites

The supportive effect of positive attitudes on the learning of intellectual skills is

widely recognized. Presumably, the attitudes a learner has toward a subject
strongly influence the ease with which the subject is learned, retained, and put to
use (Mager, 1968). The relation between positive attitude and learning may
often be readily observed in students' conduct toward a subject like mathemat-
ics.Evidence concerning the effects of "affective entry characteristics" on
achievement in school subjects is reviewed bv Bloom (1976). A recent review of
the literature by Martin and Briggs (1986) shows attitude learning strongly
related to the learning of cognitive skills.

LEARNING-TASK ANALYSIS AND OTHER LEARNING TYPES

The rationale of learning-task analysis can also be brought to bear on learning

tasks other than intellectual skills —on the learning of cognitive strategies,
information, attitudes, and motor skills. The purpose of analysis remains un-
changed — that is, the identification of both essential and supportive pre-
requisites.However, the picture that emerges in considering these applications
is and not as clear. Capabilities like information and attitude are
surely different
not learned by putting together subordinate parts, as is the case with intellectual
skills. Consequently, prerequisites for these other types of learning tend to be of
a supportive rather than an essential nature.
Table 8-1 summarizes the essential and supportive prerequisites resulting
from analvsis of the five tvpes of learning outcomes.

Prerequisites: Cognitive Strategies

Presumably, the prerequisites for cognitive strategies of learning, remembering,

and thinking are some very basic (and perhaps very simple) mental abilities. For

Table 8-1 Essential and Supportive Prerequisites for Five Kinds of Learning Outcome
Type of Essential Supportive

Learning Outcome Prerequisites Prerequisites

Intellectual Skill Simpler component intellectual skills Attitudes, cognitive strategies, verbal in-

(rules, concepts, discnmmations) formation

Cognitive Strategies Specific intellectual skills (?) Intellectual skills, verbal information, atti-

tudes

Verbal Information Meaningfully organized sets of informa- Language skills, cognitive strategies,

tion attitudes

Attitudes Intellectual skills (sometimes) Other attitudes, verbal information

Verbal information (sometimes)

Motor Skills Part skills (sometimes) Attitudes

Procedural rules (sometimes)

(From Analysis of objectives (p. 141) by R. M. Gagne, 1977. In L J. Bnggs (Ed). Instructional design. Englewood Cliffs. NJ.:

Educational Technology Publications. Copyright 1977 by Educational Technology PuWcatxxis. Reprinted by permission.)
 Analysis of the Learning Task 157

example, an effective cognitive strategy for remembering a list of items may be

to generate a different mental image for each item. The essential prerequisite in
such a case must be the ability to have visual images, which surely must be
considered a very basic ability. Again, an often effective cognitive strategy in
solving complex mathematical problems is breaking the problem into parts and
^seeking the solution to each part. What prerequisite ability is involved in such a
strategy? Evidently, an ability to divide a verbally described situation into parts.
This, too, seems to be a fundamental kind of ability of a rather simple sort.
Whatever the of cognitive strategies may be, there is
essential prerequisites
disagreement concerning how much they depend upon innate factors (which
develop through maturation) and how much they are learned. A discussion of
these issues has been presented by Case (1978) and more briefly by Gagne
(1977). The factor of maturation plays a prominent role in the developmental
theory of Piaget (1970). In contrast, Gagne (1985) proposes that cognitive
strategies of the executive type are generalizations from learned intellectual
skills. It is interesting to note, however, that either of these processes (matura-

tion or learning) takes its effect on such strategies over a considerable period of
time, as viewed from the standpoint of intellectual development.
Supportive prerequisites for the learning of cognitive strategies include the
intellectual skills that may be useful in learning the particular material or solving
the particular problems presented to the learner. Relevant verbal information
may also play this supportive role. Just as in learning other kinds of capabilities,
favorable attitudes toward learning are likely to be helpful.

Prerequisites: Verbal Information

To learn and store verbal information, the learner must have some basic lan-
guage skills. A number of learning theories propose that information is stored
and retrieved in the form of propositions. If this is the case, then the learner
must already possess the essential prerequisite skills of forming propositions
(sentences) in accordance with certain rules of syntax. These skills, of course, are
likely to have been learned fairly early in life.
Verbal information, whether of single items or longer passages, appears to be
most readily learned and retained when it occurs within a larger context of
meaningful information. This context may be learned immediately before the
new information to be acquired, or it may have been learned a long time
previously. The provision of this meaningful context has been described as a
learning condition in Chapter 5 and deserves to be classified as a supportive
prerequisite of information learning.
Attitudes support the learning of verbal information in much the same way as
they do other kinds of learning tasks. A number of different cognitive strategies
have been found to be supportive of the learning of word lists (cf Gagne, 1985;
Rohwer, 1970). Presumably, it should be possible to identify particular strat-

egies that aid the retention of prose passages, as in remembering the gist of a
textbook chapter (Palincsar and Brown, 1984).
158 Principles of Instructional Design

Prerequisites: Attitudes

The acquiring of particular attitudes may require the prior learning of particular
intellectual skills or particular sets of information. In this sense, then, these
learned capabilities may be For
essential prerequisites to attitude learning.
example, toward "truth in labeling" of packaged foods is to
if a positive attitude

be acquired, the learner may need to have (1) the intellectual skills involved in
comprehending the printed statement on the label, and (2) a variety of verbal
information about food ingredients.
As Table 8-1 indicates, attitudes may have a mutually supportive relation to
each other; related attitudes may be .supportive of the acquisition of another
given attitude. For example, preference for a political candidate makes it easier
for a person to prefer also the political views of that candidate's partv. In a more
general sense, the degree to which a human model is respected affects the
readiness with which the model's attitude is adopted.
Besides its essential role in a specific sense, verbal information also has a
supportive function in establishing attitudes. Knowledge of the situations in
which the choice of personal action will be made contributes to the ease of
attitude acquisition. For example, an attitude such as "don't drive after drink-
ing" will likely be more readily acquired if the individual has knowledge about
the various social situations in which the temptation will occur to drive after
drinking.

Prerequisites: Motor Skills

As described in Chapter 5, motor skills are often composed of several part skills.
It is sometimes the case that the most efficient learning comes about when part
skills are practiced by themselves and later combined in practice of the total skill.

In such instances, the part skills may be said to function as essential prerequisites
for the learning of the total skill.
Another component of a motor skill that has this role is the executive sub-
routine (Fitts and Posner, 1967), which is sometimes learned as an initial step in
the acquiring of a motor skill. Swimming the crawl, for example, involves an
executive subroutine that selects a sequence of movements for arms, legs, body,
and head. Even before the total skill is practiced very much, the swimmer may
receive instruction in the correct execution of this sequence. In Table 8-1, these
subroutines are referred to as procedural rules. When learned separately and prior
to the skill itself, they may be classed as essential prerequisites.
Positive attitudes toward the learning of a motor skill, and toward the
performance it makes possible, are often supportive prerequisites of some sig-
nificance.

Instructional Curriculum Maps

We have described the diagramming of skills in the intellectual skills domain,
involving hierarchical relationships among intellectual skills, with discrimina-
 Analysis of the Learning Task 159

tions as prerequisites for concepts, concepts as prerequisites for rules, and rules
as prerequisites for problem solving. These relationships can be diagrammed as
shown in Figure 8-5.
It is somewhat more what a diagram of the relationships
difficult to visualize

among objectives from domains might be, for example, the relation-
different
* ship between an intellectual skill and an attitude. Briggs and Wager ( 1981) have
described a system called instructional curriculum mapping for illustrating these
relationships. Instructional curriculum mapping simply tries to represent the
functional relationships among instructional objectives. It starts by identifying
the target objective and asking the question what other objectives are related to
the attainment of this objective (either essential skills or supportive pre-
requisites). Hierarchical relationships of essential prerequisites are drawn in
much the same fashion as the illustration in Figure 8-5. However, supportive
objectives are shown connected to the target objective, with an indication in
each case that they are not from the same domain.
For example, this target objective is an attitude: "Given access to
microcomputers, the student chooses to use a computer as a word processor to
type assignments rather than writing them by hand."
Obviously the student will have to have the intellectual skills necessary to
apply the skills, but these skills alone may be insufficient to formulate the
attitude. Supporting objectives might be:

1 States functions of a word processor

2. States the advantages of word processors over typewriters
3. States advantages of typed over handwritten material

None of the verbal information objectives above are required to learn the
intellectual skills associated with operating word processors; that is, they are not
essential prerequisites. However, the student probably already knows a fair
amount about the advantages of neatly presented work as a result of having

Problem
Solving

Rules Rules

1 1

r~ 1 r l

Concepts Concepts Concepts Concepts

h 1 1

Discrim- Discrim- Discrim- Discrim-

inations inations inations inations

FIGURE 8-5 Hierarchical Relationships among Objectives in the Intellectual Skills Domain
160 Principles of Instructional Design

come through the school system. The information is supportive of formulating

an attitude toward use of the computer as diagrammed in Figure 8-6. The
triangle between the verbal information and the attitude objective illustrates the
fact that this is an intersection of two different domains and alerts the designer
that perhaps different conditions of learning will be needed to accomplish the
target objective. The three verbal information objectives are not essential pre-
requisites to each other, but they may be taught in contextual (supportive)
sequence. The relationships among objectives from the same domain are con-
nected with solid lines.

Chooses to use a
word processor

States advantages
of using a word
processor

States functions
of a word
processor

anticipated entry skill

States advantages
oftyped over
hand-writen copy

FIGURE &6 An Instructional Curriculum Map (ICM) Showing Supportive Relationships of Verbal In-

formation Objectives to an Attitudinal Target Objective

 Analysis of the Learning Task 161

Figure 8-7 shows the highest level of intellectual

skill associated with this

target objective —"Given handwritten copy, demonstrates the use of

rule using:
a word processor by typing, editing, and printing the text."
This objective is functionally related to the target attitude objective as an
The relationship is again diagrammed to show that there
essential prerequisite.
fe domain change by the inclusion of the
a symbol in the connecting line, A
meaning that the intellectual skill is functionally related to attainment of the
attitude.
The symbol which is domains identifies skills from the
indicative of a shift in
previous domain. There may be
domain shifts in the development
several such
of instructional sequences within learning tasks. The particular symbols used are
not important. We have shown a triangle with VI in it for 'Verbal information,"
and a triangle with an MS in it for "motor skills." What is important is that the
domain shift be recognized as such because it may have important design
implications.
Of course, "Demonstrates the use of word processors" is an intellectual skill

with other prerequisite intellectual skills, including the concepts of editor, word
wrap, filer, blocks, formatting, and others. Objectives related to these concepts are
also diagrammed in a hierarchical manner as shown in Figure 8-7.
Notice that the motor skill of touch typing mav be related to the entry of text
and knowledge of advantages of typing. However, touch-typing skills are not
essential to learning the use of the word processor.
The technique of instructional curriculum mapping facilitates the designer's
task of relating objectives to one another when they are from different domains
and makes it possible to see when there are holes in the instruction and when

Demonstrates the
Chooses to use a
word processor 4 use of a word
processor to enter,
edit and print copy

Demonstrates use of
Demonstrates use Demonstrates use of
the filer to save,
of editor to enter, the text editor to
load, copy and merge
and edit text format text
text

Stales advantages
classifies typing
of using a word classifies
word-wrap mode as insert or
processor
overtype

States functions
of a word
classifies page
processor
classifies reformat format
oornrnaods commands

SKILLS (Not Ought)

States advantages
oftyped over
hand-writen copy

FIGURE 8-7 An ICM Showing Enabling Intellectual Skills Objectives for the Task of Using a Word
Processor
 162 Principles of Instructional Design

there are extraneous "dead wood" objectives that don't seem to relate to any
target objectives.

Subordinate and Entry Skills

The terms entry skill and subordinate objectives generally apply to the description
of objectives related to a particular lesson. For example, a single lesson may have
one or more target objectives. Subordinate to these objectives are the enabling
objectives that will be taught as part of the lesson. Entry skills, which the learner
is expected to have acquired before attempting this lesson, are also subordinate

to the target objective. They are essential or supportive prerequisites, but they
will not be taught during the lesson. Entry skills are identified in both hierarchy
diagrams and instructional maps as those skills listed below the dotted line. This
is illustrated in Figure 8-8. Identifying the entry skills in this manner makes it

possible to construct a pretest to see whether the student has the skills necessary
to continue with this lesson.

SUMMARY
Task analysis refers to several different, though interrelated, procedures that are
carried out to yield the systematic information needed to plan and specify the
conditions for instruction. The two procedures described in this chapter are (1)
information-processing analysis and (2) learning-task analysis. Both types of
analysis begin with target objectives for lessons or courses.
Information-processing analysis describes the steps taken by the human learn-

Demonstrate use of the

text editor to format text.

Demonstrate use of
Demonstrale setting of Demonstrate page
character format
page format. reformat procedure.
commands.

Classify
Demonstrate Demonstrate
reformat
set margins set tabs
command

<

Demonstrate
ENTRY Classifypage
Classify Classify Classify Classify
CTRL char- cursor
SKILLS format terms Bold Underline Italics
placement
acters

FIGURE 83 An O/l for the Task of Using a Text Editor, with Entry Skills Indicated
 Analysis of the Learning Task 163

er in performing the task he has learned. Included in these steps, in the typical
case, are (1) input information, (2) actions, and (3) decisions. Of particular
importance is the fact that this type of analysis usually reveals mental operations
that are involved in the performance but are not direcdy observable as overt
behavior. Together, the various steps in the performance may be shown in a
flowchart. The results of the analysis exhibit (or imply) capabilities that must be
learned as components of the performance described as the target objective.
These components are themselves instructional objectives, called enabling
objectives, that support the learning of the target objective. In addition, they
may need to be analyzed further (in the manner of learning-task analysis) to
reveal additional enabling objectives.
Task classification has the purpose of providing a basis for designing the
conditions necessary for effective instruction. The objectives of instruction are
categorized as intellectual skills, cognitive strategies, information, attitudes, or
motor skills. As indicated in previous chapters, each of these categories carries
different implications regarding the conditions necessary for learning, which can
be incorporated into the design of instruction.
Learning-task analysis has the purpose of identifying the prerequisites of both
target and enabling objectives. Two kinds of prerequisites are distinguished
essential and supportive. Essential prerequisites are so called because they are
components of the capability being learned, and therefore, their learnmg must
occur as a prior event. Other prerequisites may be supportive in the sense that
they make the learning of a capability easier or faster.
Target objectives of the intellectual skill variety may be analyzed into suc-
cessive levels of prerequisites, in the sense that complex skills are progressively
broken down into simpler ones. The result of this type of analysis is a learning
hierarchy, which provides a basis for the planning of instructional sequences.
Prerequisites for other categories of learning objectives do not form learning
hierarchies since their prerequisites do not relate to each other in the manner of
intellectual skills.
A number of kinds of supportive prerequisites may be identified for particular
types of target objectives. For example, task-relevant information is often sup-
portive of intellectual-skill learning. Positive attitudes toward lesson and course
objectives are also an important source of learning support. Cognitive strategies
of attending, learning, and remembering may be brought to bear by the learner
in supporting these processes. These supportive relationships may be di-
agrammed through the use of instructional curriculum mapping.

References

Bloom, B. S. (1976). Human characteristics and school learning. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Briggs, L. J., & Wager, W. W. (1981). Handbook ofprocedures for the design of instruction.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
164 Principles of Instructional Design

Case, R. (1978). Piaget and beyond: Toward a developmentally based theory and
technology of instruction. In R. Glaser (Ed.), Advances in instructional psychology
(Vol.1). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Cook, J. M., & Walbesser, H. H. (1973). How to meet accountability. College Park, MD:
University of Maryland, Bureau of Educational Research and Field Services.
Fitts, P.M., & Posner, M. I. (1967). Human performance. Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Gagne, R. M. (1977). Analysis of objectives. In L. J. Briggs (Ed.), Instructional design.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions of learning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
Greeno, J. G. (1976). Cognitive objectives of instruction: Theory of knowledge for
solving problems and answering questions. In D. Klahr (Ed.), Cognition and instruc-
tion. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum Associates.

Jonassen, D. H., Hannum, W. H., & Tessmer, M. (1989). Handbook of task analysis
procedures. New York: Praeger Publishing.
Mager, R. F. (1968). Developing attitude toward learning. Belmont, CA: Fearon.
Martin, B. L., & Briggs, L. J. (1986). The affective and cognitive domains: Integration for
instruction and research. Englewood Cliffs, NJ Educational Technology
: Publications.
Merrill, P. F. (1971). Task Analysis: An Information Processing Approach (Technical Memo
No. 27). Tallahassee: Florida State University, CAI Center.
Palincsar, A. S., & Brown, A. L. (1984). Reciprocal teaching of comprehension-

fostering and comprehension-monitoring activities. Cognition and Instruction, 1, 117-

175.
Piaget, J. (1970). Piagefs theory. In P. H. Mussen (Ed.), Carmichael's manual of child
psychology. New York: Wiley.
Resnick, L. B. (1976). Task analysis in instructional design: Some cases from mathemat-
ics. In D. Klahr (Ed.), Cognition and instruction. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum Associates.
Resnick, L. B., & Beck, I. L. (1977). Designing instruction in reading: Interaction of
theory and practice. In J. T. Guthrie (Ed.), Aspects of reading acquisition. Baltimore:
Johns Hopkins Press.
Rohwer, W. D., Jr. (1970). Images and pictures in children's learning. Psychological
Bulletin, 73, 393-403.
White, R. T. (1974). The validation of a learning hierarchy. American Educational
Research Journal, 11, 121-136.
White, R. T., & Gagne, R. M. (1978). Formative evaluation applied to a learning
hierarchy. Contemporary Educational Psychology, 3, 87-94.
 Designing Instructional
9 Sequences

The
L
school education takes place on a
learning directed toward achieving the goals of

learning of any particular capability

number of occasions over
is
a period of time.
preceded by the learning of prerequi-
site capabilities and is followed, on other occasions, by learning more complex
capabilities. We generally refer to the specification of a set of capabilities as a
curriculum or course of study.
A curriculum or course requires decisions about the sequencing of objectives.
The goal of an educational institution is to establish sequences within courses
that promote effective learning. The most obvious sequence follows the order of
simple (prerequisite skills) to complex (target) skills, the latter of which take
longer to accomplish. Another sequencing principle is one of sequencing objec-
tives in increasing order by the degree of meaning in what is being learned. We
know from cognitive learning theory (Anderson, 1985) that one verv important
determinant of what students will learn, and how fast thev will learn, is what
they already know. Reigeluth and Stein (1983) address the sequencing problem
at a macrolevel in their "elaboration theory of instruction." The elaboration
theory proposes that sequencing should be structured so that the student is

presented first with an epitome of a concept, procedure, or

(a generalization)
principle to be learned. The student is then presented with an elaboration or
extension of the epitome. The concepts, procedures, and rules are organized
from simple to complex, general to specific.
As will be seen, the question of sequencing is encountered at several levels of

165
166 Principles of Instructional Design

curriculum and course design, and the issues are somewhat different between
levels. But basically, the matter of effective sequences of instruction is closely
related to the matter of course organization. This chapter will describe a
procedure for organizing a course from the top downward, going from general
to more specific objectives, and utilizing the functional relationships among the
types of learning described in previous chapters.
In Chapter 8, we indicated that once the objectives or goals are specified for a
given curriculum or course, desirable next to identify major course units, each
it is

of which may require weeks of study. Under each such unit, one may
several
next identify specific objectives to be reached bv the end of the unit or bv the
end of the course. These specific objectives are then grouped together into les-
sons, which in turn may require the identification of several enabling objectives.
Intellectual skills objectives are usually the starting point for consideration of
the sequencing of instruction. This is primarily due to the importance we place
on intellectual skills as components of the curriculum but also because more is
known about the sequencing relationships among intellectual skills than about
other types of learned capabilities. Objectives from other domains of learned
capabilities are then woven into the intellectual skills structure insofar as they
support the learning of the intellectual skills. This procedure assumes that
intellectual skill objectives are the principal target objectives. However, if the
terminal objective is not an intellectual skill, but instead an attitude, then the
intellectual skills that are supportiveof it must be identified. The integration of
objectives from domains may be expressed in the form of instructional
different
maps, as described in Chapter 8. Ultimately, individual lessons are planned to
integrate related skills into an overall curriculum of lessons to accomplish the
purposes of the course.
One problem with terminology is that the word course has many different
meanings. For example, a course on cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is
quite different from a course in computer literacy. The first has very definite
criteria for judging mastery of the required skills. There would be substantial
consensus among persons who teach CPR about the objectives, the criteria for
performance, and the amount of time needed to teach the course. Also, the
number of objectives in the CPR course is relatively small. In contrast, the
curriculum for a computer literacy course is much broader; there is less agree-
ment on terminal objectives, and the total number of objectives for such a course
is quite large.
Another problem in defining a course is the constraint imposed by the
designation of a course as a specific number of hours of instruction. For
example, a one-semester-hour course in a university typically represents 16
contact hours of formal instruction. In public school, a course represents about
180 hours of formal instruction. Despite these variations, time is a very impor-
tant part of planning instruction, and the amount of time available must be
carefully considered in planning course and unit objectives.
There are no standard levels to be employed in organizing a course (except for
 Designing Instructional Sequences 167

the possible assumption that it consists of two or more lessons). However, even
the largest course can be described in five different levels of performance
outcomes as follows:

1. Lifelong objectives which imply the continued future use of what is learned, after
i the course is over
2. End-of-course objectives which state the performance expected immediately after
instruction is completed for the course
3. Unit objectives which define the performance expected on clusters of objectives
(topics) having a common purpose in the organization of the total course
4. performance objectives which
Specific are the specific outcomes attained during a
segment of instruction and which are likely to be at the appropriate level for
task analysis
5. Enabling objectives which are either essential or supportive prerequisites for
specific target objectives

AN EXAMPLE OF COURSE ORGANIZATION

Considering the nature of the content of this book, it is perhaps not in-
appropriate to illustrate the levels of course organization for a graduate course in
the design of instruction. Such a course would be part of a doctoral program in
instructional systems design. Related courses in the curriculum would pertain to
learning theory, research methods, statistics, varieties of instructional design,
design theories, and models of instructional delivery. Students entering the
course would typically have master's degrees, often in an area of teaching such as
science education or in fields such as educational media or educational adminis-
tration. Most of them would have completed an introductory course in the
theory base for systems models of the design of instruction.
Students are taught to design their own courses based on some identified
instructional need or goal. Following the "general-to-specific" basis for course
design, students are asked to state their course objectives at several levels.
The levels of objectives for the graduate course in the design of instruction
may be illustrated as follows:

1 Lifelong objective. After completion of this course, the students will con-
tinue to add to their course design skills by (1) enrolling for other design
courses and (2) seeking a variety of opportunities to apply design skills in
circumstances that require them to modify learned models or to originate new
models. Students will choose to employ or originate systematic course design
procedures based on theory, research, and consistent rationales; they will choose
to use empirical data to improve and evaluate their designs.
2. End-of-course objective. By the end of the course, the students will have
demonstrated the ability either to perform or to plan each step in a systems
model of instructional design, from needs analysis to summative evaluation. (In
168 Principles of Instructional Design

our hypothetical course, efforts axe concentrated on stages 4 through 9, as listed

in Table 2-1.)
3. Unit objectives. Students will complete four successive assignments bv
completing stages of design representing the following course units:

Unit A. The student will generate a course organization map showing lifelong
objectives, end-of-course objectives, and unit objectives, with accompanying
measures of learner performance for those levels of objectives at which the
learners' work is to be evaluated.
UnitB. The student will generate, in writing, a learning hierarchv for an intellectual
skill objective and will also devise an instructional map to show how the prereq-
uisite skills in the hierarchy are to be sequenced in relation to each other and to
objectives in other domains of outcomes.
Unit C. The student module of
will generate, in writing, either a lesson plan or a
instruction, showing media selection and prescriptions for instruc-
a rationale for
tion to be prepared for each medium selected (see Chapter 11).
Unit D. The student will generate a written script that implements the media
prescriptions made in unit C.

4. Specific performance objectives (for unit C, above).

1. State the objective(s) or enabling objective(s) for the lesson being planned.
2. Classify the objective(s) bv domain (and subdomain, if appropriate).
3. List the instructional events to be employed, and give a rationale for use or
nonuse of each of the nine events.
4. List the type of stimuli for each event.
5. List the media choices appropriate for each event (see Chapter 11).
6. Identify the theoretically best medium for each event.
7. Make the final medium selection for each event.
8. Give a rationale for decisions 4 through 7.

9. Write the prescriptions (to the media producers) for each event.

Specific performance objectives for all four units of such a course, along with
criteria appropriate for evaluating students' work, are described in detail by
Briggs (1977, pp. 464-468). Many of the prerequisite objectives supporting
the specific performance objectives for this course are represented in the form of
practice tests and exercises that students take to test their readiness to write each
of the four unit assignments (Briggs and Wager, 1981).
The levels of objectives just described may be seen as one way to organize a
course. Note that this organization progresses downward to the level of objec-
tives for individual lessons. However, the materials themselves must also be
organized and sequenced; that is, the sequence of the instructional events that
constitute the lesson must also be planned. This part of the planning depends a
great deal on the sophistication of the learners since the completeness of
 Designing Instructional Sequences 169

instructional events designed into the lesson depends upon which events the
learners are expected to provide for themselves.
The sequencing of the four course unitsfollows the design sequence described
in Chapter 2. Although learning could presumably take place in other sequenc-
ing arrangements, in this case, it appeared reasonable to have the learning
sequence follow that which an experienced designer might employ in practice.
However, there is often reason to have a learning sequence that is different from
the performance sequence. This might happen when a complex skill needed
early in the procedure is more easily learned after acquiring skills needed later.
For example, teaching a student how to write good test items may be easier after
teaching him how to write five-component objectives. However, on the job, he
may write the first item first and then write the objective.
An example of four levels of sequence planning is illustrated by a curriculum
in English writing at the level of junior high school (Table 9-1). The sequence
problem obviously arises here at the course level. Also, there may be a problem
to be solved for the single-course topic, such as "writing the paragraph." A third
and critically important level of the sequence question concerns the sequence of
skills within the individual lesson, such as "constructing sentences with de-

pendent clauses." And finally, there is the matter of the sequence of events
that occur or are planned to occur to bring about the acquisition of an indi-
vidual lesson component objective, such as "making subject and verb agree in
number."
It is important to distinguish among these four levels since quite different
considerations apply to each one. As will be apparent from the contents of this
chapter, we are mainly concerned here with levels 1 and 2, and we will be
dealing later on with questions posed by levels 3 and 4.

Table 9-1 Four Different Levels of the Problem of Instructional Sequence

Unit Example Sequence Question

Level 7 Course or course Essay composl- How will the topics of "achieving unity," "paragraph

sequence tion arrangement," "writing the paragraph," "summariz-

ing," and so on be arranged in sequence?

Level 2 Topic or unit Writing the para- How will the subtopics of "topic sentence," "arranging

graph ideas for emphasis," "expressing a single idea," and

so on be arranged in sequence?

Level 3 Lesson Composing a top- How will the subordinate skills in composing a topic
ic sentence sentence be presented for learning in sequence?

Level 4 Lesson compo- Constructing a In what sequence will concepts of parts of speech and

nent complex sent- grammatical rules be presented?

ence
170 Principles of Instructional Design

Sequence of the Course and Curriculum

Course sequence decisions deal mainly with answering the question, "In what
sequence should the units be presented?" Presumably, one wants to ensure that
the prerequisite information and intellectual skills necessary for any given topic
have been previously learned. For example, the topic of adding fractions is
introduced in arithmetic after the student has learned to multiply and divide
whole numbers because the operations required in adding fractions require
these simpler operations. In a science course, one is concerned that a topic like
"graphically representing relations between variables" be preceded by attain-
ment of the skill of "measuring variables." And obviously, one would expect the
student to have an understanding of the concept "culture" before teaching a
social studies topic on "comparing family structures across cultures."
A model for sequencing instruction in a course is referred to as macrolevel
sequencing by Reigeluth and Stein (1983) in their account of the elaboration
theory of instruction. The content of ideas with which this theory deals includes
concepts, procedures, and principles. The theory proposes that instructional
content be structured so that the student is first presented with a special kind of
overview called an epitome, which includes a few general, simple, and fun-
damental ideas. Instruction then proceeds by presenting more detailed ideas that
elaborate on the earlier ones. Following is a review of the overview and
this phase
a delineation of the relationships between the most recent ideas and those
presented earlier. This pattern of overview, elaboration, summary, and synthesis
is level of coverage of all aspects of the subject has
continued until the desired
been reached.
Course and curriculum sequences are typically represented in scope and se-
quence charts, which name the topics to be studied in a total course or set of
courses and lay them out in matrices. This approach was utilized by Tyler
(1949), and it makes a good first step in defining different levels of skills across
content topics. For example, an introductory course on computers might be
represented by Table 9-2.
This scope and sequence matrix is by no means complete and represents only
four types of learning outcomes, yet it demonstrates how the designer can
structure topics and skills. It is outcomes
especially useful to specify the affective
that may be computer course, it is evident that most of the
desired. In the
outcomes are directed toward achieving intellectual skills. However, in the
social issues unit, the attitude outcomes are the most important if the learner is
to respond to using computers in a positive manner.
The target objectives of a unit can be related to the course objective or goal in
a course level instructional curriculum map (ICM). Figure 9-1 shows such an
ICM for an introductory computer course. In this example, the sequence in
which units 1 and 4 are taught is not critically important since the intellectual
skills objectives are fairly independent. However, the skills in unit 1 are prereq-

uisite to the skills in unit 2, and those in unit 2 are prerequisite to those in unit
 Designing Instructional Sequences 171

Table 9-2 Scope and Sequence Matrix of Topics and Types of Learning Objectives for a Course on
Computer Usage
Types of Learning Outcomes

Topical Verbal Defined

Content Information Concepts Rule Using Attitudes

State: Classify: Demonstrate: Choose:

Components of Parts names Storage devices Booting machine Canng for compu-
computers RAM memory Turning machine ter

Output devices off

Definitions Input devices

CPU
Hardware
Software
Operating systems Definitions Program com- Listing files Learning the func-

Purpose mands Formatting disk tions associated

I/O Copying files with operating

File names Renaming files systems

File types

Language Definition Commands Input a program Structuring op-

Statements Edit a program erations in logi-

Lines Run a program cal order

Editor Save a program

Interpreter

Social issues Five social issues Computer theft Using computers

Computer fraud for social good
Copynght
Equity

Health

3. Also, basic terminology and use of the computer (unit 1) is prerequisite to the
rule-using skills in unit 5.

Sequence of Skills within the Topic

Specifying a teaching sequence within a topic is a problem upon which some

systematic techniques can be brought to bear. Initially,it may be recognized that

a topic can, and often does, have components. A topic on computer

several
hardware, for instance, is likely to include objectives such as (1) identify the
components of a microcomputer, (2) demonstrate the booting procedure to
boot the microcomputer into the operating system, and (3) choose to handle
the equipment and software so it won't be damaged. Notice that all three of
these objectives are stated in performance terms. It would not be helpful to have
objectives like "understand the booting procedure" or "appreciate computer
equipment." These kinds of statements are too ambiguous and, accordingly,
mav imply different performance objectives to different people.
172 Principles of Instructional Design

Course ohiprtivp 1 Cnursp OhjPr-tix/P ?

Students choose to Students demonstrate

use, and teach others proficiency in using
about computers. a computer.

Unit 3 Language s Unit 4 Social Issues Unit 5 Tools

State the implications Demonstrate use of
Demonstrates use of related to misuse of the computer as a
a language to write computers in the tool for text process-
simple programs. areas of fraud, theft, ing, data management
privacy, and equity. or graphics production

Unit 2 DOS

Demonstrate use of
operating system
commands.

Unit 1 Terminology

State the names of

components of the
computer, boot
a disk and turn it off

FIGURE 9-1 Instructional Curriculum Map (ICM) for a Course on Computers and Their Uses in Education

Analyzing Topic Objectives to Determine Learning Outcomes

The use of performance objectives is particularly important at the unit level since
the designer's objective is to determine what lessons are needed. This can get a
bitout of hand, however, because each unit objective may have a good many
subordinate essential and supportive prerequisites. At this point in design
planning, we suggest that the oudine be kept rather broad and that only the
major objectives of the unit be specified. These objectives may include any or all
of the types of learning outcomes. The specific unit objectives can be repre-
sented in an ICM, just as the course and unit objectives were represented. The
unit map computer course is shown in Figure 9-2.
for the second unit in the
As you can see, this map more
detail, and it shows the relationships
has
among the objectives within the topical unit. The relationship between the
course map and the unit map may be compared to the relationship between a
world globe and a series of flat maps of each country. The flat maps are going to
show less scope than the globe but more detail.
The unit maps are also going to show the relationships of the objectives from
 Designing Instructional Sequences 173

Operating Systems
Unit 2

Demonstrate use of the

Choose to feel confident
operating systems com-
mands to perform file
-$>- and comfortable when
using the computer.
operations.

Demonstrate procedure Demonstrate procedure Demonstrate procedure Demonstrate procedure

a floppy
for formatting for listing files and for copying files forerasing files
disk. changing directories

Identify an operating Classify files by type

Classify ERASE or Classify target file by
Classify DIR command
systems prompt. DELETE command. directory, and name
for erasing.

Classify default drive. Classify COPY command Classify source disk Classify destination disk
and file. and file.

Boot a computer

(entry skill from Unit

one)

FIGURE 9-2 ICM for Unit 2-0perating Systems-of the ICM Shown in Figure 9-1

the different domains of learning outcomes. Some will be prerequisite to others,

and therefore, they must be taught in the earlier lessons.

Identifying Lessons

The next question is, how does one identify lessons? A lesson is generally
considered to occur in a given period of time; that is, the learner expects to
spend a given amount of time on a lesson. Obviously, lesson times van'. A lesson
for a small child may be shorter than one for an adult because the attention span
of a child is shorter. Sometimes, the designer tries to have a single lesson deal
with a single learning outcome. The reason for this procedure is that each type
of learning outcome requires a different set of learning conditions, as described
in Chapters 4 and 5. However, since the time it takes to teach a single objective
may be quite short, it is not feasible to think of even objective as having its own
lesson. For this reason, specific objectives are often grouped into lessons.
It is probably more important to plan lessons around the order in which the

performance objectives are best learned rather than worn' about having different
kinds of learning outcomes in the same lesson. In fact, once the decision is made
to group different types of learning outcomes together based on their functional
relationships and the amount of time spent at a single sitting, the process of
integrating the necessary conditions of learning becomes quite straightforward.
174 Principles of Instructional Design

The unitmap shown in Figure 9-3 shows how specific objectives within the
previous map mav be grouped into lessons. In this case, the unit has two lessons,
each about one hour in length. If the instruction period were two hours long,
the whole unit could possibly be taught in a single lesson.
The sequencing of the lessons within the units then should be based on the
prerequisite relationships among the objectives. Although these are very loose
guidelines, they have the following requirements: (1) that new learning is

supported by previous learning, (2) that it is important to do a learning analvsis

to determine that the skills are being taught in sequential order, (3) that the
sequences are complete, and (4) that, objectives irrelevant to the learning task at
hand are eliminated or taught at a different time.
Table 9-3 summarizes the major considerations regarding the sequential
arrangement within a topic for each of the types of learned capability. The
middle column of the table indicates sequencing principles applicable to the
particular type of capability that represents the central focus of the learning. The
right-hand column lists sequence considerations relevant to this learning but
arising in other domains.

Sequencing of Skills within Lessons

The next level for mapping is the lesson map as shown in Figure 9-4. A lesson
map is to a unit map what a state road map is to a map of the United States. It
contains less scope than the unit map and even greater levels of detail. Although

Operating Systems
Unit 2

Demonstrate procedure Oer-orcslfaie procedure D^nons73lfi procedure

Demonstrate procedure
and lor copying Ties •or erasing lies
a floppy
lor formatting for listing flies

disk. changing directories

ERASEor Class :ly target file by

an operating
Identify Classify flies by type Classify DIR command command directory, andnamt
systems prompt

Class !y default (Mwa. Cbnt/ COPY command Classify source A* Classify deslinalkxi dek
and Be. and tile.

| [
Lessonl
(entry skill from Unit
one)
M Lesson2

FIGURE 9-3 An ICM Showing How Subordinate Skills Are Grouped into Two Lessons
 Designing Instructional Sequences 175

Table 9-3 Desirable Sequence Characteristics Associated with Five Types of Learning Outcome
Type of Major Principles of Related Sequence
Learning Outcome Sequencing Factors

Intellectual Skills Presentation of learning situation for each Verbal information may be recalled or

new skill should be preceded by prior newly presented to provide elabora-

i mastery of subordinate skills tion of each skill and conditions of its

use

Cognitive Strategies Learning and problem-solving situations Verbal information relevant to the new
should involve recall of previously ac- learning should be previously learned
quired relevant intellectual skills or presented in instructions

Verbal Information For major subtopics, order of presenta- Prior learning of necessary intellectual

tion is not important. New facts should skills involved in reading, listening, etc.

be preceded by meaningful context is usually assumed

Attitudes Establishment of respect for source is an Verbal information relevant to choices

initial step. Choice situations should be should be previously learned or pre-

preceded by mastery of any in- sented in instructions

tellectual skills involved

Motor Skills Provide intensive practice on part skills of First of all, learn the executive subroutine

critical importance and practice on tot- (rule)

al skill

Chapter 12 is concerned with the designing of individual lessons, we introduce

the lesson map here so that you may see how it relates to the course and unit
map.
The lesson map shown in Figure 9-4 has as its target objectives one or more
objectives from the unit map. In addition, it has subordinate objectives related
to the attainment of these target objectives. These subordinate objectives were
obtained by asking the question, "What must the learner know to learn these
new skills?" It is also "What do these learners already know of
necessary to ask,
importance in the learning of these new skills?" The learners' present general
knowledge and that portion of his knowledge that may be necessary for learning
the new skills become the entry skills for the lesson. That is, the designer must
begin with some information about the audience and must make some assump-
tions about the skills they bring to a particular learning task. Usually, this means
that the designer will have to make a somewhat detailed analysis of the in-
tellectual skills involved in a lesson. This is the organizing factor, and the device
for revealing the requirements for sequencing needs to be described in greater
detail.

During the process of constructing a lesson map, it may become obvious that
the skills that need to be taught cannot be accomplished in a single instructional
period. In this case, the map may be divided into two lesson maps, each
representing a single period of instruction. This will be discussed in more detail
in Chapter 11.
176 Principles of Instructional Design

«
o
c
o
-$- c
o
X)
<B t)

o 8 CD
CO TJ

1)

-^y U)
0>
O
F r
ra 01
c u
o
™ ro n
« S >
CO

<s
n .c

IA
c

-<$- ra
0)

0)

CO J2t5

computer

o .*

FORMAT proper (A T>

c
o <o

or

INIT
the

for
and ^-
i
V)
a
o>
en

E
used, .

W o
commands

Classify syntax
procedure
floppy being

a
L 1

CT
formatting
and C
Demonstrate

<g
with
a Q.
operating
a. E
for
disk.
o o
disk c a.
CO
U)
a an •2-s

Classify without system.

2 GO

1
c
ra
"5
E
c a>
<
c (A
O)
c
T3
nj
s
a> UJ
<D
Q.
CO O
en
 Designing Instructional Sequences 177

In some cases, the unit may center on a specific domain of learning such as
motor skills, information, intellectual skills, attitudes, or cognitive strategies.

LEARNING HIERARCHIES AND INSTRUCTIONAL SEQUENCE

The nature of intellectual skills makes it possible to design effective conditions

for their learning with considerable precision. When a proper sequence of
prerequisite skills is established, the learning of intellectual skills becomes easv
for a teacher to manage. In addition, the process of learning becomes highly
reinforcing for the learners because thev frequently realize that with apparent
and satisfying suddenness they know how to do some things that they didn't
know how to do of learning takes on an excitement
before. Thus, the activitv
that is at the opposite pole from "drill" and "rote recitation."
As described in Chapter 5, the learning hierarchy that results from a learning-
task analysis is the arrangement of intellectual skill objectives into a pattern that
shows the prerequisite relationships among them. An additional example of a
learning hierarchy, this time for a skill in solving a type of physics problem, is
shown in Figure 9-5.

Identifying horizontal and

vertical components
of lorces as vectors

Identifying the lorces Representing forces Identifying trigonometric

acting on a body in and their directions relationships m
opposition to each other as parts of triangles triangles

/ V

Conditions lor Identifying part of

equilibrium: a triangle
IF. = 0: IF, =

Distinguishing
magnitudes and
directions of forces

FIGURE 9-5 A Learning Hierarchy for the Target Skill of Identifying Horizontal and Vertical Components
of Forces As Vectors
(From R. M. Gagne, The conditions of learning, 4th ed., copyright 1985 by Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Fort
Worth, TX. Reprinted bv permission.)
178 Principles of Instructional Design

Here, the lesson objective one of finding the horizontal and vertical
is

components offerees of a svstem in equilibrium. To learn to perform

as vectors
such a task correct]}', students must have some prerequisite skills; these are
indicated on the second level of the hierarchy. Specifically, they must be able to
( 1 ) identify the forces in the situation that are acting in opposition to each other
when the body being acted upon is opposing
in equilibrium, (2) represent these
forces as sides of triangles that include vertical and horizontal sides, and (3)
identify trigonometric relationships of the sides and angles of right triangles
(sine, cosine, and so forth). Each of these subordinate skills (1), (2), and (3) also
has prerequisites, which are shown below them in the hierarchy.
What is meant by a prerequisite? Evidently, a prerequisite is a simpler in-
tellectual skill, but such a characterization is inadequate to identifv it properlv
since one could name a number of intellectual skills that are simpler than the
lesson objective described in the figure. A prerequisite skill is integrallv related
to the skill to which it is subordinate, in the sense that the latter skill cannot be
done if the prerequisite skill is not available to the learner. Consider what
students are doing when they identifv (more correctlv, demonstrate) "horizontal
and components of forces as vectors." Thev must show the values and
vertical
directions of the horizontal and vertical vector forces. The directions must be
such as to "resolve" the forces that oppose each other to produce a state of
equilibrium (prerequisite 1). And the values of these vectors must be obtained
by using trigonometric relationships of right triangles (prerequisites 2 and 3). If
the students do not know these prerequisites, thev will not be able to perform
the target (lesson) objective. Now, turn this idea around: If students already
know how to do each of these subordinate things, learning to do the lesson
objectives will be easy and straightforward. The likelihood is that such students
will learn to do it rapidly, perhaps even with the kind of immediacy implied by
the word "discover)'."
To identify a skill's prerequisites, one must ask, "What skill must the learner
have to learn this (new) skill, the absence of which would make that learning
impossible?" Gagne, 1985). In other words, prerequisite intellectual skills
(cf.

smooth learning of the new skill. There is

are those that are critical to the rapid,
a way of checking whether one's first attempt to answer the preceding question
has been successful. This is to examine the demands the new skill makes on the
learner and identifv where he could go wrong. Applying this to the lesson
objective of Figure 9-5, one can see that students who are attempting to
"identify horizontal and vertical components of forces as vectors" might fail if
they weren't able to (1) identifv' the forces acting in opposition (at equilibrium),
(2) represent the forces as parts of triangles, or (3) identify trigonometric
relationships in right triangles. Thus, the specification of prerequisite skills
should proxide a complete description of those previously learned skills neces-
sary for acquiring the new skill most readily.
Incidentally, the fact that prerequisite skills may be checked by considering
ways in which the learner can fail serves to emphasize the direct relevance of
 Designing Instructional Sequences 179

learning hierarchies to the teacher's task of diagnosis. If one finds a learner who
is having trouble acquiring a new intellectual skill, the first diagnostic question
should probably be, "What prerequisite skills has this person failed to learn?"
The contrast between the preceding question and these "What genetic de- —
ficiency does this person have?" or "What is the person's general intelligence?"
will be apparent. The latter questions may suggest solutions that merely serve to
remove the learner from the learning environment by putting him or her in a
social group or class. Responsible diagnosis, in contrast, attempts to discover
what the learner needs to learn. The chances are high that this will be a
prerequisite intellectual skill, as indicated by a learning hierarchy. If it is, suitable
instruction can readily be designed to get the learner "back on track" in a
learning sequence that continues to be positively reinforcing.

INTEGRATING MULTIPLE OBJECTIVES

It is not uncommon and also

for a lesson to have several different objectives
several different kinds of objectives. Frequently, multiple objectives may be
chosen for a course topic or for a comprehensive module within a course. For
example, a lesson or topic may have as a primary objective the procedural rule
for setting the chiming mechanism of a grandfather clock. Sequencing tech-
niques for such instruction may find learning hierarchies useful for the
identification of prerequisites. However, in teaching about the adjustment of
chiming mechanisms, additional objectives may be found desirable. Verbal
information about the varieties and characteristics of chiming mechanisms may
be a part of what needs to be learned. Attitudes of carefulness, precision, and
avoidance of hazards in working with clock movements may also be required. A
curriculum can be employed to trace out the interrelationships among the
map
different kinds of objectives involved.
Additional sorts of planning must often be done for lessons and topics having
multiple objectives. For example, associated with the basic skills of reading may
be such additional activities as skimming, summarizing, and reading aloud with
expression. The skill of adding whole numbers may need to be associated with
procedures for estimating quantity sizes. The chemistry topic of oxidation might
consist of rules for combining elements with oxygen, verbal information about
variety of oxide compounds, and attitudes toward personal safety when working
with explosive chemicals. Whatever the subject to be learned, the need for
lessons having multiple objectives is a frequent occurrence. Requirements for
integrating cognitive and attitudinal goals are discussed bv Martin and Briggs
(1986).
The prevalence of multiple objectives is made particularly apparent when one
attends to the goals of instruction. For instance, in setting out to teach adults to
read, one is likely to be impressed with the variety of goals these individuals
possess. One person may simply want to pass a driver's examination; another
180 Principles of Instructional Design

may need to read printed directions relating to a job, while another mav want to
be able to read the printed of sheet music. These different goals imply
lyrics

differences in the objectives of lessons to be designed and in the combination of

single objectives for which the design is to be undertaken. Provisions for
multiple objectives usually begin with consideration of the goals of the particu-
lar instruction being designed. The integration of different objectives into

learner goals, while this may be externally represented as an instructional map,

requires also the learning of a higher-order cognitive structure called a schema
(Rumelhart and Norman, 1978). Such a schema has the purpose of integrating
multiple objectives by representing a goal.

The Goal Schema

When engaged in learning several different objectives integrated in a goal,
learners must carry out a number of cognitive operations. They must be able to
retrieve prior knowledge, consisting of both verbal information and prerequisite
intellectual skills. They must utilize encoding procedures that are most readily
applicable to the various types of single objectives involved. They must associate
cues with the rules and propositions being acquired to ensure their accessibility
for later recall. And in addition to all this busy intellectual activity, they must
keep in mind how the newly learned material is going to be displayed or used.
—
Maintaining such a mental set is crucial for transfer of learning for the applica-
tion of what has been learned to the learner's goals.
The schema that makes possible the integration of prior knowledge, present
learning, and posdearning goals is a metacognitive structure that allows the
learner to maintain periodic awareness of these relationships. The central con-
cept of such a schema is that goal activity within multiple objectives will be
displayed. How will knowledge of reading skills be exhibited —
in answering
questions on a test for driving rules or in comprehending a new book of poetry?
—
How will knowledge of oxidation be displayed in forming equations snowing
combinations of oxygen and other elements or in designing protective coatings
for metal surfaces? It seems desirable to acknowledge that such pursuits, when
they are goals of individual people, are not simply "activities." Each is an activity
with a purpose. The purposive activity, engaged in by the learner, may be called
an enterprise. So the goal is the internal representation, and the enterprise is the
external activity leading to learning.

Cognitive Representation

When is first entered into, the learner should become aware of the
learning
enterprise for which he or she is aiming. As we have stated, the cognitive
representation of this enterprise is the learner's goal. This central goal concept is
the focus of a structure called a schema. Early on, the learner needs to acquire
such a structure, called a goal schema (Gagne and Merrill, 1990).
 Designing Instructional Sequences 181

A diagram of a goal schema is shown in Figure 9-6. As shown, the schema

relates the goal to its prerequisites, that of skills and knowledges
is, to the kinds
that the learner must and use when engaged in the enterprise. These
retrieve
prerequisites may comprise verbal knowledge in the form of labels, concepts and
rules, cognitive strategies, and attitudes.
Relating these components to the goal requires still another cognitive struc-
ture as part of the schema. This is a scenario —
a progression of verbal informa-
tion, which is also called a script —
relating learned knowledge to a particular
enterprise. Scenarios have the function of reminding learners, individually,
"where the}- have been and where they are going."

Forms of Goal Schemas

Considering the great varietv of goals that mav be aimed for in instruction, it

does not appear feasible to trv to identifV them in a comprehensive sense.

However, there do appear to be some common types (Gagne and Merrill,
1990). One commonlv occurring tvpe of purposive activitv (enterprise) consists
of a kind of elaborative identifving, called denoting. The integrative goal for
denoting goes bevond pointing or labeling. It mav include demonstration of the

FIGURE ?-: Diagram of a Goal Schema

(From R. M. Gagne and M. D. Merrill, Integrative goals for instructional design. Educational Teclmology Research
and Development, 30(1), 1990. Reprinted by permission.)
182 Principles of Instructional Design

rules incorporated in the definition of some entity. Thus, in denoting a class of

objects such as "typewriter," the performer would communicate not only its

name and the appearance of the object and its parts, but also the rules involved
in its functioning.
A second variety of enterprise involves teaching or "showing" others (stu-
dents, co-workers) the execution of steps in a procedure or in a process. This is

called manifesting. For example, it mav be the goal of the learner to show to
others the stages in the metamorphosis of a butterflv. Manifesting this process
may require a verbal narrative as well as the demonstration of some rules; thus,
the integration of multiple objectives, is involved. Still a third tvpe of enterprise
is discovering. Problem solving or the finding of a novel process may be taking

place. Typically, both intellectual skills and verbal information must be inte-
grated in this kind of enterprise. It mav be that a number of other enterprises are
of common occurrence. Whatever particular purpose they serve, all of them are
instances of the integration of multiple objectives.

Instruction for the Goal Schema

It isbest to make provision for the activation of a goal well toward the
beginning of instruction. As described in the following chapter, the second
event of instruction pertains to informing the learner of the objective. When
instruction consists of multiple objectives involved in an integrated goal, this
second event is carried out as follows: (1) providing a verbal statement of a goal
and its knowledges, and attitudes; and (2) giving a
relation to prerequisite skills,

verbal description of a scenario that relates whatever is to be newly learned to

the goal.
These verbal communications about the goal appear relatively simple and yet
adequate to establish a goal schema. Of course, they should be related insofar as
possible to the individual learner's prior experience and motivation. The es-
tablishment of a goal schema may be expected to make a significant addition to
the metacognitive resources available to the learner. As such it has the function
of monitoring the new learning —keeping it "on track," free of distractions, and
rejecting attention to irrelevant events. When learning has progressed to a point
at which performance is to be exhibited, the schema aids in the retrieval of
prerequisite knowledge and skills. Furthermore, throughout its scenario, the
schema supports mindful abstraction (Salomon and Perkins, 1989) and, thus,
enhances transfer of learning to the performances involved in the enterprise.
In summary, when learning aims for multiple objectives, it is usually desirable
to plan for integrative goals. This may be done, in part, by identifying suitable
sequences of objectives, utilizing such techniques as the learning hierarchy and
the curriculum map. An additional aspect of such planning is the establishment
of a schema representing the learning goal. This schema includes a scenario
relating prior knowledge to the goal toward which learning is aimed. It serves
the metacognitive functions of relating prior knowledge to the new learning,
 Designing Instructional Sequences 183

monitoring incoming communications for relevance, and enhancing the

thoughtful abstractions that support the transfer of learning.

SUMMARY
\
This chapter opens with an account on how the organization of a total course
relates to questions about the sequencing of instruction. Sequencing decisions
are identified at the four levels of course, topic, lesson, and lesson component.
We suggested ways for deciding upon instructional sequences at the levels of the
course and the topic. Course planning for a sequence of topics is typically done
by a kind of common-sense logic. One topic may precede another because it
describes earlier events, because it is a component part, or because it provides a
meaningful context for what is to follow.
In proceeding from course purposes to performance objectives, it may not
always be necessary to describe all the intermediate levels of planning in terms of
complete lists of performance objectives for the topic. The method suggested
here involves choosing representative samples of objectives within each domain
of learning outcomes. mav be noted, however, that the more complete
It

procedure can be followed and may sometimes be desirable, as is illustrated in

Briggs (1977), and in Briggs and Wager (1981).
The designing of sequences for intellectual skills is based upon learning
hierarchies. These hierarchies are derived by working backward from target
objectives, and by so doing, we can analyze the sequences of skills to be learned
(see Chapter 8). The learning of a new skill will be accomplished most readily
when the learner is able to recall the subordinate skills that compose it. When an
instructional sequence has been designed for an intellectual skill, related learning
of other capabilities may be interjected at appropriate points, as when the
learning of information is required or the modification of an attitude is desired.
In other instances, instruction aimed at other capabilities may come before or
after the intellectual skill represented in the learning hierarchy. Designing se-
quences for other types of learned capabilities also requires an analysis of
prerequisite learnings and the identification of supportive and enabling objec-
tives.

The next three chapters describe how the plans for instructional sequence are
carried into the design of a single lesson or lesson component. It is in the latter
context that the events of instruction are introduced. These events pertain to the
external supports for learning provided by the teacher, the course materials, or
the learner himself. They depend upon previous learning that has been accom-
plished in accordance with a planned sequence.

References

Anderson, J. R. (1985). Cognitive psychology and its implications (2nd ed.). New York:
Freeman.
184 Principles of Instructional Design

Briggs, L. J. (Ed.). (1977). Instructional design: Principles and applications. Englewood

Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Briggs, L. J., & Wager, W. (1981). Handbook of procedures for the design of instruction.
Englewood Cliffs,NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions of learning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
Gagne, R. M., & Merrill, M. D. (1990). Integrative goals for instructional design.
Educational Technology Research and Development, 38(1), 23-30.
Martin, B. L., & Briggs, L. J. (1986). The affective and cognitive domains: Integration for
instruction and research. Englewood NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Cliffs,

Reigeluth, C. M., 8c Stein, F. S. (1983). The elaboration theory of instruction. In C. M.

Reigeluth (Ed.), Instructional-design theories and models. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Rumelhart, D. E., 8c Norman, D. A. (1978). Accretion, tuning, and restructuring: Three
modes of learning. In J. W. Cotton 8c R. Klatzky (Eds.), Semantic factors in cognition.
Hillsdale, NJ: Earlbaum.
Salomon, G., 8c Perkins, D. N. ( 1989). Rocky roads to transfer. Rethinking mechanisms
of a neglected phenomenon. Educational "Psychologist, 24, 113—142.
Tyler, R. W. (1949). Basic principles of curriculum and instruction. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press.
 The Events of
10 Instruction

p lanning a course of instruction makes use of the

principles described in the preceding chapters: determining what the outcomes
of instruction are to be, defining performance objectives, and deciding upon a
sequence for the topics and lessons that make up the course. When these things
have been done, the fundamental "architecture" of the course is ready for more
detailed planning in terms of both teacher and student activities. It is time to
give consideration to the bricks and mortar of the individual lesson.
Supposing, then, that the course of instruction has been planned so that the
student may reasonably progress from one lesson to the next. How does one
ensure that he or she takes each learning step and does not falter along the way?
How is the student coaxed along during the lesson itself? How does one, in fact,
instruct the student?

THE NATURE OF INSTRUCTION

we have said virtually nothing

In designing the architecture for the course,
about how instruction itself may be done. During a lesson, there is progress
from one moment to the next as a set of events acts upon and involves the
student. This set of events is what is specifically meant by instruction.
The instructional events of a lesson mav take a variety of forms. They may
require the teacher's participation to a greater or lesser degree, and they may be
determined by the student to a greater or lesser degree. In a basic sense, these

185
186 Principles of Instructional Design

events constitute a set of communicationsto the student. Their most typical form is

as verbal statements, whether oral or printed. Of course, communications for

voung children may not be verbal but instead use other media of communica-
tion such as gestures or pictures. But whatever the medium, the essential nature
of instruction is most clearlv characterized as a set of communications.
The communications that make up instruction have the sole aim of aiding the
—
process of learning that is, of getting the student from one state of mind to
another. It would be wrong to suppose that their function is simply "to
communicate" in the sense of "informing." Sometimes it appears that teachers
are inclined to make this mistake —they "like to hear themselves talk," as has
sometimes been There is perhaps no better way to avoid the error of
said.

talking too much than to keep firmly in mind that communications during a
lesson are to facilitate learning and that anvthing beyond this is mere chatter.
Much of the communicating done by a teacher is essential for learning. Some-
times a fairly large amount of teacher communication is needed; on other
occasions, however, none mav be needed at all.

Self-Instruction and the Self-Learner

Any or of the events of instruction ma\' be put into effect by the learner
all

himself when he is "self-instructing." Students engage in a good deal of self-

instruction, not solely when they are working on programmed materials, but
also when the}' are studying textbooks, performing laboratory exercises, or
completing projects of various sorts. Skill at self- instruction may be expected to
increase with the age of the learners, as they gain in experience with learning
tasks. Events of the lesson, designed to aid and support learning, require teacher
activities to a much greater extent in the first grade than they do in the tenth. As
learners can experience and continue to pursue learning activities, they acquire
more and more of the characteristics of "self-learners." That is, they are able to
use skills and strategies by which they manage their own learning.
The events of instruction to be described in this chapter, therefore, should not
be viewed as being invariably required for even' lesson and ever}' learner. In
practice, a judgment must be made concerning the extent of self- instruction the
learner is able to undertake. A more extensive consideration of self- instruction in
systems of individualized instruction is contained in Chapter 14.

Instruction and Learning

The purpose of instruction, however it may be done, is to provide support to

the processes of learning. may, therefore, be expected that the kinds of events
It

that constitute instruction should have a fairly precise relation to what is going
on within the learner whenever learning is taking place. To undertake in-
structional design at the level of the individual learning episode, it appears
necessary to derive the desirable characteristics of instructional events from what
is known about learning processes.
 The Events of Instruction 187

Although we of this book to describe modern

are unable within the confines
theoretical notions of learning processes in detail, it appears worthwhile to
provide a brief account of learning theory, which the reader may wish to
supplement by reference to other works. In particular, we are concerned with
establishing a sound basis in learning theory for the derivation of instructional
events. Each of the particular events that make up instruction functions to aid or
otherwise support the acquisition and the retendon of whatever is being
learned. These functions of external events may be derived by consideration of
the internal processing that makes up any single act of learning. The kinds of
internal processing to which we are referring are those involved in modern
cognitive learning theories (Anderson, 1985; Estes, 1975; Klatzky, 1980).
The sequence of processing envisaged by cognitive theories of learning is
approximately as follows (Gagne, 1977, 1985). The stimulation that affects the
learner's receptors produces patterns of neural activity that are briefly "reg-
istered" by sensory registers. This information is then changed into a form that is

recorded in the short-term memory, where prominent features of the original

The short-term memory has a limited capacity in terms of
stimulation are stored.
the number of items that can be held in mind. The items that are so held,
however, may be internally rehearsed and, thus, maintained. In a following
stage, an important transformation called semantic encoding takes place when the
information enters the long-term memory for storage. As its name implies, in this
kind of transformation, information is stored according to its meaning. (Note
that in the context of learning theory, information has a general definition that
includes the five kinds of learned capabilities distinguished in this book.)
When learner performance is called for, the stored information or skill must
be searched for and retrieved. It may then be transformed direcdy into action, by
way of a response generator. Frequently, the retrieved information is recalled to
the working memory (another name for the short-term memory), where it may be
combined with other incoming information to form new learned capabilities.
Learner performance itself sets in motion a process that depends upon external
feedback, involving the familiar process of reinforcement.
Figure 10-1 shows the relation between the structures involved in cognitive
theories of learning and memory and the processes associated with them.
In addition to the learning sequence itself, cognitive theories of learning and

memory propose the existence of executive control processes (not shown in

Figure 10-1). These are processes that select and set in motion cognitive
strategies relevant to learning and remembering. Control processes of this sort
modify the other information flow processes of the learner. A control process
may select a strategy of continued rehearsal of the contents of short-term
memory, for example, or a cognitive strategy of imaging sentences to be learned.
They may exercise control over attention, over the encoding of incoming
information, and over the retrieval of what has been stored.
The kinds ofprocessing presumed to occur during any single act of learning may
be summarized as follows:
188 Principles of Instructional Design

1. Attention: Determines the extent and nature of reception of incoming stimula-

tion.
2. Selective perception (sometimes called pattern recognition): Transforms this
stimulation into the form of object- features, for storage in short-term memory.
3. Rehearsal: Maintains and renews the items stored in short-term memory.
4. Semantic encoding: Prepares information for long-term storage.

STRUCTURE PROCESS

Reception of
patterns of neural impulses

Selective perception

Semantic encoding

Retrieval

Response organization

Performance

Effectors

Feed back reinforcement

FIGURE10-1 The Postulated Structures of Cognitive Learning Theories and the Processes Associated
with Them
(From R. M. Gagne, The conditions of learning, 4th ed., copyright 1985 by Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Fort
Worth, TX. Reprinted by permission.)
 The Events of Instruction 189

5. Retrieval, including search: Returns stored information to the working memory

or to a response generator.
6. Response organization: Selects and organizes performance.
7. Feedback: Provides the learner with information about performances and sets in
motion the process of reinforcement.
8. Executive control processes: Select and activate cognitive strategies; these modify
any or all of the previously listed internal processes.

Instructional Events

The processes involved in an act of learning are, to a large extent, activated

internally. That is to say, the output of any one structure (or the result of any
one kind of processing) becomes an input for the next, as Figure 10-1 indicates.
However, these processes may also be influenced by external events, and this is
what makes instruction possible. Selective perception, for example, may
obviously be affected by particular arrangements of external stimuli. The fea-
tures of a picture or text organized by perception may be influenced by high-
lighting, underlining, bold printing, and other measures of this general sort.
Similarly, the particular kind of semantic encoding that is done in learning may
be specified or suggested by meaningful information provided externally.
From these reflections on the implications of learning theory, one can derive a
definition. Typically, instruction consists of a set of events external to the learner
designed to support the internal processes of learning (Gagne, 1977, 1985). The
events of instruction are designed to make it possible for learners to proceed
from "where they are" to the achievement of the capability identified as the
target objective. In some instances, these events occur as a natural result of the
learner's interaction with the particular materials of the lesson, as, for example,
when the beginning reader comes to recognize an unfamiliar printed word as
something familiar in her oral vocabulary and, thus, receives feedback. Mostly,
however, the events of instruction must be deliberately arranged by an in-
structional designer or teacher. The exact form of these events (usually com-
munications to the learner) is not something that can be specified in general for
all lessons, but rather must be decided for each learning objective. The particular

communications chosen to fit each set of circumstances, however, should be

designed to have the desired effect in supporting learning processes.
The functions served by the various events of instruction in an act of learning
are listed in Table 10-1, in the approximate order in which they are typically
employed (Gagne, 1968, 1985). The initial event otgaining attention is one that
supports the learning event of reception of the stimuli and the patterns of neural
impulses they produce. Before proceeding further, another instructional event is
designed to prepare the learner for the remaining sequence. This is event
number which is presumed to set in
2, informing the learner of the objective,
motion a process of executive control by means of which the learner selects
particular strategies appropriate to the learning task and its expected outcome.
Event number 3 is also preparatory to learning and refers to the retrieval of items
190 Principles of Instructional Design

ofprior learning that may need to be incorporated in the capability being newly
learned. Events 4 through 9 of Table 10-1 are each related to the learning
processes shown in Figure 10-1.
It should be realized that these events of instruction do not invariably occur in
this exact order, although this is their most probable order. Even more impor-
tant, by no means are all of these events provided for every lesson. Their role is

to stimulate internal information processes, not to replace them. Sometimes,

one or more of the events may already be obvious to the learner and, therefore,
may not be needed. Also, one or more of these events are frequendy provided by
learners themselves, particularly when they are experienced self-learners. In
designing instruction, the of instructional events usually becomes a checklist.
list

In using the checklist, the designer asks, "Do these learners need support at this
stage for learning this task?"

Gaining Attention

Various kinds of events are employed to gain the learner's attention. Basic ways
of commanding attention involve the use of stimulus change, as is often done in
moving display signs or in the rapid "cutting" of scenes on a television screen.
Beyond this, a fundamental and frequently used method of gaining attention is
to appeal to the learner's interests. A teacher may appeal to some particular
student's interests bymeans of a verbal question such as "Wouldn't you like to
know what makes a leaf fall from a tree?" in introducing a lesson dealing with
leaves. One student's interest may be captured by such a question as "How do
you figure a baseball player's batting average?" in connection with a lesson on
percentages. Naturally, one cannot provide a standard content for such ques-
tions — quite to the contrarv since every student's interests are different. Skill at
gaining attention is a part of the teacher's art, involving insightful knowledge of
the particular students involved.
Communications that are partially or even wholly nonverbal are often em-
ployed to gain attention for school lessons. For example, the teacher may
present a demonstration, perhaps exhibiting some physical event (a puff of

Tablel 0-1 Events of Instruction and Their Relation to Processes of Learning

Instructional Event Relation to Learning Process

1. Gaining attention Reception of patterns of neural impulses

2. Informing learner of the objective Activating a process of executive control

3. Stimulating recall of prerequisite learning Retrieval of pnor learning to working memory

4. Presenting the stimulus matenal Emphasizing features for selective perception
5. Providing learning guidance Semantic encoding; cues for retrieval

6. Eliciting the performance Activating response organization

7. Providing feedback about performance correctness Establishing reinforcement

8. Assessing the performance Activating retrieval; making reinforcement possible

9. Enhancing retention and transfer Providing cues and strategies for retrieval
 The Events of Instruction 191

smoke, an unexpected collision, a change in the color of a liquid), which is novel

and appeals to the student's interest or curiosity. Or a motion picture or
television scene mav depict an unusual event and thus command attention.
A good preplanned lesson provides the teacher with one or more options for
communications designed to gain attention. When instruction is individualized,
the teacher is able to van- the content and form of the communication whenever
necessary to appeal to individual student interests.

Informing the Learner of the Objective

In some manner or other, the learner should know the kind of performance that
will be used as an indication that learning has, in been accomplished.
fact,

Sometimes aim of learning is quite obvious, and no special communication

this
is required. For example, it would be somewhat ridiculous to make a special

effort to communicate the objective to a novice golfer who undertakes to

practice putting. However, there are many performance objectives that may not
be initially obvious to students in school. For example, if the subject under study
is the Preamble to the United States Constitution, being able to recite it

verbatim is not at all the same objective as being able to state its major ideas. If
decimals are being studied, is it obvious to the student during any given lesson
whether he or she is expected to learn to (1) read decimals, (2) write decimals,
or perhaps, (3) add decimals? The student should not be required to guess what
is in the instructor's mind. The student needs to be told (unless, of course, he or

she already knows).

On the whole, it is probably best not to take the chance of assuming that the
student knows what the objective of the lesson is. Such a communication takes
little time and may at least serve the purpose of preventing the student from
"getting entirely off the track."Communicating the objective also appears to be
an act consistent with the frankness and honesty of a good teacher. In addition,
the act of verbalizing the objective may help the teacher to stay "on target."
Of course, if objectives are to be communicated effectively, they must be put
into words (or pictures, if appropriate) that the student can readily understand.
For a six-year-old child, an objective like "given a noun subject and object and
an active verb, formulate a correct sentence" must be translated into a com-
munication that runs somewhat as follows: "Suppose I have the words 'boy,'
'dog,' and 'caught.' You could make them into a sentence, like The boy caught
the dog.' This is called 'making a sentence,' and that's what I want you to do
with the words I point to." Performance objectives, when used to describe a
course of study, are typically stated in a form designed to communicate un-
ambiguously to teachers or to instructional designers. The planning of instruc-
tion for a lesson, however, includes making the kind of communication of the
lesson's objective that will be readily understood by students.
It is sometimes speculated that communicating an objective to students may

tend to keep them from trying to meet still other objectives they may formulate
192 Principles of Instructional Design

themselves. No one has ever seen this happen, and the chances are it is a highly
unlikely possibility. When one communicates a lesson's objective to students,
they are hardly inclined to think that such a statement forbids them from giving
further thought to the subject at hand. Working with an objective of "reading
decimals," for example, it is not uncommon for a teacher to ask, "What do you
suppose the sum of these decimals might be?" Thus, still another objective is
communicated, about which the students are perfecdy free to think about, while
making sure that they have achieved the first objective. Naturally, one also wants
the students to develop in such a way that they will think of objectives them-
selves and learn how to teach them to themselves. Nothing in the communica-
tion of a lesson's objectives carries the slightest hint that such activities are to be
discouraged. The basic purpose of such communication is simply to answer the
student's question, "How will I know when I have learned?"
When multiple objectives are to be attained, serving the purpose of an
enterprise, here is the instructional event that may be elaborated to build a goal
schema. The toward which the
learner should be informed about the enterprise
new learning aimed as a basis for acquiring an appropriate goal. What kind of
is

purposeful activity might the learner be engaged in once the multiple objectives
of the lesson have been acquired? Is he likely to be asked to use his newly learned
knowledge to pass a particular kind of test, to teach the knowledge to other
people, to make some sort of practical application, or to solve a particular sort of
problem? Whatever the enterprise is, it will draw upon the single objectives
(verbal information, skills, attitudes) that make up the performance and that
accordingly must be integrated into the goal. By means of verbal statements to
the learner, a scenario is communicated that will relate the various single
objectives to the goal.

Stimulating Recall of Prerequisite Learned Capabilities

This kind of communication mav be critical for the essential event of learning.
Much of new learning (some might say all) is, after all, the combining of ideas.
Learning a rule about moss (Newton's second law of motion) involves a com-
bination of the ideas of acceleration and force, as well as the idea of multiplying. In
terms of modern mathematics, learning the idea of eight involves the idea of the
set seven, the set one, and joining. Component ideas (concepts, rules) must be

previously learned if the new learning is to be successful. At the moment of

learning, these previously acquired capabilities must be highly accessible to be
part of the learning event. Their accessibility is ensured by having them recalled
just before the new learning takes place.
The recall of previously learned capabilities may be stimulated by asking a
recognition or, better, a recall question. For example, when children are being
taught about rainfall in relation to mountains, the question may be asked, "Do
you remember what the air is like in a cloud that has traveled over land in the
summer?" (The air is warm.) The further question may then be asked, "What is
 The Events of Instruction 193

the temperature of the land on a high mountain likely to be?" (Cold.) This line
of questioning recalls previously learned rules and obviously leads to a strand of
learning that will culminate with the acquisition of a new rule concerning the
effects of cooling on a warm, moisture-laden cloud.

I
Presenting the Stimulus Material

The nature of this particular event is relatively obvious. The stimuli to be

displayed (or communicated) to the learner are those involved in the perfor-
mance that reflects the learning. If the learner must learn a sequenceof facts,
such as events from historv, then there are facts that must be communicated,
whether in oral or printed form. If the learner is engaged in the task of
pronouncing aloud printed words, as in elementary reading, then the printed
words must be displayed. If the student must learn to respond to oral questions
in French, then these oral questions must be presented since they are the stimuli
of the task to be learned.
Although seemingly obvious, it is nevertheless of some importance that the
proper stimuli be presented as a part of the instructional events. For example, if
the learner is acquiring the capability of answering questions delivered orally in
French, then the proper stimuli are not English questions or printed French
questions. (This is not to deny, however, that such tasks may represent sub-
ordinate skills that have previously been used as learning tasks.) If the learner is
to acquire the capability of using positive and negative numbers to solve verbally
stated problems, then the proper stimuli are verbally stated problems and not
something else. If one neglects to use the proper stimuli for learning, the end
result may be that the learner acquires the "wrong" skill.
Stimulus presentation often emphasizes features that determine selective per-
ception. Thus, information presented in a text may contain italics, bold print,
underlining, or other kinds of physical arrangements designed to facilitate
perception of essential features. When pictures or diagrams are employed,
important features of the concepts they display may be heavily outlined, circled,
or pointed to with arrows. In establishing discriminations, distinctive features
may be emphasized by enlarging the differences between the objects to be
distinguished. For example, in programs of reading readiness, large differences
in shapes (such as those of a circle and triangle) may be introduced first,
followed by figures exhibiting smaller differences. Distorted features of a b and d
may be initially presented in order that the smaller differences of these letters
will eventually be discriminated.
Stimulus presentation for the learning of concepts and rules requires the use
of a variety of examples. When the learning of a concept such as
the objective is

circle, it is and small circles on the chalkboard

desirable to present not only large
or in a book, but also green circles, red ones, and ones made of rope or string.
One might even have the children stand and join hands to form a circle. For
young children, the importance of this event can hardiv be overemphasized.
194 Principles of Instructional Design

The provide such a variety of examples accounts for the classic instance
failure to
related by William James in which a boy could recognize a vertical position when
a pencil was used as the test object, but not when a table knife was held in that
position.
Comparable degrees of usefulness can be seen in the use of variety of examples
as an event for rule learning. To apply the formula for area of a rectangle, A — x •

y, must not only be able to recall the statement that represents the
the student
rule, but he must know that A means area; he must understand what area
means; he must know the x and^ are the dimensions of two nonparallel sides of
the rectangle, and he must know that the dot between x and y means to multiply.
But even when all these subordinated concepts and rules are known, the learner
must do a variety of examples to ensure that he understands and can use the rule.
Retention and transfer are also likely to be enhanced by presenting problems
stated in words, in diagrams, and in combinations of the two over a period of
time.
Once such rules are learned, groups of them need to be selectively recalled,
combined, and used to solve problems. Employing a variety of examples in
problem solving might entail teaching the learner to break down odd-shaped
figures into known shapes, like circles, triangles, and rectangles, and then to
apply rules for finding the area of these figures as a way to arrive at the total area
of the entire shape.
In the learning of both concepts and rules, one may proceed either inductively
or deductively. In learning concrete concepts, like circle or rectangle, it is best to
introduce a variety of examples before introducing the definition of the concept.
(Imagine teaching a four-year-old child the formal definition of a circle before
exposure to a variety of circles!) But for older learners who are learning defined
concepts, a simple definition might best come first, such as "A root is the part of
a plant below the ground." Assuming the learner understands the component
concepts that are contained in the statement, this should be a good start,

perhaps followed at once by a picture.

Providing Learning Guidance

Suppose one wishes a learner to acquire a rule (or it might be called a defined
concept) about the characteristics of prime numbers. He might begin by display-
ing a list of successive numbers, say, 1 through 25. He then might ask the
learner to recall that the numbers may be expressed as products of various
factors: 8 = 2-4 = 2-2-2 = 81, and so on. The learner could then be asked
to write out all the factors for the set of whole numbers through 30. What is
wanted now, as a learning outcome, is for the learner to discover the rule that
there is a certain class of numbers whose only factor (or divisor) other than the
number itself is 1
The learner may be able to "see" this rule immediately. If not, he may be led to
its discovery by a series of communications in the form of hints or questions.
 The Events of Instruction 195

For example, such a series might run somewhat as follows: "Do you see any
regularities in this set of numbers?" "Do the original numbers differ with respect
to the number of differentfactors they contain?" "In what way are the numbers
3, 5, and 7 from 4, 8, and 10?" "In what way is the number 7 like the
different
number 23?" "Can you pick out all the numbers that are like 7 and 23?"
These communications and others like them may be said to have the function
of learning guidance. Notice that they do not "tell the learner the answer";
rather, they suggest the line of thought which will presumably lead to the
desired "combining" of subordinate concepts and rules to form the new to-be-
learned rule. Again, it is apparent that the specific form and content of such
questions and hints cannot be spelled out in precise terms. Exactly what the
teacher or textbook says is not the important point. It is rather that such

communications are performing a particular function. They are stimulating a

direction of thought and are thus helping to keep the learner on the track. In
performing this function, they contribute to the efficiency of learning.
The amount of learning guidance, that is, the number of questions and the
degree to which thev provide "direct or indirect prompts," will obviously van'
with the kind of capability being learned (Wittrock, 1966). If what is to be
learned is an arbitrary matter such as the name for an object new to the learner
(say, a pomegranate), there is obviously no sense in wasting time with indirect
hinting or questioning in the hope that somehow such a name will be "dis-
covered." In this case, just telling the student the answer is the correct form of
guidance for learning. At the other end of the spectrum, however, are cases
where less direct prompting is appropriate because this is a logical way to
discover the answer, and such discover}' may lead to learning that is more
permanent than that which results from being told the answer.
Guidance for learning is an event that may readily be adapted to learner
differences, as described in Chapter 6. Instruction that is highly didactic and that
makes use of "low-level" questions is likely to find greatest appeal and effective-
ness among learners of high anxiety, whereas low-anxiety learners may be
positively affected by the challenge of difficult questions. As previously noted,
guidance taking the form of frequent pictures and oral communications may aid
learners of low ability in reading comprehension, whereas these measures may
be quite inefficient with skillful readers.
The amount of hinting or prompting involved in the learning guidance event
will also vary with the kind of learners. Some learners require less learning
guidance than do others; they simply "catch on" more quickly. Too much
guidance may seem condescending to the quick learner, whereas too little can
simply lead to frustration on the part of the slow learner. The best practical
solution may sometimes be to apply learning guidance a little at a time and allow
the student to use as much as he needs. Only one hint may be necessary for a fast
learner, whereas three or four may work better with a slower learner. Providing
adaptive learning of this sort can readily be made part of a total system of
computer-based instruction (Tennyson, 1984).
196 Principles of Instructional Design

In the learning of attitudes, a human model may be employed, as indicated in

Chapter 5. Models themselves, as well as the communications they deliver, may
be considered to constitute the learning guidance in attitude learning. Thus, the
total instructional event in this case takes a somewhat more complex form than
is the case with the learning of verbal information or intellectual skills. The same
function of semantic encoding is being served, however.

Eliciting the Performance

Presumably, having had sufficient learning guidance, the learners will now be
carried to the point where the combining event of learning takes
actual internal
place. Perhaps the}' look less confused, or some indication of pleasure has
crossed their faces. They have seen how to do it We must now ask them to !

show that thev know how to do it. We want them not only to convince us, but
to convince themselves as well.
Accordingly, the next event is a communication that in effect says "show me"
or "do it." Usually, thisperformance following learning will use the same
first

example (that is, the same stimulus material) with which the learners have been
interacting all along. For example, if they have been learning to make plurals of
words ending in ix and have been presented with the word matrix, the first
performance is likely to be production of the plural matrices. In most instances,
the instructor will follow this with a second example, such as appendix, to make
sure the rule can be applied in a new instance.

Providing Feedback

Although in many situations, it may be assumed that the essential learning event
is concluded once the correct performance has been exhibited by the learner, this
is not universally the case. One must be highly aware of the aftereffects of the

learning event and their important influence on determining exactly what is

learned. In other words, as a minimum, there should be feedback concerning the
correctness or degree of correctness of the learner's performance. In many
instances, such feedback is automaticallv provided —
for example, an individual
learning to throw darts can see almost immediately how far away from the bull's
eye the dart lands. Similarly, a child who
to match a printed word
has managed
with one in her oral vocabulary, which same time conveys an expected
at the
meaning, receives a kind of immediate feedback that has a fair degree of
certainty. But, of course, there are many tasks of school learning that do not
provide this kind of "automatic" feedback. For example, in practicing using the
pronouns I and me in a variety of situations, is the student able to tell which are
right and which are not? In such instances, feedback from an outside source,
usually a teacher, may be an essential event.
There are no standard ways of phrasing or delivering feedback. In an in-
structional program, the confirmation of correctness is often printed on the side
 The Events of Instruction 197

of the page or on the following page. Even standard textbooks for such subjects
as mathematics and science customarily have answers printed in the back of the
book. When the teacher is observing the learner's performance, the feedback
communication may be delivered in many different ways a nod, a smile, or a —
spoken word. Again in this instance, the important characteristic of the com-
^munication is not its content but its function: providing information to the
learners about the correctness of their performance.

Assessing Performance

The immediate indication that the desired learning has occurred is provided
when the appropriate performance is elicited. This is, in effect, an assessment of
learning outcome. Accepting it as such, however, raises the larger questions of
reliability and validity that relate to all systematic attempts to assess outcomes or
to evaluate the effectiveness of instruction. These are discussed in a later chapter,
and we shall simply state here their relevance to the single learning event.
When one sees the learner exhibit a single performance appropriate to the
lesson objective, how does the observer or teacher tell that he or she has made a
reliable observation? How does that person know the student didn't do the
required performance by chance or by guessing? Obviously, many of the doubts
raised by this question can be dispelled by asking the learner to "do it again,"
using a different example. A first grader shows the ability to distinguish the
sounds of mat and mate. Has he been lucky, or can the child exhibit the same
rule-governed performance with pal and palel Ordinarily, one expects the
second instance of the performance to raise the reliability of the inference
(concerning the student's capability) far beyond the chance level. Employing yet
a third example should lead to a higher probability so far as the observer is
concerned.
How is the teacher to be convinced that the performance exhibited by the
learner is valid? This is a matter that requires two different decisions. The first is,
does the performance in For example, if the
fact accurately reflect the objective?
objective is to "recount the main idea of the passage in your own words," the
judgment must be made as to whether what the student says is indeed the main
idea. The second judgment, which is no easier to make, is whether the perfor-
mance has occurred under conditions that make the observation free of distortion.
As an example, the conditions must be such that the student could not have
"memorized the answer" or remembered it from a previous occasion. The
teacher must be convinced, in other words, that the observation of performance
reveals the learned capability in a genuine manner.
Obviously, the single, double, or triple observations of performance that are
made immediately after learning may be conducted in quite an informal manner.
Yet they are of the same sort, and part of the same piece of cloth, as the more
formally planned assessments described in a later chapter. There need be no
conflict between them and no discrepancies.
198 Principles of Instructional Design

Enhancing Retention and Transfer

When information or knowledge is to be recalled, the existence of the meaning-
ful context in which the material has been learned appears to offer the best
assurance that the information can be reinstated. The network of relationships in
which the newlv learned material has been embedded provides a number of
different possibilities as cues for its retrieval.

Provisions made of intellectual skills often include arrangements

for the recall
for "practicing" their retrieval. Thus, if defined concepts, rules, and higher-order
rules are to be well retained, course planning must make provision for systematic
reviews spaced at intervals throughout weeks and months. The effectiveness of
these spaced repetitions, each of which requires that the skill be retrieved and
used, contrasts with the relative ineffectiveness of repeated examples given
directly following the initial learning (Reynolds and Glaser, 1964).
As for the assurance of transfer of learning, it appears that this can best be
—
done by setting some variety of new tasks for the learner tasks that require the
application of what has been learned in situations that differ substantially from
those used for the learning itself. For example, suppose that what has been
learned is the set of rules pertaining to "making the verb agree with the pronoun
subject." Additional tasks that vary the pronoun and the verb may have been
used to assess performance. Arranging conditions for transfer, however, means
varying the entire situation more broadlv still. This might be accomplished, in
this instance, by asking the child to compose several sentences in which he
himself supplies the verb and pronoun (rather than having them supplied by the
teacher) . In another variation of the situation, the student may be asked to
compose sentences using pronouns and verbs to describe some actions shown in
pictures. Ingenuity on the part of the teacher is called for in designing a variety
of novel "application" situations for the purpose of ensuring the transfer of
learning.
Variety and novelty in problem-solving tasks are of particular relevance to the
continued development of cognitive strategies. As has previously been men-
tioned, the strategies used in problem solving need to be developed by the
systematic introduction of occasions for problem solving, interspersed with
other instruction. An additional event to be especially noted in the presentation
of novel problems to the student is the need to make clear the general nature of
the solution expected. For example, "practical" solutions mav be quite different
from "original" solutions, and the student's performance can easily be affected
by such differences in the communication of the objective (cf. Johnson, 1972).

Instructional Events and Learning Outcomes

The events of instruction mav be appropriately used in connection with each of
the five kinds of learned capabilities described in Chapters 4 and 5. In the case of
some instructional events, such as gaining attention, the particular means em-
ployed to bring about the event does not have to be different for intellectual skill
 The Events of Instruction 199

objectives, say, and for attitude objectives. However, for learning guidance, the
specific nature of the event is likely to be very different indeed. As we have seen
in the previous section, the encoding of an intellectual skill may be guided by
verbal instructions, such as communicating to the learner a verbal statement of a
rule to be learned. In contrast, effective encoding of an attitude often requires a
complex event that includes observation of a human model. The requirement of
differing treatments of instructional events extends also to step 3, stimulating
recall of prior learning, and to step 4, presenting the stimulus.
A summary of events 3, 4, and 5 for each type of learned capability is
contained in Table 10-2, along with examples of the function served by these
events. For each kind of learning outcome, appropriate conditions of learning
are listed under each of the three events. These descriptions are not intended to
be all inclusive; additional suggestions for the design of instructional events are
given in the preceding paragraphs of this section.

Table 1 0-2 Functions of Instructional Events 3, 4, and 5 with Examples for Each of Five Kinds of Learning

Outcomes
Intellectual Skill

Event 3: Stimulate Recall of Prior Learning Essential for learner to retrieve to working memory prerequisite rules

and concepts
Event 4: Present the Stimulus Display a statement of the rule or concept, with example giving emphasis to
features of component concepts
Event 5: Provide Learning Guidance Present varied examples in varied contexts; also, give elaborations to furnish

cues for retrieval

Cognitive Strategy
Event 3: Stimulate Recall of Prior Learning Recall task strategies and relevant intellectual skills

Event 4: Present the Stimulus Describe the task and the strategy, and show what the strategy accomplishes
Event 5: Provide Learning Guidance Describe the strategy and give one or more application examples

Verbal Information

Event 3: Stimulate Recall of Prior Learning Recall familiar well-organized bodies of knowledge related to the new
learning

Event 4: Present the Stimulus Display printed or verbal statements, emphasizing distinctive features

Event 5: Provide Learning Guidance Elaborate content by relating to larger bodies of knowledge; use mnemonics,
images

Attitude
Event 3: Stimulate Recall'of Prior Learning Recall the situation and the actions involved in personal choice. Remind
learner of human model
Event 4: Present the Stimulus Human model describes the general nature of the choice of personal action to be

presented

Motor Skill

Event 3: Stimulate Recall of Prior Learning Recall the executive subroutine and relevant part skills

Event 4: Present the Stimulus Display the situation existing at the beginning of the skill performance. Demon-
strate executive subroutine

Event 5: Provide Learning Guidance Continue practice with informative feedback

200 Principles of Instructional Design

An inspection of the table will show that the particular form taken by each of
these three instructional events depends upon the capability to be learned. For
example, when an intellectual skill is to be learned, the stimulation of recall
pertains to the retrieval of prerequisite concepts or rules; whereas if verbal
information is to be learned, the recall of a context of organized information is

required. Similar differences in the specific form of event 3, as well as events 4

and 5, may be noted throughout the table.

THE EVENTS OF INSTRUCTION IN A LESSON

In using the events of instruction for lesson planning, it is apparent that they
must be organized manner, with primary attention to the lesson's
in a flexible
objectives. What is implied by our description of these events is obviously not a
standard, routine set of communications and action. The invariant features of
the single lesson are the functions that need to be carried out in instruction.
Even these functions are adapted to the specific situation, the task to be
accomplished, the tvpe of learning represented in the task, and the students'
prior learning. But each one of these functions should be specifically considered
in lesson planning.
It is now possible to consider how these events are exemplified within an
actual lesson. We have chosen, as an example, a set of instructions to the
designer of a computer-based lesson, showing the implications of each in-
structional event for frame-by-frame design (Gagne, Wager, and Rojas, 1981).
The lesson is about a defined concept in use of the English language, namely, the
part of a sentence called the object. Instructions to the designer are outlined in
Table 10-3.
It will be evident that this lesson in English grammar may best be conceived as
part of a longer sequence in which such prior concepts as sentence, subject, and
predicate have already been learned. For learners without such previous experi-
ence, instruction in the concept object would need to begin with simpler prereq-
uisite concepts. It may be noted that the lesson is carefully planned in the sense
that it reflects each of the instructional events described in this chapter.
Obviously, it is an exercise in which the designer's art has considerable opportu-
nity to flourish within the framework of events that support the desired learn-
ing.

Comparison with Lessons for Older Students

As instruction is planned for middle and higher grades, one can expect the
events of instruction to be increasingly controlled by the materials of a lesson or
by the learners themselves. Thus, when the units of instruction that make up a
course of study are structurally similar, as may be the case in mathematics or
beginning foreign language, for example, the objectives for each succeeding unit
Table 10-3 Events of Instruction in Design of a Computer-Based Lesson

Instructional Event Procedure

1 . Gaining attention Present initial operating instructions on screen, including some displays that

change second by second. Call attention to screen presentation, using words

like "Look!" "Watch!" etc.

Informing learner of les- State in simple terms what the student will have accomplished once he or she

son objective has learned.

Examples: "Joe chased the ball."

"The sun shines brightly."

One of these sentences contains a word that is an object, the other does not.

Can you pick out the object? In the first sentence, ball is the object of the verb

chased. In the second sentence, none of the words is an object. You are about to

learn how to identify the object in a sentence.

Stimulating recall Recall concepts previously learned.

prior learning Example: Any sentence has a subject and a predicate. The subject is usually a

noun, or a noun phrase. The predicate begins with a verb. What is the subject

of this sentence?

"The play began at eight o'clock."

What verb begins the predicate of this sentence?

"The child upset the cart."

Presenting stimuli with Present a definition of the concept.

distinctive features Example: An object is a noun in the predicate to which the action (of the verb) is

directed. For example, consider the sentence,

"The rain pelted the roof."

The word roof\s the object of the verb "pelted."

5. Guiding learning Take a sentence like this:

"Peter milked the cow."

The answer is the cow, and that is the object of the verb. Notice, though, that

some sentences do not have objects.

"The rain fell slowly down."

In this sentence, the action of the verb fell is not stated to be directed at

something. So, in this sentence, there is no object

6. Eliciting performance Present three to five examples of sentences, one by one. Ask, "Type if this

sentence has an object; then type the word that is the object."

Examples: "Sally closed the book."

"The kite rose steadily."

Providing informative Give information about correct and incorrect responses.

feedback Example: Book is the object of the verb closed m the first sentence. The second

sentence does not have an object.

Assessing performance Present a new set of concept instances and noninstances in three to five

additional pairs of sentences. Ask questions requiring answers. Tell the learner

if mastery is achieved and what to do next if it is not.

Enhancing retention and Present three to five additional concept instances, varied in form.

learning transfer Example: Use sentences such as

"Neoclassical expressions often supplant

mere platitudes."

Introduce review questions at spaced intervals.

Note. From "Planning and authonng computer-assisted instruction lessons" by R. M. Gagne, W. Wager, and A. Rojas, p. 23.

Educational Technology. September, 1981, Copynght 1981 by Educational Technology Publications. Repnnted by permission of the

authors and copyright owners.

201
202 Principles of Instructional Design

may be evident to students and, therefore, may not need to be communicated.

For reasonably well-motivated students, it is often unnecessary to make any
special provisions for controlling attention since this event, too, may be appro-
priately managed by the learners themselves. This circumstance clearly contrasts
with that prevailing in, say, a classroom of seventh graders where the teacher
may need to make special provisions for getting their attention.
Homework assignments, such as those that call for learning from a text,
depend upon the learners to employ cognitive strategies available to them in
managing instructional events. The text may aid selective perception by its
inclusion of bold printing, topic headings, and other features of this general
sort. The text may, and often does, include a context of meaningful material that
provides for semantic encoding by relating new information to organized
knowledge already in learners' memories. An important part of "studying,"
however, is the necessity for practicing appropriate performance, whether this is
a matter of stating information in the learner's own words, applying a newly
learned rule to examples, or originating solutions to novel problems. For these
events of self- instruction, as well as for the judgment of correctness that gives an
immediate sort of feedback, learners frequently must depend upon cognitive
strategies available to them.

SUMMARY
This chapteris concerned with the events that make up instruction for any single

performance objective as they may occur within a lesson. These are the events
that are usually external to the learner, supplied by the teacher, text, or other
media with which the learner interacts. When self-instruction is undertaken, as is
to be more frequently expected as the learner's experience increases, in-

structional events may be brought about by the learner himself. However they
originate, the purpose of these events is to activate and support the internal
processes of learning.
The general nature of supporting external events may be derived from the
information- processing (or cognitive) model of learning and memory, which is
employed in one form or another by many contemporary learning investigators.
This model proposes that a single act of learning involves a number of stages of
internal processing. Beginning with the receipt of stimulation by receptors,
these stages include (1) a brief registration of sensory events, (2) temporary
storage of stimulus features in the short-term memory, (3) a rehearsal process
that may be employed to lengthen the period of short-term storage to prepare
information for entry into long-term memory, (4) semantic encoding for long-
term storage, (5) search and retrieval to recall previousy learned material, and
(6) response organization producing a performance appropriate to what has been
learned. Most of (7)
theories include, either implicitly or explicitly, the process
reinforcement as brought about by external feedback of the correctness of per-
formance. In addition, this learning model postulates a number of (8) executive
 The Events of Instruction 203

control processes that enable the learner to select and use cognitive strategies that

influence other learning processes.

As derived from this learning model, instructional events are:

1. gaining attention
2. informing the learner of the objective
3. stimulating recall of prerequisite learnings
4. presenting the stimulus material
5. providing learning guidance
6. eliciting the performance
7. providing feedback about performance correctness
8. assessing the performance
9. enhancing retention and transfer

These events apply to the learning of all of the types of learning outcomes we
have previously described. Examples are given to illustrate how each is planned
for and put into effect.
The order of these events for a lesson or lesson segment is approximate and
mav van' somewhat depending on the objective. Not all of the events are
invariablv used. Some are made to occur by the teacher, some by the learner, and
some bv the instructional materials. An older, more experienced learner may
supply most of these events by his own study effort. For young children, the
teacher would arrange for most of them.
As these events apply to the various kinds of capabilities being acquired, they
take on different specific characteristics (Gagne, 1985). These differences are
particularly apparent in the following events from our list: event 3, stimulating
recall of prior learning; event 4, presenting the stimulus material; and event 5,

providing learning guidance. For example, presenting the stimulus (event 4) for the
learning of discriminations requires conditions in which the differences in
stimuli become increasingly fine. Concept learning, however, requires the pre-
sentation of a variety of instances and noninstances of the general class. Con-
ditions of learning guidance (event 5) required for the learning of rules include
examples of application; whereas these conditions for verbal information learn-
ing are prominendy concerned with linking to a larger meaningful context. For
attitude learning, this event takes on an even more distinctive character when it
includes a human model and the model's communication.
An example is given of using the events of instruction for the design of a
computer-based lesson on a defined concept in English grammar.

References

Anderson, J. R. (1985). Cognitive psychology and its implications (2nd ed.). New York:
Freeman.
Estes, W. K. (Ed.). (1985). Handbook of learning and cognitive processes: Introduction to
concepts and issues (Vol. 1). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
204 Principles of Instructional Design

Gagne, R. M. (1968). Learning and communication. In R. V. Wiman W. C. &

Meierhenry (Eds.), Educational media: Theory into practice. Columbus, OH: Merrill.
Gagne, R. M. (1977). Instructional programs. In M. H. Marx &
M. E. Bunch (Eds.),
Fundamentals and applications of learning. New York: Macmillan.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions oflearning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
Gagne, R. M., Wager, W., &
Rojas, A. (1981, September). Planning and authoring
computer-assisted instruction lessons. Educational Technology, 17-26.
Johnson, D. M. (1972). A systematic introduction to the psychology of thinking. New York:
Harper & Row.
Klatzky, R. L. (1980). Human memory: Structures and processes (2nd ed.). San Francisco:
Freeman.
Reynolds, J. H., & Glaser, R. (1964). Effects of repetition and spaced review upon
retention of a complex learning task. Journal of Educational Psychology, 55, 297-308.
Tennyson, R. D. (1984). Artificial intelligence methods in computer-based instructional
design: The Minnesota adaptive instructional system. Journal of Instructional Develop-
ment, 7(3), 17-22.
Wittrock, M. C. (1966). The learning by discovery hypothesis. In L. S. Shulman 8c E. R.
Keislar (Eds.), Learning by discovery: A critical appraisal. Chicago: Rand McNally.
 14 Selecting and Using
Media

o
in instructional design is
ne of the essential decisions that must be made
what medium to employ as a vehicle for the com-
munications and stimulation that make up instruction.
In this chapter, we describe the problem of media selection confronting
designers of instructional programs and teachers. Some of the common features
of media selection "models" will be described as well as the factors to be taken
into account in selecting media. A method of media selection will then be
outlined that indicates ways of incorporating desirable features. Some limita-
tions of this method will be noted in comparison with other models.

SELECTION VERSUS DEVELOPMENT OF MEDIA PRESENTATIONS

When instructional design is developed from the verv beginning, one expects
that media presentations will be part of the design. The term media, however, is
employed here in a very broad sense. Instructional deli verv mav be accomplished
by means of the verbal speech of a teacher or by a printed text as well as by way
of vehicles of more complex technical materials, such as sound and video
recordings. Often, however, existing media presentations are selected as part of a
larger instructional plan rather than being separately designed and developed.
Teachers, as well as teams of instructional designers, mav earn' out a com-
prehensive design of instruction that depends upon the selection of media.

205
206 Principles of Instructional Design

Teachers as Instructional Designers

The who deliver instruction often select and use a great

teachers or instructors
variety of both print and nonprint media. Only frequently do instructors devel-
op such materials or media presentations themselves. In conventional pro-
cedures, teachers select materials that will enable learners to master the desired
objectives. This selection function can be thought of as a part of lesson planning.
Briggs (1977) has suggested that a completed lesson plan contain the following
ingredients:

1. A statement of the objectives of- the lesson

2. A list of instructional events to be included in the lesson
3. A list of media, materials, and activities bv which each event is to be accom-
plished
4. Notes on necessary teacher roles and activities and on communications to be
made to the learners

It will be recalled from earlier chapters that we view the purpose of com-
munications to the learner each
as contributing desired instructional events for
lesson. Most of of the domains of learning
these events are needed in all

outcomes, depending somewhat on the experience level of the learners. One

must choose same medium for deliver)' of instructional communications. The
medium chosen may be the instructor's voice, a film, a book, or the learner's
own study effort.
In selecting media and materials, the teacher is likely to discover immediately
that available materials and media presentations are not indexed or catalogued
according to the intended instructional objectives.
It is therefore suggested that the teacher make decisions about media in the
process of lesson planning based on the following two questions:

1. What medium would I like to use for each intended learning outcome?
2. Where will I find the specific materials?

Actually, of course, there is a third question affecting the teacher's decisions,

and that is how the selected materials will be used. But this chapter deals
primarily with media selection, and a later chapter focuses on media utilization.
Although available materials will often contain much of the desired content
(thus providing the desired instructional stimulus), they may not provide for
other instructional events. For example, a film may deliver desired content, but
it may not present the objective, guide semantic encoding, or contain pauses for
student response and feedback. In that case, the teacher must either create such
events separately from the film, or stop the film at points so that questions and
feedback can occur.
Most often, then, the teacher is faced with having to select media and
materials that were not specifically designed for the exact objectives that have
 Selecting and Using Media 207

been adopted. Furthermore, the materials available often do not provide all the
desired instructional events.Manv materials are carefully organized to present
information in a logical order but do not cover each instructional event appro-
priate for particular objectives. As a result, the teacher cannot make all the media
selections from catalogs; the actual materials must be previewed before final
selection is made. Subsequendy, the teacher's lesson plans are designed to
indicate how the selected materials will be used and how the events not pre-
sented by the materials are to be accomplished.
On the brighter side, publishers and other suppliers of media are providing
modules of instruction with increasing frequency. Such modules often give
directions to both teachers and learners on how the materials and exercises can
be used to reach the objectives, as well as how to know that they have been
reached. Although such modules mav not always be designed around the
specific set of instructional events described in this book, they usually have been
designed to implement a systematic strategy of instruction. Some modules
list them. As the use
contain the actual materials to be used, whereas others just
of such modules becomes more widespread, teachers should experience fewer
difficulties in lesson planning and in selecting media and materials.

MEDIA AND THE LEARNING SITUATION

Instruction is provided in a learning situation. The features of this situation

impose constraints upon what media may be most effective. The kinds of media
to be emploved in a first-grade class, for example, are quite limited in variety in
comparison with those appropriate for a class of high school students or a class
of adults refreshing their technical skills.
The following are features of the intended learning situations that need to be
taken into account in selecting media:

1. Communications to the learner delivered by the teacher (instructor) versus

communications delivered via media for self- instruction
2. Learners possessing sufficient verbal comprehension ability (see Chapter 6) to
comprehend printed communications versus learners who have insufficient
verbal comprehension ability
3. Communications delivered direcdy to the learner or learners versus com-
munications broadcast from a central station
4. The performance to be learned is such that errors are serious (that is, danger-
ous, as in the case of airplane emergency procedures) versus performances
whose potential errors are not serious

Each of these features imposes some on the kinds of media

limitations
appropriate. Considering them would elimi-
in reverse order, the fourth feature
nate from consideration all media except those on which the desired per-
formances can be direcdy practiced, such as the actual equipment or a simulator
208 Principles of Instructional Design

device. Media such as a lecture or a TV program might set the stage, but would
surely be inadequate for the learning of a skill such as hose directing in firefight-
ing, for example. The third feature also limits media selection severely; to be
considered for this kind of learning situation, media must be those that involve
the transmission of messages composed of sound, pictures, or both, and which
do not provide for interactive responding by the learner.
These features of the learning situation lead to a classification of six general
types of decisions about learning situations (Reiser and Gagne, 1983) as fol-
lows: (1) job competence decision (consequences of error), (2) central broad-
cast decision, (3) self- instruction with learner-readers, (4) self-instruction with
nonreaders, (5) instructor with readers, and (6) instructor with nonreaders.
Each of these choices of learning situation implies that certain media can be set
aside as inappropriate. It may be noted, however, that for each tvpe of learning
situation, a number of media options continueto exist. As a general rule, most
instructional functions can be performed bv most media.
In practical instructional situations, the media employed are often chosen on
grounds of availability, feasibility, and cost. Obviously, these are important
factors and must be considered in the final selection. What we suggest here,
however, is that the question of appropriateness for learning be addressed
initially. As we shall see, for most situations, the types of media available for

effective learning are more than a few. Giving initial consideration to learning
support means that critical errors in media choice can be avoided. For example,
one refrains from choosing (1) a medium displaying printed discourse for
learners who are nonreaders, (2) radio broadcast as a sole medium for teaching
intellectual skills, or (3) an instructor lecture for the training of vehicle driving.
These basic decisions based upon the type of learning situation lead to addition-
al choices among a reduced list of learning-appropriate media. As factors in the

final choice, cost, availability, and feasibility of use naturally come into play.

Media and Their Selection

In beginning to describe the details of the media selection process, we need first

to define the term medium. A number of been sug-

different definitions have
gested, some reflecting sensorv channels (audiovisual), others the nature of the
content of the instructional message (print, picture). Here, we adopt Reiser and
Gagne's (1983) definition that instructional media are "the physical means by
which an instructional message is communicated" (p. 5). By this definition, a
printed text, an audiotape, a training device, a TV program, an instructor's
talking, along with many other physical means, are all considered media.
Learning-effective media and the limitations on their choices occasioned by
the type of learning situation are shown in Table 11-1.
In examining the table, it should be borne in mind that its contents apply to
the widest possible variety of learning situations. These include situations of the
training of firemen, peace officers, and military personnel, as well as those of the
typical school classroom. As a consequence, the listed media cover a range
 Selecting and Using Media 209

Table 1 1-1 Media and Media Decisions in Different Learning Situations

Learning Situation Media Decision

MEDIA High performance competence (error Exclude all media except (1) large equip-

consequence serious) ment, (2) portable equipment, (3) sim-

Large equipment
ulator
Simulator
TV broadcast
Central broadcast Exclude all media except TV and radio
Radio broadcast
Portable broadcast

equipment
Self-instruction with readers All media are potentially effective
Training device
Computer
Self-instruction with nonreaders Exclude media employing discursive
Programmed text
Interactive TV printed passages or complex audio
Motion picture messages
Slide tape
TV cassette Instructor with readers All media are potentially effective

Filmstrip
Training aid Instructor with nonreaders Exclude printed texts and complex in-

Audio structor lectures

Overhead
projector
Slides
Instructor

from equipment simulators (as a helicopter simulator) to the most primitive

medium (as drawing on a chalkboard). Of course, for the typical school class-
room, the range of available media would be considerably shortened, and
choices would be made among such devices as filmstrips, TV cassettes, and
computer instruction modules. A more detailed description of the characteristics
of the listed media may be found in Reiser and Gagne (1983).
Most of the media listed in Table 11-1 will be familiar to the reader. For a
few, some words of explanation need to be made.

Real equipment and simulators Real equipment may be employed as means of

providing practice in Equipment used for such a purpose may be large, as in
skills.

the case of an earth mover, or portable, as in the case of a blood-pressure cuff and
stethescope. Sometimes, practice of skills is given bv a simulator, a device that
reproduces the operating characteristics of real equipment. Simulation may also be
used to represent procedures, substituting symbols for real objects, as is often done
with the computer.
Broadcast Radio and TV broadcasts are used as instructional media when students
are widely dispersed. Verbal knowledge of all kinds is readilv transmitted in this
manner. Intellectual skills have been successfully taught bv broadcast radio and TV
when provisions are made for student response.
Training and training aids A device that permits practice of skills or of part
devices

skills, but which does not necessarily have the appearance or operating characteris-
tics of the real equipment, is A number of training devices
called a training device.
are available for automobile driving, aimed at teaching the skills of braking, steer-
ing, and rapid response to unexpected events. Equipment that does not represent
the operating characteristics of automobiles does not qualify as a simulator, strictly
210 Principles of Instructional Design

speaking, but is classified as a training device. A training aid, in contrast, is a device

that exhibits the operation of some process (such as the circulation of blood) that
the learner is expected to observe but not otherwise interact with.
Computers The computer is a particularly useful and versatile instructional
medium. It can display both print and diagrammatic pictures on a screen, and
accept learner responses via a typewriter keyboard, joystick, pointer, or other
control device. By suitable design, computer-based instruction can be truly in-
teractive, providing adaptive, informative feedback to learners in accordance with
their responses, whether correct or incorrect. Because of
computer- this feature,

based instruction is of intellectual skills.

particularly well suited for the learning
Interactive TV Normally, the pictures and audio presentations of television are not
learner interactive. They may be made so, however, by using a TV tape cassette or
videodisc combined with a computer.
Motion picture and TV cassette The medium listed as motion picture is to be
understood as incorporating audio. Nowadays, motion and sound are typically
combined in the TV cassette, although film is still widely used.
Instructor The instructor characteristics employed
as media are the voice in de-
livering speech, and the action in demonstrating procedures. Another important
media function is the delivery of informative feedback adapted to learner respond-
ing. In addition to these various activities, of course, the instructor has the executive
functions of planning and managing instruction.

MEDIA SELECTION PROCEDURES

If we consider the relationship of media characteristics to the type of learning

situation, we discover a broad range of choices. This process of media choice,
however, is only the first step. One must then proceed to narrow the field to the
few media that are capable of supporting instruction most effectively. Most
models for instructional media selection have the purpose of reducing the
number of potentially effective media to a small number, with the final selection
of one or two based upon factors of practical feasibility.
Media selection models have many features in common. For example, virtual-
ly all models call for consideration of the kind of objective being dealt with, the
characteristics of the intended learners, and a host of practical factors such as size
and composition of the group to be served, the range of viewing and hearing
distances, and the like. Since separate summaries of the features of each model
would be redundant, we will begin by listing some of the more common
features.
Most writers on media selection models would initially agree that there is no
one medium that is universally superior to all others for all types of desired
outcomes and for all learners. This conclusion is also supported by research on
media utilization (Aronson, 1977; Briggs, 1968; Briggs and Wager, 1981;
Clark and Salomon, 1986). Most writers also agree that one cannot identify
media that are particularly effective for a single school subject for a single grade
level. Rather, careful design work and the results of media research both suggest
 Selecting and Using Media 211

that media are best selected for specific purposes within a single lesson. Thus, a
motion picture mav be an effective way to portray historical events in history
lessons, but the teacher may be left to inform the learner of the objective, offer
learning guidance, and provide feedback. It is not that a specially designed film
could not provide all these events but rather that most available films do not do
i so. Films can also be used to portray theoretical events such as atomic particles
in motion, or for enlarging, condensing, speeding up, or slowing down the
portraval of observable activities in nature or in manufacturing processes. Other
examples of media usage, along with a listingof some advantages and limita-
tions of various media, have been described by Briggs and Wager (1981).

Factors in Media Selection

Beyond the consideration of requirements of the learning situation, models of
media selection typically include three categories of factors contributing to the
narrowing of choices. These are (1) physical attributes of the media, (2) task
characteristics, and (3) learner characteristics.

Physical Factors

Media differ from each other in terms of the physical characteristics of the
communications thev are able to display. Some media permit visual displays, and
others do not. The propertv of visual display is obviously of use in teaching the
identification of concrete concepts (shapes, objects) and spatial relationships
(locations, distances). Generally, media are capable of presenting verbal dis-
plavs, either as printed text or as audio messages. When printed text is otherwise
appropriate, worth noting that print on paper is one of the least expensive
it is

media. The capability of presenting sound is a commonly occurring attribute of

media. Not only may verbal messages play a role in media choice, but also the
presentation of other varieties of sound, such as environmental noises and
music. In connection with pictorial displavs, color mav be emploved. Research
findings indicate that color does not increase the effectiveness of instruction,
except when it is an essential feature of what must be learned (Schramm, 1977).
A special categorv of media consisting of real objects is mentioned in Table
11-1 as large equipment and portable equipment. Most writers on media selection
have recognized that real objects may sometimes be the most effective media, for
example, in the learning of motor skills and complex procedures (piloting an
airplane, putting air in a tire). Another characteristic of media of notable
significance is pictorial motion. When the dynamic features of objects are a part
of the essential content to be displaved, motion in pictures is virtuallv essential.
Examples are the movements of storm clouds and the internal operations of a
four-cylinder gasoline engine. Special uses of pictorial motion may be employed
in the display of fast motion and slow motion. Of particular significance relating
to motion is the potential of displaying the actions of living beings realisticallv.
212 Principles of Instructional Design

particularly humans. It would be difficult to overemphasize the importance of

this feature in such media as motion pictures and television.

The Learning Task

In choosing media for instruction, the tvpe of performance expected of learners
of instruction (the learning outcome) needs to be considered with some
as a result
care. Perhaps the most obvious media differences arise over the interactive
qualitv. When intellectual skills are being learned, precise feedback to the learner
about correctness and incorrectness of performance is a matter of great signifi-

cance to learning effectiveness. When concrete concepts or rules involving

spatial arrangements or spatiotemporal sequences are being learned, the presen-
tation of pictures (as opposed to verbal descriptions) is an essential aspect of
instruction. For example, the parts of a flower or the movement of a pendulum
can be most effectively displayed in pictorial form but onlv with difficulty by
means of verbal presentations.
When verbal information is to be learned (for example, knowledge about a
historical event), the medium to be chosen must have the capability of present-
ing verbal material, either in print or by audio channel as speech. Attitudes are
best presented bv media that make possible the display of a human model and
the model's message about personal choices. Pictorial motion of human activi-
ties is, therefore, a major consideration in the choice of media for attitude

learning or modification. Further details concerning the operation of these

choices in a media selection model are described in the following section.

Learner Variables

Characteristics of learners must be considered when selecting media. Research

on aptitude treatment interaction (ATI) has revealed the effects of instruction
on and locus of control (see Chapter 6).
learners differing in such traits as anxiety
Some educators are convinced that learners differing in "learning styles" may
benefit most from media presentations that match their styles. What these
learning style differences are and whether they may be effective with different
media has not been definitely established. If the styles were known, it might not
be feasible or economical to provide enough parallel media packages for each
lesson to accommodate all of the differing stvles.
One kind of learner characteristic about which there should be little question
in media selection is reading comprehension. Those learners who score low in this
ability will undoubtedly have from the printed page.
difficulty in learning
Because this ability is closely correlated with performance in oral language
understanding, low- ability learners are also likely to learn poorly from speech
that is semanticallv complex. Two things can be done to alleviate these difficul-
ties. One is to design the printed or oral prose passage to be low in reading

difficulty, using familiar words and short sentences. The second is to use
 Selecting and Using Media 213

pictures and diagrams, to the extent possible, for the presentation of novel
concepts, rules, and procedures. be evident that for those low in reading
It will

comprehension ability, pictures can convey such learning content more rapidly
and efficiendy than verbal expressions.
Given normal progression in reading skills for groups of learners, the learner's
* age is a useful matter to consider in media selection. In this connection, Dale's
(1969) "cone of experience" is a useful tool. Dale listed 12 categories of media
and exercises, in a somewhat age-related fashion. Thus, at level 1, "Direct
purposeful experience," it is proposed that a child come into physical contact
with objects, animals, and people, using all the senses to "learn by doing." As
one goes up the age scale, pictorial and other simulated substitutes can be
emploved for some of the experiences. At the top of the cone is the use of
"verbal symbols," which suggests learning bv reading, an efficient method for
sophisticated learners. When dealing with cognitive objectives —information,
intellectual skills, and cognitive strategies —
of thumb previously suggested
a rule
by Briggs and Wager (1981) is "Go as low on the scale as you need to in order
to insure learning for your group, but go as high as you can for the most
efficient learning" (p. 131). By considering the opposing factors of "slow but
sure" (time-consuming direct experience) and "fast but risk)'" (typically occur-
ring when learners are not skillful readers), one may decide just where on the
scale is the best decision point for media selection. Dale's categories are as
follows:

12. Verbal symbols

11. Visual symbols — signs; stick figures
10. Radio and recordings
9. Still pictures
8. Motion pictures
7. Educational television
6. Exhibits
5. Study trips
4. Demonstrations
3. Dramatized experiences — puppets;
plays; playing
role
2. Contrived experiences —models; mock-ups; simulation
1. Direct purposeful experience

For attitude objectives, Wager (1975) has suggested that Dale's age/media
relationship becomes inverted compared to the relationship for cognitive objec-
tives. Thus, a young child benefits from direct experience with real objects for

cognitive objectives; he may acquire an attitude by hearing verbal statements

from people he respects, as discussed in Chapter 5. Attitudes may be formed by
listening to statements from respected models. Wager goes on to say that
changing an already established attitude, on the other hand, may require real- life
experiences for both children and adults. Briggs (1977) describes attitude
formation and change as it takes place at various age levels by various methods:
214 Principles of Instructional Design

(1) classical conditioning, (2) hearing persuasive communications, and (3)

human modeling. Clearly, different media would be involved in these different
methods.
Some educators have sought to identify kinds of family backgrounds that are
related to effectiveness of various media. Such factors may indeed be related to
entering competencies and attitudes of pupils toward school learning. But it is

not clear whether such data would be more useful in checking on the
at present
entering competencies of pupils in order to decide what they need to be taught
or for selecting the media that relate to how they should be taught. However, a
few indirect media selection implications are fairly likely. For example, children
from homes where parents do not or cannot read are less likely than other
children to have acquired a love for reading and skill in reading, other factors
being equal.

The Assumed Learning Environment

Another set of factors in media selection is based upon administrative con-
siderations rather than technical ones. The of using media varies
practicality
with such features of the learning environment as (1) size of school budget; (2)
size of class; (3) capability for developing new materials; (4) availability of
radio, television, and other media equipment; (5) teacher capabilities and
availability for an instructional design effort; (6) availability of modular materi-
alsfor individualized, performance-based instruction; (7) attitudes of principal
and teachers toward innovations; and (8) school architecture.
Many of the decisions related to these factors may have been made early in the
instructional design process, as discussed in Chapter 2. However, these early
decisions are intended to match the use of various delivery systems with media
for specified school environments. Also, some of the factors clearly suit the
situation where an established curriculum is being redesigned piecemeal as a
gradual change strategy. These decisions are not at the same level of detail as
media selection for specific lessons and instructional events with lessons.

The Assumed Development Environment

Obviously, it would be useless to plan to design a delivery system (and the
attendant media) if the design and development resources were not adequate for
the task. That is, the time, budget, and personnel available will influence the
probability of success in designing specified delivery systems. The kinds of
personnel available, for example, will determine the kinds of media that can be
developed successfully. Beyond this, the personnel available will determine the
kind of design model that is feasible for the situation. Carey and Briggs (1977)
have discussed further how budgets, time, and personnel influence not only
what instruction can be developed, but also what design models and what team
management systems are appropriate to the task.
 Selecting and Using Media 215

The Economy and the Culture

In designing an instructional system, one will wish to choose media that are
acceptable to the users and within the budget and technology resources avail-
able. Attitudes toward various media may differ between urban and rural people

i or among ethnic or socioeconomic subgroups. Some countries or regions would

not have the technological skills or the electric power to utilize radio and
television, whereas these media would be practical and acceptable elsewhere.
There mav even be religious or cultural attitudes that help determine local
reactions to various media. Print media may earn' high prestige in one area,
whereas radio and television have greater favor in another. All these factors
should be considered if the media selected for a delivery system are to find
acceptance.
Within boundaries of acceptance for various media, further consideration can
then be given to cost effectiveness. Under one circumstance, cost may be the
overriding factor, whereas under another circumstance, a required level of
effectiveness may be determined first, after which costs are considered. For
example, designers of military training often separate those objectives that must
be completely mastered at anv cost because they are critically important from
those objectives that are less critical.

Designers will need to ascertain the intended user's status and intentions in
order to avoid selecting media that mav be unacceptable or impractical. There
are many ways of gathering such information, including visits to the users and
the use of questionnaires. Perhaps the best way is to arrange to have some of the
users become members of the design team. This practice mav not only help
ensure acceptance of the media chosen, but also enhance the effectiveness of the
total instructional design.
Designers who serve as education consultants to other countries become
aware of the need to avoid recommending a "United States solution" to prob-
lems in countries where such solutions are ill-suited. This refers not only to
media selection, but also to the total instructional approach. Even the transla-
tions of instructional materials and rather straightforward directions (as in
teachers' guides) must be carefully reviewed to ensure clarity for the user. The
importance of this point may be appreciated by recalling that even when
designing materials for our own students we are not sure that the com-
munications are understood until they are tested in use bv those students. In
short, what is perfectly clear to the writer may be very confusing to the reader.

Practical Factors

Assuming media under consideration are acceptable to the users and are
that the
number of detailed practical factors remain to be
within their capabilities, a
considered in order to select media that are effective and also convenient. A
general discussion of such factors for each of several media may be found in
216 Principles of Instructional Design

books on media selection and utilization (for example, Anderson, 1976; Bretz,
1971; Kemp and Dayton, 1985). The suitability of media for use in practical
situations may depend on such factors as size of group, type of learner, response
desired, type of stimulus presentation, simplicity of physical classroom arrange-
ments, requirements for lighting or darkness in the room, and other environ-
mental conditions.
Some of the practical factors to be considered in media selection are:

1. What size of group must be accommodated in one room on a single occasion?

2. What is the range of viewing and hearing distance for the use of the media?
3. How easilycan the media be "interrupted" for pupil responding or other
activity and for providing feedback to the learners?
4. Is the presentation "adaptive" to the learners' responses?
5. Does the desired instructional stimulus require motion, color, still pictures,
spoken words, or written words?
6. Is sequence fixed or flexible in the medium? Is the instruction repeatable in
even' detail?
7. Which media provide best for incorporating most of the conditions of learn-
ing appropriate for the objective?
8. Which media provide more of the desired instructional events?
9. Do the media under consideration vary in probable "affective impact" for the
learners?
10. Are the necessary hardware and software items obtainable, accessible, and
storable?
11. How much disruption is caused bv using the media?
12. Is abackup easily available in case of equipment failure, power failure, film

breakage, and so on?

13. Will teachers need additional training?
14. Is a budget provided for spare parts, repairs, and replacement of items that
become damaged?
15. How do costs compare with probable effectiveness?

You may be able to think of man}' items that could be added to this
list of

practical factors in media selection. Most which

teachers can report instances in
a burned-out bulb or a broken film has made necessary' a sudden change in
plans. Equally disruptive is the selection of a medium unsuitable for the size of
the group, with the possibility that many persons cannot see or hear. Having a
backup plan or an alternative lesson is one way to minimize the negative reaction
when something "goes wrong" in the classroom.

A METHOD OF MEDIA SELECTION

Previous chapters have shown that there are man}' design steps to be taken prior
to media selection, at least when following the general design model presented
in this book. Some of these prior steps are analysis of objectives, defining the
 Selecting and Using Media 217

objectives by domain of the learning outcome, and designing instructional

sequences. Chapter 10, which dealt with the events of instruction, prepared you
to apply those events to planning instruction for the particular objectives that
represent the purposes of single lessons.
In acknowledging the importance of the learning situation, we propose that
the identification of that situation be undertaken initially, as previously de-
scribed. This is because the most prominent differences among instructional
media are related to the learning situation. For example, in the learning situation
involving "self-instruction with nonreaders," media that display print in the
form of connected prose may be immediately excluded. Beyond this determina-
tion, the choice of media for learning effectiveness comes to depend particularly
on the type of learning outcome intended. As an extreme example, the learning of
a multistep procedure (and intellectual skill) cannot be adequately done by the
medium of an instructor's lecture.
The purpose of this section is to outline a systematic method of media
selection for each of six learning situations, beginning with the type of learning
outcome implied by the lesson objective and ending with the identification of a
set of media that can be effective for the learning contemplated. From this
smaller set, a final choice of one or more particular media may be made on the
basis of practical considerations (cost, feasibility, and so on).

A Model of Media Selection

A method of media selection that proceeds from the identification of the type of
learning situation to a consideration of the implications of the learning outcome
is described by Reiser and Gagne (1983). Its main point will be briefly summa-
rized here. It should be noted that this model is intended to be applicable to a
broad range of situations, encompassing school education, adult education,
technical and professional education, and training for specialized jobs in in-
dustry and the military services. Although acknowledging its broad applicabil-
ity, we shall confine our attention mainly to the more "academic" kinds of
instruction.
Reiser and Gagne's model takes into consideration logistic factors (to what
size group the instruction will be delivered), learner variables (readers versus
nonreaders), and task variables (task importance, type of learning outcome). At
completion of the analysis, the media suggested as appropriate for teaching a
particular type of task depend on their ability to deliver the events of instruction
that will provide the necessary conditions of learning for a particular type of
outcome.

An Example—Self-Instruction with Nonreaders

The model uses flowcharts to indicate the successive choices needed in media
selection. An example applicable to the learning situation "self-instruction with
 218 Principles of Instructional Design

nonreaders" is shown in Figure 11-1. The chart begins with a list of "candidate

media" from which choices are to be made. As will be apparent, this list includes
virtually all types of media except those that have been excluded because they
meet only the requirements of other learning situations (such as broadcast
media).
Entering the flowchart itself, the first question asks if the outcome is "either
an attitude or verbal information?" If the answer to this initial question is

negative, then the model indicates that the learning outcome must be a skill
(intellectual skill or motor skill). The next question asks whether "motor prac-

Candldate Media

Portable Equipment
Training Device
Teach Skill
(Mintil or Motor)
S 17
Attitude?
V y~
Teech
Verbal
Information
Computer
Interactive TV Yes
Motion Picture
Slide/Tape f 18. N.
YM Will Visuals >
TV Cassette '15! 16 N YesN,
Help Recall?
Filmstrip Can the Can the\No
Printed Text Media in D.1 Media in D.2 to X
(below) (below) o» F.2/
Training Aid
Provide Adequate Provide Adequate No
Audio Feedback? Feedback?
Chart \/Yei
Overhead Projection D.1 D.2
D.3
Motion Picture D.4
Slides Portable Equip, (a) Computer (a)
Slide /Tape* Audio
Training Device (a) Interactive TV TV Cassette
Instructor

(a) supplemented with, or including, audio speech

• somewhat less effective

Explanation of Questions - Chart

13. Either an Attitude or Verbal Information? Is the aim either to influence the
student's values (attitudes) or to have the student learn to 'state' (rather than 'do') something?
14. Motor Practice Necessary? Ooes the skill to be learned require smooth timing of
muscular movements (a "motor skill")?
15. Can the Media in 0.1 Provide Adequate Feedback? Can the media in 0.1 accept
and evaluate the desired student responses and provide the type of feedback required?
16. Can the Media in 0.2 Provide Adequate Feedback? Can the media in 0.2 accept
and evaluate the desired student responses and provide the type of feedback required?
17. Attitude? Does instruction aim to influence the student's values or opinions?
18. Will Visuals Help Recall? Is it likely that the use of visuals will help the student
establish Images that will aid recall of verbal information?

FIGURE 11-1 Portion of a Flowchart for Media Selection, Applicable to the Learning Situation "Self-
Instruction with Nonreaders"
(From R. A. Reiser & R. M. Gagne, Selecting media for instruction, copyright 1983 by Educational Technology
Englewood Cliffs, N.J. Reprinted bv permission.)
Publications,
 Selecting and Using Media 219

tice is necessary," indicating the identification of a motor skill. If indeed that is

the learning outcome intended, the next whether suitable

critical question is

practice, with feedback, can be provided by one or both of the two media that
suggest themselves: (1) portable equipment (for example, a hand pump for
^inflating tires), or (2) a training device (for example, a device for baseball
batting practice). It may be noted that for this kind of learning situation, the

identificationof a motor skill as the learning outcome leads to the exclusion of all
media except These are the only two that make possible the direct
these two.
practice required for motor skill learning. Should either of these media be
judged inadequate to provide suitable feedback during practice, the chart says
"go to box F.l." The meaning here is "go to the chart for the learning situation
'Instructor with Nonreaders,' " with the implication that an instructor will
provide the necessary feedback.
Now, returning to the point at which a skill was identified, suppose the
question about motor practice was answered no. This would mean the skill to be
dealt with is an intellectual skill. Decision 16 then seeks to answer the question

about adequate feedback with respect to two media that have the quality of
interacting with learner responses: (1) computer instruction, and (2) interactive
TV. Why are such media as motion picture, slide or videotape, and TV cassette
not included here? Because these media do not permit the learner the response
interaction that is essential for effective learning of intellectual skills. Here is

another instance, then, in which the appropriate media have been reduced from
a rather long list to two. (The direction "go to box F.2" has the same implication
as that previously described for F.l.)
To complete the explanation of this chart, we return to the question, "Is this
either an attitude or verbal information," and suppose that the answer is yes. In
either case, one seeks to identify media that do not employ printed text and that
do not necessarily provide for interactive feedback. Should the learning outcome
be an attitude, evidently motion pictures, slide or videotape presentations, or
TV cassettes will be effective media. This is because they can describe and
picture the situations to which the attitude is applicable and can realistically
display a human model who will present the message conveying the desired
attitude.
Should the answer to the previous question be no, the model identifies the
learning outcome as verbal information. Again, this implies the exclusion of
media displaying printed discourse. The next question is "will visuals help
recall?" If not, then a reasonable choice of media would appear to be one that
presents the verbal information auditorially, as by an audiotape recorder.
However, visuals in media often do help recall by providing elaboration of the
verbal information and additional visual cues (Chapter 5). If this possibility
exists, the chart points again to the choices of media as (1) motion picture, (2)
slide or videotape, or (3) TV cassette.
By working through the flowchart for this particular learning situation (self-
instruction with nonreaders), one can clearly appreciate the success of this
220 Principles of Instructional Design

method media to a relatively small number. The

in reducing the candidate
method one that considers learning effectiveness as the basis for decisions,
is

which in turn are derived from identifications of the five types of learning
outcomes described in Chapters 3, 4, and 5. The media selected are those best
able to put into effect the conditions of learning appropriate for each type of
learning outcome.

Media Selection by Learning Outcome

It is possible in this chapter to present only one of the flowcharts applicable to
the six learning situations of the Reiser—Gagne model. Bevond referring the
reader to that source (Reiser and Gagne, 1983), we can onlv summarize the
main points of the model bv describing the "media implications" of each
learning outcome. This is done in Table 11-2. Recall that initial decisions
leading to the exclusion of some media are made on the basis of the type of
learning situation, as indicated in Table 11-1. Assuming that step has been
taken, Table 11-2 lists the implications for media exclusion and media selection
indicated by the type of learning outcome intended by the objective of the
instruction.
The table may be read as follows. When the intent of the lesson under design
has the learning outcome of one or more intellectual skills, exclude those media
that make no provision for feedback and subsequent interactive responding by
the learner. The reason is that the learning of intellectual skills cannot be
adequately supported without this feature. Another exclusion, applicable to

Table 11-2 Implications for Media Exclusion and Media Selection of Type of Learning Outcome
Learning Outcome Exclusions Selections

Intellectual Skills Exclude media having no interactive fea- Select media providing feedback to learn-

ture er responses

Exclude pnnted discourse for nonreaders Select audio and visual features for

nonreaders

Cognitive Strategies Exclusions same as for intellectual skills Select media with same features as those

for intellectual skills

Verbal Information Exclude only real equipment or simulator Select media able to present verbal mes-
with no verbal accompaniments. Ex- sages and elaborations. Select audio
clude complex prose for nonreaders and pictorial features for nonreaders

Attitudes Exclusions same as for verbal information Select media able to present realistic pic-

tures of human model and the model's

message

Motor Skills Exclude media having no provision for Select media making possible direct prac-

learner response and feedback tice of skill, with informative feedback

 Selecting and Using Media 221

learners of low reading comprehension (here called nonreaders as an abbreviated

expression), is that of semantically organized printed prose. Media selection for

intellectual skills reflects complementary procedures. Select media that provide

for feedback and learner interaction. For nonreaders, select media that com-
municate by pictorial and audio modes, either to supplement or supplant
printed discourse.

Practical Considerations in Media Selection

Employment of the model described in the planning and designing of instruc-
tion is expected to ensure suitable attention to learning effectiveness. In general,
exclusion rules of the model will prevent consideration of media that are
inappropriate for learning. Rules of inclusion will lead to the selection of media
best suited for the presentation of communications that support learning.
Following these rules will bring the instructional designer to consider the
practical advantages of a relatively small list of media. Some of the principal
practical questions in a media decision are described in the previous section on
practical factors.

Adapting the Model to Design Circumstances

This chapter has presented a method of media selection that may be described as
fine grained and analytical. Emphasis on making media decisions aimed
is placed
at ensuring learning effectiveness based upon identification of the type of
learning outcomes represented bv the lesson objectives. Having excluded in-
appropriate media on this basis, a final choice can be made from a relatively
small list of possibilities, on grounds such as feasibility, availability, and costs.
Thus, explicit use of theory and research is provided for in the system, and
subsequent empirical, formative, and summative evaluations are assumed.
The model of media selection and utilization presented here is, therefore,
systematic, internally consistent, and related directly to the major theoretical
orientation of this book. Actually, the model has been used with some ease and
leads to expeditious media decisions (Reiser and Gagne, 1983). Designers
trained in use of this model will have the detailed skills to fit the resource and
constraints of specific design projects. Carey and Briggs (1977) have shown that
the skilled design team leader must not only adopt, adapt, or design a specific
model to fit the project budget and personnel available, but must also develop
time periods for specific tasks, make personnel assignments, and monitor the
entire management plan. A design model must be adapted to fit the circum-
stances of any particular design project relative to: budget, time, personnel,
equipment, supplies, and institutional characteristics of the developing
facilities,

agency and the using agency.

Surely, the most significant aspect of this design model is its emphasis on the
primacy of selecting media based on their effectiveness in supporting the learn-
222 Principles of Instructional Design

ing process. Every neglect of the consideration of how learning takes place may
be expected to weaker procedure and poorer learning results. Ex-
result in a
perienced designers, of course, may do much of the analysis "in their heads"
because the steps in problem solution have become familiar.

SUMMARY
This chapter begins with a brief account of how teachers may participate in the
design of instruction bv selecting media and the materials thev display. Teams of
designers may develop new materials for media. Much of the theorizing involved
in the two functions, however, can be the same, according to the design model
presented in this book.
Selection of media is determined by a number of factors, including the nature
of the learning situation; the type of learning outcome expected; the environ-
ment for learning; the conditions for instructional development; the culture in
which instruction will be given; and on various practical factors including
accessibility, feasibility of use, and costs. The aim of learning effectiveness is to
give primacy first to the learning situation (including the nature of intended
learners) and following that to the kind of learning outcome expected.
A model of instructional media selection is described, based on the work of
Reiser and Gagne (1983). This model requires, first, the identification of one of
six kinds of learning situations, characterized by such features as the use or
nonuse of broadcasts, instructors, and self- instruction. Following this de-
termination, a flowchart exhibits successive choice points of media selection as
they are influenced by the requirements of effective learning for the various
learning outcomes. The model is based upon the conditions of learning pertain-
ing to each of the learning outcomes described in Chapters 3, 4, and 5. A
summarv of implications of the model for media selection is presented in Table
11-2.
The method of media selection given here, along with the model, makes
media selection a highly rational matter based upon theory and research pertain-
ing to learning effectiveness. The method can be employed by teachers and
designers of instruction as individuals or in teams. The model with its flowcharts
is easy to understand and use. The procedure is one that devotes initial attention
to learning effectiveness, excludes inappropriate media, and applies practical
considerations to a shortened list of candidate media.

References

Anderson, R. H. (1976). Selecting and developing media for instruction. New York: Van
Nostrand Reinhold.
Aronson, D. (1977). Formulation and trial use ofguidelines for designing and developing
 Selecting and Using Media 223

instructional motion pictures. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, Florida State Univer-

sity, Tallahassee, FL.
Bretz, R. (1971). The selection of appropriate communication media for instruction: A guide
for designers of Air Force technical training programs. Santa Monica, CA: Rand.
Briggs, L. J. (1968). Learner variables and educational media. Review of Educational
Research, 38, 160-176.
Briggs, L. J. (Ed.). (1977). Instructional design: Principles and applications. Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Briggs, L. J., & Wager, W. W. (1981). Handbook ofprocedures for the design of instruction
(2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Carey, J., & Briggs, L. J. (1977). Teams as designers. In L. J. Briggs (Ed.), Instructional
design: Principles and applications.Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology
Publications.
Clark, R. E.,& Salomon, G. (1986). Media in teaching. In M. C. Wittrock (Ed.),
Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed.). New York: Macmillan.
Dale, E. A. ( 1969). Audiovisual methods in teaching (3rd ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart
and Winston.
Kemp, J. E., & Dayton, D. K. (1985). Planning and producing audiovisual materials (5th
ed.). New York: Harper & Row.
Reiser, R. A., & Gagne, R. M. (1983). Selecting media for instruction. Englewood Cliffs,
NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Schramm, W. (1977). Big media, little media. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
Wager, W. (1975). Media selection in the affective domain: A further interpretation of
Dale's cone of experience for cognitive and affective learning. Educational Technology,
15 (7), 9-13.
 Designing the Individual
12 Lesson

duce
T.
effective instruction.
he ultimate goal of instructional design
When this goal is accomplished, it
is to pro-
generally results in
of lessons that may be delivered either by a teacher or by mediated
a lesson or set
materials. A mediated lesson is often called an instructional module. A lesson or

module is generally planned to be a particular length in minutes, which usually

means that any significant instructional curriculum is going to require more
than a single lesson. In Chapter 9, we described the process of defining and
sequencing lessons. In this chapter, we will discuss the relationships among
several different objectives within a lesson and the employment of the events of
instruction in constructing such lessons.
Most of the characteristics of human capabilities that we discussed in Chapter
6 are used as a basis for planning the lesson, as are the events of instruction
described in Chapter 10. These events apply to the design of all kinds of lessons,
irrespective of the domain of the learning outcome intended. In this chapter, we
emphasize the variations among lessons as they correspond to different domains
of learning outcomes. These lesson variables are first considered in terms of their
implications for designing sequences of instruction and later with respect to the
establishment of effective learning conditions for the different domains of
learning outcome.
In designing a lesson, one needs first to ensure that the events of instruction
are provided for. Additionally, it is necessary to classify the lesson objectives and
arrange that specific events are placed in an appropriate sequence for the
attainment of these objectives. The content of the events, or instructional
prescriptions, is then written as the lesson content.

224
 Designing the Individual Lesson 225

LESSON PLANNING AND MODULE DESIGN

Frequently, teachers select rather than develop instructional materials. In prac-

tice, teachers often "design as they teach" — that is, they may design sequences of
lessons in advance but, perhaps, do not design all lessons for the course before
the teaching begins. Because of these practical circumstances, teachers tend to
plan each lesson in only enough detail so as to be "ready" for each lesson since
they are able to improvise some of the details as the lesson progresses. This is not
entirely undesirable because it gives the teacher flexibility to redesign "on the
spot" — that is, to adjust procedures to the instructional situation and to re-
sponses of the learners (Briggs, Gustafson, and Tillman, 1991).
As will be discussed in Chapter 14, the nature of instruction in large groups
provides less precision of control in instruction than is possible in small groups.
The unpredictability of student responses in a large group, coupled with restrict-
ed planning time, means that instruction is often planned and carried out with
only a moderate degree of control over the conditions of learning. Utilization of
small group or individualized instruction modes makes possible greater preci-
sion of instruction. Adaptation to an individual's entering competencies and
rates of learning is provided by instruction that permits self-pacing and self-
correction for each learner. These functions are made possible in tutoring or
small group modes and with materials that allow branching by the student to
the most needed and helpful exercises contained in the instructional material.
Such branching occurs in some learning modules within programmed instruc-
tion, computer- assisted or computer-managed instruction, or by the frequent
use of self-tests that allow the learner to use the instruction in an adaptive
manner.

Individualized, Self-Paced, and Adaptive Instructional Materials

Individualized, self-paced, and adaptive instructional materials are often used syn-
onymously, although there are shades of differences in their meanings. We
define individualized instruction as that which takes into consideration the needs
of students. Such instruction begins with an analysis of the entrv skills of the
learner, and the subsequent instruction is prescribed based on that individual's
needs. Self-paced instruction is a phrase implying instructional management by
the learner as well as the mediation of instruction. For example, videotaped or
printed materials may be used in either group or self-paced instruction. Howev-
er, in a self-paced instructional system, the learner can spend as much time as

necessary to achieve the objectives. Self-paced instruction is generally associated

with the procedures of mastery learning, in which achievement rather than time
dictates the rate of the student's progress through the instruction. The term
adaptive instruction usually refers to materials and management systems that
constantly monitor the progress of the student and change the instructional
content based on that student's progress. Generally speaking, adaptive instruc-
tion involves complex record keeping and decision making and is facilitated by
226 :
::es :
;

-5V.:::-= le; r

the use of computers. However, its procedures may be carried out manually for
individuals or small groups. These types of instruction depend in some measure
on mediated instructional materials since may be at
all students in a class
different stages of learning at any praticular point in time.
In summary, the object of instructional design is to produce a lesson or series
of lessons that include consideration of the delivery system being used as well as
the needs of the learners. The nature of the lesson will depend a great deal on
how it is to be used. In a teacher-based system, the lesson plan mav be somewhat
incomplete because the teacher can fill in the gaps. In contrast, individualized or
must be more carefully planned and developed since there
self-paced instruction
is no immediate teacher help available. The remainder of this chapter will
often
focus on how the principles of instructional design described in previous chap-
ters may be applied to the development of either a teacher-led or a mediated
lesson.Both these forms of instructional delivery retain the emphasis we have
placed on these central themes:

1. taxonomy of learning outcomes

Classifying objectives bv the use of a
2. Sequencing objectives to take account of prerequisites
3. Including the appropriate events of instruction that apply to all domains of
outcomes
4. Incorporating into the events of instruction the particular conditions of learn-
ing relevant to the domains of the objectives in the lesson

We now turn to further discussion of the sequencing of instruction and then to

instructional events and conditions of learning. The chapter concludes with a
discussion of steps in lesson planning and an example of a lesson plan that
incorporates the form of the model usually adopted by an individual teacher
who designs and conducts the instruction.

ESTABUSHING A SEQUENCE OF OBJECTIVES

In Chapter 9, we described top-down analysis of intellectual skills and the

consideration of functional relationships among different domains of learning to
which it leads. We indicated a way of diagramming these relationships through
the use of instructional curriculum maps (ICMs) and showed how such maps
can be used to identify different levels of curricula.
Within each ICM
an implied sequence of instruction. That sequence is
is

based on principles underlying hierarchical prerequisite relationships and those

that describe facilitative learning sequences. For example. Figure 12-1 shows a
learning hierarchy that could also be an instructional curriculum map composed
of objectives from only the intellectual skills domain.

Planning a Sequence for Intellectual Skill Objectives

We begin our account of lesson sequence planning with objectives representing

intellectual skills. The subordinate skills required to attain an objective of this
 Designing the Individual Lesson 227

SUBTRACTION
(XI)

Subtract whole numbers

of any size

(VIII) (IX) (X)

Subtracting when Subtracting when Subtracting when

several borrowings successive borrow- "double borrowing"
are required In ing Is required. Is required (across
non-adjacent columns In adjacent columns 0)

(VII) (VI)

Subtracting in Subtracting when a

successive columns. single borrowing is
without borrowing required. In any
column

(V) (IV)

Subtracting a one- Identifying where

digit number, with borrowing is to be
borrowing done

(II) (III)

Subtracting in Subtracting when

successive columns, a is understood
where each requires ("bringing down")
a simple subtraction
(no "bringing down")

(I)

Simple subtraction
("facts")

FIGURE 12-1 A Learning Hierarchy for Subtracting Whole Numbers

228 Principles of Instructional Design

sort can be derived as a learning hierarchy.Suppose that one does indeed want
to establish the of subtracting whole numbers of any size as diagrammed in
skill

Figure 12-1. The learning hierarchy for this objective lists 10 essential pre-
requisites, shown as boxes in the hierarchy. Let us assume that box I, simple
subtraction facts, represents learning ahead}' accomplished earlier bv the stu-
dents. The teacher now needs to design a lesson or, perhaps more likely, a
sequence of lessons to enable the learners to subtract any whole numbers they
may encounter. Although there are several sequences of teaching the skills
shown in boxes II through X that might be successful, the implication of the
hierarchy is that the bottom row of boxes should be taught first, then the next
higher row, and so on. It may also be inferred that a sequence going in
numerical order from box II to box X might be the most effective sequence.

In summary, hierarchies are so arranged that there may be options in a

sequence of boxes within a horizontal row, but there are not options in proceed-
ing from the bottom row upward, at least when we wish to adopt a single
sequence for all learners in the group.
This to say that a student couldn't learn the task bv a sequence that
isn't

violates theabove rules of thumb. If a student did learn by such a nonhierarchi-

cal sequence, it might be because she alreadv could perform the skills in some of
the boxes or because she possessed sufficient cognitive strategies to discover
some of the rules without having received direct instruction in their application.

Determining a Starting Point

Continuing with the example of learning to subtract whole numbers, it is
possible that some students may have already learned some of the prerequisite
skills in some of the boxes. One student mav alreadv be able to perform the skills

in boxes II and III; another may be able to perform II and V. Obviously, one
needs to begin the instruction "where each student is." This is conveniently
done in individualized instruction programs as described in Chapter 15, but it
can be done also with a group bv arranging other activities for those students
who do not need some of the instruction planned for the group. An alternative,
of course, is for students to sit through some of the instruction as a review,
although this may not always be the best solution. A review of earlier skills may
be needed at the beginning of each lesson to be sure there is ready recall when
the new learning is undertaken. Generally speaking, however, intellectual skills
that are learned are recalled well compared with the recall of facts or labels, for
example.

Specifying a Sequence of Lessons

A teacher must decide "how much" should be included in each lesson, as well as
the sequencing of the lessons, following the implications for sequencing dis-
cussed might often be convenient to teach some "boxes" as single
earlier. It

lessons; other boxesmay be combined within one lesson, as we have already

shown in Chapter 9.
 Designing the Individual Lesson 229

The hierarchy, then, implies several possible effective lesson sequences. The
skill relationships that indicate essential prerequisites need to be maintained in
planning such sequences —otherwise, no particular sequence is implied. How-
ever, the teacher may choose to insert instruction relating to other domains of
outcome into the sequence. Often, a sequence of lessons is built around an
such a way as to include instruction concerning
intellectual skill objective in
verbal information objectives, attitudes, and cognitive strategies (Wager, 1977;
Briggs and Wager, 1981).

Achievement of Skills in Sequence

The planning of lessons designed to attain the final skill, XI, contains the
assumption that each student will display mastery of prerequisite skills before
being asked to learn the next higher skill. For example, before tackling skill X,
requiring double borrowing across a column containing a zero, it must be
ascertained that the learner can do skills VI and VII, requiring subtracting in
successive columns without borrowing and borrowing in single and multiple
columns.
The notion of mastery must be taken with complete seriousness when one is
dealing with intellectual skills. The lessons must be so designed that each
prerequisite skill can be performed with perfect confidence by the learner before
attempting to learn more complex skills in the hierarchy. Any lesser degree of
learning of prerequisites will result in puzzlement, delay, inefficient trial and
error at best, and in failure, frustration, or termination of effort toward further
learning at the worst. For this reason, we suggest that allowing the student to
choose the sequencing is not likely to be the most efficient procedure.

Provisions for Diagnosis and Relearning

Lesson planning which utilizes the hierarchy of intellectual skills may also
provide for diagnosis of learning difficulties. If a student has difficulty learning
any given skill, the most probable diagnostic indication is that the student
cannot recall how to perform one or more prerequisite skills. Any given lesson
may provide diagnostic information by requiring that prerequisite skills be
recalled. If one or more cannot be recalled, then relearning of these prerequisites
should be undertaken. Thus, the assessment of mastery for any given skill,
occurring as a part of a lesson on that skill, may be followed by further
assessment of prerequisite skills, in case mastery is not achieved. Following this,
provision should be made for a "relearning loop" in the sequence of lessons,
which gives the student an opportunity to relearn and to display mastery of the
necessary prerequisites before proceeding.

Sequence in Relation to Cognitive Strategies

Since cognitive strategies are executive routines for information processing, it is

often difficult to ascertain whether these skills have been learned. Usually, one
230 Principles of Instructional Design

cannot specify a particular sequence of prior learning leading up to the attain-

ment of a cognitive strategy. What must be remembered, however, is that
students already possess some kinds of cognitive strategies at the time instruc-
tion begins. These strategies are in the form of automatized rules for processing
new information. When one speaks of teaching a new cognitive strategy, what is
meant is introducing students to a new way of processing information. This
means that they will have to learn to modify their existing strategy or simply to
forget it and adopt the new strategy.
The prerequisite skills essential for the learning of cognitive strategies are
often simple skills Examples are (1) associating
established by prior learning.
unrelated names by using them and (2) breaking a complex
in a sentence,
problem into parts. Strategies such as these can usually be communicated by
means of verbal statements to the learner. In addition, a sequence of instruction
designed to improve cognitive strategies usually takes the form of repeated
opportunities for the application of the strategies. Such occasions may be
interspersed with instruction having other intended outcomes and typically are
made to recur over relatively long periods of time. In this way, it is expected that
gradual improvement in the application of the new strategy will be possible. In
the case of metacognitive strategies (see Chapter 4), it does not seem likely that
observable amounts of improvement can occur with the time of a single lesson
or two.
When cognitive strategies become the target of instruction, they often take
the form of a sequence of steps or activities to be performed by the learner in
order to help the learner process information in a new way. An example of such
a procedure is the SQ3R (Survey, Question, Read, Recite, Review) technique
for reading text materials (Robinson, 1970). The list of steps, and an explana-
tion of the activity in each step, serve as an executive subroutine, much as the
sequence of steps in a motor skill serves as an executive subroutine. The
instructional activity, as previouslv mentioned, has the student practice the
application of the executive subroutine. As the student repeatedly applies the
procedure over a we should expect his performance to become
period of time,
more automatic and fluid. How can we know when the student has adopted the
procedure as a cognitive strategy? One indicator might be self-report; another
might be direct observation of the student's manipulation of the text as he reads
it. However, the most telling indicator might be the decrease in time and an

increase in accuracy the student exhibits between the early applications (while
learning) and the later applications (after adopting). Adoption implies that the
strategy is now a part of that student's information-processing repertoire and
that it can be applied efficiently and effectively.

Planning a Sequence for Verbal Information Learning

As indicated in Chapter 5, the most important prerequisite for the learning of

information is the provision of a meaningful context within which the newly
 Designing the Individual Lesson 231

learned information can be subsumed or with which it can be, in some meaning-
ful sense, associated. The principles applicable to sequencing differ somewhat
depending on whether the objective concerns learning a set of names (labels),
learning an isolated fact, or learning the sense of a logically organized passage.

I
Names or Labels

The names (such as the names of a number of trees) is

learning of a set of
facilitatedby the use of previously learned organized structures, which the
learner has in memory. A variety of structures may be used by the learner to
encode the newly acquired information. The encoding may take the form of a
simple association, as when a new French word la dame is associated with the
English word dame, which thus becomes an association for lady. Sometimes,
encoding may involve the use of a sentence, such as that which associates
starboard with right in "the star boarder is always right." Frequently, too, the
method of encoding may involve the use of visual images,
as would be the case if
the learner associated an image of a crow with a person's name, Crowe.
Mnemonic techniques involving the use of images and the key- word method are
reviewed by Pressley, Levin, and Delaney (1982). The imagery employed for
encoding may be quite arbitrary, as when a learner uses the shops on a well-
known street as associations for newly acquired names of things having nothing
to do with the shops themselves (cf. Crovitz, 1970).
It is clear, then, that the learning of new names or labels calls upon previously
learned entities stored in the learner's memory. In this kind of information
learning, it does not seem reasonable that a specific content of previous learning,
implying a sequence of instruction, can be recommended. Although it is possi-
of new labels by prescribing some particular "codes"
ble to facilitate the learning
for the learner to use, such a procedure is generally found to be less successful
than permitting the learner to use an encoding system of his own. What the
learner mainly needs to have learned previously, aside from the various
meaningful structures that may already be in memory, is "how to encode." This
is a particular kind of metacognitive strategy. The possibilities of long-term

instruction designed to improve such a strategy have not been investigated.

Individual Facts

The learning of individual facts, as they might occur in a chapter of history text,
also involves an encoding process. In this case, the encoding is usually a matter
—
of relating the facts to larger meaningful structures larger organized "bodies of
knowledge" that have been previously learned.
Two kinds of procedures are available for instructional sequencing when one
is dealing with factual information. Both of them should probably be employed,

with an emphasis determined by other factors in the situation. The first is the
prior learning (in a sequence) of what Ausubel (1968) calls organizers. If the
232 Principles of Instructional Design

learner is to acquire facts about automobiles, for example, an organizing passage

may first be presented that informs the learner about the major distinctive
categories of automobile description —body style, engine, frame, transmission,
and so on. The specific facts to be learned about particular automobiles then
follow.
The second procedure, not entirely unrelated to the first, involves the use of
questions or statements to identify the major categories of facts for which
learning is desired (cf. names of
Frase, 1970; Rothkopf, 1970). Thus, if the
persons described in a historical passage most important information to be
is the
learned, prior experience with questions about such names in a sample passage
will facilitate the learning and retention of them. Should the lesson have the
objective of stating dates, then dates could be asked about in a prior passage.

Organized Information

Most frequendy, an objective in the category of verbal information is the

expectation that the learner will be able to state a set of facts and principles in a
meaningful, organized manner. For example, an objective in social studies might
be to describe the process involved in the passage of a by the U.S. Congress. bill

In this case, a schema would such as

likely include at least the essential steps,
drafting the bill, introducing the bill, and so on. The learning of organized
information of this sort is also subject to an encoding procedure that calls upon
previously learned structure in the student's memory. Anderson (1984) de-
scribes such a memory structure as a schema. He defines schema as an "abstract
structure of information [which may be] conceived as a set of expectations"
. . .

(p. 5). These expectations are considered to be slots in the learner's knowledge
structure into which the new information can be integrated. Sequencing of
organized knowledge should take into account existing schemas into which the
new knowledge can be subsumed. The teacher should structure the new in-
formation so that it builds on what the student already knows. An example is
cited in the work of Ausubel (1968), wherein he speaks of the process of
"correlative subsumption," occurring when information about Buddhism is
acquired following what has previously been learned about a different religion,
Zen Buddhism. That is, when learning new material on Buddhism, the learner
will compare the new information to what he already knows about Zen Bud-
dhism. Because the information about both is similar, it is subsumed in the Zen
Buddhism schema, which then becomes the Zen Buddhism/Buddhism schema.

Planning a Sequence for Motor Skill Learning

The capabilities that constitute prerequisites for the learning of a motor skill are
the part skills that may compose the skill to be learned and the executive
subroutine (the complex rule) that serves to control their execution in the
 Designing the Individual Lesson 233

proper order. Of course, the relative importance of these two kinds of pre-
requisites depends largely upon the complexity of the skill itself. To attempt to
identify part skills for dart throwing, for example, would not be likely to lead to
a useful sequencing plan; but in a complex skill such as swimming, practice of
part skills is often considered a valuable approach.
* Typically, the learning of the executive subroutine is placed early in the
sequence of instruction for a motor skill, before the various part skills have been
fully mastered. Thus, in learning to heave the shot put, the learner-athlete may
at an early stage acquire the executive subroutine of approaching the line,
shifting his weight, bending his arm and body, and propelling the shot, even
though at this early stage his performance of the critical movements is still rather
poor.
The particular part skills mav themselves have important prerequisites. For
example, in the skill of firing a rifle at a target, the concrete concept of a correct
sighting picture is considered to be a valuable subordinate skill to the execution
of the total act of target shooting. Accordingly, a plan of instruction for a motor
skill must provide not only for the prior practice of part skills, when this is

appropriate, but also on some occasions for a sequence relevant to the individual
part skills themselves.

Planning a Sequence for Attitude Learning

As is true for other kinds of learned capabilities, the learning or modification of

an attitude calls upon previously acquired entities in the learner's memory. A
positive attitude toward reading poetry, for example, could scarcely be es-
tablished without some knowledge of particular poems on the learner's part or
without some of the language skills involved in interpreting the meaning of
poetic writing. Thus, for many attitudes with which school learning is con-
cerned, the planning of an instructional sequence must take into account these
kinds of prerequisite learning.
The basis for an instructional sequence aimed at establishing an attitude is to
be found in the particular verbal information and intellectual skills that become a
part of the personal action that the teacher expects the learner to choose as a
result of instruction. If the learner is to have a positive attitude toward associat-
ing with people of races different from his own, such an attitude must be based
upon information concerning what these various "associations" (plaving games
with, working with, dining with, and so on) are about. Or if the learner is to
acquire a positive attitude toward the methods of science, this must be based
upon some capabilities (skills) of using some of these methods. An instructional
sequence of learning an attitude, then, often begins with the learning of in-
tellectual skills and verbal information relevant to that attitude. It proceeds then
to the introduction of a procedure involved in establishing the positive or
negative tendency that constitutes the attitude itself, as described in Chapter 5.
Since attitude learning mav require prior learning of intellectual skills and verbal
234 Principles of Instructional Design

information, it is often necessary to consider learning domain interactions as

described by Martin and Briggs (1986). These interactions can be analyzed by
means of "audit trails," in which the attitude to be acquired is related to other
skills that facilitate its acquisition. The audit trail may include other attitudes,
verbal information, or intellectual skills, and it provides a guide for the sequenc-
ing of experiences leading to attitude change.
When the method of human modeling is employed for attitude modification
another prerequisite step in the sequence may be necessary. Since the "message"
that represents the attitude needs to be presented by a respected source (usually
a person), it may in some instances be necessary to establish or to build up
respect for this person. A currently famous scientist is not likely to command the
respect that a well-known scientist, such as Einstein, does; and Einstein, as a
pictured model, is more likely to be respected if the learner knows of his
accomplishments

LESSON PLANNING FOR LEARNING OUTCOMES

The sequence of capabilities exemplified by the learning hierarchy (for in-

tellectual skills) or by a set of identified prerequisites (for other types of
outcomes) is used as a basis for planning a series of lessons. The implication it

has for the design of a single lesson is that one or more prerequisite or
supporting capabilities need to be available to the learner. Obviously, though,
there is more than this to the planning of each lesson. How does the student

proceed from the point of having learned some subordinate knowledge or skills
to the point of having acquired a new capability? This interval, during which the
actual learning occurs, is filled with the kinds of instructional events described in
Chapter 10. These events include the actions taken by the students and teacher
to bring about the desired learning.

Instructional Events and Effective Learning Conditions

The most general purpose for what we have called the events of instruction is

that of arranging the external conditions of learning in such a way as to ensure

that learning will occur. Instructional events are typically incorporated into the
individual lesson. In a general sense, these events apply to all types of lessons,
regardless of their intended outcomes. Just as we have found it necessary to
describe particular sequencing conditions that pertain to different lesson out-
comes, we need to give an account of the particular events that
also recognize a
affect the learning effectiveness of lessons having different kinds of outcomes.
This makes it possible to recall the conditions of learning for various classes of
learning outcomes and to apply these principles to the arrangement of effective
learning within a lesson. These conditions are described in greater detail by
Gagne (1985).
Tables 12-1 and 12-2 are intended to consolidate several ideas that influence
 Designing the Individual Lesson 235

Table 1 2-1 Effective Learning Conditions for Incorporation into Lessons Having Objectives of Intellectual
Skills and Cognitive Strategies
Type of
Lesson Objective Learning Conditions

Discrimination Recall of responses

Presentation of same and different stimuli, with emphasis on distinctive features

Repetition of same and different stimuli, with feedback

Concrete Concept Recall of discrimination of relevant object features

Presentation of several instances and nonmstances, varying in irrelevant object

qualities

Identification of instances by student, with feedback

Defined Concept Recall of component concepts

Demonstration of the concept, using its definition

Demonstration of concept example by student

Rule Recall of subordinate concepts and rules

Demonstration of rule, using verbal statement

Demonstration of rule application by student

Higher-Order Rule Recall of relevant subordinate rules

Presentation of a novel learning task or problem

Demonstration of new rule in problem solution by student

Cognitive Strategy Recall of relevant rules and concepts

Verbal statement or demonstration of strategy

Practice of strategy in novel situations

lesson design. First, they assume the general framework of instructional events,
described in Chapter 10, without developing these ideas further. Second, they
describe procedures for implementing optimal learning conditions that are
specifically relevant to of learning objective. These have been referred
each class
to as the external conditions of learning. And third, they take account of the
problem of lesson sequencing by representing the recall of prerequisite capabili-
ties appropriate for each kind of learning outcome as internal conditions.

The result of this integrating exercise is a kind of checklist of distinctive

conditions for effective learning that need to be incorporated into the general
framework of instructional events in order to accomplish learning objectives. It
may be noted that the checklist pertains only to the following events of instruc-
tion: event 3, stimulating recall of prior learning; event 4, presenting the
stimulus; event 5, providing learning guidance; and event 6, eliciting perfor-
mance. The remaining instructional events are described in Chapter 10.

Lessons for Intellectual Skill Objectives

Effective learning conditions for the varieties of intellectual skills that may be
reflected in planning the events of a lesson are given in Table 12-1. Each list of
conditions given in the second column begins with a statement designating the
236 Principles of Instructional Design

Table 12-2 Effective Learning Conditions for Incorporation into Lessons Having Objectives of Verbal
Information, Attitudes, and Motor Skills

Type of
Lesson Objective Learning Conditions

Verbal Information

Names or Labels Recall of verbal associations

Encoding by student—relating name to image or meaningful sentence

Using name in context of other knowledge

Facts Recall of context of related meaningful information

Performance of reinstating fact in larger context of verbal information

Using fact in context of other knowledge

Knowledge Recall of context of related information

Performance of reinstating new knowledge in the context of related information

Using knowledge by relating it to other facts and bodies of knowledge

Attitude Recall of verbal information and intellectual skills relevant to chosen personal
actions

Establishment or recall of respect for "source" (usually a human model)

Reward for personal action, either by direct expenence or vicariously by observa-
tion of the human model

Motor Skill Recall of responses and part skills

Establishment or recall of executive subroutine (procedural rule)

Practice of total skill

recall of a previously learned capability, often from a previous lesson in a

sequence. The list then proceeds with conditions that are to be reflected in other
instructional events (such as those of presenting the stimulus, providing learn-
ing guidance, eliciting the student performance, and so on). In interpreting the
information in this column, the reader mav find it useful to review the state-
ments of internal and external conditions of learning for these types of objec-
tives, as described in Chapters 4 and 5.

Lessons for Cognitive Strategy Objectives

Conditions designed to promote effective learning for cognitive strategies are
listed in the bottom portion of Table 12-1. The list pertains to the learning of
strategies of learning, remembering, and problem solving. External and internal
conditions for learning cognitive strategies were discussed previously in Chap-
ter 3.

Lessons for Objectives of Information, Attitudes, and Motor Skills

The design of instructional events for lessons having one of the following
objectives —verbal information, attitudes, or motor skills —needs to take into
 Designing the Individual Lesson 237

account the particular conditions for effective learning shown in the correspond-
ing portions of Table 12-2. These lists are derived from the fuller discussion of

internal and external conditions of learning contained in Chapter 4.

STEPS IN LESSON PLANNING

Assuming that a teacher has organized a course into major units or topics and
has further planned sequences of lessons for each, how does that teacher proceed
with the design of a single lesson?
Following our emphasis upon providing for the events of instruction includ-
ing the incorporation of effective learning conditions for the domain repre-
sented in the objective of the lesson, we suggest that teachers employ a planning
sheet that will contain the following elements:

1 A statement of the objective of the lesson and its classification as to domain of

learning outcome
2. A list of the instructional events to be employed
3. A list of the media, materials, and activities by which each event is to be
accomplished
4. Notes on teacher roles and activities (prescriptions for instruction)

Such a planning sheet might list the objective at the top, with a column for
each of the other three items in the previous list. After the planning sheet is

completed, a script for the lesson could be written. An example of a completed

lesson planning sheet is shown in Table 12-3.
We will now describe some varieties of circumstances related to the four
elements of the planning sheet.

The Objective of the Lesson

As noted earlier, some lessons may have a single objective, whereas others may
include several related objectives. For example, the lesson presented in Table
12-3 is for a single objective that appears in a learning hierarchy for a more
complex intellectual skill objective. In delivering this lesson, however, the
teacher must attend to its prerequisites and provide for transfer to subsequent
objectives. The purpose of the lesson is to provide part of the instruction needed
to accomplish the integrated goals, as discussed in Chapter 9, associated with
the unit of instruction.

Listing the Instructional Events

The events of instruction are based on the hypothesized sequence of internal

stages of information processing. The purpose of the external events is to
facilitate the internal processes; therefore, it makes sense to present them in
238 Principles of Instructional Design

Table 12-3 Example of a Lesson for a Concrete Concept Objective

Objective: Given a collection of plane figures, five of which are trapezoids and five not, identifies the trapezoids by

circling them.

Event Media Prescnption

1 . Gaining attention Live instruction and Draw figures on chalkboard, emphasizing variety of

chalkboard appearance of figures

2. Inform the learner of the ob- Same Present several pairs of figures differing in critical

jective attnbutes (4 sides, straight, 2 parallel), along with

statements such as "this is a trapezoid," "this is

not." Follow with a pair of figures and the ques-

tion, "Can you pick out the trapezoid?"

3. Stimulate recall of prerequi- Overhead projector Present pairs of lines which are straight, not straight;

sites parallel, not parallel; figures that are 4-sided, 5-

sided, 3-sided; closed, open

In the case of each pair ask the student to identify

the difference by telling or by pointing

4. Presenting the stimulus ma- Same Present a senes of pairs of figures, each containing a

terial, and trapezoid and a nonexample. Ask the student to

5. Providing learning guidance identify the trapezoid in each case. When feature

names are known point out the presence or abs-

ence of the feature in each member of the pair

(straight, nonstraight; parallel, nonparallel, etc.)

6. Eliciting performance Overhead transpar- Present a worksheet with 20 plane figures, 8 of

encies and work- which are trapezoids, and other figures differing in

sheets one or more critical attnbutes. Have the students

circle the trapezoids on their worksheets

7. Providing feedback Oral review by in- When the students have finished the worksheet,

structor project a copy on the overhead. Identify the

trapezoid in each example; identify the absence

of the critical feature in each nonexample

8. Assessing performance Teacher Using a test similar to the worksheet, have the stu-

dents circle the trapezoids

9. Enhancing retention and Worksheets Ask the students to draw a trapezoid, beginning with

transfer each of three straight lines: 1 vertical, 1 horizon-

tal, and 1 slanted. As matenals are available, ask

students to identify trapezoid shapes in pictures

of objects (furniture, tools, etc.)

order. However, the events are only to serve as guidelines for developing the
lesson. It may not be necessary to include all the events or to present them in a
strict linear order. When designing the lesson, the teacher should consider both
the sophistication of the learners as self- directive learners and the nature of the
objectives of the lesson. Under some circumstances, it may be desirable to spend
 Designing the Individual Lesson 239

an entire period on a single instructional event, for example, establishing

motivation for a series of lessons. Or, an hour may be required to present a
complex objective to the students, including a discussion or a demonstration of
its subordinate parts, each of which the learners are to respond to in some
prescribed manner. In a course in which objectives are written at the unit level
land not it may be reasonable to spend an hour or more
at the lesson level,
clarifying the exact nature of the expected performance for each unit before the
actual instruction for the unit is undertaken. This type of organization may be
appropriate for a course whose major outcomes are problem-solving skills.
Although the events of instruction represent a crucial element in the design
model presented in this book, it is also of great importance that the manner in
which such events are planned reflect the best estimate of the capabilities and
entering competencies of the students (see Chapter 6).

Choosing Media Materials and Activities

At this step in instructional design, the greatest differences may be noted

between designing teacher-led and mediated instruction. Mediated instruction
requires the designer to attend to all the events of instruction as well as the
manner in which they will be operationalized in the materials. The model for
teacher- led instruction is much less exact since the teacher fills in the gaps.
However, the basic principle of planning the external events of instruction is the
same in both. The question that must be answered is, "How will I accomplish
this event with these students?" For example, when considering the event of
gaining attention for an objective in a genetics unit in science for young
children, the teacher might think, "If I could find a 16-mm film showing the
various species of animals whose distinctive features are so exaggerated as to
make them comical, I up to the objective about how genes
could use this to lead
determine these differences." If such a film could not be found, the teacher
would devise some other way to accomplish the event. Designers developing a
mediated module on the same topic must go through the same process of
determining how the event will be accomplished. In some cases, existing materi-
als may be found that can be incorporated into the module; however, in most
cases, it requires the production of new materials.

Examples of Lesson Planning Sheets for Various Types

of Learning Outcomes

Table 12-3, presented earlier, shows an example of how the events of instruction
might be interpreted for a lesson that teaches a concrete concept. Tables 12-4
through 12-8, on the next few pages, show examples of Lesson Planning Sheets
problem solving,
for other types of learning including: defined concept, rule,
and verbal information and attitude. Notice how the conditions of learning as
presented in Tables 12-1 and 12-2 have been incorporated in the prescriptions.
240 Principles of Instructional Design

Table 12-4 Example of a Lesson for a Defined Concept

Objective: Given a text pnnted with no caps, classifies proper nouns.

Event Media Prescnption

1 . Gaining attention Live instruction and Put two sentences on the blackboard, using no caps. (Examples: the
chalkboard team's name was the wildcats, the woman's name was mrs.

brownl. Ask the students if they notice anything unusual about

these sentences. Point out the words that are usually capitalized

2. Inform the learner of the Same Tell the students this lesson is about proper nouns. A proper noun

objective begins with a capital letter. They will be learning to identify which
nouns are proper nouns, to be written with an initial capital letter

3. Stimulate recall of pre- Overhead projector Remind the students that a noun is the name of a person, place, or

requisites thing. Ask the students to grve examples of nouns in each of

these categones. Reminder: the first word in a sentence is al-

ways capitalized—not important for this lesson

4. Presenting the stimulus Same Wnte the definition of a proper noun on the overhead: A proper noun
matenal is a word that names a particular person, place, or thing

5. Providing learning guid- Teacher Compare common nouns to proper nouns to show application of the

ance definition "general noun" versus "particular noun." For example:

boy-^John
girl—Alice

mother—Mrs. Smith
building—World Trade Center

monument— Lincoln Memorial

6. Eliciting performance Worksheets Ask the students to wnte seme proper nouns next to a list of

common nouns. Include the categones of people, places, and

things

7. Providing feedback Oral review by instruc- Inform the students as to the correctness of their answers. Re-

tor with class par- mind students, if necessary, that proper nouns are always

ticipation capitalized

8. Assessing performance Written quiz sheet Have the students underline the proper nouns in each of ten sent-

ences. Include the following conditions: sentences with no

proper nouns, one proper noun at the beginning of the sentence,

one proper noun embedded in the sentence, multiple proper

nouns, pronouns

9. Enhancing retention and Worksheets Have each student wnte five sentences that include proper nouns,

transfer for people, places, and things. Conduct a contest to see who can

use the most proper nouns in their sentences

 Designing the Individual Lesson 241

Table 1 2-5 Example of a Lesson for Teaching a Rule

Objective: Given the voltage in a circuit and the wattage of an appliance, find the amperage the appliance will draw, using the formula:

Amperage = Watts/Volts.

Event Media Prescription

V Gaining attention Video tngger film Show a scene where everyone is getting ready for work and school in

the morning. Mother has her curling iron plugged in. dad is ironing

a shirt. Sally plugs in her hair dryer, and all of a sudden the screen
goes blank. Ask if anyone knows what happened? (Answer:

Sally's hair dryer overloaded the circuit and blew a fuse.)

2. Inform the learner of the Teacher State that the purpose of this lesson is to be able to figure out how
objective much electricity (amps) is needed by appliances such as a hair

dryer, refngerator, iron. Typical situation: a new appliance is plug-

ged into a circuit already being used. Will the fuse blow?

3. Stimulate recall of pre- Overhead projector Ask the students to recall that the typical voltage in a household

requisites circuit is 1 15 volts. (In using the formula, this may be rounded to

100 volts.) The wattage of an appliance is usually pnnted on the

appliance's metal label. Fuses in electric circuits are rated accord-

ing to amps (amount) of electricity they can carry; if this amount is

exceeded, the fuse blows

4. Presenting the stimulus Same Tell the students the rule for calculating the amps used by an appli-

matenal ance is to divide the wattage of that appliance by the voltage of

Watts
the circuit: = Amps. Therefore, if Sally's hair dryer uses
Volts

1200 watts, it is drawing 12 amps (— = 12)

5. Providing learning guid- Teacher Use several different examples to illustrate the application of the rule

ance WattsA/olts = Amps. (1) Ask the student if Sally's hair dryer

would blow a fuse rated at 1 5 amps. (No, because the dryer uses

only 12 amps.) (2) Ask the students what happens if Mom plugs

the iron into the same circuit. (Some will reply, "It will blow the
fuse.") Ask how they could prove it. Give help when needed to

find the amperage drawn by the iron (1 000 watts) and to find the

total amps in the circuit with both the iron and the hair dryer

turned on. (12 + 10 = 22 amps; the fuse will blow)

6. Eliciting performance Overhead transparen- Apply the rule to a number of other appliances. Ask students to find

cies and work- amps, assuming a voltage of 100 volts, light bulb, 100 watts; TV,
sheets 300 watts; vacuum cleaner, 600 watts; electric shaver, 50 watts;
curling iron, 1200 watts; electnc space heater, 1350 watts; re-

frigerator (starting, 1500 watts) (running, 800 watts)

7. Providing feedback Oral review by instruc- Inform the students as to the correctness of their answers and

tor

fraction ^
remediate incorrect answers. Watch for the inversion of the

Watts

8. Assessing performance Teacher Have the students do 10 problems requiring the calculation of amps

9. Enhancing retention and Worksheets Describe or picture the need for finding amperage in several different

transfer practical situations. Have the students tackle a few problems to

determine whether a fuse will blow or not. Have a contest to see

how many electrical things (from a list, showing watts) the stu-

dent can plug into a 20-amp circuit without blowing the fuse
242 Principles of Instructional Design

Table 12-6 Example of a Lesson for a Problem-Solving Skill

Objective Given a drawing of a plot of land, the student generates a plan for a spnnkler system that will cover at least
: 90% of the land,
using the least amount of materials (PVC pipe and spnnkler heads).

Event Media Prescription

1. Gaming attention Live instruction and Show pictures of spnnkler coverage of a rectangular plot of ground.

overhead projector one highly successful (90%) coverage, one unsuccessful (70%
coverage), and one using too many spnnkler heads. Show these
rapidly, inviting attention to their differences

2. Inform the learner of the Same The problem to be solved is to design the most efficient spnnkler

objective system for a plot of ground—one that covers at least 90% and
uses the smallest amounts of pipe and spnnkler heads

3. Stimulate recall of pre- Overhead projector Have the learners recall applicable rules. Since the spnnkler heads
requisites they will use spray in circles and partial circles, rules to be recalled

are (1) area of a circle, (2) area of quarter and half circles, 13) the

area of rectangular areas, 14) the area of irregular shapes made by

the intersection of circular arcs with straight sides

4. Presenting the stimulus Same Restate the problem in general terms, and then add specific details:

material (a) rectangular lot 50 by 1 00 ft; (2) radius of the spnnklers, 5 ft; (3)

water source in the center of the lot

5. Providing learning guid- Same The student will need to design tentative spnnkler layouts, draw

ance, and them out and calculate the relative efficiency of each. Guidance

6. Eliciting performance may be given by informing the learner of various options rf it

appears that rules are not being applied correctly. For example.

"Could you get more efficient coverage in the comer by using a

quarter-circle spnnkler head'" Or "It looks like you have a lot of

overlap; are you allowing for a 10% noncoverage?" Ask the

learner what rule he is following for placing the spnnkler

7. Providing feedback Oral review by instruc- Confirm good moves, when in a suitable direction. If the learner

tor doesn't see a possible solution, suggestions may be made. For

example, "Why don't you draw four circles that barely touch,

calculate the area, then draw a rectangle around the circles and

calculate the area of coverage to see how much you have?"

8. Assessing performance Teacher Present a different problem using the same type of spnnkler, with

different lot shape and size. Check the efficiency of the student's

solution in terms of coverage and amount of materials used

9. Enhancing retention and Worksheet Present several different problems varying in shape of lot position of

transfer the water source, and area of spnnkler coverage. Assess the

generalizability of student problem solving to these new situations

 Designing the Individual Lesson 243

Table 12-7 Example of a Lesson for a Verbal Information Objective

Objective: Given the question "What 'truths' were held to be self-evident, according to the framers of the Declaration of In-

dependence?" the student states, in his own words, the gist of these "truths."

Event Media Prescription

1-1. Gaining attention Live instruction Say, "In 1776, the English colonies on this continent declared that

they were independent of the country which established them—

England. What reasons did they give for such an audacious

declaration?"

2. Inform the learner of the Same Some of the reasons were found in truths held to be self-evident.

objective What were these "truths"?

3. Stimulate recall of pre- Chalkboard and hand- The prerequisites in this case are gaining meaning from sentences,

requisites outs including the words in the sentences. Word meanings that might

need to be defined are: self-evident: endowed: unalienable; in-

stituted; deriving. Syntactic sentence structures also need to be

recognized and understood

4. Presenting the stimulus Pnnted text on hand- Present the relevant prose passage from the Declaration of In-

matenal outs dependence:

We hold these truths to be self evident: That all men are created

equal; that they are endowed by their Creator with certain un-

alienable nghts; that among these are life, liberty, and the pursuit

of happiness. That, to secure these nghts, governments are

instituted among men, deriving their just powers from the con-
sent of the governed"

5. Providing learning guid- Provide room on hand- Ask the students to number the "truths" in the passage, beginning

ance outs for list and ela- with (1) all men are created equal. Ask the students to elaborate

borations each of these "truths," to themselves, by associating each point

with some other familiar ideas. (For example, the "right to life"

might be associated with controversies about capital punishment;

the "right to liberty" may be associated with the taking of hos-

tages, and so forth)

6. Eliciting performance Have students read re- Ask the students to answer the question "What truths are held to be
sponses—elicit self-evident?" without trying to repeat the passage word for word
all "different"

responses

7. Providing feedback Teacher Verify the learning and retention of the passage in terms of meaning.
Give corrections when errors or omissions are made

8. Assessing performance Teacher Ask for recall of the entire passage, scored in terms of "meaning
units"

9. Enhancing retention and Verbal information is remembered best when it is practiced (used).

transfer Students could be asked what the English government's re-

sponse might have been to each of the "truths" put forward in

the Declaration. Another question might be, "Why did the colon-

ies think that each of these rights was being violated?" Exercises

of this sort require the use of the verbal information that has been
learned
244 Principles of Instructional Design

Table 12-8 Example of a Lesson for an Attitude Objective

Objective: The learner chooses to eat foods that are low in fat and low in calories in order to control weight. [Note: This lesson is not

for children; it is most appropriate for young adults who are concerned about being overweight. Also, this class is ongoing with events

6. 7, and 8 presented weekly.]

Event Media Prescnption

1. Gaining attention Video Present a montage of outline human fat figure, alongside foods that

are high in fat (butter, ice cream, pastry), and contrast picture of a

lean outline figure, alongside foods that are low in fat (stnng

beans, celery, fish). Ask. "Which figure do you prefer for your-

self?"

2. Inform the learner of the Video-mediated model "The goal of this workshop is to understand how we can control our

objective (dressed in nurses weight through eating foods tow in calones and fat." (The hidden

uniform) agenda is that the student will choose to do so)

3. Stimulate recall of pre- Same Remind the students (or instruct them) of the calones and fat content

requisites of common foods. Mention foods that are high in calories and fat

and others that are low. Emphasize balance in the diet

4. Presenting the stimulus Live instruction The content of this lesson should be delivered by a person who
material serves as a human model. This could be someone who was
overweight but is now at a proper weight through application of

choices about what to eat

5. Provding learning guid- Live instruction and The model should be admirable and believable He or she descnbes
ance . dec the shift in food choices made, the difference in weight that

transpired, and the satisfaction that resulted. The messages deliv-

ered by the model might be "If I can do it. you can do it." "It

works," "It isn't easy, but it is worth it"

6. Eliciting performance Overhead transparenc- Ask the students for reports of food eaten over the past week. These

ies and worksheets should include mention of the occasions on which food choices

are made (at meal times and between meals). These reports, of

course, are imperfect indicators of actual behavior in choosing

foods

7. Providing feedback Oral review by instruc- Give positive feedback to indicators of desirable choices in self-

tor reports of food eating. Feedback should confirm a desired choice

(or movement toward a desired behavior) with praise or support

8. Assessing performance Teacher Attitudes may be assessed using unobtruswe measures. Observe

students over a penod of weeks to see if unusual weight gains

are avoided and if they use positive phrases m talking about their

food choices

9. Enhancing retention and Worksheet Attitudes are reinforced by support from the environment. The efforts

transfer of the individual can be aided by weekly meetings of a support

group
 Designing the Individual Lesson 245

INTEGRATIVE GOALS: LESSON PLANNING

FOR MULTIPLE OBJECTIVES

The occurrence of multiple objectives is common in instruction. As previously

mentioned, a single lesson is most often only a part of a larger unit. As discussed
in Chapter 9, instruction should engage a student in a comprehensive purpose
of the sort that Gagne and Merrill (1990) call an enterprise. For example, after
instruction, the student might be expected to demonstrate new knowledge
through the act of "denoting" or bv elaborative discussion. A particular "denot-
ing" goal may require the integration of many different types of learning
outcomes including verbal information, attitudes, related concepts, and rules.
The instructional curriculum map, introduced in Chapter 8, is one way of
analyzing integrative goals into component objectives from differing domains.
The issue to be addressed hereis how lesson design for multiple objectives from

different domains differs from lesson design for single objectives. As discussed
in Chapter 9, it is useful to draw instructional maps in the process of planning
sequences of lessons. These maps may be drawn at several levels, corresponding
to the three levels at which the question of sequencing arises in the design of a
course. Such maps may serve to show the integration of objectives from the
different domains and visually depict each objective's role in supporting attain-
ment of a larger goal. Figure 12-2 illustrates a map for a lesson on the in-
heritance of sex-linked traits. In this lesson, it is easy to see that instruction on
many of the objectives may be combined and presented together. For example,
the teacher might group the information objectives (A and B) and present the
content related to both of them at one time.

Planning Instructional Activities

The main difference in planning for multiple-objectiveand single-objective

lessons is must plan how to present the events of
that the teacher or designer
instruction for multiple objectives. This model for lesson design proposes that
the teacher or designer will determine a strategy for a lesson by grouping
objectives and events of instruction into instructional activities. An instructional
activity is something the teacher does, or has the student do, representing one or
more events of instruction for one or more objectives. For example, showing a
film is an instructional activity. The purpose of that activity may be to motivate
the learner, present the content, or both. Likewise, a game in which the class is

divided into two teams which compete in applying rules learned in a lesson may
provide both motivation and the event "elicit performance." A lesson, then,
consistsof one or more instructional activities which occur in a predetermined
framework. The most common framework for a teacher-led lesson is a pre-
determined period of time. Even a mediated lesson is generally planned to be
completed in an estimated period of time. Our task, in this case, is to figure out
what instructional activities are going to occur during this period of time. To do
246 Principles of Instructional Design

Demonstrate inheritance of
sex-linked trait,using
a Pummet square diagram.

Demonstrate the use of a

Pummet square to show
how sex-linked traits appear
more often in men than in

women. E

Demonstrate how to fill

ina Pummet Square.

Identify a sex-linked trait

in a chromosome diagram.

-4 State (summarize) how a

sex-linked trait is carried
by a gene on a chromosome.
B

State the definition of a

sex-linked trait.

EISTTRY SKILLS

Classify Classify gene, Classify reces- Identify the repre-

chromosome, by definition. sive and domin- sentation of male and

by definition. 2. ant by definition female sex chromo-
4. somes. 5.

Classify trait,

by definition.

3.

FIGURE12-2 ICM for a Lesson on Genetics: Sex-Linked Traits

this, one might construct a table like the one shown in Figure 12-3 which we
callan objectives/time-line matrix.
Planning instructional activities starts with sequencing the objectives from the
instructional map. The lesson's objectives are listed vertically at the left side of
the matrix in the order in which they are to be taught. Across the bottom of the
matrix is a time line that depicts the desired length of the lesson. Within the
 Designing the Individual Lesson 247

ii

J= 5
O 1a.
.C 3
+- o
<p C3

*$
a>
<o
> s
>
<
"<5 1
c -0
o o
G3 c
a>

</>
c
c to
a)
t ~.3 _
o a)
0) ,c
o +-»
o
K cu
c/i
a> ts
c 3
—i
fc
a> C
b
E O
> c
>
I LU
J3 15
O c
<D
CO
CNI
«~"
s
saAjjoafqo S|||>is Ajjug a>
LU
rr £
-3 ?
CJ
1
248 Principles of Instructional Design

matrix formed by the intersecting rows and columns are cells. Into these cells,

we can place a number which represents one or more events of instruction that
will occur as time progresses, as shown in Figure 12-3. This figure represents
the objectives/time-line matrix for the lesson map shown in Figure 12-2. Events
of instruction may then be grouped together, either across objectives or within
objectives, into an instructional activity. Any instructional activity is planned to
present one or more events of instruction for one or more objectives.
The objectives/time-line matrix and the lesson-planning sheet (illustrated by
Table 12-9) are completed simultaneously. The lesson-planning sheet, instead of
listing the events of instruction down the left side as shown in earlier examples,
lists the instructional activities that are represented on the bottom line of the
objectives/time-line matrix. The events of instruction are incorporated into the
activities. The guiding principle in constructing the objectives/time-line matrix
and the lesson-planning sheet is to go from prerequisite skills to higher-order
skills and to present the events of instruction through the instructional activities

in a sequential manner so as to facilitate information processing.

Table 12-9 Lesson-Planning Sheet for a Lesson on Sex-Linked Traits, Including Prescriptions for Media
and Instructional Activities

Teaching Type of Possible

Activity Stimuli Media Prescription

(a) Spoken word, teacher, slides, Gaining attention: Present a question to the student; e.g.,

pictures video "Why are more men color-blind than women? Why
aren't more women bald? What determines if you will be
bald when you get older?"

(b) Spoken word, teacher, slides, Recall prerequisites: Review the concepts of chromosome,
pictures video trait, genes, recessive, and dominant, showing pictures

with each definition

Spoken word, teacher, hand- Inform students of objective A and B: "In this lesson, you
written word outs, video will first learn what a sex-linked trait is and how it is

inherited"

(d) Spoken word, teacher, hand- State the definition of a sex-linked trait

written word outs, video

(e) Spoken word, teacher, video, Present the objective, concept C, with new content show-

pictures slides, chalk- ing relevant attributes of a chromosome pair with a sex-

boards linked trait. Show three examples: XJ XcX X&. Indi-

cate how each gene is carried on the X chromosome

(f) Written word worksheets Elicit performance for concept C. "See if you can answer
these questions: Does XgY represent a sex-linked trait?

Why? Does XgX represent a sex-linked trait? Why? Does

XY a represent a sex-linked trait? Why?"
 Designing the Individual Lesson 249

Spoken word, teacher, hand- Review the correct answers with the students
written word outs

Ig) Spoken word teacher, video State objectives D and E: "Now you will learn why these
traits are more common in men that in women and how

you can determine whether or not the trait will be ex-

pressed'

Spoken word, teacher, hand- Show students how to develop a Pummet square for look-

illustrations outs, chalk- ing at possible outcomes of crosses:

board
Female
Xc X

Male X XXc XX
Y XcY XY

Spoken word teacher, hand- Present the Pummet square, filled in to show possible

outs combinations of chromosomes and genes in offspnng

Spoken word teacher, hand- Provide learning guidance, i.e., procedure for filling out the

illustrations outs square, giving a number of different examples

Spoken word, teacher, chalk- Present the rule: "A sex-linked trait is always visible in a

written word board male because the Y chromosome does not mask the
recessive gene on the X chromosome"

Spoken word teacher, chalk- Learning guidance: Show the Pummet square again.

board Demonstrate that the expression of a trait can be de-

termined by looking at the cells. Give at least two ex-
amples from the following:

Xc X; Xc Y
X X; Xc Y
Xc X; X Y

Identify the concept carrier. Show that the recessive trait

becomes expressed in the female only when both X

chromosomes carry the recessive trait

(m) Wntten word worksheets Have the students solve several problems applying the rule

for determining expression of a trait. For any cross, ask

(1) Would a male exhibit the trait? (2) Would a female

exhibit the trait? (3) What is the probability that a male or

a female will not exhibit or carry the trait? For feedback,

provide model answers to students

(n) Wntten word worksheets Provide for retention and transfer by giving students word
problems pertaining to sex-linked crosses. "If your moth-
er's father was bald, what are your chances of being

bald?" Discuss the relation of this lesson to work to be

undertaken in subsequent lessons
250 Principles of Instructional Design

In Figure 12-3, entry skills 1 through 5 are from previous lessons. They are to
be reviewed to enhance retention and transfer (event 9) for those skills and to
recall prerequisites (event 3) for the target objectives of the lesson. The event

groupings are denoted by ellipses that enclose those events of instruction that
are to be considered an instructional activity. Figure 12-3 shows these group-
ings, where the instructional activities are denoted by the lowercase letters (a)
through (n) at the bottom of the figure, along a line denoting time.
As is evident from the figure, the first learning activity, (a), consists of
instructional event 1, gaining attention. The next instructional activity on the
time line, (b), recalls the prerequisite skills learned in an earlier lesson. For these
skills, the activity involved reflects event 9, enhancing retention and transfer.
The third activity, (c), informs the learners of the nature of objectives A and B.
Notice that these are verbal information objectives. In this lesson, they are
planned to be taught first, not because they are required as prerequisites, but
because they provide a supportive context by aiding transfer to the learning of
the main intellectual skill objectives (C, D, and E). The next activity, (d),
presents the stimulus for the information objectives A and B.
Sometimes, it is helpful to think of a group of events for a single objective as a
single instructional activity, as illustrated for events 5 through 7 (f), in which
furnishing learning guidance, eliciting performance, and providing feedback are
planned to occur over a short time.

Sequencing Instructional Activities and Selecting Media

Notice that the lesson diagrammed by the objectives/time-line matrix in Figure
12-3 can be described as a linear series of instructional activities denoted by the
lowercase letters (a) through (n). Within the framework of a lesson, a teacher
would have a fair amount of latitude with respect to which events to include,
which to omit, and which to combine across objectives. However, sequencing
considerations related to prerequisite skills suggest that a more efficient strategy
is that in which content will first be presented for the supportive objectives,
followed by content related to target objectives.
As previously mentioned, the prescriptions that describe what will take place
in each of the activities are written on the lesson- planning sheet as the time-
objectives matrix is being constructed. It is at this point that consideration must

be given to the capabilities of media and delivery systems to provide the events
constituting the lesson. Consistent with our model is the principle that the
effectivenessof instruction depends upon the ability of the media employed to
provide the events of instruction, in the manner required by the type of learning
outcomes and by learner characteristics. The fact that most media research
shows no significant differences with regard to learning may speak more to a
lack of consideration in the research of when media differences are important
(that is, when the events being presented make a significant difference) than it
does to whether media differences exist (Reiser and Gagne, 1983).
 Designing the Individual Lesson 251

If the prescriptions are witten before media of instruction are chosen, design-
with a wide latitude within which they can make media decisions.
ers are left
This has been referred to as an open-media model of instructional design (Briggs
and Wager, 1981). In contrast, if the medium is preselected, the prescription
will have to take into consideration the limitations of the medium to provide the
* events that constitute the learning activity. Table 12-9 gives a brief example of
how each of the prescriptions might be written in a classroom deliver)' system
with a teacher. If this lesson were to be mediated, the teacher and film might
possibly be replaced by videotape, and in this case, the prescriptions would look
very much the same. If the lesson were to be mediated in the form of printed
text, however, the prescriptions would need to change substantially. As dis-

cussed in Chapter 11, media decisions become most important when attending
to whether the learners are readers or nonreaders and the consequent require-
ments for visual display, practice, and feedback.

ROLES AND ACTIVITIES IN INSTRUCTIONAL DEVELOPMENT

There are a great many mediated instructional materials on the market. To the
teacher, these items have value only in terms of the learning activities to which
they may apply. To make the best use of these materials, the teacher needs to
study them carefully. She must note particularly the instructional events they do
not appear to address so that plans can be made for such events in the lesson
plan. The aim of this teacher activity is to produce a lesson plan in which all the
needed instructional events occur.
When new instructional materials are developed, the instructional design and
the subject matter expert (SME) work together in analyzing the learning task,
deciding on an appropriate delivery system, and preparing prescriptions for the
lessons in a course of study. In this process, both the designer and the SME
review existing materials and assess their appropriateness for use within an
intended course. Then, like the teacher, they undertake to determine to which
events, learning activities, pertain. At this
and lessons these existing materials
point, the designer must determine how the remaining events or activities can
be provided. Since the product of most instructional design projects is mediated
instruction, the designer must be concerned with how the media chosen can be
most appropriately used to support the instructional events. The events of
instruction and the conditions of learning, as exemplified in Tables 12-1 and
12-2, provide guidance for lesson design. It is unlikely that the process of
choosing or developing learning activities can be specified with such complete
accuracy that lesson design can be reduced to a "cookbook recipe." Lesson
design partakes of art as well as science. However, the events of instruction
provide a focus that aids both lesson construction and revision after formative
evaluation, based on what we now know about learning.
252 Principles of Instructional Design

SUMMARY
This chapter has dealt with lesson planning as the accomplishment of two major
activities: (1) planning for sequences of lessons within a course, unit, or topic;

and (2) design of individual lessons in such a way that effective conditions of
learning can be incorporated into the instructional events of each lesson.
The determination of sequences of lessons was discussed separately for each
domain of learning outcome. The use of learning hierarchies was shown to be of
central importance in the design of sequences of lessons for intellectual skill
objectives, whereas other considerations enter into sequencing decisions for
other kinds of outcomes.
To make each instructional event in the lesson successful, the conditions of
learning relevant to the outcome (represented by the lesson objective) must be
incorporated into the lesson. Although intuition, ingenuitv, creativitv, and
experience are all valuable when planning lessons, reference to relevant con-
ditions of learning can sharpen instruction and avoid neglect of some of the
desirable functions of instruction.
Four steps in lesson planning were discussed. These include (1) listing the
objective(s) of the lesson, (2) listing desired instructional events, (3) choosing
materials and activities, and (4) noting roles for teachers and designers. An
example of a multiobjective lesson plan for a studv of the inheritance of sex-
linked traits provides an indication of the time scheduling of instructional events
and prescriptions for teacher activities.
Up to the point of lesson planning, all stages of instructional design can be
similarlydone whether a team is designing an entire curriculum or a teacher is
designing a course. At the point of lesson design, however, teachers must
consider what thev personallv will bring to the lesson (and what role they will
play), whereas designers of mediated materials must decide how to provide
needed activities in a preplanned lesson. The purpose of both designs is the
—
same to incorporate effective conditions of learning into the instructional
events for all lessons and modules.

References

Anderson, R. C. (1984). Some reflections on the acquisition of knowledge. Educational

Researcher, 13, 5-10.
Ausubel, D. P. (1968). Educational psychology: A cognitive view. New York: Holt, Rine-
hart and Winston.
Briggs, L. J., Gustafson, K. L., & Tillman, M. H. (Eds.). (1991). Instructional design:
Principles and applications (2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology
Publications.
Briggs, L. J., & Wager, W. W. (1981) Handbook
.
of'procedures for the design of instruction.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Crovitz, H. E. (1970). Gallon's walk. New York: Harper 8c Row.
 Designing the Individual Lesson 253

Boundary conditions for mathemagenic behaviors. Review ofEduca-

Frase, L. T. (1970).
337-347.
tional Research, 40,
Gagne, R. M. 1985). The conditions oflearning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
(

Winston.
Gagne, R. M., & Merrill, M. D. (1990). Integrative goals for instructional design.
Educational Technology Research and Development, 35(1), 23—30.
Martin, B. L., & Briggs, L. J. (1986). The affective and cognitive domains: Integration for
instruction and research. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Pressley, M., Levin, J. R., &
Delany, H. D. (1982). The mnemonic keyword method.
Review of Educational Research, 52, 61-91.
Reiser, R., & Gagne, R. M. ( 1983) Selecting media for instruction. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
.

Educational Technology Publications.

Robinson, F. P. (1970). Effective study (4th ed.). New York: Harper Row. &
Rothkopf, E. Z. (1970). The concept of mathemagenic behavior. Review of Educational
Research, 40, 325-336.
Wager, W. (1975). Media selection in the affective domain: A further interpretation of
Dale's cone of experience for cognitive and affective learning. Educational Technology
15(7), 9-13.
Wager, W. (1977). Instructional design and higher education. In L. J. Briggs (Ed.),
Instructional design. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
 Assessing Student
13 Performance

i nstruction is designed to bring about the learning of

several kinds of capabilities. These are evidenced by improved performance on
the part of the student. Although much learning goes on outside the school and
much results from the student's own effort, the responsibility of the school is to
—
organize and provide instruction directed toward specific goals goals which
might not be achieved in a less organized manner.
The outcomes of this planned instruction consist of student performances
that show that various kinds of capabilities have been acquired. Five domains of
such capabilities have been identified and discussed in previous chapters: in-
tellectual skills, cognitive strategies, information, motor skills, and attitudes.
Performance objectives in these categories, applicable to a course of instruction,
may be further analyzed to discover the prerequisites on which their learning
depends. These in turn can form a basis for deciding upon a sequence of
individual lessons and for the design of the lessons themselves.
Both the designer of instruction and the teacher need a way to determine how
successful the instruction has been, in terms of the performance of each in-
dividual student and entire groups of students. There is a need to assess student
performance to determine whether the newly designed instruction has met its
design objectives. Assessment mav also be done to learn whether each student
has achieved the set of capabilities defined by the instructional objectives. In this
chapter, we will discuss how both these purposes can be served by the develop-
ment of procedures for assessing student performance.

254
 Assessing Student Performance 255

PURPOSES OF PERFORMANCE MEASURES

In Chapter 2, we pointed out that measures of student performance may have as

manv as five different purposes, when considered in relation to instruction in

schools. These are briefly discussed in the following sections.

Student Placement

When students return to school after each summer vacation, they will have
forgotten some skills learned the previous vear, and they will have acquired new
information, skills, and attitudes. Even in the unlikely event that the members of
a group left school the previous term with highlv similar capabilities, they will
not all be at the same starting point in respect to the sequence of skills to be
learned in a new school vear.
Placement tests are used to determine just which skills in a sequence each
student has learned and can recall at the time the tests are administered (usually
soon after the beginning of a new term). The results of such tests show the
pattern of each student's areas of mastery and nonmastery, for the purpose of
identifying the starting points for instruction.Programs of individualized in-
struction (Chapter 15) are well designed for this purpose. Under group instruc-
tion, the teacher will need to arrange some activities for students who need to
catch up or who need to work ahead of the majority. The more suitable the
provisions made for each learner, the more precise the instruction will be and
the more likely the students are to experience success.

Diagnosis of Difficulties

Diagnostic tests may be constructed to measure the prerequisite skills revealed

by learning hierarchies designed to represent the essential parts of total skills.

These tests are especially helpful when some learners are seen to be "falling
behind." A probable reason for falling behind, especially in group instruction, is
that earlier skills in a sequence have not been mastered, thus making it difficult
to learn superordinate skills. Based on the results of a diagnostic test, individual
learners can be given remedial instruction on prerequisite skills. In some in-
stances, of course, the remedial instruction mav need to emplov methods and
materials different from those originallv used in order to avoid a second failure
at the same trouble point in a sequence of lessons.

Checking Student Progress

Performance tests are often administered after each lesson in a series to ensure
that each student is mastering each objective. Teachers learn to use such tests less
often when an entire group consistendv progresses well and to use them more
often when a number of learners are experiencing difficulties. Of course, some
256 Principles of Instructional Design

progress checking is often done informally by the teacher in making spot checks
with a few learners on each occasion. But in individualized instruction pro-
grams, such as those presented by computer-based instruction, these tests are
typically a part of each "module." Testing of this frequent sort soon shows that a
learner is keeping up or falling behind. Bv using brief progress checks consistent
with assessment adequacy, learners can receive assurance that they are progress-
ing well. The results of such tests also represent dependable information for the
teacher to use in planning the next steps in instruction.
For advanced learners, as in universities and colleges, progress checks are
usually made less often. Some college instructors give weekly tests, but others
mav use only final examinations in their courses. In these settings also, the use of
computer-based instruction introduces a desirably frequent progress-checking
routine.

Reports to Parents

The use of performance measures not only assures both learners and teachers
that all is well, it also constitutes a dependable basis for reporting progress to
parents and administrators. The results of accumulated progress checks may
provide a basis for promotion, for certification, or for admission to higher
institutions of learning.

Evaluation of the Instruction

Another important purpose of performance testingand improve

is to evaluate
the instruction itself. In recent years it is not uncommon of for the materials
instruction to have undergone formative evaluation —
tryouts and subsequent
revisions of the materials with individuals, with small groups, and with large
groups in field test situations. For this purpose, the total scores earned by each
student on peformance measures are of interest in indicating the overall degree
of success attained. Even more important are item analyses showing which items
are passed or failed by a majority of students. Item scores are particularly useful
in deciding where the instruction needs to be improved. Techniques for forma-
tive evaluation are further discussed in Chapter 16 (see also Dick and Carev,
1985).
Performance tests are also used in conducting summative evaluations of the
instruction. These evaluations are conducted after course revisions have been
accomplished and after the resulting form of the course has been used for
additional groups of learners. Procedures for summative evaluation are de-
scribed in detail by Popham (1975), Dick and Carey (1985), and in Chapter 16.
The principles for preparing performance measures are similar whether ap-
plied to the construction of tests for each prerequisite skill in a learning hierar-
chy, for an entire topic, or for a larger unit of study. In the remainder of this
chapter, we will discuss tests in terms of their validity for measuring perfor-
 Assessing Student Performance 257

mance on a single objective. However, the single objective could be that of a

course, a unit, a single lesson, or an enabling objective.

PROCEDURES FOR OBJECTIVE-REFERENCED ASSESSMENT

The phrase objective-referenced assessment is used with a literal meaning in the

context of this book. It is intended to imply that the way to assess student
learning is to build tests or other assessment procedures that directly measure
the human performances described in the objectives for the course. Such mea-
sures of performance make it possible to infer that the intended performance
capability has indeed been developed as a result of the instruction provided.
Similar tests can be administered before the instruction is given (pretests), and
provisions can be made to allow students to bypass instruction they do not need.
Normally, a teacher tests only for the "assumed entering capabilities" before
introducing the instruction and assesses performance on the objective itself only
following instruction (that, by a posttest). A convenient compromise practice
may be for the teacher to permit any student who thinks he has mastered the
objective before instruction to take the test reflecting that objective as a pretest
and to excuse the student from that portion of the instruction if he passes it.

The performance objective is the keystone in planning assessment of perfor-

mance. We have indicated the critical importance of the verbs in the statement
for cor reedy describing the objective (Chapter 7). The verbs are equally crucial
as a basis for planning the performance assessment. Such verbs tell what the
student should be asked to do when taking the performance assessment test.

Note that the capability verb refers to the capability that is inferred to be present
in the student's repertoire, when the student has successfully performed as stated
in the action verb in the objective. The capability verb is the intent of the
objective; the action verb is the indicator that the intent has been achieved by the
learner.

Congruence of Objective and Test: Validity

The objective-referenced orientation to assessment greatly simplifies

the concept
of validity performance measurement. This approach to assessment results in a
in
direct rather than an indirect measure of the objective. Thus, it eliminates the
need to relate the measures obtained to a criterion by means of a correlation
coefficient, asmust usually be done when indirect measures are used or when
tests have been constructed without reference to any explicit performance
objectives. Accordingly, one can address the matter of test validity by answering
this question: "Is the performance required during assessment the same per-
formance as that described in the objective?" If the answer is a clear yes, then the
test is valid. In practice, it is desirable for more than one person to make this
judgment and for consistency to be attained among these judges.
258 Principles of Instructional Design

Validity is ensured when the assessment procedure results in measurement of

the performance described in the objective. This occurs when the test and the
objective are congruent with each other. A caution may be interjected here,
however. This method of determining validity assumes that the statement of the
objective is itself valid, in the sense that it truly reflects the purposes of the topic
or lesson. The procedures described for defining objectives in Chapter 7 are
intended to ensure that this is the case. Nevertheless, there may be an additional
need to recheck the consistency of specific objectives and more broadly stated
purposes. Sometimes, inconsistencies become apparent when statements of
objectives are transformed into tests of student performance.
It should be recognized that the Word test is used here in a generic sense to
mean any procedure for assessing the performance described in an objective.
Thus, the use of this word can cover all forms of written and oral testing as well
as procedures for evaluating student products such as essays, musical pro-
ductions, constructed models, or works of art. We choose the term assessment
rather than the alternative achievement testing to refer to the measurement of
student performance. The latter term is often associated with norm- referenced
measurement, which will be the subject of a later discussion in this chapter. At
this point, however, test and assessment are used to refer to objective-referenced
performance measurement.
Some of the performance objectives given in Chapter 7 can be used to
illustrate how judgments about test validity may be made. Initially, we shall be
concerned primarily with two of the five parts of an objective statement, the two
verbs that describe the capability to be learned and the actions the student takes in
demonstrating this capability. Later on, other parts of the objective will be
related to performance assessment.
First, consider the example ofgenerating a letter by typing. The wordgenerate
is the clue that in the test situation the student must compose his own letter
rather than typing a different form of a letter composed by someone else. It is
clear that the learner must use his capability of generating a particular kind of
letter within the constraints of the situation described in the objective. In the
alternative objective relating to typing, the learner receives a written longhand
letter composed by someone These two objectives relating to business
else.

letters are very different. One requires only the skill of typing a letter already
composed, whereas the other requires also the problem-solving capability of
composing the letter. Thus, two domains (motor skills and intellectual skills) are
samples.
In a second example drawn from Chapter 7, the student must demonstrate the
use of a rule by supplying the missing factor in an equation. Simply copying the
missing value from a book or remembering the value from having seen the
problem worked before would not constitute a valid test for this capability. In
designing a test, care must be taken to use different examples for testing than
those used for teaching so as to minimize the chance that the correct response
can be supplied by any means other than the intended intellectual process.
 Assessing Student Performance 259

In anv example of demonstrating master)' of a concept, the learner may identify

the concept bv printing the of the concept (name) in a blank. This is
first letter

not the same as either copying the first letter or spelling the name of the concept.
It is also different from the performance of explaining how the concept may be

used. Anv or all of these latter instances mav be useful performances, but they do
not reflect the intent of the objective, either as to the capability required or the
action signifying that the capability is present.
Exercises on judging the validity of test items by comparing them with the
corresponding performance objectives are given bv Briggs and Wager (1981)
and by Dick and Carey (1985).

Designing the Test Situation

The form of performance objectives described in Chapter 7 serves as the basis

for the test situation. It will be recalled that the five components of an objective
statement are given as (1) situation, (2) learned capability, (3) object, (4) action,
and (5) tools and constraints. An objective statement also provides a description
of the situation to be used in testing.
For certain types of objectives and for learners who are not too young, the
change of only a few words may convert the objective statement to a test. For
example, one could give the objective on generating and typing a letter to the
learner as "directions for taking the test." All that would be needed in addition
would be to supply the "received letter" and to provide an electric typewriter,
typing paper, and carbon paper. The person administering the test would
further be instructed to ensure a favorable (monitored) environment and to
record and call "time." For the objective of demonstrating the procedure of
short division, about all the test administrator (teacher) would need to do would
be to supply a division expression in the form abcld and make clear where the
students were expected to write their answers.
It is clear, then, that the more closely objectives follow the outline given in
Chapter 7, the fewer decisions remain to be made in planning the test and the
fewer directions must be given to the student. Statements of objectives prepared
for the use of the instructional designer or teacher are also used to define most of
the test situation for the student. Of course, both objectives and test items
derived from them have to be presented in simpler terms for young children,
either for communicating to them the purpose of the lesson or for testing their
performance after the lesson is completed.

Some Cautions
In using objectives to plan tests, a few cautions should be noted. The more

incomplete the statements of objectives, the more these cautions mav be needed
because more must be "filled in" in moving from the objective to the test
situation.
260 Principles of Instructional Design

1 Avoid substituting verbs that change the meaning of either the capability or the
action described in the objective. When synonyms or more simple explanations
are needed to translate the objective into a test, these restatements must be
reviewed for agreement with the intent of the objective. Particular care should
be taken not to change from an answer the student must somehow construct or
develop for himself, to an answer he must merely choose, select, or recall. If an
objective says "generate a position and a defense for the position," he can only
do this orally or in writing —not by from a multiple-choice
selecting answers
test. Avoidance of ambiguity in "guessing at" what vague verbs mean in poorly

stated objectives can be achieved by using the standard verbs from Table 7-1.
But careful attention needs to be given to deciding upon unambiguous mean-
ings for verbs such as summarize, describe, list, analyze, and complete, except as
ing verbs denoting the particular action expected. Review of an objective in
these terms sometimes reveals that the objective itself needs to be changed. In
that case, it should be changed before planning the instruction and before using
the statement either as a lesson objective or as a part of the directions for a test.
2. Changes in other elements of the objective should be avoided, except when
needed to simplify directions for the student on how to take the test. That is,
unless a deliberate change is intended, the situation, the object, and the tools
and other constraints, as well as the two verbs denoting the capability and the
action, should be congruent between the objective and the test. It is possible
that changes might be so great as to make the test call for capabilities the
students have not yet been taught. In a "worst possible" mismatch between
objective and test, capabilities in different domains of learning outcomes might
be specified in the objective and in the test. In such a situation, if the teaching
were to be directed to an objective in still a third domain, there would be
maximum incongruence among the three anchor points. It might be revealing
to ask teachers or designers, on three separate occasions, to produce their
objectives, their examinations, and their lesson plans. It is conceivable that the

objectives might call for "appreciation" while the teaching contains "facts," and
the examination calls for the "use of concepts and rules."
3. Tests should not be made either easier or more difficult than the objectives.
These terms need not enter into testing of the objective-referenced variety. The
aim is one of accurately representing the objective rather than one of estimating
how to make tests sufficiently difficult.
4. The test should not try to achieve a large range in scores or a normal distribu-
tion of scores. The aim of such testing is not that of discriminating among the
students. That is to say, testing does not have the purpose of finding that one
student scores higher or lower than another. Rather, its purpose is to discover
which objectives both students have learned.

THE CONCEPT OF MASTERY

The introduction of the idea of mastery of learning outcomes (Bloom, 1968)

requires a change in viewpoint toward the conduct of instruction as well as
toward its assessment. In conventional instruction, both the teacher and the
 Assessing Student Performance 261

students expect that only a few students will learn so well as to receive an A in
the topic or course. The rest will either do fairly well, as represented by a C, for
example, or they will fail. When test scores are plotted as frequency' distribu-

tions, a normal curve is formed, and certain percentages of students are assigned
to various letter grades.
In commenting on the impact of this system of assessment, Bloom, Hastings,
and Madaus (1971, p. 43) observe that the expectations so established tend to
fix the academic goals of teachers and students at inappropriately low levels, thus
reducing both teacher and student motivation. The particular educational prac-
tice that produces these "group-paced" instruction, in which all stu-
effects is

dents must try to learn at the same rate and by the same mode of instruction.
When both pace and mode are fixed, the achievement of each student becomes
primarily a function of his aptitude. But if both mode and rate of instruction can
van among
r
learners, the chances are that more students can become successful
in their learning (Block and Anderson, 1975).
It is easier to set up means bv which the rate of learning is allowed to vary

among learners than it is to predict the mode of learning which will benefit each
student the most. And of course, there are economic and other limits one —
cannot provide a different mode for even' single student. Modularized, in-
dividualized instruction can largelv take care of the rate problem and, to some
extent (when alternative materials or modes are available), the problem of
learning style as well. The diagnostic features of individualized assessment also
make it possible to help a student redirect his efforts properly.
Masten learning means essentially that if
r
the proper conditions can be
provided, perhaps 90-95 percent of the students can actually master most
objectives to the degree now onlv reached by "good students." Thus, the
masten' learning concept abandons the idea that students merely learn more or
less well. Rather, an effort is made to find out why students fail to reach master}'
and to remedy the situation for such students. The resolution of a learning
problem by a student usually requires one of the following measures: (1) more
time for learning, (2) different media or materials, or (3) diagnosis to determine
what missing prerequisite knowledge or skills he must acquire to master the
objective. Within this context, the personal knowledge of the teacher can be
added to form decisions concerning students whose performance is exceptional
even when these methods have been fully utilized. The general aim implied by
the notion of mastery includes the resolution to provide materials and con-
ditions bv means of which most learners can be successful at most tasks, in a
program that is reasonable for each individual.

Determining Criteria for Mastery

How can it be known when a student has performed satisfactorily or attained

master}' on a test applicable to an}' particular objective? The student needs to be
told he was successful so that he can then move on to work toward achieving the
262 Principles of Instructional Design

next objective he chooses or has assigned to him. In case he has not been
successful in attaining the objective, the teacher needs to determine what reme-
dial instruction is needed.
A remedial decision for an objective in the intellectual skill domain can best be
made by administering a diagnostic test over the capabilities subordinate to the
objective. In other instances, the teacher may use oral testing methods to find
out where in the teaching sequence the failure to learn first began. When
instruction is individualized, the individual lessons often include such diagnostic
testson subordinate capabilities. For a known slow learner, such diagnostic tests
of subordinate competencies may be used as assessments of performance so that
the learner is known to have mastered each capability before he goes on to the
next. This procedure detects small failures before they accumulate into large
failures of entire lessons, topics, or courses. Certainly, consistent use of frequent
testing could often prevent the year-after-year failures or, at least, alert the
school earlier to a need to reappraise the program for a particular student.
When mastery is on an objective, this
defined for a test assessing performance
also defines the criterionof success for that objective. The first step is to define
how well the learner must perform on the test to indicate success of that
objective. Then, a record is made of bow many students have reached the
criterion (mastery). This makes it possible to decide whether the instruction for
that objective has reached its design objective. Later, at the end of an entire
course, the percentage of students who reached the criterion of mastery of all the
objectives (or any specified percentage of the objectives) can be computed.
From such data, one can determine whether the course design criterion has been
met. A frequently used course design criterion is that 90 percent of the students
achieve mastery of 90 percent of the objectives, but other percentages than these
may, of course, be used. Sometimes, three design criteria are set, with one
indicating minimal acceptable success, and the others representing higher de-
grees of success. In general, this means of representing course design criteria can
be used to give accountability for the performance of students following in-
struction.
The administration of tests applicable to course objectives and the definition
of mastery each objective provide the means for evaluating both the
level for
course and the performance of individual students. Thus, students can be
itself

promoted on the basis of such tests, and the test results can be used in the
formative evaluation of the course, showing where revisions are needed, if any
(see Chapter 16). This built-in capability for course improvement is compatible
not only with fair promotion standards for students, but also with the in-
dividualization of instruction and with the development and evaluation of entire
instructional systems.
Although the action of defining master)' on each objective, when objective-
referenced tests are employed, intended primarily for the purpose of monitor-
is

ing student progress and for discovering how successful the course is, data from
the same tests can be used for assigning grades when that is required by the
school.
 Assessing Student Performance 263

CRITERIA FOR OBJECTIVE-REFERENCED ASSESSMENT

The question to be addressed next concerns the matter of deciding upon criteria
of mastery for each kind of learning objective. Typical procedures for each
domain of learning outcomes are described in the following section. More
extensively described procedures for criterion-referenced testing may be found
in Berk (1984).

Intellectual Skill Objectives

Problem Solving

As an illustration of criteria for assessing performance for this type of learning

outcome, we begin with an objective for the acquisition of a capability in
problem solving, briefly described in Table 7-1. The statement of this objective is
"generates, by synthesizing applicable rules, a paragraph describing a person's
actions in a situation of fear."
To score such a paragraph as acceptable, a list of features the paragraph
should include would be prepared. For this kind of objective, no verbatim key is
possible, and mechanical scoring does not appear to be feasible. Since no
grammatical requirements are included in this abbreviated statement of the
objective, it may be assumed that an adequate description need not be error free
in grammar and punctuation. If several teachers are using the same objective,
they might work together to define assessment criteria and to agree upon how
many actions must be described and what aspects of fear are to be included. The
minimum number of rules to be synthesized in the solution could be agreed
upon, with the application of some rules being mandatory and others optional.
The test for a problem-solving objective is not to be based on a judgment such
as "8 out of 10 questions correct." The criteria to be employed may be both
qualitative and quantitative in nature. Whatever the checklist for scoring may
contain, its application will require judgment, not a clerical checking of answers
with an answer key. Consequently, degree of agreement among teachers in
applying the checklist to determine acceptable or unacceptable paragraphs is a
relevant factor in determining the reliability of the measure of performance
obtained. The criteria employed for judging such a performance might be (1)
bodily reaction, and (3)
facial expression, (2) two statements of rules governing
emotional expression in behavior.

Rule Learning

For the learning of a rule, the example given in Table 7-1 is "demonstrates, by
solving verbally stated examples, the addition of positive and negative num-
bers." To examine the matter of performance criteria more exactly, one needs to
264 Principles of Instructional Design

begin with an expanded version of this objective: "Given verbally stated ex-
amples involving physical variables that vary over a range of positive and
negative values, demonstrates the addition of these values by writing appropri-
ate mathematical expressions yielding their sum." Obviously, this more com-
plete statement adds to the specification of the situation and, therefore, to the
adequate formulation of a test item. Such an item, for example, might say, 'The
temperature in Greenland on one day was 17°C during the dav and decreased by
57° during the night. What was the nighttime temperature?"
Thus, the situation part of the objective statement defines the class of situa-
tions from which particular test items are to be drawn. Suppose the objective is
"Given a verbal statement defining values of length and width of a rectangularly
shaped face of an object, the student finds the area of the face." From such a
statement, an item such as the following could readilv be derived: "A box top is
120 cm in length and 47 cm in width; what is its area?" It may be noted that the
statement of the objective in this case implies that the performance will be
ensured in a situation including a verbal statement of the problem. A different
statement beginning "Given a diagram of a rectangle with values of length and
width indicated ." would, of course, imply a different form of test item.
. .

A remaining decision pertaining to the criterion of performance measurement

has to do with the question of how many items to employ. Obviously, the aim is
to achieve a genuine measurement of "mastered" versus "not mastered." It may
need to be determined empirically how many items must be used in order to
make such a decision correcdv. By convention, 10 or 20 items might be
considered necessary as a number of examples for a test of the learning of an
arithmetic rule. However, Lathrop (1983) has shown that, by using some
reasonable assumptions of sequential analysis (Wald, 1947), decisions about
mastery and nonmastery can be made on the basis of a sequence of as few as
three correct items. The aim in using multiple examples is primarily one of
avoiding errors of measurement, which may arise because of one or more
undesirable idiosyncratic features of a single item. Additional procedures for
determining desirable test length are described in the book edited by Berk
(1984).

Defined Concepts

To derive an illustration of performance criteria for the measurement of a defined

concept, the following example of an objective may be used: "Given a picture of
an observer on the Earth and the skv above, classifies the zenith as the point in
the sky vertically above the observer." Again, it is apparent that the situation
described in this statement mav be directly represented in the form of a test item.
For example, such an item might first depict (in labeled diagram) the Earth, the
sky,and an observer standing on the Earth. Going on, it could say: "Show by an
angular diagram the location of the zenith." For an answer, the student would
draw a vertical line pointing from the observer to the sky, indicate that it made a
 Assessing Student Performance 265

90° angle with the Earth's surface point at which the observer was located,
at the

and label the point in the sky to which the line was directed as the zenith.
An item of this type would not be highly dependent on the verbal abilities of
the student and might be a desirable form of measurement for that reason.
^Alternatively, providing you could assume the student's verbal facility, an item
might be based upon a differently stated objective, as follows: "Asked to define,
classifies zenith as the point in the sky vertically (or 90° to the surface) above an

observer on the Earth by stating a definition orally." It is evident that measure-

ment in this case is subject to distortion. Unless one is entirely convinced that
the student has mastered the subordinate concepts (Earth, sky, observer, 90°),
the resulting response of the student may have to be interpreted as a memorized
verbalization. Nevertheless, noteworthy that verbal statements (preferably
it is

in the learner's own words) are often employed as criteria for assessment of
defined concepts.

Concrete Concepts

The assessment of concrete concept learning involves the construction of items

from an objective statement like the following: "Given five common
and plants
asked to name the major parts, identifies for each the root, leaf, and stem by
pointing to each while naming it." For such an assessment to be made, the
student would be provided with five plants laid out on the table and, in response
to the teacher's question, would point to and name the root, leaf, and stem for
each plant. Of course, an objective with a somewhat different statement of the
situation would lead to a corresponding difference in the test item. For example,
the objective statement: "Given pictures of five common plants, identifies the
root, leaf, and stem of each by placing labels bearing these names opposite the
appropriate part," implies a specifically different kind of test item. Whereas the
example assumes only that the oral responses root, leaf, and stem can be made
without error, the latter example requires the assumption that the labels contain-
ing these words can be read.
A simple example of assessment for concrete concept is provided by the task
of identifying a common geometrical shape, as it may occur in an early grade.
The objective statement might read: "Given a set of common geometrical shapes
and the oral directions 'show me the circles,' identifies the circles by pointing."
From this statement, an assessment item may be derived that involves giving the
student a piece of paper on which figures such as the following appear:

ODAOODonOAo
Upon being given the oral directions, "Point to each one that is a circle," the
student would make the appropriate response to each circular figure and not to
other figures in order to be counted as having attained the concept.
266 Principles of Instructional Design

Discrimination

Assessing discrimination requires the presentation of stimuli to which the

learner responds in a way
that indicates same or different. The example in Table
7-1 is by matching the French sounds of u and ou."To represent
"discriminates,
this objective as a test item, it would be necessary to present the sounds of a
number of French syllables or words containing these vowels (as in rue and
roux) and ask for an indication of same or different by the student.
An example of visual discrimination would be provided by items that pre-
sented figures such as the following to be matched to the model:

Model:

The directions for an item of this sort would be "Circle the figure or figures that
match the model." It may be noted that discrimination tasks are purely per-
ceptual; they do not require that the learner name the stimulus or identify its

attributes. What is assessed is simply perceiving a difference or no difference.

Cognitive Strategies

In contrast to the techniques of assessment for intellectual skills, the indicators

of cognitive strategies are somewhat indirect and often require a longer chain of
inference. For example, if the strategy of Table 7-1, "adopts the imagining of a
U.S. map to recall the names of the states," is employed, the observed perfor-
mance will be a list of the states. However, such a list could be given by a learner
who used quite a different cognitive strategy, possibly one that was less efficient

(such as a strategy of reporting the states systematically by the beginning letters

of their names). Thus, the performance by itself fails to indicate the adoption
and use of a particular strategy. Assessment of the imaging strategy would
require the additional observations that the states were named in a sequence
indicating regional locations and also that this strategy yielded an efficient
performance.
Several different strategies of solving geometric problems involving relations
between angles of a complex figure were studied by Greeno (1978; see also,
Gagne, 1985, pp. 143-145). Here, too, the strategies could not be revealed
simply by the successful solution of the geometric problem. Instead, they were
indicated by verbal reports of the students themselves, who were asked to "think
aloud" while working on the problem.
Although it would seem desirable to extend the notion of mastery learning to
all domains of instructional objectives, its application to the measurement of

cognitive strategies cannot readily be achieved. Whether the strategies we deal

with are those that primarily control the processes of attending, encoding,
 Assessing Student Performance 267

retrieving, or problem solving, it is apparent that the quality of the mental

process is being assessed and not simply its presence or absence. Sometimes,
novel problems have many solutions rather than a single solution. In such
instances, cognitive strategies will have been used by the student in achieving
the solution, whatever it may be. Accordingly, assessment becomes a matter of
i
judging how good the solution is, and it is unlikely that a "pass-fail" decision
will be made.
It is noteworthy that standards of originality and inventiveness are applied to

the assessment of such student products as theses and dissertations in university

undergraduate and graduate education. Besides being thorough and technically
sound, a doctoral dissertation is expected to make "an original discover)' or
contribution" to a field of systematic knowledge. Exact criteria or dimensions
for judging this quality are typically not specified. Varying numbers of pro-
fessionally qualified people usually arrive at a consensus concerning the degree
of originality exhibited by a dissertation study and its acceptability as a novel
contribution to an area of knowledge or art.

Productive Thinking

The measurement of productive thinking, and by inference the cognitive strat-

egies that underlie such thinking, has been investigated by Johnson and Kidder
(1972) in undergraduate psychology classes. Students were asked to invent
novel hypotheses, questions, and answers in response to problem statements
which go beyond the information obtained from lectures and textbooks. The
problems employed included (1) predicting the consequences of an unusual
psychological event, (2) writing an imaginative sentence incorporating several
newly learned (specified) concepts, (3) stating a novel hypothesis related to a
described situation, (4) writing a tide for a table containing behavorial data, and
(5) drawing conclusions from a table or graph. When items such as these were
combined into tests containing 10 to 15 items, reasonably adequate reliabilities
of originality scores were obtained. Quality was judged by two raters whose
judgments were found to agree highly after a short period of training.
Assessments of originality can presumably be made of students' answers,
compositions, and projects at precollege levels. In fact, such judgments are often
made by of
teachers incidentally, or at any rate informally, concerning a variety
projects and problems undertaken bv students in schools. It seems evident that
systematic methods of assessment can be applied to cognitive strategies at these
lower levels of the educational ladder, although this has not as yet been done.
It should be pointed out that the assessment of cognitive strategies or the

originality of thought as an outcome of learning does not necessarily have the

same aim nor use the same methods as those employed in the measurement of
creativity as a trait. Creativity has been extensively studied in this latter sense
(Torrance, 1963; Guilford, 1967; Johnson, 1972), and the findings go far
beyond the scope of the present discussion. When assessment of the quality of
268 Principles of Instructional Design

thought is to be undertaken as a learning outcome, two main characteristics

must be sought. First, the problem (or project) that is set for the student must
require the utilization of knowledge, concepts, and rules that have been recently
learned by the student rather than calling upon instances of skills and informa-
tion that may have been acquired an indeterminate number of years previously.
Second, it must be either assumed or, preferably, shown that students have in
fact learned relevant prerequisite information and skills before the assessment of
originality is undertaken. This condition is necessary to ensure that all students
have the same opportunity to be original and their solutions are not handi-
capped by the absence of necessarv knowledge and intellectual skills.

Verbal Information

In this domain, the concept of master;' must be related to a predetermined set of

facts, generalizations, or ideas, an acceptable number of which the student can
state in acceptable form or degree of completeness and accuracy. The con-
ventional norm-referenced measurement is often closely related to assessment of
information. The fundamental distinction to be held in mind, however, is that
of objective- versus content-referenced measurement. The aim of assessment is to
determine whether certain objectives have been attained rather than to discover
whether some content has been covered.
Objective-referenced assessment may be achieved for the information domain
of learning outcomes by specifying what information is to be learned as a
minimum standard of performance. Objectives pertaining to information
should state clearly which and generalizations should be learned.
names, facts,

They thus of information to be recalled from the

differentiate the core content
incidental information that may be in the book and that some students may be
able to recall but that represents learning bevond the required level.
It would be make the objectives in the information domain so
a mistake to
exhaustive as to leave no time for objectives in other domains. Instead, one
should deliberately seek out and identify those informational outcomes that are
likely to contribute most to the attainment of objectives in other domains.
Although masses of information should be acquired over years by the well-
educated person, this goal should not be allowed to interfere with the attain-
ment of objectives in the areas of intellectual skills and problem-solving strat-
egies.
Typically, assessing the learning of verbal information means measuring
quantity (Gagne and Beard, 1978). The intention is to assesshow much the
knows about some particular historical event or era or about a natural
student
phenomenon like earthquakes. How much do students know about the varieties
of oak trees or about the cutting of logs into lumber? Answers to quantity
questions come from items selected from a domain that is more or less well
defined. It may be as precisely defined as a specific longer prose passage. Or it
may be more loosely defined as the declarative knowledge a student is expected
to learn from lectures, text, and other references available on a particular subject.
 Assessing Student Performance 269

A of methods have been proposed for the analysis of prose texts

variety
displaying verbal knowledge (Britton and Black, 1985). Some of these pro-
posals suggest the possibility that the quality of knowledge can be assessed as a
learning outcome. It is possible that some kinds of memory organization
resulting from learning represent "deeper understanding" of verbal information.
Mt is, of course, possible to distinguish main ideas from subordinate ideas by the
use of these methods. But the fuller meaning of quality or depth of knowledge
remains to be shown by research and theoretical development before measures
of this aspect of verbal information can be developed.

Examples of Verbal Information Items

Some typical items for assessment of verbal information are:

1. Describe at least three of the causes of the American Revolution, as discussed in

the textbook.
2. State the chemical name for the following substances: baking soda, blue vitriol,
chalk . . .

3. Write a paragraph summarizing how a president is elected when the electoral

college fails to elect.
4. Name any 15 of these 20 animals from their pictures.
5. What is guaranteed by the Fourth Amendment to the U.S. Constitution?
6. Read this report, and write a summary of the four main themes developed in
the report.

As these examples indicate, objective-referenced testing of information re-

quires the exact identification of what informationis to be learned and retained.

If the listingof names or dates is to be acquired, this should be made clear.

Alternativelv, if the substance of a passage is to be recounted, this objective
should be made equally apparent to the student. These procedures make learn-
ing for mastery feasible as well as fair and reasonable.

Attitudes

As Chapter 5 has indicated, attitudes vary in the intensity with which they
influence the choice of personal actions. Since the strength of attitudes is what

one wishes to assess, it is evident that mastery cannot be identified. The

assessment of strength of an attitude toward or against a class of choices of
action may be obtained in terms of the proportion of times the person behaves
in a given way in a sample of defined situations. For example, attitude toward
using public transportation might be assessed by observing the likelihood of a
student's choosing various forms of public (rather than private) transportation
in the various situations in which such choices aremade. The observed incidents
would be the basis for inferring the degree to which the person tends to use or
not to use public conveyances.
In assessing an attitude such as "concern for others," it is evident that no
270 Principles of Instructional Design

pass-fail criterion of master}' can be set. However, a teacher might adopt the
objective that all her second-grade pupils will improve in this attitude during a
year's period. In addition, it would be possible to adopt the standard that each
child will exhibit concern for others, either in verbal expression or overt actions,
more times per month in May than during the previous October. Anecdotal
records may be kept recording such actions, and reports of "improvement" or
"nonimprovement" may be made at the end of the school year. Such reports can
be quantified in terms of number of positive actions and in terms of proportion
of positive-to-total (positive plus negative) actions. Behaviors representing
neither kind of action would simply not be recorded, in recognition of the fact
that some of the child's time is spent in stud}' periods offering little opportunity
for behaving either way toward other people.
Attitudes are often measured by obtaining self-reports of the likelihood of
actions as opposed to direct observations of the actions themselves. As is well
known, the most serious limitation in the use of questionnaires for this purpose
is the possibility of bias resulting from the students' attempts to answer ques-

tions so as to win approval rather than reflecting their choices accurately. There
appears to be no simple solution to the problem of obtaining truly accurate
information from self-reports, although many investigations have been carried
out for this purpose (cf. Fishbein, 1967). Best results appear to be achieved
when students are first assured that the assessment being done
is not intended as

an adversary process; that is, that the}' need not report only what will (they
think) be approved. When questionnaires are administered to groups, the
additional precaution is frequently taken to ensure that responses are anony-
mously recorded.
As previously indicated, attitudes are best conceived and measured as a
consistency in choices of personal action toward some class of object, persons, or
events (Chapter 5; see also Gagne, 1985). A domain of assessment items that
defines these choices may be carefully specified along several dimensions (Trian-
dis, 1964). For example, in assessing the choices made by whites in accepting
"social contact with Negroes," items were chosen from a domain that included
the dimension of sociopersonal characteristics of Negroes (occupation, age, and
so on). Of course, the specific content of the Triandis instrument reflects the
prevailing values of an earlier age. But the method, or a variant of it, can

presumably be used to define a set of choices of personal action that make

possible an acceptable quality of objective-referenced scores for attitudes.

Motor Skills

Motor skills many years been evaluated by comparison with standards,

have for
as in the caseof handwriting. Many years ago, a familiar device in the elementary
school room was the Palmer Scale for grading handwriting. A sample of the
student's writing was compared with ideal samples on a chart containing various
degrees of "correct" penmanship, each having a numerical value such as 90, 80,
 Assessing Student Performance 271

70, and so on, indicating the standard for each level of skill in writing. This was
a criterion-referenced form of grading, in that standards were stable and teachers
could say that 60 was "passing" at the third grade, 70 at the fourth grade, and so
on.
. The standards for assessment of motor skills usually refer to the precision of the
performance but often also to its speed. Since motor skills are known to improve
in either or both of these qualities with extended practice, it is unrealistic to
expect that mastery can be defined in the sense of learned or not learned.
Accordingly, a standard of performance must be decided upon in order to
determine whether master}' has been achieved.
Typing skill provides a good example of assessment methods in this domain.
A number of different standards of performance are set at progressively higher
levels for practice that has extended over increasingly long periods of time.
Thus, a test standard of 30 words per minute with a specified minimum
numbers of errors may be adopted as a reasonable standard in a beginning
course, whereas 40 or 50 words per minute may be expected for an advanced
course after more time has been given for additional practice.

Reliability of Objective-Referenced Measures

Choosing criteria for items and tests designed to accomplish objective-
referenced measurement requires the selection of standards of performance
appropriate to the stated objective, as the preceding discussion has shown. In
addition, the items employed for assessment need to yield measurement that is

dependable. This latter feature of the assessment procedure is referred to as

reliability, and it has two primary meanings.

Consistency-

First, reliability is consistency of measurement. It is necessary to determine that

the student's performance in answering or completing one particular item
designed to assess his performance on an objective is consistent with his per-
formance on other items aimed at the same objective. A pupil in the second
grade may be asked by one item to demonstrate his mastery of an arithmetic rule
by means of the item: 3M + 2M = 25; M
= ? Obviously, the purpose of
assessment is to discover whether he is able to perform a class of arithmetic
operations of this type, not simply whether he is able to do this single one.
Accordingly, additional items belonging to the same class (for example: AM +
ZM — 21; SM + \M = 36) are typically employed in order to ensure the
dependability of the measurement.
In informal testing situations, as when the teacher probes by asking questions
of one student after another, single items may be employed to assess perfor-
mance. However, it is evident that no measure of consistency is available in such
situations. On any single item, a student may make a successful response because
272 Principles of Instructional Design

he happens to have seen and memorized an "answer." Alternatively, his response

may be incorrect because he has inadvertently been misled by some particular
characteristic of the item. The single item does not make possible a confident
conclusion that the student has mastered the performance implied by the
objective.
In those instances in which the class of performances represented by the
objectiveis well defined (as in the arithmetic example previously given), the

procedure of selecting additional assessment items of the same class is fairly

straightforward. It is essential to bear in mind that the conclusion aimed for is

not "how many items are correct?" but rather "does the number correct depend-
ably indicate mastery?" Although two items are obviously better than one, they
may yield the puzzling outcome, half right-half wrong. Does this mean that the
student has attained mastery, or does it mean he got one item right only because
he somehow managed to memorize an answer? Three items would seem to
provide a better means of making a reliable decision about mastery. In this case,
two out of three correctly answered leads to a certain confidence that reliability
of measurement has been achieved. More items can readily be employed, but
three seems a reasonable minimum on which to base a reliable assessment of
master)'.
When cognitive strategies are the aim of assessment, the item selected for the
purpose of assessment may actually be a rather lengthy problem-solving task.
For example, such a task might be to 'Svrite a 300-word theme on a student-
selected topic, within one hour." Assessing performance consistently may re-
quire several items since it is necessary to disentangle the prior learning of
information and intellectual from the quality of original thought. A
skills

number of on which the student can display the

occasions must be provided
quality of his performance within this domain of learning outcome. The aim is
to make it unlikely that a student could meet the criteria set for such tasks
without possessing a genuine, generalizable capability of writing original
themes on other topics.

Temporal Dependability

The second meaning of reliability is dependability of the measurement on

temporally separated occasions. One wishes to be assured that the student's
demonstration of mastery of the objective as assessed on Monday is not different
from what it would be on Tuesday or on some other day. Is his performance an
ephemeral thing, or does have the degree of permanence one expects of a
it

learned capability? Has his performance, good or bad, been determined largely
by how he felt that day, by a temporary illness, or by some adventitious feature
of the testing situation?
Reliability of measurement in this second meaning is usually determined by a
second testing separated from the first by a time interval of days or weeks. This
is the test-retest method, in which good reliability of the tests is indicated by a
 Assessing Student Performance 273

high degree of correspondence between scores obtained by a group of students

on the two occasions. Often, this procedure is used in the formative evaluation
of the test, but it ma}' also be employed in practical assessment to determine
whether what has been learned has a reasonable degree of stability.

I
NORM-REFERENCED MEASURES

Tests designed to yield scores that compare each student's performance with
that of a group or with a norm established by group scores are called norm
referenced. Characteristicallv, such tests are used to obtain assessments of student
achievement over relatively large segments of instructional content, such as
topics or course. They differ from objective-referenced tests in that they typically
measure performance on a mixture of objectives rather than being confined to
assessment of single, clearly identifiable objectives. Thus, a norm- referenced test
is more likely to have the purpose of assessing "reading comprehension" than it

is to measure the attainment of the individual skills involved in reading, consid-

ered as specific objectives.

Because of this characteristic of comprehensive coverage, norm- referenced
tests are most useful for summative kinds of assessment and evaluation (see
Chapter 16). They provide answers to such questions as "How much American
history does a student know (compared to others at his grade level)?" "How
well is the student able to reason using the operations of arithmetic?" "What
proficiency does the student have in using grammatical rules?" Obviously, such
assessment is most appropriate when applied to instruction extending over
reasonably long periods of time, as in midcourse or end-of-course examinations.
At the same time, the characteristics of norm-referenced measures imply some
obvious limitations compared with objective-referenced tests. Since their items
usually represent a mixture of objectives, often impossible to identify singly,
they cannot readily be used for the purpose of diagnostic testing of prerequisite
skillsand knowledge. For a similar reason, norm-referenced tests typically do
not provide direct and unambiguous measures of what has been learned, when
the latter is conceived as one or more defined objectives.
Often a norm- referenced test presents questions and tasks that require the
student at one and the same time to utilize learned capabilities of intellectual
skills, information, and cognitive strategies. In so doing, they make possible
assessments of student capabilities that are "global" rather than specific to
For this reason, they are particularly appropriate for
identifiable objectives.
assessingoutcomes of learning in a set of topics or in a total course. Since the
scores obtained are also representative of a group (a single class or a larger
"referenced" group such as 10-year-old children), the score made by each
student may conveniendy be compared with those of others in the group.
Percentile scores are often used for this purpose; the score of a student may be
expressed, for example, as "falling in the 63rd percentile."
274 Principles of Instructional Design

Teacher-Made Tests
Tests constructed by teachers are sometimes of the norm-referenced variety. The
teacher may be interested in learning how well students have learned the content
of a course, which may represent a number of different objectives and several
categories of learning outcome. Midcourse and end-of-course examinations
often have this characteristic of mixed purposes of assessment. These may also
be conceived as being aimed at testing the student's integration of the various
skills and knowledge he is expected to have learned.

At the same time, a norm-referenced test makes possible the comparison of

students' performances within a group or with a referenced group (such as last
year's class). Often, such tests are refined over periods of years, using methods of
item analysis to select the most "discriminating" items (cf Hills, 1981; Payne,
—
1968). This means that items that do not discriminate those that many stu-
—
dents answer correcdy and those that few answer correctiy are progressively
discarded. Tests refined in this manner tend increasingly to measure problem-
solving and other cognitive strategies. They may also, in part, measure in-
telligence, rather than what has been directly learned. Although this may be a
legitimate intention when the aim is to assess the total effects of a course of
study, it is evident that this quality of norm-referenced tests makes them very
different from objective-referenced tests.
When assessment is aimed at the outcomes of individual lessons or parts of
lessons, little justification can be seen for the use of norm-referenced tests. When
such tests are used to assess student performance resulting from the learning of
defined objectives, they are likely to miss the point of assessment entirely. When
instruction has been designed so as to ensure the attainment of objectives, tests
should be derived directly from the definition of the objectives themselves, as
indicated in the earlier portion of this chapter. Unless objective-referenced tests
are used for this purpose, two important purposes of assessment will likely be
neglected: (1) the assessment of mastery of the specific capabilities learned, and
(2) the possibility of diagnostic help for students in overcoming particular
learning deficiencies by retrieving missing prerequisite skills and knowledge.

Standardized Tests

Norm-referenced tests intended for broad usage among many schools within a
school system, a region, or in the nation as a whole may have norms that are
standardized. This means that the tests have been given to large samples of
students in specified age (or grade) groups and that the resulting distributions
of scores obtained become the standards to which the scores of any given
student or class of students may be compared. Sometimes, the standard norms
are expressed as percentiles, indicating what percentage of the large sample of
students attained or fell below particular scores. Often, too, such standards are
expressed as grade-equivalent scores, indicating the scores attained by all chil-
 Assessing Student Performance 275

dren in the group who were in the first grade, the second grade, and so on.
Procedures used in the development and validation of standardized tests are
described in manv books on this subject (cf. Cronbach, 1984; Thorndike and
Hagen, 1986; Tyler, 1971).
Standardized tests are generally norm- referenced tests; the development of
* objective- referenced tests has not vet proceeded to the point of availability for a
variety of objectives and for a variety of levels of instruction. Accordingly,
standardized tests typicallv exhibit the characteristics previously described. They
are usuallymixed in their measurement of particular objectives since their items
have not been directlv derived from such objectives. Their items are selected to
produce the largest possible variation in scores among students, and thus, their
scores tend to be rather highly correlated with intelligence rather than with
particular learning outcomes. With a few exceptions, they fail to provide the
identification of missing subordinate capabilities that is essential to diagnostic
aims.
Obviously, then, standardized tests are quite inappropriate for use in the
detailed assessment of learning outcomes from lessons having specifiable objec-
tives. Their most frequent and most appropriate use is for the purpose of

summative evaluation of total courses of several years of instruction. When

employed for these purposes, standardized tests can provide valuable informa-
tion about the long-term effects of courses and of larger instructional programs.

SUMMARY
Up to this point, we have been concerned primarily with goals and performance
objectives, with the domains of learning they represent, and with the design of
lessons that employinstructional events and conditions of learning suitable for
the chosen objectives. In this chapter, we turn our attention to the assessment of
student performance on the objectives. Thus, we proceed from the what and the
how to the how well aspect of learning.
For the purpose of assessing student performance on the planned objectives
of a course, objective-referenced tests employing a criterion-referenced interpretation
constitute the most suitable procedure. Such tests serve several important pur-
poses:

1. They show whether each student has mastered an objective and, hence, mav go
on to study for another objective.
2. They permit early detection and diagnosis of failure to learn, thus helping to
identify the remedial study needed.
3. They provide data for making improvements in the instruction itself.
4. They are fair evaluations in that thev measure performance on the objective that
was given to the student as an indication of what he was supposed to learn. This
kind of testing is consistent with the honestv of the relation of teacher to
learner.
276 Principles of Instructional Design

Objective-referenced tests are direct rather than indirect measures of perfor-

mance on the objectives. They deal with each objective separately rather than
with very large units of instruction, such as an entire year of study. For this
reason, they have diagnostic value as well as value for formative evaluation of the
course.
The validity of objective-referenced tests is found by determining the con-
gruence of test with objective. Reliability is obtained by measuring the con-
sistency of the performance assessment and its dependability over time. The
concept of mastery is relevant for objective-referenced tests in the domains of
intellectual skills, motor skills, and information. For these types of learning
outcomes, mastery levels can be defined as error-free performances. In the case
of cognitive strategies and attitudes, since assessments deal with how well or how
much, the use of criteria of mastery is less clearly applicable. Examples are given
of how criteria of performances can be chosen for each learning domain.
Another type of test is called norm-referenced. Such tests do not measure
separate, specific objectives of the course. Rather, they measure mixtures or
composite sets of objectives, whether these are identified or not. When a
norm- referenced test is a standardized test, it has been carefully designed and
revised to yield high variability of scores. The interpretation of the scores is
made by reference to norms, which represent performance on the test for large
groups of learners. Such tests permit comparison of a score of one pupil with
that of others; they also permit comparing the average score for a group with
the scores of a larger norm group.

References

Berk, R. A. (Ed.). (1984). Aguide to criterion-referenced test construction. Baltimore, MD:

Johns Hopkins University Press.
Block, J. H., &
Anderson, L. W. (1975). Mastery learning in classroom instruction. New
York: Macmillan.
Bloom, B. S. (1968). Learning for master)'. Evaluation Comment, 1(2), 1-5.
Bloom, B. S., Hastings, J. T., &
Madaus, G. F. (1971). Handbook on formative and
summative evaluation of student learning. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Briggs, L. J., &
Wager, W. W. (1981). Handbook ofprocedures for the design of instruction
(2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publications.
Britton, B. K., & Black, J. B. (1985). Understanding expository text. Hillsdale, NJ:
Earlbaum.
Cronbach, L. J. (1984). Essentials ofpsychological testing (4th ed.). New York: Harper &
Row.
Dick, W., &Carey, L. (1985). The systematic design ofinstruction (2nded.). Glenview, IL:
Scott, Foresman.
Fishbein, M. A. (Ed.). (1967). Attitude theory and measurement. New York: Wiley.
Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions of learning (4th ed.). New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Winston.
 Assessing Student Performance 277

Gagne, R. M, &
Beard, J. G. (1978). Assessment of learning outcomes. In R. Glaser
(Ed.), Advances in instructional psychology (Vol. 1). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Greeno, J. G. (1978). A study of problem solving. In R. Glaser (Ed.), Advances in
instructional psychology (Vol. 1). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Guilford, J. P. (1967). The nature of human intelligence. New York: McGraw-Hill.
^ Hills, J. R. (1981) Measurement and evaluation in the classroom. Columbus, OH: Merrill.
.

Johnson, D. M. (1972). A systematic introduction to the psychology of thinking. New York:

Harper & Row.
Johnson, D. M., & Kidder, R. C. (1972). Productive thinking in psychology classes.
American Psychologist, 27, 672-674.
Lathrop, R. L. (1983). The number of performance assessments necessary to determine
competence. Journal of Instructional Development, 6(3), 26-31.
Pavne, D. A. (1968). The specification and measurement of learning outcomes. Waltham,
MA: Blaisdell.
Popham, W. J. (1975). Educational evaluation. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Thorndike, R. L., & Hagen, E. (1986). Measurement and evaluation in psychology and
education. New York: Wiley.
Torrance, E. P. (1963). Education and the creative potential. Minneapolis: University of
Minnesota Press.
Triandis, H. C. (1964). Exploratorv factor analyses of the behavioral component of
social attitudes. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 68, 420-430.
Tvler, L. E. (1971). Tests and measurements (2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-
Hall.
Wald, A. (1947). Sequential analysis. New York: Wiley.
Part Four
Delivery Systems
for Instruction
 Group Instruction
14

assembled in
in
a
A
group.
great deal of instruction
When instruction is delivered
is

in this
done with learners
way, one has to bear
mind constandv that learning still occurs within individuals. Older learners,
to be sure, may attain a high degree of control over the management of
instructional events, to the extent that their learning depends on self- instruction.
For learners of whatever sort, the attempt is usually made in group instruction
to ensure that each instructional event is as effective as possible in supporting
learning by all members of the group
Groups assembled for instruction are of various sizes. The group sizes that
seem of particular significance for instructional design include, first, the two-
person group, which makes possible the tutoring mode of instruction. A second
commonly distinguished kind of group is simply the small group, containing
roughlv three to eight members, a size that favors discussion, as well as what may
be called interactive recitation. In this latter mode, the performances of in-
dividuals are affirmed or corrected by other members of the group. The third
kind of group is a large group, with 15 or more members. The most commonly
used mode of instruction in such a group is the lecture, which may of course
incorporate such other presentations as projected or televised pictures and
demonstrations. Another mode of instruction with large groups is individual
recitation, commonly used with such subjects as language, both native and

foreign, and sometimes with other subjects as well.

Although these three group sizes clearly appear to have different implications

281
282 Principles of Instructional Design

for instructional deliver}', the distinctions among them are not hard and fast.

What can be said, for example, of the group containing between eight and 15
members? Sometimes, instruction proceeds as with a small group (by discus-
sion, for example), but at other times, a large-group mode might be
(a lecture)
employed. Division into small groups is also possible. Considering the other
end of the scale of group size, one can distinguish a very large group (a hundred
or more students). In such cases, however, instructional factors differing from
those of the large group are likely to be logistic in character, pertaining to
seating arrangements, acoustics, and others of this general nature. Although
these factors have their own peculiar importance, we do not attempt to discuss
them here. Otherwise, large-group modes of instruction are assumed to be
relevant and applicable to groups mat are very large.

CHARACTERISTICS OF GROUP INSTRUCTION

How shall the instructional features of different kinds of instructional groups be

characterized? One way would be to describe in detail the various modes of
instruction, such as the lecture, the discussion class, the recitation class. These
various modes do indeed have different characteristics and vary in their feasibil-
ity of use with different sizes of groups. There are, however, variations in what is

done by the lecturer, in what happens during a discussion, and in what occurs in
a recitation class that appear to be of particular significance for an understanding
of the of instruction on learning. Systematic knowledge of several of
effects
these instructional modes is summarized in a volume edited by Gage (1976).
Rather than describing features of the different modes of instruction, our
approach in this chapter is to consider how such varieties of instruction can be
planned for delivery to different sizes of instructional groups the two- person —
group, the small group, and the large group. Our discussion is concerned with
questions of what instructional arrangements (including instructional modes)
are possible and are likely to be most effective with each of these types of groups.

Patterns of Interaction in Instructional Groups

The size of an instructional group is an important determinant of the environ-
ment in which learning occurs. Some patterns of interaction among teachers and
students are more readily attained with small groups, some with large. Owing to
differences in the way they are perceived by students, these patterns may
influence the outcomes of learning. Some classroom interaction patterns, similar
to those described by Walberg (1976), are depicted in Figure 14-1.
As the figure shows, communication between teacher and student flows in
both directions during instruction in a two-person group. When recitation is the
adopted mode, with either a small or a large group, mutual interaction occurs
between the teacher and one student at a time, while the other students are
 Group Instruction 283

TWO-PERSON GROUP SMALL OR LARGE GROUP

(Tutoring) (Recitation)

T< » S

SMALL GROUP
LARGE GROUP
(Interactive
recitation;
( Lecture)
Discussion)

FIGURE14-1 Some Patterns of Classroom Interaction in Groups of Various Sizes (Arrows Indicate the
Direction of Interactions)

recipients of a teacher communication. Interactive recitation and discussion

occur in a small group when there is interaction among students as well as
between teacher and student. In the lecture mode of instruction, used typically
with a large group, the communication flow is from teacher to students.

Variations in Instructional Events

Any or all of the events of instruction (Chapter 10) may be expected to vary
with group size, both in their form and in their feasibility of use. For example,
the event of gaining attention can obviously be rather precisely managed in a
two-person group, whereas it can only be loosely controlled for the individual
learners in a large group. Learning guidance, in a two-person group, is typically
under the control of the instructor (tutor), whereas the semantic encoding
suggested by a lecturer is likely to be modified in a number of individual ways by
the strategies available to individual learners. When feedback consists of in-
formation indicating correct or incorrect student answers, it can often be
controlled in a large group with about as much precision as that provided to a
single student. However, when the feedback includes information about the
causes of incorrect responding, it will vary with the individual student.
The primary factors that appear subject to variation in different typesof
instructional groups, then, are those pertaining to the events of instruction. The
size of group not only determines some of the necessary characteristics of these
events but also sets limits upon their effectiveness in supporting the processes of
284 Principles of Instructional Design

learning. It is these features of group instruction that we shall be considering in

the following sections.

Diagnosing Entry Capabilities of Students

Another factor of some importance in its influence on instructional effectiveness

is the assessment of entry capabilities of students (cf. Bloom, 1976). Procedures
for accomplishing such diagnosis are not instructional events themselves, but
they do make possible the design of certain of these events. The ways of
conducting diagnostic procedures are likely to van' with the size of the in-
structional group.
Entry capabilities of students may be assessed at the beginning of a course of
study or at the start of a semester or school year. Student capabilities may be
assessed in a finer sense, and weaknesses or gaps diagnosed just prior to the
beginning of each new topic of a course. Diagnosis of this latter sort is com-
monly done, for example, in the period devoted to teaching prereading skills to
children or at various stages of beginning reading. Other examples of the
application of fine-grained diagnostic procedures are sometimes seen in
mathematics and in foreign language study. Such diagnoses are likely to be most
successful if based upon learning hierarchies. Simple tests or probes can be
administered to students to reveal specific gaps in enabling skills. Diagnosis in
this form is not severely affected by group size since testing for gaps in enabling
skillscan usually be done as effectivelv with large groups as with small.
Designing and executing the instruction implied by diagnosis of entry
capabilities is, however, greatiy affected by the size of the instructional group.
This fact provides the basic rationale for instruction that is "individually pre-
scribed." The effects of group size on instruction are particularly critical when
the concern is with diagnosis relevant to each lesson or, in other words, with the
diagnosis of immediate prerequisites. Depending on what has happened previously
to prepare students for a particular lesson, a different individual pattern of
prerequisite capabilities mav conceivablv appear for each student in a group.
Thus, one might discover 20 different patterns of capability in enabling skills
within a group of 20 students. Such patterns of instructional needs may readily
be managed in a tutorial situation; in fact, this feature is often considered the
most prominent advantage of the tutoring mode. The same finding about
individual patterns of immediate prerequisites, however, presents a considerable
challenge to the teacher of a 20-person group, for example. Some further
implications of this circumstance will be discussed in a later section.

INSTRUCTION IN THE TWO-PERSON GROUP

Instructional groups of two persons consist of one student and one instructor or
tutor. Groups of this sort mav, however, be composed only of students, one of
 Group Instruction 285

whom assumes the tutoring role. In schools, the tutoring of younger students
by older ones is not an uncommon practice. However, peer tutoring has also
been successfully done, even in earlv grades (Gartner, Kohler, and Riessman,
1971). The alternation of student-tutor roles by pairs of older students or of
adults is sometimes chosen as a mode of instruction. Regarding any of these
possible arrangements, it is worthv to note the learning gains are about as
frequendy reported for tutors as the}' are for students (Ellson, 1976; Devin-
Sheehan, Feldman, and Allen, 1976; Sharan, 1980).
As noted in the previous chapter, svstems of individualized instruction are
usually designed so that diagnostic tests of student weaknesses (or gaps) will be
followed bv prescriptions of specific instruction designed to fill these gaps. In
such systems, teachers are essentially behaving as tutors when they follow up the
prescription with oral instruction. Individualized instruction, then, although it

frequendy calls upon the learner for self-instruction, often also involves tutoring
in a two-person group.

Events of Instruction in Tutoring

The group composed of a single student and a single tutor has long been
considered a kind of ideal situation for teaching and learning. The primarv
reason for this preference would appear to be the opportunities the two-person
group provides for the flexible adjustment of instructional events. Thus, the tutor
can employ just enough stimulation to gain the attention of the student or can
increase the amount if a first attempt fails. The tutor can suggest a number of
alternative schemes for the encoding of information to be learned; if one doesn't
work well, another can be employed. The student's comprehension of a new
idea and his storing of it can be assessed immediately, and again after a lapse of
time, in order to affirm its learning and to reinforce it.
Some of the main features that exemplify flexible adjustment of instructional
events for a two-person group may be described as follows:

1. Gaining attention: Assuming that the student participates willingly in the

tutorial situation, the gaining of attention (in the sense of alertness) may readily
be accomplished. The tutor may demand attention by giving a verbal direction
and watch for the overt signs that are typical of an attentive state. Obviously,
immediate adjustments of the stimulation necessarv to bring about attention
can be made if the student's attention wanders.
2. Informing the learner of the objective: In the case of this event, flexibility may
typically be achieved by repeating the objective in different terms or by demon-
strating an instance of the performance expected when the learning is com-
pleted. Of course, if the objective is already known by the student, an event
such as this may be entirely omitted.
3. Stimulating recall ofprerequisite learnings: The possibilitv of flexible determina-
tion of this event gives the tutoring mode a definite advantage in the support of
learning. Assuming that diagnosis of the previouslv learned prerequisites has
286

been made, the tutor can proceed to fill in the gaps of missing student
should that be necessarv. Being assured that prerequisites have
capabilities,
been acquired, the tutor can then proceed to require recall bv the student.
These acts of the tutor in making prerequisite skills accessible in the working
memory will do much to ensure that learning proceeds smoothlv.
4. Presenting the stimulus material: Here, too, there is a great flexibility of choice
available to the tutor. Selective perception may readilv be aided: The tutor can
give emphasis to lesson components by changes in oral delivery, bv pointing,
by drawing a picture, and in many other ways. If a foreign language is being
learned, for example, the tutor can choose just the right oral expression to
illustrate the grammatical rule to be taught. If varied instances are required, as
in the teaching of a new concept, the number and varied features of these
instances can be carefully chosen to meet the student's need, as indicated bv an
immediately preceding performance.
5. Providing learning guidance: This event is also one in which the flexibility of the
two-person situation results in an important advantage. In fact, it is in this
connection that the phrase "adapting instruction to the needs of the learner"
has its clearest meaning. The tutor can employ a variety of means to encourage
semantic encoding on the pan of the learner. Furthermore, the tutor can try such
means one after another, if necessary, until one is found that works best. Rule
applications can be demonstrated; pictures can be used to suggest visual im-
agery; organized information can be pro\ided as a meaningful context for the
learning of new knowledge. The tutoring mode offers manv opportunities for
the selection of effective communications by the tutor, all aimed at supporting
the learning processes of the student.
6. Eltating the performance: In the two- person group, learner performance can be
elicited with a degree of precision not possible in larger groups. On a moment-
to-moment basis, the tutor is by the learners behavior that
usually able to judge
the necessary internal processing has occurred and that the learner is ready to
show what he has learned.
7. Providing feedback: The provision of feedback is also capable of greater precision
in a two- person group than in other groups. Precision in this case pertains not
primarily to the timing of feedback but to the nature of the information given
to the learner. The learner can be told, with a high degree of accuracy, what is
right or wrong with his performance and given directions that permit correc-
tion of errors or inadequacies.
8. Assessing the performance: Flexibility in assessment is available to the tutor, in the
sense that the performance may be tested at various intervals following the
learning. The testing of learner performance may also be repeated as many
times as deemed necessary for a reliable decision to be made.
9. Enhancing retention and transfer: The management of this kind of event may be
done with considerable flexibility in a two-person group and. therefore, with a
good deal of precision. The tutor can select cues that, according to past
experience, work effectively to facilitate retrieval in a particular learner. Just
enough varied examples can be chosen to aid the transfer of learning. Spaced
reviews can be conducted to the extent needed to ensure long-term retention
for the particular student, based upon previous experience with that student in
the tutoring situation.
 Group Instruction 287

The Flow of Instruction in Tutoring

It is evident that the two-person instructional group permits maximal control of

instructional events bv the tutor. As the manager of instruction, the tutor can
decide which events to emplov, which to emphasize, and which to assign to the
learner's own The determination of timing for these events can operate
control.
to make each of learning optimally efficient. In addition, the flexibility of
act
choice of exactly how to select and arrange each event makes it possible for a
tutor to provide instruction meeting the needs of the individual student. In the
tutoring mode, instruction can most readily be adapted to the instructional
needs of each student.
In practice, tutoring has taken a variety of forms (Gartner, Kohler, and
Riessman, 1971). The advantages it appears to offer have often been shown to
yield favorable results in student achievement, although not always (Cloward,
1967; Ellson, 1976). The evidence appears to show that the advantages of
tutoringdo not result from the individual attention provided to the student in
the two-person situation. Rather, tutoring works best when the instruction it
makes possible is highly systematic (Ellson, 1976). In other words, tutoring can
be a highly effective mode when advantage is taken of the flexibility it provides
arrangement of instructional events. The freedom
in achieving precision in the
made possible by the two-person instructional group does not produce good
results if it leads to sloppiness in instruction; on the contrary, favorable out-
comes appear to depend upon of the events of instruction.
careful control
Typically, an episode in tutoring runs somewhat as follows. We assume a task
in beginning reading, having the objective, "Given an unfamiliar printed two-
syllable word of regular spelling, demonstrates phonics rules by sounding the
word." The printed word is plunder. The tutor is a volunteer, mother of one of
the children in first grade, tutoring a six-year-old girl pupil.
and tells her of the objective by
First, the tutor gains the child's attention

saying, "Here is a word you probably haven't seen before in your reading
(plunder) I want you to show me how you can sound it out." Should the pupil
.

sound out the word immediately, either by correctly using rules or by recogniz-
ing the printed word, the tutor says "Good!" and goes on to another printed
word. Otherwise, the tutor encourages the child to sound out the first syllable
(plun), then the second one, and then both together.
Actually, the procedure is one of combining reminders of what the child
already knows (recall of prerequisites), such as the sounds of/»/ and un, and
learning guidance that suggests the strategy called "blending." Thus, the tutor
may tell the child to place her finger over the last part of the word, leaving the
letters /> and / exposed, and then ask, "What sound does pi make?" If the pupil
answers correctly, positive feedback is given. If she gives an incorrect response,
the child is told what the correct response is and asked to repeat it. Then the
procedure is followed again for each sound and for successive combinations of
sounds, until the entire word can be sounded correctly. At that point, the child
288 Principles of Instructional Design

is asked to repeat the word, and some acknowledgement is made of her accom-
plishment. (In fulfilling a secondary objective, the meaning of the word would
probably also be explained to the child.)
The systematic steps in this tutoring situation can be seen to be those of
repeating, as necessary, the events of instruction calling for the stimulation of
recall of prerequisites, presenting the stimulus material, providing learning
guidance, eliciting and assessing the performance, and providing feedback.
Essentially, the same steps would be followed in the tutoring of older students
or adults in the learning of an intellectual skill, except that somewhat greater
dependence might be placed on encouraging the student to institute these
events himself. Tutoring at the university level, of course, usually consists almost
entirely of self- instruction —
the tutor's activities being largely confined to assess-
ing performance and to suggesting means the student may employ to enhance
retention and transfer of learning.

INSTRUCTION IN THE SMALL GROUP

Instructional groups of up to eight students are sometimes found in formally

planned education. The universitv teacher, or the teacher of adult meets classes,
with a small group of students on some occasions. More frequently, such groups
may be formed by deliberate division of larger ones. In the elementary and
middle grades, the schoolteacher may find it desirable to form small groups
from an entire class of students in order to instruct students who have
progressed to approximately the same point in their learning of a particular
subject.
The employment of small groups for instruction is a common practice in such
elementary school subjects as reading and mathematics. In the first grade, for
example, a teacher may find that some pupils have not yet mastered the oral
language of reading readiness; others may be just beginning to learn to
skills

sound the and syllables of printed words; still others may be reading
letters

entire printed sentences without hesitation. Obviously, these different sets of

students need to be taught different sets of enabling skills. It would accomplish
nothing to present pages of print to pupils who are still struggling with oral
language. Nor is it likely to be of advantage to those pupils who already read
pages of print to have to suffer through lessons that require them to make oral
descriptions of objects shown in pictures. The practical solution is to divide the
class into a number of small groups.
Classes of older students or adults are sometimes divided into several sets
constituting small groups. The groups thus formed may meet on separate
occasions, as in "quiz sections," or they may meet in separate small groups for a
portion of the time of a scheduledclass. In either case, the aim is to attain some

of the advantages of small-group instruction and to provide some added varia-

tion in the forms of instruction possible with large groups.
 Group Instruction 289

Events of Instruction in Small Groups

The control of instructional events in the small group (three to eight students)
can best be compared to what is possible in the tutorial situation. This kind of
arrangement of teacher and student might be described as "multistudent tutor-
*ing." The characteristics of the instructional situation resemble those of the
two-person group and are rather unlike those of the large group. In the small
group, the teacher typically attempts to use tutorial methods, sometimes with
single students, sometimes with more than one, and most often by "taking
turns." The general result is the management of instructional events in a way
that applies to each individual student in the group but with some evident loss
of flexibility and precision.
Procedures of diagnosis mav have been used to select the members of a group
for small-group instruction. As previously noted, this is typical practice for small
groups in elementary reading, language, and mathematics. During an in-
structional session with a small group, it is also possible for the teacher to
diagnose each student's attainment of immediate prerequisites. In fact, this may be
seen as one of the important features of small-group, as contrasted with large-
group, instruction. By suitable questioning of each student in turn, the teacher
is able to judge with a fair degree of accuracy that the necessary enabling skills
are present in all students. In this way, the estimate of students' readiness for
taking the next step in learning can be made to approximate the degree of
precision available in the two-person instructional group.
The possibilities of control of the events of instruction in the small group are
discussed in the following paragraphs:

1. Gaining attention: In a small group, arranged so that the teacher can maintain
frequent eye contact with each member, gaining and maintaining student
attention poses no major difficulties.

2. Informing the learner of the objective: This event can also readilv be managed in a
small group. The teacher can, as necessary, express the objective of the lesson
and ensure that it is understood by each member of the group. Of course, it

mav take a bit more time to ensure understanding of objectives for eight
students than it does for onlv one (as in the two- person group).
3. Stimulating recall of prerequisite learning: By questioning several students in
turn, the teacher is able to be fairly sure that necessary enabling skills and
relevant items of supportive information are accessible in the working memo-
of all students. Using best judgment, the teacher mav direct questions that
ries

The same questions have the

require selected students to recall relevant items.
added effect of reminding other students of material that is already available to
them.
4. Presenting the stimulus material: The materials for learning mav be presented in
ways appropriate to the objective, but without necessarily being tailored to
individual student characteristics. For example, features of the oral presentation
mav be given emphasis by voice changes. In pictures or diagrams, particular
features of objects and events may be appropriately made prominent. For this
290 Principles of Instructional Design

particular event, the degree of lessened flexibility compared with that of the
two-person group appears to be minimal.
5. Providing learning guidance: Here, the choice is either to present a communica-
tion to the group or to members of the group in turn. With the first of these
alternatives, the teacher is behaving as though in a large-group setting; with the
second, the event is managed as in the tutoring mode, involving a teacher

interaction with one student, then with another, and so on. Obviously, the
more students there are in the group, the more time the latter procedure takes.
It is not uncommon for the teacher of a small group to alternate between these

two approaches, judging one to be more appropriate at one time, one at

another. In any case, the function of the event remains the same providing —
cues and suggesting strategies that will aid the semantic encoding of material to
be learned.
Quite a different kind of learning guidance is provided by the small group
which is engaged in discussion. In such groups, the discussion may be managed
and led by the teacher. In other instances, the small groups formed out of large
classes may have designated students as discussion leaders. The learning guid-
ance provided by discussion is of various sorts, and its function in support of
learning depends on the nature of the objective. More generally, it would
appear that discussions place a fairlv high degree of dependence on the self-

instructional strategies of the individual students. In adult discussion groups,

the members are, to a large extent, using the strategies of deciding what they
want to learn and selecting these elements from what they hear or say as part of
the discussion.
6. Eliciting the performance: It is clear in the case of this event that the only way of
eliciting each student's performance group is to do it one by one.
in a small
Since this uses up a good deal of time, it is not always done. Instead, the teacher
usually calls on one or two students to show what they have learned and
assumes that the learning has been equally effective for those not called upon.
As the lesson proceeds, other students take their turns being called upon.
Obviously, this procedure aims at approximating that of the two-person group,
but the precision of the event is considerably reduced. The teacher comes to
depend upon a probabilistic estimate of learning outcomes rather than a precise
determination of them.
7. Providing feedback: Since this event is tied to the occurrence of student perfor-
mance, it is subject to the same kinds of limitations in the small group. For the
student who is called upon, feedback may be precisely provided. For the other
students, it is only probable because it depends on which of them has made the

same response (perhaps covertly).

8. Assessing the performance: Performance assessment may also lose some precision
of control since only one student's performance can be assessed at one time by
oral questioning. The other students must wait their turns; this means that a
sample of performances will be assessed for each student but not the entire
repertoire each is supposed to have learned. Of course, a test covering an entire
lesson or topic may later be given to the entire group of students (a technique
equally applicable to large groups).
9. Enhancing retention and transfer: For instructional groups in the elementary
grades, the teacher is able to estimate the desirability of varied examples and
 Group Instruction 291

additional spaced reviews in providing favorable conditions for retention and

learning transfer. Such estimates are made by a kind of averaging of the group's
performance and, thus, do not have the precision afforded in the tutoring
situation of the two-person group. In the case of older students and adults, the
conduct of discussions has as one of its major purposes the enhancement of
retention and transfer.

Instruction in the Small Group -Recitation

Suppose that a teacher has assembled a small group of pupils who are to learn
the skill of adding fractions with dissimilar denominators. Since one of the steps

in this procedure is "finding the least common multiple of the denominators," it

mav be assumed that diagnostic tests have indicated that students already
possess such prerequisite concepts as numerator, denominator, factor, and multi-
ple, as well as rules for multiplying and dividing small whole numbers and the

rule for adding fractions with identical denominators.

Once the attention of all members of the group is gained, the teacher tells the
students the objective of the lesson, using an illustration such as 2/5 + 4/15.
Calling upon one or two members of the group in turn, the teacher stimulates
recallof prerequisite concepts and rules. For example, students may be asked to
add 2/13 + 5/13, to obtain 7/13. Having assurance that prerequisite skills are
readily accessible, the teacher presents a single example such as 2/5 + 3/7 as
stimulus material. The next step is to provide suitable learning guidance for the
learning of the rule having to do with the finding of a least common multiple.
This mav be done by demonstrating the multiplication of denominators (5x7
= 35); alternatively, a discover)' method may be employed, initiated by such a
question as, "How might we make it possible to change these into fractions that
could be added?" In this case, one student of the group is called upon for an
answer while others await a later turn. A different student may then be called
upon for performance, that is, in arriving at the changed expression 14/35 +
15/35 and in supplying the sum 29/35. Feedback, in the form of affirming the
correct response or correcting a wrong one, is then provided.
The subsequent instructional events are conducted in such a group by calling
on different students, using different examples. Thus, performance is followed
by appropriate feedback for the students in the group by taking turns. The
immediate performance of each student is assessed in this manner. The varied
examples used serve the function of enhancing retention and transfer, assuming
that students other than the one called upon are responding in a covert manner
while learning.

Instruction in Discussion Groups

Instruction that takes the form of discussion is said to be characterized as

"interactive communication" (Gall and Gall, 1976). One student speaks at a
292 Principles of Instructional Design

time and is listened to by the entire group. The order in which students initiate
or respond to speech in not predetermined. Often, one student is responding to
the remarks or questions introduced by another student. The teacher may
interpose remarks or questions and sometimes may call upon individual students
to speak. Of course, small groups of this sort may be organized with students as
discussion leaders.
Three kinds of objectives are often considered appropriate for instruction by
group discussion: subject matter mastery, attitude formation, and problem
solving (Gall and Gall, 1976). It is not unusual for a class discussion to have
more than one of these types of objectives.
The formation and modification of attitudes is usually the major aim of
issue-oriented discussion, examples of which are found in the "jurisprudential
model" and the "social inquiry model" described by Joyce and Weil (1980). The
discussion may be initiated by the account of an incident illustrating a social
issue (such as freedom of speech or job discrimination). The teacher or group
leader may then ask for one or more opinions about the issue. Comments are
made about these opinions, either by the discussion leader or by other students.
As the discussion proceeds, the leader attempts to achieve progressive sharpen-
ing and clarification of the issue by introducing different examples and
by encouraging statements by various group members. Often, what is aimed
for is a group consensus, as represented by a set of statements to which no
major disagreements remain. This attitude-forming situation may be con-
ceived as a particular kind of learning guidance, namely one involving com-
munications from a number of human models. These models are members
of the group and its leader. This kind of learning guidance, particularly
effective in attitude formation, is followed by performance (choice of
action) by the individual students and by feedback in the form of group con-
sensus.
Problem solving is also a commonly adopted goal for discussion groups (Maier,
1963). It appears that the kinds of problems that provide the most effective
instruction in discussion groups are those with multiple solutions and those that
include attitudinal components. Maier (1971) points out that small-group
divisions of large college classes can increase the opportunities for student
participation and can be used to form discussion groups for problem solving
and other Maier suggests the presentation of problems or
related purposes.
issues that capture student interest and emotional involvement, as a means of
enlisting motivation. With this kind of objective, small groups have the chance
to practice both communication skills and problem-solving strategies. Obvious-
ly, this type of instructional group is one that depends very largely upon the

students to manage instructional events for themselves. The students must

provide themselves with the stimulation to recall relevant knowledge and must
employ their own cognitive strategies of encoding and problem solving. Atti-
tude change objectives are a secondary, although not necessarily less important,
outcome of this type of discussion session.
 Group Instruction 293

INSTRUCTION IN THE LARGE GROUP

In instructing large groups, the teacher employs communications that do not

differ in function from those employed with two-person groups or with small
groups. For a large group, the teacher initiates and manages the events of
instruction that are specifically relevant to the primary objective of the lesson.
Because the teacher's cues for timing and emphasis come from several (or many)
sources rather than from a single student, there is a marked reduction in precision
in the management of instructional events. Teachers of large groups cannot be
sure they have gained the attention of all students; they cannot always be sure
that all students have recalled prerequisites or that the semantic encoding they
suggest will work well with all students. The strategy of instruction in a large
group is, therefore, a probabilistic strategy. Instruction so designed will be effec-
tive "on the average" but cannot by itself be ensured as effective for each
individual learner (cf. Gagne, 1974, pp. 124-131).
It may be argued that this pattern of large-group instruction is the way

instruction should be designed in general. The instruction itself (that is, the
communications of the teacher) is "good," and it is up to the student to profit
from it. Students, in this view, must do a great deal of organizing of the events
—
of instruction themselves it is up to them to infer the objective of instruction,
to remind themselves to recall prerequisite skills, to choose a method of encod-
ing, and so on. Such a view appears to be widelv held and widelv emploved in
college and university teaching. It may be noted, also, that this conception of
instruction runs contrary to the notion of mastery learning proposed by Bloom
(1974, 1976). Bloom's conception relates the quality of instruction to the
occurrence of events described as providing cues, participation, reinforcement, and
feedback! correctives. This set of instructional features closely resembles the in-
structional events we have described. It is evident that mastery learning requires
the management of events that go bevond the "giving of information" by the
teacher.

Instructional Events in the Large Group

As is the case with the small group, the influence of instructional events in the
large group is only probable. The teacher's communications reach individual
students with different probabilities, and their effects on individual students also
cannot be monitored with certainty. Since the degree of instructional readiness,
the intensitv of motivation and alertness, the appropriateness of the semantic
encoding suggested, and the accessibility of relevant cognitive strategies are all
factors likely to van' with the individuals who make up the group, instruction, as
delivered, is relatively imprecise. Any lack of effectiveness that instruction mav
have for one individual may, of course, be overcome by the student's own efforts
at self-instruction. For example, what some students fail to learn from a lecture
they may learn later by employing their own encoding strategies on notes of the
294 Principles of Instructional Design

lecture. Other students may find this kind of encoding ineffective and mav
prefer to process the information in its oral form as originally given.

1. Gaining attention: This event, as all teachers know, is highly important for the
effectiveness of instruction delivered to a group. It is surely no more than a
probable occurrence in a class of young people, and often little more likely in a
classof older students. The occasional use of demonstrations and audiovisual
media can aid the gaining of attention at times when other critical instructional
events are to follow.
2. Informing the learner of the objective: The objective can readilv be stated and
demonstrated to a large group. It will probablv be comprehended bv all
students, when suitably presented.
3. Stimulating recall ofprerequisite learning: As indicated previously, this event may
be of critical importance for learning. It is also, perhaps, one of the most
difficult events to accomplish with reasonable probability in a large group.
Typically, the teacher calls upon one or two students to recall relevant concepts,
rules, or information. Obviously, though, the necessary retrieval may not be
achieved by other students, many of whom are hoping to avoid being called
upon. As a result, the management of this event may often be inadequately
accomplished. Those students who have not recalled prerequisite skills will

probably not learn the relevant objective. The cumulative effects of this in-
adequacy are, therefore, quite serious. Various means (such as "spot quizzes"
for the entire group) are employed to improve the operation of this event. It
appears to deserve a great deal of attention bv instructional designers.
4. The content to be learned can be presented in a
Presenting the stimulus material:
way that emphasizes distinctive features. This means that the presentation can
be made optimally effective, on the average.
5. Providing learning guidance: In a large group, learning guidance can be pro-
vided in a way that works, in a probabilistic sense, for most members of the
group. For example, the encoding of a historical event can be suggested by a
which may be generally effective in the group as a
picture or dramatic episode,
whole. The particular encoding suggested, however, cannot be adapted to the
individual members of the group, as it can in smaller groups.
6. Eliciting the performance: Control in obtaining the learner's performance is

much weakened in the large group. Whereas a tutor can expect several occa-
sions during which the student exhibits what he learns in a single lesson, the
teacher of a group cannot manage this for each student in the group. Instead, in
a typical class, the teacher calls on one or two students at a time. Other students
in the group mav occasionally be responding covertly, but this is not a highly
likely possibility. Accordingly, it may be seen that the student response has a
low degree of precision as an instructional event in the large group.
Quizzes and tests are often given in an attempt to overcome the difficult}' of
eliciting student performance. To be most effective as instructional events,
quizzes should be frequent. Even daily quizzes, however, cannot approximate
the frequency with which the tutor is able to ask for student performances that
reflect capabilities learned in an immediately previous moment.

7. Providing feedback: Since this event is inevitably tied to the occurrence of

performances bv the students, it is subject to the same limitations as those
 Group Instruction 295

occurrences. Feedback to students in a large group occurs with low frequency

and is likely to be confined to results of tests covering a number of different
learning objectives.
8. Assessing the performance: Similarcomments may be made concerning this event
in the instructionof large groups. The more frequent and regular assessment
(followed by corrective feedback) can be, the better will be the outcome of
learning. For example, regularly scheduled quizzes following segments of study
material are considered to be the most valuable feature of some computer-
managed courses in college subjects (Anderson et al., 1974). When the com-
puter is used for assessment, this event can be managed with a degree of
precision that is impossible for the teacher of a large group.
9. Enhancing retention and transfer: Events of this nature can be accomplished by
the teacher of a large group, again in a probabilistic sense. That is, the teacher
can use the varied examples and spaced reviews that have been found to work
best on the average, but she is unable to adapt these techniques to differences in
individual learners.

The Lecture
Surely the most common mode of instruction for the large group is the lecture.
The teacher communicates orally with students assembled in a group. The oral
communication may be accompanied by occasional demonstrations, pictures, or
diagrams; and these may be presented in various media, including the chalk-
board. The students listen, and some take notes, which they may use later for
recall or as a means of generating their own semantic encodings.
As pointed out by McLeish (1976), the lecture can accomplish some positive
instructional purposes. In particular, the lecturer can (1) inspire an audience
with his own enthusiasm, (2) relate his field of study to human purposes (and,
thus, to student interests), and (3) relate theory and research to practical
problems. The lecture attains these goals with the utmost economy, which
doubtless accounts for its preservation as an instructional mode for over two
thousand years of higher education.
McLeish's interpretation implies that the good lecture can attain certain
instructional objectives very well because it is able to implement certain in-
structional events effectively. For example, "inspiring students with his enthu-
siasm" implies that the lecturer often functions as ahuman model in establishing
positive attitudes toward the subject of study. The motivational effects of
lecturing are also incorporated in the idea of relating a specialized field of study
to the more general concerns of human living. As for the concept of relating
research findings to practical problems, this purpose of the lecture functions to
provide a context of cues that will aid retention and learning transfer.
As pointed out in the previous section, the communications delivered to
groups of learners by the lecture can be aimed at optimizing the effectiveness of
many of the events of instruction in a probabilistic sense. For example, attention
can be gained by dramatic episodes; instructional objectives can be simply and
296 Principles of Instructional Design

clearly stated; suggested encoding of material to be learned can be provided by

summary statements, visually presented tabular arravs, or diagrams; and so on.
It is clear that many of the events of instruction can be appropriately presented
within a lecture, although they cannot be managed with precision. Their
momentary effects cannot be ensured for all students, neither can their specific
forms be adapted to individual differences in students.
Viewed from the standpoint of instructional events, perhaps the weakest
features of the lecture reside in its lack of control over (1) the recalling of
prerequisites and (2) the eliciting of student performance, with its succeeding
provision of corrective feedback. The lecturer can remind students of what they
need to recall as prerequisite knowledge, but he cannot take the steps necessarv
to ensure such recall. Again, the lecturer can encourage students to practice the
capabilities they are learning, but he cannot require them to exhibit the per-
formances that reflect what thev have learned. Thus, when the lecture is used as
the sole mode of instruction, there is heavy dependence upon the student to
institute these events for himself. This degree of self-instruction is a common
expectation in college and university instruction as well as in adult education. It

is worth noting that quizzes and tests are able to overcome of the
this limitation
lecture only to a small degree since they are typically both infrequent and
"coarse-grained" in their assessment of specific learning objectives.

The Recitation Class

Another form of large-group instruction, more frequently used with some

subjects than with others, is the recitation class. This mode of instruction
partially overcomes some of the limitations of the lecture, at least in a probabilis-
In a recitation class, the teacher calls on one student after another to
tic sense.

respond to questions. In a class in foreign language, for example, one student at

a time may be answering questions posed in that language or otherwise continu-
ing a conversation in the foreign tongue.
The teacher's questions in a recitation class may represent several different
instructional events at different times during a single lesson. A question may be
designed to stimulate of a prerequisite capability, bringing it to the
recall
forefront of the student's memorv. Or, a question may be one that asks the
—
student to perform to show what he has learned. A different kind of question
may be used to suggest a question of thought to the student (in the manner of
"guided discoverv") and, thus, to guide his learning in the sense of semantic
encoding. Still another kind of question ma}' require the student to think of
examples of application of a newly learned skill or body of knowledge —
process that will contribute cues useful for recall and learning transfer. For
instance, having learned the concept of homeostatic control, for instance, ques-
tions might direct students to describe several examples of practical devices of
this categorv.
In recitation classes, some instructional events are often left for the student to
 Group Instruction 297

manage. This is typically the case when recitation follows a homework assign-
ment. In such instances, it is of
usually expected that events such as control
attention, gaining information about the objective, semantic encoding, and the
provision of corrective feedback will be managed by the student himself as he
- does his homework. These events are obviously relevant to the student's study
activities in reading his textbook, practicing his newly learned skills in examples,
or rehearsing the statement of organized information. Good study habits are, in
these circumstances, the determiners of effective learning.
The control of instructional events in the large recitation class is decidedly
imprecise, with regard to their effects on individual students. When questions
are asked, for whatever purpose, there is time for only a few students to respond.

Should the teacher call upon students who are typically well prepared and, thus,
engage in relative neglect of students who may be less able to guide their own
learning? Or should the teacher call upon the less able students, and through the
necessity of supplying corrective feedback, bore those who have already learned
correctly? It is clear that what usually happens in the use of recitation with large
class is that the necessary events of instruction affect only a few students on any
one occasion. Time does not permit the teacher to allow everyone to take a turn.
All too frequendy, students learn to resort to the game of avoiding being called
upon to recite. This, of course, is the wrong game with regard to the learning of
lesson objectives.

FEATURES OF TUTORING IN LARGE GROUPS

Methods of large-group instruction, including lecture and recitation, may be

combined in various ways with small-group, two-person-group, or in-
dividualized instruction in restoring some of the advantages of the tutoring
situation.One rather simple scheme is to divide the large group into small
groups for part of its meeting time or into classes of smaller groups for meetings
subsequent to a large-group lecture or recitation. Either of these arrangements is
intended to make possible a degree of precision in the control of instructional
events which surpasses that of a large group.

Mastery Learning

An outstanding system of teaching that direcdy attempts to introduce precision

in the management of instructional events is (Bloom,
called mastery learning
1974; Block and Anderson, 1975). Generally speaking, this method supple-
ments large-group modes of teaching with diagnostic progress testing and feedback
with correction procedures.
In using this system, the teacher divides a course of study into units of
approximately two weeks' length, each unit having clearly defined objectives.
Following the teaching of the unit, students take a test to determine who has
298 Principles of Instructional Design

mastered the objectives. The test diagnoses which objectives have or have not
been acquired. Those students who exhibit mastery are permitted to engage in
self- instructional enrichment activities. For those who have not yet shown

mastery, additional sessions of instruction are provided, such as small-group

study, individual tutoring, or additional self- study materials. These students are
again tested when they believe themselves prepared, with the intention that all
will eventually show mastery of the objectives. The addition of progress and
diagnostic and corrective feedback procedures makes a distinct contribution to
instructional precision. Evidence of the system's effectiveness has been reviewed
by Block and Burns (1976).

Tutoring Versus Other Methods

Bloom (1984) has described a series of studies, conducted by students under his
direction, that provide direct contrasts of the effectiveness of several methods of
instructional delivery. As compared with conventional
instruction in groups of
30 students per teacher, the use of mastery learning procedures resulted in
improvements in achievement amounting to a rise from the 50th percentile to
the 84th percentile. (This is an increase of one standard deviation, or 1 sigma, as
Bloom describes it.) When tutoring was employed as a method, the increase in
achievement was from the 50th to the 98th percentile, or 2 sigma.
These striking effects of the tutoring method, extending even beyond those of
mastery learning in 30-student groups, raised the general question: What
aspects of tutoring can be incorporated into large-group instruction so as to
increase its effectiveness? Can strategies of instruction be used with 30-person
groups that can raise achievement from the 50th to the 98th percentile, the
tutoring level?
One technique of instruction that was investigated in 30-person groups was
called "enhanced prerequisites." Actually, this was the same as the instructional
event "stimulating recall of prerequisites" since it involved helping students
review and relearn the prerequisites they lacked. The subjects being learned were
courses in second-year French and second-year algebra. The achievement result-
ing from his treatment, using otherwise conventional instruction, was from the
50th to the 76th percentile. In other comparable classes, the enhanced prerequi-
site technique combined with master)' learning procedures brought achievement

to the 95th percentile.

Other aspects of tutoring- related instruction investigated by Bloom's students
included combinations of (1) enhanced cues and student participation and (2)
enhanced cues, participation, and reinforcement (corrective feedback). The
meaning of enhanced cues in these studies was the provision of explanations of
the concepts and rules being learned; participation was encouraged by having
students note the frequency of their participation in learning and the problems
they had in understanding the instruction. Both of these combinations of
supplementary instructional events brought about substantial increases in stu-
 Group Instruction 299

dent achievement. The greatest effects,beyond the 96th percentile, were found
when these added techniques were combined with the procedures of mastery
learning.
These studies confirm and reconfirm the effectiveness of mastery learning
procedures, particularly those that inform students of correct and incorrect
* performances and permit restudy until success is achieved. Beyond this, they
show that certain instructional events that normally characterize the tutoring
situation can be employed satisfactorily in groups of about 30 students. These
"enhanced" instructional events include (1) ensuring review of prerequisites, (2)
employing student participation as a part of learning guidance, and (3) enhanc-
ing cues to retrieval by employing elaboration of concepts and rules (as in using
explanations). In the absence of one-on-one instruction, it appears that particu-
lar attention to these events of instruction can accomplish in large groups much

of what is expected from tutoring.

SUMMARY
The nature of instruction delivered to groups is determined in many important

respects by the of the group. For purposes of distinguishing the characteris-

size
tics of instruction, it is useful to consider three different group sizes: (1)

two-person groups, (2) small groups containing approximately three to eight

students, and (3) large groups of 15 or more members.
The characteristics of instruction applicable to groups of these three different
sizes can be understood in terms of the degree of precision with which in-
structional events can be managed by the teacher. Generally speaking, the
two-person situation, consisting of a tutor and a student, affords the greatest
degree of precision for instructional events. As the size of the group increases,
control over the management of instructional events grows progressively weak-
er. That is to say, the effects of necessary instructional events on individual

learners decrease from near certainty to lesser degrees of probability as the

group size grows larger. Learning outcomes, accordingly, come to depend
increasingly upon the self-instructional strategies available to the individual
learner.
A particular feature of the instructional situation that is typically more diffi-

cult to manage group size increases is the diagnosis of entering capabilities.

as
Means of assessing what the individual students know or do not know at the
beginning of each lesson are readily available to the tutor but become more
difficult to accomplish with larger groups. This factor is of particular importance
for the execution of the instructional event stimulating recall ofprerequisites since
students will obviously be unable to recall something they have not previously
learned. The control of this event is, thus, likely to grow weaker with larger
groups, and the result may be a cumulative deficit in student learning.
The two-person group, using tutoring as a mode, makes possible relatively
300 Principles of Instructional Design

precise management of instructional events, from early ones such as gaining

attention to the late ones providing for retention and learning transfer. In the
small group, precision of control of instructional events
is attained largely by

multiperson tutoring, that by initiating each instructional event for the

is,

different members of the group in turn. In such circumstances, some events

become only probable (rather than certain) for some students on some occa-
With the aid of self- instructional strategies of individual students, small-
sions.
group instruction can attain considerable effectiveness. Small groups are fre-
quently formed by dividing larger groups. Examples of small groups formed in
this manner are those for instruction in basic skills in the elementary grades and
student-led discussion groups in college classes.
Large-group instruction is characterized by weak control of the effects of
instructional events bv the teacher. The gaining of attention, the cuing of
semantic encoding, the eliciting of student performance, and the provision
of corrective feedback can all be instituted as events, but their effects upon the
learning processes of students are onlv probable. Sometimes, indeed, the effects
of these events on the individual learner have quite low probabilities. Learning
from large-group instruction, therefore, depends to a considerable degree on the
learner's own strategies of self- instruction. This circumstance is more or less
expected in college students and adult groups.
Typical modes of instruction in large groups are the lecture and the recitation
class. A number of techniques have been suggested for overcoming the weak-

nesses of these large-group instructional methods. Frequently, large groups are

divided into smaller groups and, sometimes, into two-person groups in order to
bring about some of the advantages of increased precision of control over
instructional events. One system for the improvement of large-group instruction
is which units of instruction are managed so that diagnosis
masterv learning, in
and corrective feedback follow the learning of each unit until mastery is
achieved.
Studies have also shown that aspects of the tutoring situation, such as enhanc-
ing the learning of the prerequisites, encouraging student participation in
learning guidance, and adding elaboration cues for retrieval, can bring about
substantial improvements in achievement in large-group situations.

References

Anderson, T. H., Anderson, R. C, Dalgaard, B. R., Wietecha, E. J., Biddle, W. B.,

Paden, D. W., Smock, H. R., Alessi, S. M., Surber, J. R., &
Klemt, L. L. (1974). A
computer-based studv management system. Educational Psychologist, 11, 36-45.
Block, J. H., &
Anderson, L. W. (1975). Mastery learning in classroom instruction. New
York: Macmillan.
Block, J. H., & Burns, R. B. (1976). Mastery learning. In L. S. Shulman (Ed.), Review of
research in education, 4. Itasca, IL: Peacock.
 Group Instruction 301

Bloom, B. S. (1974). An introduction to mastery learning theory. In J. H. Block (Ed.),

Schools, society and mastery learning. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
Bloom, B. S. (1976). Human characteristics and school learning. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Bloom, B. S. (1984). The 2-sigma problem: The search for methods of group instruction
as effective as one-to-one tutoring. Educational Researcher, 13 (6) 4-16.
£loward, R. D. (1967). Studies in tutoring. Journal of'Experimental Education, 36, 14-25.
Devin-Sheehan, L., Feldman, R. S., & Allen, V. L. (1976). Research on children
tutoring children: A critical review. Review of Educational Research, 46, 355-385.
Ellson,D. G. (1976). Tutoring. In N. L. Gage (Ed.), The psychology of teaching methods
(Seventy-fifth Yearbook of the National Society for the Study of Education) Chicago: .

University of Chicago Press.

Gage, N. L. (Ed.). (1976). The psychology of teaching methods (Seventy-fifth Yearbook of
the National Society for the Study of Education). Chicago: University of Chicago
Press.
Gagne, R. M. (1974). Essentials oflearning for instruction. New York: Dryden Press-Holt,
Rinehart and Winston.
Gall, M. D., &
Gall, J. P. (1976). The discussion method. In N. L. Gage (Ed.), The
psychology of teaching methods (Seventy-fifth Yearbook of the National Society for the
Study of Education) Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
.

Gartner, A., Kohler, M., & Riessman, F. (1971). Children teach children. New York:
Harper & Row.
Joyce, B., & Weil, M. (1980). Models of teaching (2nd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall.
Maier, N. R. F. (1963). Problem-solving discussions and conferences. New York: McGraw-
Hill.

Maier, N. R. F. (1971). Innovation in education. American Psychologist, 26, 722-725.

McLeish, J. (1976). The method. In N. L. Gage (Ed.), The psychology of teaching
lecture
methods (Seventv-fifth Yearbook of the National Society for the Study of Education).
Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Sharan, S. (1980). Cooperative learning in small groups: Recent methods and effects on
achievement, attitudes, and ethnic relations. Review of Educational Research, 50, 241-
271.
Walberg, H. J. (1976). Psychology of learning environments: Behavioral, structural, or
perceptual? In L. S. Shulman (Ed.), Review of research in education, 4. Itasca, IL:
Peacock.
 Individualized
15 Instruction

more
T. eachers have long sought ways to
both the objectives and the methods of learning to
precise while adjusting
make teaching

the needs and characteristics of individual learners. These efforts have largely
been frustrated because teachers have had no delivery systems designed to adjust
instruction to the individuals in a group of 25 or more learners. Although
teachers have traditionally divided their time between working with individuals
and with groups of varying sizes, this arrangement often leaves some pupils
unoccupied and unable to progress for some periods of time. Little is accom-
plished by teachers merely asserting a determination to adjust their teaching to
the individual needs of pupils. They need a delivery system designed to achieve
such a purpose.
In the previous chapter, we described some of the attempts made by Bloom
and (1984) to overcome some of the difficulties inherent in group
his students
instruction. Bloom maintains that one-to-one tutorial instruction is the most
effective form and that an average student in a tutorial program achieves more
than 98 percent of students in conventional classroom instruction. (Bloom calls
the difference in effectiveness of instructional mode the 2-sigma problem,
referring to the fact that the achievement difference is two standard deviations in
size.) We note here, however, that besides the tutoring mode of instruction,
there is another set of solutions for the 2-sigma problem. These are centered on
the use of instructional materials that address the student direcdy, without
depending upon a teacher for delivery, and that are tailored to individual
student needs.

302
 Individualized Instruction 303

Earlv efforts to design delivery systems to assist teachers in individualizing

instruction were made before the advent of more recent technology such as the
current models of the design of instructional systems represented, for example,
bv this book. Also, the early efforts were largely local ones because there was no
marketing agency concentrating on development and diffusion of special materi-
als and media to support the plan for individualization. Many early experiments
in schools, thus, left too great a burden on the teacher. In short, a total support
system for individualized instruction was lacking.
In recent years, universities and private research and development agencies
have developed comprehensive delivery systems for individualized instruction.
The design and development phases for the delivery system were often sup-
ported in part bv federal or state funds, and private funding made possible the
diffusion of the developed svstem. The purposes of these systems, broadly
defined, were:

1 To provide a means for assessing the entry skills of students

2. To assist in finding the starring point for each student in a carefully sequenced
series of objectives
3. To provide alternative materials and media for adjustment to varying learning
styles of students, including choices between print and nonprint materials
4. To enable students to learn at their own rates, not at a fixed pace for the entire
group
5. To provide frequent and convenient progress checks so that students did not
become "bogged down" with cumulative failures

In total, these measures were to enable all pupils to work each day on
skills, and rates
objectives within their individual needs, capacities, prerequisite
of learning. This was accomplished, in part, by designing the learning materials
and media that could earn- more of the support for more of the instructional
events. Team efforts were often employed to design, develop, evaluate, and
diffuse the learning materials as a component of the entire delivery system. In
short, a systems design model was employed to provide teachers with a total
deliven- system to support the classroom activities.

NATIONALLY DIFFUSED SYSTEMS

Three individualized- instruction delivery systems have been used widely in the
elementary and middle schools throughout the nation. The three systems van'
somewhat in subject areas covered and in age range of pupils. Generally speak-
ing, all were eventually intended to include the areas of reading, mathematics,
sciences, and social studies from kindergarten through the upper elementary and
sometimes to the secondary levels. The three programs referred to have been
described by their designers in books edited by Weisgerber (1971) and by
Talmage (1975). The names of the programs are Program for Learning in
304 Principles of Instructional Design

Accordance with Needs (Project PLAN), Individually Prescribed Instruction

(IPI), and Individually Guided Instruction (IGE). Other widely diffused sys-
tems for individualizing instruction are also described in the book edited bv
Weisgerber (1971).
The three nationally diffused systems are the subjects of an evaluation report
(EPIE, 1974). Other reports describe the operations of the programs in the
schools and provide guidance for school administrators and teachers concerning
their potential selection, adoption, or adaptation to meet local needs (Edling,
1970; Briggs and Aronson, 1975). Reiser (1987) has recently reviewed the
substantive objectives of each of these plans and the fate of each. In spite of their
proved effectiveness, all three of these programs have declined in use or have
been discontinued when federal funding ceased.

LOCALLY DEVELOPED SYSTEMS

Some schools or school districts have undertaken either to make adaptive

changes in one of the widely marketed systems of individualized instruction or
to develop entirely new systems locally. Thus, some schools have adopted
available systems with few modifications, some have made major modifications
of available systems,and some start at the beginning to develop their own
systems. When the objectives of a school coincide closely with those of an
available system, it seems wasteful to repeat the entire instruction design when it
has already been carefully done. Of course, schools sometimes purchase certain
materials or components of a system and develop others locally.
In visits to two nonoverlapping samples of schools employing one or another
systems of individualized instruction, great variations in specific classroom
applications were found, although all were directed generally toward the five
purposes previously described. Edling (1970), who visited 46 schools, high-
lighted both the common and the unique features of operation. Briggs and
Aronson (1975), who visited 42 schools, described typical operations in select-
ed schools and summarized the various factors to be considered by schools when
plans are made to initiate a new program. These factors pertain to information
needed by school boards, parents, administrators, teachers, and pupils.
The development of locally developed systems is sometimes facilitated by
publishers who
produce materials that identify skills in a sequence. Schools may
adopt a reading series based on objectives keyed to test items furnished to the
publisher. However, few publishers have actually validated the effectiveness of
their material. Usually, thev have simply added objectives and test items onto
existing materials. The State of Florida has recently recognized this deficiency
and has implemented a set of textbook selection criteria that require publishers

to validate the effectiveness of their materials. It is possible that other states will
follow suit.
 Individualized Instruction 305

VARIETIES OF ACTIVITIES

Once of individualized instruction is in operation in a school, what

a system
might be observed? The following description (adapted from
typical activities
Briggs and Aronson, 1975) represents a typical hour in an individualized
reading program in a classroom with one teacher, one teacher's aide (who might
be a paid paraprofessional or volunteer parent), and 25 third-grade pupils.
Several children are still learning to visually discriminate the letters of the
alphabet. Thev working individually with programmed instruction booklets.
are
Each page shows is to underline one of the two
a letter at the top; the child
letters placed lower on the page that matches the letter at the top; feedback is
provided when the page is turned. These children learn slowly, but they are
learning and so still experience success rather than failure during this hour.
These children were in a regular classroom last year.
Two other children can discriminate the letters, and now, they are learning to
pronounce the names of the letters. They are taking turns running cards through
a machine; each card has a letter printed on it, and a sound recording pro-
nounces the name. The children imitate the pronunciation.
Five children are sitting in a corner of the room with the teacher. These
children can read, pronounce, and give their own definitions of many words,
and they can read some sentences. However, they need help on word attack
skills for unfamiliar printed words. After some instruction in this small group,
the teacher will assign various lessons to be completed at another corner of the
room. There, each child will work with
accompanied by a sound tape
a booklet
describing the exercises and providing feedback. The tape is paced to give
instruction, to pause for pupil responses, and to give correct- answer feedback.
Four children are listening to "read along tapes" while silently reading from a
printed text.
One child is taking an oral test administered by the teacher's aide. Another
child has in his hand a completed written test for an objective; he is waiting for it

to be checked bv the aide. One child is checking off an objective for himself on a
record sheet on the wall; he has passed a self-graded test, using an answer key.
Another child is at the materials file, looking up the materials indicated by a
sheet giving him a new objective for study.
The noise level in the room is higher than in a conventional classroom, but it
is mainly productive noise, and the children are no longer distracted by it. The
teacher pauses from her small-group work to reprimand one boy who is annoy-
ing a classmate who is trying to read.
Over in the far corner of the room, one boy is lying on the floor reading a
sixth-grade-level book.
How can a teacher arrange for all these activities and conduct some direct

instruction with individuals and small groups? The diagnostic and placement
tests are keyed to objectives in a sequence, which in turn are keyed to varieties of
materials available for the objectives. The materials are arranged in files that the
306 Principles of Instructional Design

students have learned to use to gain access to materials. Thev also have learned
to return nonexpendable materials to their proper places in the file.

Still, do not spend a major portion of their time working alone.

the children
In the next hour, "show and tell" is scheduled for evervone since they can all
communicate at a common level of oral speech, although they vary widely in
reading ability. Also, in this particular school, only reading and mathematics
instructions are individualized. Other subjects are taught by conventional
methods. The children are able to operate the variety of equipment available.
The equipment is simple to operate, and instruction on its operation was given
at the beginning of the year.

IMPLEMENTING INSTRUCTIONAL EVENTS

As may be inferred from such a sketch of a tvpical hour of activity, media are
often employed for some of the events of instruction. Careful attention is also
given to the sequencing of objectives and to each child's progress in the
sequence.

Taking Account of Prior Learning

Diagnostic and placement tests are given at the beginning of the school year to
determine just which skills, in a carefully ordered sequence of objectives, each
student already has mastered and can recall at the time of testing. The results of
such tests determine which objective represents the starting point for an in-

dividual student. Frequent subsequent testing helps to update individual records

of masterv of prerequisites for later objectives in the series. In the case of reading
and mathematics, a single sequence of objectives is often adopted for all learners,
but the materials used and the pace of learning vary among learners. In scien e
and social studies, there are often core objectives assigned to all learners, wi i

enrichment or "excursion" objectives selected by the student according to

personal interest.

Gaining Attention

This event usually presents fewer problems in an individualized program than in

large-group instruction. Each student is usually eager to begin a new objective,
having achieved success on the previous objective. As soon as students obtain
the materials (and in some cases, the equipment) for a new objective, they
usually turn at once to the learning task. It is rare that more than one student at a
time is not actually working on the assigned objective.

Maintaining attention also is seldom a problem. The systematic cycles of

presenting a problem, requiring a response, and providing feedback, which are
built into the material, tend to maintain attention. In elementary grades, chil-
 Individualized Instruction 307

dren are often encouraged to "turn off the machine" or to "read for fun" or to
turn to something like clay modeling when they tire of a task. They then will
usually return to the task without prompting.

Informing the Student about Objectives

Owing to the highly structured nature of much of the learning materials, the
objective is often evident to the learners. However, each objective in the
sequence usuallv carries both a number and a name —the number to facilitate the
filing of material and the name as a shortened form of the objective. The
students, thus, become aware of the various objectives in the series. In small-
group sessions, when the teacher undertakes to initiate a new skill or to verify
completion of objectives, the objective is made evident if it is not already known
to the members of the group. It may be noted that under individually paced
programs, the composition of small groups shifts constantly. A group of five
who are all at the same point of progress on one day may not be at the same
common point on another day.
Although in general, there is no reason why objectives should not be given to
learners in terms that they can understand, this event does not appear to have as
much importance it does for loosely structured
for highly structured material as
of material, the student needs the objectives to
material. In the latter type
determine which portions of the material are most relevant so that selective
reading and review may be undertaken.

Stimulating Recall of Prerequisites

Recall of prerequisite learning also may be easy to achieve in a carefully se-

quenced, highlv structured program. The careful sequencing makes recall of
immediately prior learning highly probable, and the structure of materials makes
more probable the initial mastery of prerequisites. Also, the frequent progress
checks (usually after study of each objective) prevent cumulative forgetting that
could slow further learning.

Presenting the Stimulus Materials, Eliciting the Response,

Providing Feedback

Since individualized programs for elementary schools make much use of self-

instructional materials, it follows that there are built-in cycles of presenting the
stimulus information, requiring a response, and providing feedback. This fea-
ture is commonly found in the various print and nonprint media used for
individualized instruction. It may be the appropriate and precise management of
these events of instruction that represents one of the strongest features of
individualized programs. This strength, it may be noted, is primarily a feature of
the materials. The primary strengths of the teacher in such programs lie in
308 Principles of Instructional Design

managing and monitoring the entire system in the classroom and in ensuring
that personal guidance is available when provided materials and tests fail to
function adequately for an individual learner.

Providing Learning Guidance

Much of this event is also designed into instructional materials in the form of
prompts, cues, and suggestions to the learner. This function mav be blended in
with the event of providing the stimulus material in a somewhat more precise
manner than can be provided by a teacher, except when using the tutorial mode
of instruction.
Teachers, however, are often able to give a more general form of guidance
than the provided encoding cues. Teachers discuss with pupils which alternative
materials mav be best for them and which enrichment or elaboration objectives
they mav wish to choose. One of the advantages of individualized deliver}'
systems is that they give the teacher time to spend with individual pupils. Once
the pupils learn the basic procedures for pretesting, learning, and posttesting
and how to locate materials and equipment, the basic system runs itself. This
does not mean that the teacher is not busv. Often, there are times when students
must wait to see the teacher for guidance or testing. But gradually pupils learn
to signal the teacher of their needs and to turn in the meantime to enrichment
activities.

Individualized svstems can be a great boon to slow learners, protecting them

from inappropriate tasks and inappropriate instruction and, hence, helping
them to avoid failure. These svstems can also free fast learners from the boredom
of unnecessarv instruction, allowing time for more challenging activities. It is
the teacher, of course, who must see that learning arrangements are suitable for
each learner.

Assessing the Performance

For some may test themselves by use of an answer key. But at

objectives, learners
and more often than in large-group instruction, the teacher
least periodicallv,
makes the assessment with or without the use of written tests. Again, time freed
from other instructional events is available for this assessment bv the teacher.

Enhancing Retention and Transfer

Once the teacher has assessed performance and found it to be satisfactory in

terms of masterv or adequate according to acceptable standards, attention may
be turned to enhancing retention and transfer of learning. As shown in Chapter
14, group instruction is often suitable for this purpose. When several learners
have been assessed and found to be at the same point of progress in master}' of
given objectives, discussion led bv the teacher can be lively, interesting, and
 Individualized Instruction 309

effective. Students can hear each other's applications of skills or information,

and same time, progress may be made toward terminal objectives pertain-
at the
ing to attitudes or cognitive strategies. Other techniques for enhancing reten-
tion and transfer may be designed as part of the materials or may take the form
of projects selected to match student interests.
* Because the events of instruction can be arranged in the ways described,
learning in an individualized program is often perceived to be less difficult (and
perhaps more enjoyable) than in a large-group situation. Although it is fre-
quently mentioned that an individualized program requires self-management
and self-instruction, it may also be the case that given adequate motivation, such
a program is more precisely helpful to the learner than instruction in a large
group. Therefore, it need not be concluded that individualized instruction is

effective only for mature learners. Owing to the assured appropriateness of each
lesson in the series and to the precision of the instruction, it might be said that
this form of instruction is needed more by less mature learners. Adults and
college students, on the other hand, are expected to be able to discern appropri-
ate from inappropriate materials and to provide many of the instructional events
for themselves. For mature learners, the form and structure of individualized
programs may be expected to differ from those designed for younger students.

SYSTEMS FOR OLDER STUDENTS

In college-level instruction, several individualized methods have been developed

and fairly widely adopted. Two of the best known are the Keller Plan (Keller,
1966; Ryan, 1974) and the Audio-Tutorial Approach (Postlethwait, Novak,
and Murray, 1969).
As might be expected considering the maturity of the learners, the individual-
izedmethods employed at the college level are not as fine grained and precisely
controlled as those for elementary schools. Generally, the procedures are de-
signed to utilize an economical combination of large-group lecture sessions,
smaller quiz sessions, and independent study. Tests are employed to enable
students to participate in the most appropriate activities. Insofar as possible, the
mastery learning concept is adopted, within the limits of administrative policies
concerning the pursuit of courses beyond scheduled academic terms.
In college programs of this sort, students concentrate their study in the areas
needing the most work, as indicated by progress checks. Less use is made of the
small-step variety of learning materials. Instead, laboratory assistants are avail-
able to provide some individual tutoring when other methods fail. The typical
combination of conventional and special procedures results in a degree of
instructional precision that is perhaps intermediate between that obtained in
large groups and that described previously as appropriate for elementary pro-
grams. This may represent a reasonable degree of control in trying to enhance
leaning for adult learners without undue costs.
310 Principles of Instructional Design

An was de-
earlier strategy for individualizing learning at the college level
veloped by Pressey in the 1920s. He
termed the procedure adjunct auto-
later
instruction (Pressey, 1950). The strategy was quite straightforward; a regular
college textbook was employed, along with sets of practice test questions for
each chapter. Mechanical devices were used to provide "right-wrong" feedback
after each response to a practice test question. This procedure was employed in
regular classrooms, in independent study programs, and in special classes for
superior students (Pressey, 1950; Briggs, 1947, 1948). Adjunct autoinstruction
was not widelv adopted as a regular classroom procedure. Interestinglv enough,
questions about various ways of placing the adjunct questions in an overall study
procedure have become prominent in recent years (Frase, 1970; Hiller, 1974;
Rothkopf and Bisbicos, 1967).

VARIETIES OF INDIVIDUALIZED INSTRUCTION

Apart from the tvpes of delivery svstems described earlier for elementary and
secondary schools and for college instruction, the term individualized, instruction
has been used in reference to a diverse array of educational methods. Some of
these mav be described as follows:

1. Independent study plans: In which there agreement between a student and a

is

teacher on only the most general

of stated objectives to indicate the
level

purpose of studving. Students work on their own to prepare for some form of
final examination. No restrictions are placed upon students as to how they may
prepare for the examination. A course outline may or may not be provided. The
task may be described at the course level in such terms as "preparing for an
examination in differential calculus" or at the degree level as in honors pro-
grams in English universities. A similar procedure is used in the United States
in preparing for the doctoral comprehensive examination in many fields.

2. Self-directed study: Which mav involve agreement on specific objectives but with
no restrictions upon how the student learns. Here, the teacher may supply a list
of objectives that define the test performances required to receive credit for the
course; the teacher may also supply a list of readings or other resources
available, but the student is not required to use them. If a student passes the
test, he or she receives credit for the course.
3. Learner-centered programs: In which students decide a great deal for themselves
within broadly defined areas —
what the objective will be and when to terminate
one task and go to another. This degree of openness is sometimes found in
public schools and has been the customary stvle of operation for a few private,
special schools. Usually in public schools, learner choice is permitted only for
enrichment exercises and then onlv after certain required or "core" skills have
been mastered. Often, such activities are offered as an incentive to the student
to learn the core skills.

4. Self-pacing: Inwhich learners work at their own rates, but upon objectives set
bv the teacher and required of all students. In this case, all students may use the
same materials to reach the same objectives only the rate of progress is —
individualized.
 Individualized Instruction 311

5. Student-determined instruction: Providing for student judgment in any or of all

the following aspects of the learning: (a) selection of

of objectives; (b) selection
the particular materials, resources, or exercises to be used; (c) selection of a
schedule within which work on different academic subjects will be allocated;
(d) self-pacing in reaching each objective; (e) self-evaluation as to whether the
objective has been met; and (f) freedom to abandon one objective in favor of
another.
This description implies the possibility of more than 20 different ways in
which instruction may be said to be individualized or "learner determined" if
various permutations and combinations of elements controlled by the learner
are considered.
6. Computer-adaptive instruction: Pacing the learner by means of scores on pretests,
the learner's history of performance, and the learner's progress through the
lesson. The goal of computer- adaptive instruction is to customize the instruc-
tion for each learner based on learner analysis, alternative presentation strat-
egies, and knowledge database. Also called intelligent computer-assisted instruc-
a
tion (ICAI), research and development work in this area has been going on for
at least two decades. The rapid development of microcomputer capabilities has
accelerated efforts in designing instructional authoring systems that can pro-
duce ICAI. These systems are usually based on a technology called an expert
system.
Expert systems are computer programs which structure knowledge or pro-
cedures according to a set of rules. These rules may be based on knowledge
structures or presentation strategies or both (Tennyson and Rasch, 1988). As
an individual interacts with an expert system, the computer will ask for in-
formation it needs to make the next decision. If the computer is unable to make
a decision (according to the currently stored rules), it asks for a new rule. In this
way, an expert system is capable of "learning" through an interaction with an
expert. Currently, Merrill, Li, and Jones (1990a, 1990b) are working on such
an authoring system, which they believe will simplify the process of in-

structional design. However, worth noting that expert systems have been in
it is

use in the field of medicine for some time, and there are many barriers to their
use, not the least of which is the complexity of even a relatively simple system
(Richards, 1990).

Clearly, most of the varieties of individualized instruction tend to place

greater responsibility upon students for providing the events of instruction than
is the case for the delivery systems discussed in previous sections. For the most

part, these varieties also permit greater freedom of choice as to what the
objectives will be and how the objectives may be attained. For these reasons, the
latter methods have been employed mainly for selected groups of students.

MANAGEMENT OF INDIVIDUALIZED INSTRUCTION

may provide a large number of materials,

Systems of individualized instruction
each separate item of which keyed to an objective. Alternatively, use may be
is

made of existing materials to form a module of instruction by giving printed

312 Principles of Instructional Design

directions on how to use the materials to achieve one or more objectives. For
younger children, often an objective will be so limited in scope that it can be
mastered in an hour or less. For older students, a module may require a week or
two of study, and evaluation mav be made for a cluster of objectives rather than
for a single objective.
The management of the day-to-day progress of pupils is related closely to the
frequent progress checks that are keved either to single objectives or to groups
of objectives representing modules. Thus, the frequency of formal checks upon
pupil progress tends to decrease with the age of the learners. In a similar vein,
the frequency of responding (followed bv feedback) mav often also be decreased
for older learners; this feature is adjusted either by the way self- instructional
materials are designed or by the way a module is assembled. The management of
learning, then, is usually centered on single objectives for voung children and on
modules for older children.
Sometimes, the module will contain all the instructional materials needed to
pass a test on the objective. It usually also contains practice tests that the
students can use to judge their readiness for taking the actual test. In the event
that materials and resources phvsically independent of the module itself are to be
used, directions for how to locate and use them are included. Thus, the module
and its directions for using related materials allow the learner to go about the
learning task without directions from another person, except when difficulties
are encountered.
We now give further consideration to the nature of materials for individual-
ized procedures that are applicable to young learners and to those applicable to
adults.

Components for Young Learners

A typical individualized program of instruction for children mav be expected to
have somewhat different components than a program for adults. The procedures
for using the materials will also be different. The following are brief descriptions
of typical components of modules designed for children at about the sixth-grade
level, who are assumed to have some reading ability.

A List of Enabling Objectives

Often, the learner may benefit from seeing both the target objective for the
module and the prerequisite capabilities to be acquired. These may be shown
simply as a list, or they may be in the form of a learning hierarchy (described in
Chapter 12).

A Suggested Sequence of Activities

In part, the sequence of activities mav be derived from the sequence of enabling
objectives, and in some instances, alternative sequences may be chosen. The
 Individualized Instruction 313

sequence as a whole needs to make suitable provision for the enhancement of

retention and transfer. Sometimes, alternative materials, resources, or exercises
may be offered as options. mav be encouraged to
Students find for themselves
which materials seem suitable. One student may prefer or profit most from a
* programmed text; another may find a slide or videotape presentation more
effective.

A Menu of Modules
Some programs contain onlv required modules. The total menu, however,
should be designed to meet the needs of fast learners as well and not solelv those
of slow learners. Alternativelv, programs mav offer both core and enrichment
modules, and still others may consist entirely of student-chosen modules. The
student-selected modules may be designed to provide only self-evaluations of
student performance since the objectives represent what the student wants to
learn.
Programs may be designed to make use of the principles of contingency
management —
using a preferred (high-reward) activity as an inducement to
undertake a study activity. Often, such programs include procedures that give
the student opportunities to make "contracts," with some required minimum
number of modules to be completed by each student. The student may receive a
number of points at the outset, which he can "spend" to negotiate time to
complete a module; and he may, in turn, earn points for successful completion
within the contract period. The earned points, within limits, may then be spent
to earn free time for preferred new learning or for other kinds of preferred
activity.
A more extreme curriculum philosophy holds that there should be no mod-
ules and no objectives. According to this view, the learner would simply be put
into a learning environment that includes learning resources, laboratory materi-
als, supplies, and so on, perhaps attractively arranged to induce interest, but

with no requirements, points, or other rewards, other than the intrinsic reward
of enjoyment of learning.
Opinions differ greatly on whether the student should be required to learn or
even to trv to learn anything he does not voluntarily undertake. Opinions also
differ on how should be. Those who
specific objectives for individual learning
dislike specific objectives usually shun the use of modules, preferring an open
environment that permits the student to choose what is to be learned. It would
seem, however, that society must take responsibility for teaching children how
to live in our culture as productive, happy, responsible, adult citizens. Since it is
difficult to determine the exact nature of human capabilities, a child will need to
achieve his goals and to solve problems not yet foreseen by today's adults;
therefore, emphasis needs to be placed on intellectual skills and problem-solving
strategies rather than simply upon presently known "facts" (see Rohwer, 1971).
Programs in science and social studies are often designed to emphasize the
314 Principles of Instructional Design

attainment of "process" objectives, such as "the student will arrange numerical

data in tabular form."

Alternative Materials for Single Objectives

It is evident to most teachers that some children master a given learning

objective better by using one book, medium, or exercise than by using another
that mav have equally good content. In some cases, the reason may be obvious; a
poor reader will understand a videotape or slide series better than a book. In less
obvious cases, individual learning styles are cited, although the specific meaning
of this phrase is not entirelv clear. Research studies, however, have identified
few intellectual and personality characteristics that can be related to success with
specific forms or media of instruction (Briggs, 1968; see also Chapter 6). This
finding may result either from the existence of differing entering capabilities that
match the specific content of various materials or from the fact that instructional
events more appropriate to some individuals occur to a greater extent in certain
materials. It may be that features of the instructional materials —small versus
large steps; inductive versus deductive; concrete versus abstract; or other charac-
teristics of this sort —can be shown to be differently effective for different
learners. At anv rate, providing several versions of a module is often worthwhile.
One version might have a simpler vocabulary; one might employ a shorter
sentence length; and another might combine an outline or advance organizer
with a presentation that is technically complex.
The alternative-module concept clearly raises an economic question. Research
is needed to assess the extent of advantages of alternative materials so that these
can be considered in light of costs. Similar data are needed relevant to the
instance in which one form of materials is superior to other, less costly materials
for most learners.

A Feedback Mechanism
For young learners and lengthy modules, it may not be wise to wait until a test is
given to provide feedback. Feedback after small increments of study is usually
desirable. Feedback at frequent intervals of both text-based
is a built-in feature
and computer-programmed instruction. The effectiveness of many media, such
as television or film, can be improved by building in explicit provisions for
learner response and feedback. In addition to enhancing learning, such response
and feedback may suggest the need for diagnostic testing and remedial instruc-
tion or for restudv of the module when performance is poor.
Mechanical devices and chemicallv treated answer sheets can be used to
provide feedback after each response to practice questions. Television teachers
can pose questions after a brief lecture segment, pausing for the viewer to write
his answer or just to think of the answer; after the pause, feedback can be given.
Questions used with live lectures have also been found to benefit learning and
 Individualized Instruction 315

usually retention also. Classroom devices can be employed to provide immediate

automatic recording of students' answers (to multiple-choice questions) for
viewing by the teacher who can reprogram the lecture on the spot.
When a module is brief, or when the learner typically succeeds readily, a
s parallel form of the formal test on the objectives can be used to give feedback
after learning is completed. Some form of self-testing or response with correc-
tive feedback can usually be devised as part of each module. This enhances
learning and saves time for the teacher, who can then do individual remedial
teaching when all — valuable
other means fail a which teachers have
activity for
too time when employing conventional group
little Such pro-
instruction. a
cedure provides an added bonus — the teacher has time to guide thinking and
give added feedback on an individual basis when most needed.

Components for Adult Learners

The nature of both the materials and the procedures may properly be less highly
structured for college students or other experienced adult learners.

Objectives

Course objectives for adults may sometimes be quite precise and specific.
However, it may still be assumed that evaluation of learner performance can be
made at less frequent intervals than would be the case for children. Whether one
broad objective or many more specific ones are employed in modules, checks on
the performance of the adult learner are typically not made until after a rather
long period of study.

Directions

Directions for pursuing study may also be gready abbreviated for adult learners.
The learners may be provided with a list of resources or simply told to "use the
library and laboratory." The objective itself may be the main source of direc-
tions.

Learning Materials

Materials for learning may be highly structured, as in a programmed text;

semistructured, as in an outline or laboratory guide; or unstructured, as would
be the case when the student does library research on a topic.

Evaluation of Performance

Adult students may have a few weeks or an entire semester to complete an

instructional unit. While working on the unit, the student usuallv receives
316 Principles of Instructional Design

feedback from a teacher or advisor and from conferences providing reactions to

draft plans and preliminary reports. Students mav also receive direct instruction
on a variety of subordinate capabilities, such as writing skills, techniques for
finding sources, and others. Usually, the evaluation is based on the appropriate-
ness of procedures employed, competence in reporting and interpreting data,
and ability to defend a rationale for the product or studv that has been com-
pleted.

Functions of Modules

Modules may specify activities for groups, small or large. In such instances, a
class chart shows the progress of each pupil and is used to form groups that are
at the same point of progress.
Modules can also be designed as directions for laboratorv or field exercises or
for independent learning not based on instructional materials. In one industrial
course for adults, the learners were given the entire set of course objectives and
shown where they could go to take tests. Thev were then free to visit emplovees
in appropriate departments to observe, ask questions, or see other ways to learn.
It should be noted that modules need not be restricted to cognitive objectives.

Objectives in the affective or motor domain can be devised equallv well. In shop
courses, where machine time must be carefullv planned, all needed cognitive
learning can be made to take place before a skill is practiced with the equipment.
This not only saves money for duplicate machines, but also avoids injury to
persons and damage to equipment bv ensuring that the trainee knows safety
precautions and correct procedures before having access to the machine. In
many cases, a simulator (Chapter 11) of the actual machine also brings benefits
in cost, safety, and efficiency. Simple training devices can be used for parts of the
total task, reserving the more expensive, complex simulator for consolidation of
skills and practice of emergency procedures in a safe environment.

USE OF MATERIALS IN INDIVIDUALIZED INSTRUCTION

A particular set of instructional materials has been developed for use with the
individualized svstem called Project PLAN (described in Weisgerber, 1971).
This particular system will be described to provide a concrete illustration of how
such materials can be employed in individualizing instruction. PLAN was used
by a number of schools throughout the United States in the mid-1970s.
The instructional objectives of PLAN formed the basis of a curriculum in
language arts, social studies, science, and mathematics for grades 1—12. Within
each grade and subject, these objectives were organized into modules ofstudy for
use by students. Usually, five or six objectives constituted a module. A program
of studies was developed bv the student and teacher, and this program guided
the student in selecting modules appropriate to his needs and interests.
 Individualized Instruction 317

A central feature of the PLAN system involved the use of a computer, a

PLAN was a "computer-
terminal for which was usually located in each school.
supported" system. The computer received and stored records about each
student's previous study, progress, and performance record. On a daily basis,
information was printed out for the teacher indicating (1) which lesson objec-
tives were completed by which students and (2) what activities were begun or
completed by each student. In addition, the computer furnished periodic re-
ports of progress on each student. In general, the information stored in the
computer constituted a base of essential information for planning individual
student programs and guiding student learning activities.

Modules and Teaching-Learning Units

A PLAN module was a unit of study lasting two weeks, on the average.
Sometimes, modules dealt with single topics, sometimes not. They were col-
lections of activities representing closely related objectives, such as those in
writing, speaking, and spelling. In any case, modules were composed of several
teaching-learning units (TLUs), each of which had a single objective.
The TLU began with a learning objective that told the student what was to be
learned. Following this was a list of a number of learning activities. A typical
TLU pertaining to a social module for the seventh grade is shown in Figure
15-1.
As will be seen, the TLU described the learning activities to be undertaken by
the student and the references to be studied. Self-test questions and discussion
questions were also included. In the early grades, pictorial techniques were used
to communicate to pupils the objective and the learning activities. An accompa-
nying sheet, called the activity sheet, described additional activities for the
student to do in learning about the topic of the TLU. Once the activities given
in the TLU and the activity sheet were completed, the student should have been
able to do what was called for in the objective and was then ready to take a
performance test. If the performance was satisfactory, the student moved for-
ward to a new TLU; if not, additional work was suggested by the teacher.

Teacher Directions

The teacher directions that accompanied each TLU were designed to com-
municate the objective, the plan for student activities, materials needed, and test
directions. Using this sheet, the teacher was able to see at a glance what kinds of
activities —
needed planning whether discussions, game playing, field trips, or
self-study by the student. The teacher directions made evident which modes of
instruction might be needed, such as small-group work, partners working
together, tutoring, or other modes. Thus, it was possible for the teacher to
advise the student about options for learning activites.
 318 Principles of Instructional Design

Patriots and Politicians 4712-1

OBJECTIVE
Identify reasons for the development of political parties in the United States.

When the founders of our country were writing the Constitution, there were
many about what should be done. Read The Promise of
different opinions
America, pp. 140-143. and Promise of America: The Starting Line. pp. 129-134.
Make a list of at least four issues on which the authors of the Constitution
disagreed. Were these the first differences of opinion among Americans?

When George Washington became President, there were no political parties.

Read The Promise of America, pp. 153-155. With a partner, look at the
filmstrip. The Beginning of Political Parties. If you were in George Washington's
place, what problems would you have had to deal with? Discuss this question
with your partner.

Raising money was a

big problem for President Washington and his Secretary
of the Treasury. Alexander Hamilton. Read The Promise of America, pp.
157-162. Which groups in the colonies supported Hamilton's policies? Why?
Which groups opposed them? Why?

Americans also differed on how to treat foreign countries. Read about these
differences in The Promise of America, pp. 164-167. and History of Our United
States, pp. 206-208. Why did some Americans favor France and some favor
England?

FIGURE 15-1 An Example of a TLU from Project PLAN, with an Objective in Seventh-Grade Social
Studies
(Reprinted by permission of Profiles Corporation, Iowa Citv, Iowa.)
 Individualized Instruction 319

Not long after Washington became President it became apparent that there
were two major groups with different solutions to our problems. Ope of these
groups was called the Federalists: the other was called the Anti-Federalists, or
the Republicans These two groups became the first two political parties.
Political parties are organizations of men with similar views who work together
for the same goals Read about the beginnings of political parties in History of
Our United States, pp. 205-206. and The Promise of America, pp. 162-164.
Now do the Activity Sheet.

Have a debate Pretend that you are a farmer and a supporter

with a partner.
of Jefferson. a merchant and a supporter of Hamilton. Try to
Your partner is

convince your partner that your party's programs are best for the United States.

George Washington was very disappointed by the development of political

parties. He believed that everyone should be able to agree on policies that
were good for everyone in the country. Discuss the following questions with a
partner

a. Were Hamilton's programs "better" for everyone in the country than

Jefferson's programs?

b. Can we say that there really is one program that is best for the whole
country?

c. Why do some people favor one program rather than another?

d. Today's political leaders also say their programs will be good for
everyone in the country. Is it possible that these programs might be
good for some people and bad for others?

Look through the newspaper. Can you find examples of politicians who
disagree about what is good for the whole country?

8 In the filmstrip there is a statement that "the formation of our first political
parties was an important development in the democratic process of
government.'' Would Washington have agreed with this statement? Do you
agree? Do you think that is possible to have a democratic government
it

without competing parties? Can you think of any alternatives to the two party
system?

OBJECTIVE
Identity reasons (or the development of political parties in the United States.
320 Principles of Instructional Design

Instructional Guides

Other materials that sometimes accompanied TLUs were instructional guides.

Such guides provided direct instruction to the student when it was unavailable
in published sources. The}' often made it possible for the student to develop an
TLU. Figure 15-2 is an
intellectual skill necessarv for further progress in a
example of an instructional guide in fourth-grade language arts, related to the
objective, "given a root word, change its form or class bv adding suffixes."

Performance Measures

When the student had completed a TLU, he took a test designed to assess his
performance on the stated objectives. In some instances, the test had a multiple-
choice format that could be scored by the computer. In others, his performance
was observed and evaluated by the teacher in accordance with definite standards.
The teacher then transmitted this evaluation to the computer for record-keeping
purposes. Computer printouts of performance records for all students were
ready for the teacher's use on the next day.

Materials Handling

One distinctive feature of materials in modular form is that they tend to be

arranged in smaller "chunks" than is the case with traditional instruction. The

materials for a single objective must be either phsyically separate from the
materials for other objectives, or they must be clearly identified and indexed to
match the objective and the test for the module.
Whether the materials for a module represent one chapter in a book, several
chapters from different books, or a specially designed programmed instruction
sequence, there must be a system by which the student, the teacher, and the
teacher's aides can locate the materials quickly. This requires either an indexing
system or the separate physical packaging of all materials for each module. The
materials may be collected into a folder, which is properly stored for easy
retrieval. Some kind of numbering system is convenient to use, both for plan-
ning and record keeping for each pupil and for locating and storing materials. It
is handy, for example, to have "Module No. 1, converting fractions to de-

on planning sheets, on record sheets, and on the materials

cimals," listed
themselves when
filed on shelves or in cabinets.
A planning sheet of some kind is needed for each student, particularly when
some freedom in choosing objectives is given to the student. In such a case, the
student may confer with the teacher at intervals to plan in advance for taking
one or more modules. If, on the other hand, all students begin with Module No.
1 and complete as many modules as time permits, a single sheet for the entire

class may be used for planning, monitoring, and record keeping.

It is no small task, even after the modules themselves have been designed and
 Individualized Instruction 321

Food for Thought 1413-1

INSTRUCTIONAL GUIDE

E very pet needs pet food, EVEN pet words like the little feller you see here.

The best pet food for pet words

happens to be Suffix Leaves like those
on the bush here.

A suffix is a group of letters which

when attached can change the
meaning and the form-class of the
word.

Let's feed our hungry word and see what happens!

Now let's find out if our pet word has changed form-class. Remember the test
sentences:

Noun: I have one noise. I have many noises.

noiseless noiseless.
Adjective: The noisy boy seemed very noisy.

noisily. Noisily
Adverb: The boy ate the cake noiselessly. Noiselessly he ate the cake

Can the pet word noise change form-class to become a verb? Try the verb test to find
out! Write your answer below. Discuss your answer with a partner

FIGURE 15-2 An Example of an Instructional Guide from Project PLAN

(Reprinted by permission of Profiles Corporation, Iowa City, Iowa.)
322 Principles of Instructional Design

developed, to be sure there is a sufficient supply of each module and that the
supply is stored for ready access, selection of material, and return of material. If
some of the materials are expendable, someone (perhaps an aide) must be sure
that after each use, the expendable portion is restocked andmade ready for use
again. A further problem is updating module material. As new material becomes
available it must be cross-referenced to the objectives and
test items and put into
modular form. It is this maintenance that sometimes appears to spell the
downfall of individualized instruction. Although there tended to be sufficient
funding for the development of individualized systems like PLAN, a lack of
maintenance may have been a major factor leading to their discontinuance
'

(Reiser, 1987).

TEACHER TRAINING FOR INDIVIDUALIZED INSTRUCTION

At first glance, the task of storing, arranging, and using modules for instruction
may lead one to believe more trouble than it is worth. Indeed, teachers
it is all

need training in how to manage individualized instruction. At first, such train-

ing mav lead the teacher to feel that his most cherished functions are being
usurped by the system and that he is being asked to perform only the tasks of a
librarian or clerk. This is because some of the teacher's tasks are new and strange
compared with those required under a conventional method of teaching. All
teachers need special training for conducting and managing individualized
instruction, and they cannot be expected to function adequately, let alone
enthusiastically, without such training. In the future, as such training is more
frequendy included as a regular part of preservice teacher training programs, the
problem will likely be handled at that point in the teacher's education rather
than later on.
Even with appropriate training, not all teachers will like the individualized
approach. Some experienced teachers will not wish to relinquish their familiar
role. Others, who are tired of saying approximately the same thing year after
year in class, will welcome the change in role. Once teachers are trained and
experienced in the new role, most come to prefer it, usually after one year
(Briggs and Aronson, 1975).

Monitoring Student Progress

Monitoring the progress made by students consists of two related functions: (1)
knowing what each student is undertaking to learn and (2) knowning how fast
and how well each is progressing. A glance at the class chart can show which
modules a student has finished and which one is being currendy attempted. For
a module to be recorded as finished, the student must have met some minimum
standard of performance on a test or other evaluation of achievement of the
objective. Sometimes, this standard is stated in the objectives, as "by solving
 Individualized Instruction 323

correctly eight of 10 linear equations." At other times, a product is to be

evaluated: a laboratory report, a work of art, or an analysis of an editorial with
respect to evidence of bias. To make such evaluations as objective and reliable as
possible, a "grading sheet" or "criterion sheet" may be used; this sheet lists the
^ features to be looked for in the student product and delineates some system for
deciding whether it meets the standard. For example, points may be assigned on
each separate feature to be evaluated; or the number of features present and
satisfactory may be counted. Either of these techniques is preferable to making a
single overall judgment, not only because it improves the evaluation, but also
because it can serve a diagnostic function —
it can show the student where

improvement is needed. This same criterion sheet can be given to the student at
the onset of instruction and, thereby, can function to inform about what is
expected, suggesting how it may be done and stating how the product will be
evaluated.
Some done orally. By discussing the module and the work
evaluations can be
done on by the learner, the teacher can often test in a more probing fashion
it

than can be done in written form. The assessment can also involve the planning
of the next work to be undertaken or the remedial work needed. Although oral
tests may be less highly standardized than written ones, they are often con-
venient and effective when conducted with an individual student.
Regardless of how progress is monitored, the teacher usually knows more
about the progress of each student in a well-designed individual plan than when
group instruction is used. One reason is that in individualized instruction every
student responds to even' question. Even if all studentswork on the same
objectives, this is a desirable feature. Of course, when studentswork on unique
objectives or unique clusters of them, evaluation must be done individually.

Assessment of Student Performance

The performance of students is assessed throughout the conduct of an individu-

alized instruction program to achieve a number of purposes: (1) initial place-
ment of students in an approximate level with respect to first assignments in
each subject, (2) assessment of master)' of each module and of the completion of
instructional objectives on enrichment of tasks, (3) diagnosing learning difficul-
ties in order to identify needed assignments, and (4) measuring student progress
in areas of the curriculum over a yearly period.

Assessment of Mastery

The assessment of student performance is of particular importance to an in-

dividualized system, particularly in the areas of intellectual where new
skills

assignments are made on the basis of master)' of prerequisite skills. Such

day-to-day assessment should not be considered a matter of formal testing, but
instead likened to the informal probing typically done by every teacher in the
324 Principles of Instructional Design

classroom. It differs from the latter not in its formality of administration, but in
its provision of preestablished standards (criteria) used by the teacher or bv the
student to judge when mastery has been achieved. Criteria for mastery are
specified inprograms designed for individualized instruction, along with pro-
cedures and items used for the observation of individual student performance.

Diagnostic Testing

When a student encounters a difficult}' with an assignment, a brief diagnostic

test is typicallv administered by the teacher or aide. Diagnostic procedures
provide an indication of prerequisite skills and information that have been
inadequately learned or forgotten by the student. They, therefore, provide an
indication to the teacher of a desirable next assignment or review assignment
that will reestablish the necessary competence in the individual student.

Attitude Assessment

The assessment of student attitudes in areas such as cooperation, helping,

control of aggressive acts, and others may be done by the teacher by means of
checklists completed at periodic intervals. Other socially desirable attitudes of
citizenship, which mav be prominent objectives in social studies instruction, can
be assessed in other ways, as by questionnaries.

Typical Daily Activities

The various activities of managing an individualized svstem suggest typical daily

activitiesof students, teachers, teachers' aides, and (when applicable) student
tutors. As all these participants gain experience with individualized methods,
things go more smoothly. At first, there may be quite a bit of "slack time" while
a pupil is waiting for help or to be told what to do next. Gradually, the pupil
becomes more skilled as an independent learner, and he finds his way about
within the system and with the resources available. Progressing from a rather
harassed feeling at first, to a calm, easy pacing, the teacher also becomes both
more skilled and more at ease. Initiallv, it may seem that there are too many
things to keep track of, but this changes with time.
Student activities are often quite varied over a relatively short time. Especially
when an one course or classroom is engaged in an
entire school rather than just
individualized svstem, the concept of flexible scheduling is combined with
individualized instruction. Then, a student mav spend most of one day on one
subject, but the next dav he may be engaged in brief activities ranging over many
subjects. This freedom to concentrate heavilv at one point but to diversify at
other points relieves schooling of much of the boredom resulting from the same
schedule everv dav.
A student mav, thus, move from a studv carrel, to a videotape or slide area, to
a small-group activitv, to a conference with one or more teachers, to a test
station, and on to band practice or basketball, all in less than one complete
 Individualized Instruction 325

school day. At other times, a three-hour laboratory and writing session may
complete the work in chemistry for a week.
Teachers usually spend some time each day for advance planning sessions with
one to six students; they may review progress and test results and give next
assignments to other students. On still other occasions, the teacher may do
individual diagnosis and remedial instruction or confer about a change in a
planned schedule. Usually, the teacher arranges and conducts small-group ses-
sions for groups of students who are at approximately the same point in their
learning process.
To a great extent, students and aides maintain the materials files once they are
taught the filing system. Teacher's aides often administer and score tests, help
keep records, and help students find materials they need. They may also serve as
tutors and generally provide back-up assistance when the teacher is especially
busv. In general, their role is to help implement the plans agreed upon between
teacher and student.

Classroom Control

Although, in general, the principles of classroom control and discipline are the
same for individualized as for group instruction, several factors usually tend to
minimize discipline problems in the individualized method. First, the personal
attention and consideration given to individual students and to their plans,
ambitions, and interests all tend to motivate them positively toward achieve-
ment of success. Second, the method is designed to promote success in learning,
and this becomes rewarding in itself and motivating for continued effort. Third,
the teacher spends less time teaching the by a group procedure; this leaves
class

fewer opportunities for a student to engage the attention of the entire class with
his attention-seeking behavior. The teacher's dealing with a disturbance or lack
of attention on the part of a student is less likely to be noticed by the entire
group. All these factors help lessen the traditional adversary relationship that
tends to grow between teachers and students.
Since a system of individualized instruction is clearly designed to help each
pupil succeed, fair-minded voungsters usuallv respond favorably. Just as the
system discourages "baiting" of the teacher, it also discourages public confronta-
tions in which neither side wishes to "back down." Finally, it removes tempta-
tion for a teacher to employ sarcasm or ridicule of poor work. It quietly reminds
the teacher that the goal is learning, not platform performance or crowd
psychology. Most important of all, an individualized system emphasizes learn-
ing and achievement, privately attained and privately evaluated, by a student
who has accepted major responsibility for his learning.

Contingency Management

Techniques of contingency management are of great usefulness in the adminis-

tration of a svstem of individualized instruction. In simply stated form, these are
326 Principles of Instructional Design

techniques the teacher uses to arrange successions of student activities in such a

way that an initially nonpreferred activity will be followed by a preferred
activity, thus providing reinforcement for the former. The concept of reinforce-
ment contingencies has been developed and applied to the activities of teaching
by Skinner (1968). Application of the techniques of contingency management
to school situations has been described bv a number of writers (Homme,
Czanyi, Gonzales, and Rechs, 1969; Buckley and Walker, 1970; Madsen and
Madsen, 1970).
When used properly, contingency management aids in accomplishment of
three objectives that form a part of successful instruction:

1. Establishing and maintaining orderly student behavior, freeing the classroom

from disruption and distraction, and aiming students toward productive learn-
ing activities
2. Managing learning so as to instill in students a positive liking for learning and
for the accomplishments to which it leads
3. Capturing the interest of students in desirable problem-solving activities as

sources of satisfaction for master)' of the intellectual skills involved in them

In general, the teacher needs to learn to identify differences in the interests,

likes, and dislikes of individual students, and to employ these in selecting
specific contingencies to achieve a task-oriented learning environment.

MEDIA DEVELOPMENT FOR INDIVIDUALIZED INSTRUCTION

One of the primary roles of the teacher in individualized instruction is manage-

ment of the system. Because the materials largely take over the role of instruc-
tion, the role of the instructor changes to that of manager and maintainer of the
system. Initially, teachers resist this role, but as previously mentioned, this
resistance diminishes with continued experience. After becoming accustomed to
the new role, teachers usually prefer individualized systems over traditional
teaching. However, experience has indicated that satisfactory performance of
individualized svstems depends upon maintenance of appropriate procedures. It
is owing to a lack of continuing support for these routines that individualized

systems typically fail.

What are some The technology of media has changed

possible solutions?
drasticallv since themid-1970s. Microcomputers have made it possible for
teachers to have a personal computer in their classrooms for the purposes of
instruction and management. These small computers can provide the processing
capability that previously could only be provided by expensive mainframes. Of
particular importance is the fact that it is possible to use microcomputers as
Most research on computer- assisted instruction
instructional deliver)' systems.
(CAI) has shown it to be at least as effective as other modes.
The main problem facing individualized instruction continues to be the
 Individualized Instruction 327

development of materials and the maintenance of the system. Perhaps these new
technologies will demand an even more novel role for the teacher, that of
instructional designer—developer. This would be an entirely new role for the
teacher who is trained to deliver instruction in a conventional lecture-and-
discussion classroom format.
Computers are not the onlv new technology that can be employed in instruc-
tion. Video technology, which was in the past very expensive and not particular-
ly well used, has undergone a revolutionary change. Formerly bulk} and hard to 7

use, equipment is now light, compact, and relatively inexpensive. A teacher can
learn to operate a videocamera recorder unit in 15 minutes. The problem lies in
training teachers how best to use this equipment to support and maintain
individualized instruction.
Other new technology combines the use of the computer and laser videodisc
libraries in theform of information retrieval systems. A related technology is
electronic "desk top" publishing. Using computers, it is possible to "down load"
text and graphics from databases and to reconfigure and print this material on
high-quality laser printers. It is conceivable that teachers could use this technol-
ogy to produce a customized text for each student (or selected groups of
students) in their classes. Information technology (the computer management
of information and communication) will certainly have an effect on our in-
dividual lives. In what ways it will be used to support individualized instruction
are matters yet to be determined.
A number of researchers such as Bork (1985), Park and Tennyson (1983),
Ross (1984), and others continue to ask questions regarding the role of com-
puters in instructional systems. From this modern work, one can predict the
simplification of computer software to the point where teachers can quickly and
easily develop lessons to meet individual student needs. Many of these advanced
conceptions of the uses of technology to solve the 2-sigma problem are exciting
to contemplate but will require reconstruction of teacher training curricula if
thev are to have lasting effects on instruction.
The history of technological solutions to educational problems does not
provide grounds for unusual optimism. What needs to be emphasized is that
technology has been proved to be effective (Suppes and Machen, 1978). Per-
haps even newer technology can be found to alleviate some of the problems
related to costs associated with access and maintenance.

SUMMARY
Individualized instruction is designed by the same processes of planning that
apply to design of individual lessons for conventional group instruction. Our
previous descriptions of performance objectives, learning hierarchies, sequenc-
ing, and employment of appropriate instructional events and conditions of
learning apply to the design of modules for individualized instruction.
328 Principles of Instructional Design

It is the delivery system that primarily distinguishes the design of modules from
the design of lessons. The characteristics of materials for individualized instruc-
tion include the following:

1. Modules are usually more distinctly self- instructional than are conventional
lessons. More of the needed instructional events and conditions of learning are
designed into the materials making up the module than is the case for con-
ventional materials.
2. The materials incorporated into modules do more of the direct teaching,
whereas in conventional methods, the teacher presents more of the necessary
information. Thus, the role of the teacher changes somewhat. Individualized
instruction depends to a lesser degree on the teacher's function as provider of
information; more stress is placed on counseling, evaluating, monitoring, and
diagnosing.
3. Some systems provide alternative materials and media for each objective, thus
letting the selection vary according to the learner's preferences as to style of
learning.

Modules for individualized instruction sometimes contain all the materials,

exercises,and tests needed. In other instances, they refer the learner to external
materials and activities at appropriate times. A single module usually includes
the following as a minimum:

1. A performance objective
2. A set of materials and learning activities either self-contained in the module or
external to the module
3. A method for self-evaluation of mastery of the objective
4. A provision for verification of the learning outcome by the teacher

As a consequence of its nature, individualized instruction typically provides

more frequent feedback and more frequent progress checks than is the case for
conventional instruction. It may permit more freedom of choice on the part of
the learner, depending on the extent to which objectives are optional or re-
quired. Usually, as a minimum, the learner sets his own pace in learning
activities.

Management of individualized instruction requires a way to index and store

modules, a way to schedule modules to be used by each learner, a way to
monitor pupil progress, and a way to assess performance. Sometimes, "con-
tracts" are arranged to provide for required work, for enrichment work, and for
earned free time for activities the learner prefers.

Classroom control problems are usually less in individualized instruction than

need special training in the man-
in conventional instruction. Teachers usually
agement of such systems. Once they master the necessary routines, they often
prefer individualized to conventional methods.
New technologies offer a variety of opportunities as vehicles for the deliver)'
of instruction in individualized form. Computer-aided instruction appears to be
 Individualized Instruction 329

used with increasing frequency in schools and workplaces. Computers also make
possible rapid access to knowledge banks and the development of instructional
materials designed for individual student use. Video technology has also ad-
vanced to a degree that makes the fabrication of video lessons or modules
relatively inexpensive. It is possible that new technological advances of these and
other varieties will make individualized instruction more readily available and
maintainable in the vears to come.

References

Bloom, B. S. (1984). The 2-sigma problem: The search for methods of group instruction
as effective as one-to-one tutoring. Educational Researcher, 13(6), 4—16.
Bork, A. (1985). Personal computers for education. New York: Harper & Row.
Briggs, L. J. (1947). Intensive classes for superior students. Journal of Educational
Psychology, 39, 207-215.
Briggs, L. J. (1948). The development and appraisal of special procedures for superior students,
and an analysis of the effects of knowing of results. Unpublished doctoral dissertation,
Ohio State University, Columbus, OH.
Briggs, L. J. (1968). Learner variables and educational media. Review of Educational
Research, 38, 160-176.
Briggs, L. J., & Aronson, D. (1975). An interpretive study of individualized instruction in
the schools: Procedures, problems, and prospects. (Final Report, National Institute of
Education, Grant No. NIE-G- 740065). Tallahassee, FL: Florida State University.
Buckley, N. K., & Walker, H. M. (1970). Modifying classroom behavior: A manual of
procedures for classroom teachers. Champaign, IL: Research Press.
Edling, J. V. (1970). Individualized instruction: A manual for administrators. Corvallis,
OR: DCE Publications.
EPIE (1974, lanuarv). Evaluating instructional svstems. Educational product report: An
in-depth report (No. 58).
Frase, L. T. (1970). Boundarv conditions for mathemagenic behavior. Review of Educa-
tional Research, 40, 337-348.
Hiller, J. H. (1974). Learning from prose text: Effects of readability level, inserted
questions difficulty, and individual differences. Journal of Educational Psychology, 66,
202-211.
Homme, L., Czanvi, A. P., Gonzales, M. A., 8c Rechs, J. R. (1969). How to use

contingency contracting in the classroom. Champaign, IL: Research Press.

Keller, F. S. (1966). A personal course in psychology. In R. Ulrich, R. Stachnik & J.

Mabrv (Eds.), The control of behavior. Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman.

Madsen, C. H., Jr., & Madsen, C. K. (1970). Teaching/discipline: Behavioral principles
toward a positive approach. Boston: Allvn 8c Bacon.
Merrill, M. D., Li, Z., and Jones, M. K. (1990a). Limitations of first generation
instructional design. Educational Technology, 30(1), 7—11.
Merrill, M. D., Li, Z., and Jones, M. K. (1990b). Second generation instructional design
(ID2). Educational Technology, 30(2), 7-14.
Park, D., 8cTennvson, R. D. (1983). Computer-based instructional svstems for adaptive
education: A review. Contemporary Education Review, 2(2), 121—135.
Postlethwait, S. N., Novak, J., & Murray, H. T., Jr. ( 1969) The audio
. tutorial approach to
learning (2nd ed.). Minneapolis: Burgess.
330 Principles of Instructional Design

Pressev, S. L. (1950). Development and appraisal of devices providing immediate

tests and concomitant self- instruction. Journal ofPsychol-
automatic scoring of objective
ogy, 29, 417-447.
Reiser, Robert A. (1987). Instructional technology: A history. In R. M. Gagne (Ed.),
Instructional technology: Foundations. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
Richards, B. (1990). Should instructional designers design expert systems? Educational
Technology Research and Development, 37(3), 63-71.
Rohwer, W. D., Jr. (1971). Prime rime for education: Early childhood or adolescence?
Harvard Educational Review, 41, 316-341.
Ross, S. M. (1984). Matching the lesson to the student: Alternative adaptive designs for
individualized learning systems. Journal of Computer-Based Instruction, 11, 41—48.
Rothkopf, E. Z., & Bisbicos, E. E. (1967). Selective facilitative effects of interspersed
questions in learning from written materials. Journal of Educational Psychology, 58,
56-61.
Ryan, B. A. (1974). PSI: Keller's personalized system of instruction, an appraisal. Washing-
ton, DC: American Psychological Association.
Skinner, B. F. (1968). The technology of teaching. New York: Appleton.
Suppes, P., 8c Machen, E. (1978). The historical path from research and development to
operational use of CAI. Educational Technology, 18 (4), 9-12.
Talmage, H. (Ed.). (1975). Systems of individualized education. Berkeley, CA:
McCutchan.
Tennyson, R. D., 8c Rasch, M. (1988). Linking cognitive theory to instructional
prescriptions. Instructional Science, 17(4), 369-385.
Weisgerber, R. A. (Ed.). ( 1971). Developmental efforts in individualized instruction. Itasca,
IL: Peacock.
 Evaluating Instruction
16

E I very designer of instruction wants to have assur-

ance that his topic, or course, or total system of instruction
learning in the schools. This means that he wishes to at least
is valuable for
know whether his
newly designed course or system works in the sense of achieving its objectives.
More importantly, perhaps, he is interested in finding out whether his product
works better than some other system it is designed to supplant.
The evaluation of instruction and the evaluation of educational systems are
related but different problems. Learning is a complex enterprise because there
are many variables other than the quality of instruction that affect it. This is
illustrated in the classic work of Carroll (1963), who describes a "school
learning model." This model identifies the following variables: learner per-
severance, time allowed for learning (opportunity), learner aptitude (subject
specific), learner ability to understand (general intelligence), and quality of
instruction. Each of these variables affects either the time an}' particular learner
needs to learn any given skill or the time that the learner will actually spend.
Most design models place a great deal of emphasis on improving the quality of
instruction through the use of formative evaluation. However, according to the
Carroll model, in order to evaluate instruction, one must also consider the
motivation of the learner and also other environmental variables, such as oppor-
tunity to spend the time needed.
Indications of how well an instructional product or system performs are best
obtained from systematically gathered evidence. The means of gathering, ana-

331
332 Principles of Instructional Design

lyzing,and interpreting such evidence are collectively called methods of evalua-

tion,which is the subject of this final chapter. The placement of this chapter, bv
the way, should not be taken to indicate that the planning of evaluation for
instruction should be undertaken as a final step. Quite the opposite is true; as
will be shown, the design of evaluation requires principles of instructional
planning that have been described in even' chapter of this book.
Evidence sought in an enterprise whose purpose is the evaluation of instruc-
tion should be designed to answer at least the following specific questions
concerning a lesson, topic, course, or instructional svstem:

1. To what extent have the stated objectives of instruction been met?

2. In what ways and to what degree is it better than the unit it will supplant?
3. What additional, possibly unanticipated, effects has it had and to what extent
are these better or worse than the supplanted unit?

These are but a small subset of the questions that are posed in the field of
educational evaluation in general (cf. Popham, 1975). These three questions

may best be considered critical ones for the evaluation of an instructional product
or procedure. Before discussing them further,we attempt in the next section to
provide a brief review of the larger context to which thev belong.

EDUCATIONAL EVALUATION

In its most general sense, evaluation in education is to assess the worth of a variety
of states or events, from small to large, from the specific to the very general. One
can speak legitimatelv of the evaluation of students, of teachers, of administra-
tors. Evaluation can be undertaken of educational products, the producers of such
projects, or even of evaluation proposals (Scriven, 1974). Methods of evaluation
applicable to manv different aspects of educational svstems and institutions have
developed rapidlv over the past several years. The subject of educational evalua-
tion requires a book of its own. Here, we shall be able to indicate only the main
ideas of some prominent methods.

Scriven's Evaluation Procedures

Scriven (1967, 1974) has proposed and tried out evaluation procedures that he
considers applicable to educational products, courses, curricula, and projects
proposing educational change. One of the outstanding conceptions proposed by
Scriven is called goal-free evaluation. In essence, this means that an evaluation
undertakes to examine the effects of an educational innovation and to assess the
worth of these effects, whatever thev are. The evaluator does not confine himself
to the stated objectives of a new product or procedure, but rather seeks to assess
and evaluate outcomes of any sort. Thus, changes in teacher attitude might
 Evaluating Instruction 333

occur with the introduction of a scheme for using parent volunteers to tutor
children in arithmetic. Such a change in attitude would be assessed in a goal-free
evaluation not simply as an "unanticipated outcome," but as one of a number of
effects that a new procedure might produce.
The total scope of educational evaluation, as Scriven sees it, extends from the
^establishment of a need through the assessment of effects to a determination of
and the likelihood of continued support. The following list
cost effectiveness
summarizes suggestions of the assessments of worth that need to be made in
evaluating a new educational program or product (Scriven, 1974):

1 Need: Establishing that the proposed product will contribute to the health or
survival of a system
2. Market: Determining the existence of a plan for getting the product used
3. Performance infieldtrials: Evidence of performance of the product or program

under typical conditions of use

4. Consumer performance: The appropriateness with which the product is ad-
dressed to, and likely to be used by, true consumers (teachers, principles,
students)
5. Performance —Comparison: Performance of the product compared with criti-

callv competitive products

6. Performance—Long-term: Data indicating performance over period extend-
a
ing beyond intitial field trials

7. Performance— Side Outcomes other than the primary objective, revealed

effects:

by goal-free assessment
8. Performance— Indication that the processes of instruction are
Process: pro- as
posed the product
in
9. Performance— Causation: Demonstration that the observed are caused
effects

by the product or program

10. Performance— A quantitative indicator of
Statistical significance: effect
1 1 Performance—Educational In view of the achievement of the prod-
significance:
uct or program as indicated by items 3 through 10, evaluating the importance
of the gains thus identified for the educational institutions concerned
12. Costs and cost effectiveness: Estimation of inclusive costs of a new program and
comparison with competitors
13. Extended support: Continued monitoring and updating of the product

According to judging the worth of a new educational product or

this system,
procedure complex matter, based upon various kinds of information. The
is a
judgments made about each single factor may be recorded on a profile graph,
which can then be used to make a systematic judgment of appropriateness and
general worth of the product.

Stufflebeam's Evaluation Methods

The model of evaluation developed by Stufflebeam and his associates (1971)

was originally designed to applv to any of a variety of educational improvements
334 Principles of Instructional Design

that might be considered for adoption, or actually adopted, by a school or

school system. The model is called CIPP (context, input, process, and product).
The CIPP model considers evaluation as a continuing process. The informa-
tion to be dealt with in evaluation of an education program must first be
delineated, then obtained, and finally provided. The information produced by
evaluation has the primary purpose of guiding decision making. Tvpicalfy,
Stuff lebeam's procedures for evaluation can be thought of as having the purpose
of guiding the decisions of a school superintendent who is faced with a proposal
to institute a new curriculum program.
The kinds of decisions toward which evaluation may be oriented are four:
planning, structuring, implementing, and recycling. Planning decisions are
guided by context evaluation, which involves the determination of problems and
unmet needs. Evaluation of the input includes consideration of alternative
solutions (programs, products), their relative strengths and weaknesses, and
their respective feasibilities (structuring decision). Process evaluation deals with
information about the educational processes set in motion by the new program.
These are implementing decisions, an example of which would be a decision
about the appropriate use of tutoring as specified by a new mathematics pro-
gram. Finally, there is product evaluation, which serves to guide decisions about
recycling. An example of this type of evaluation would be identifying and
assessing how well a new course of study is working, leading to a decision to
continue the program, to drop it, or to modify it.

In general, this conception of evaluation procedures requires planning of the

operation in a manner that seeks answers to questions in the following areas:

1. Program: What program is to be evaluated, and what population does it serve?

2. Audiences: What are the main concerns of the audience to be served by the
evaluation?
3. Purposes: How will the information yielded by the evaluation be used?
4. Approach: What type of study will be conducted (context, input, process,
output)?
5. Questions: What questions will be addressed?

Stufflebeam (1974) accepts Scriven's suggestion of goal-free evaluation not as a

substitute for, but as a valuable supplement to, goal-based evaluation. The
between formative and summative evaluation is also maintained in
distinction
the CIPP model. Formative evaluation is seen as serving the needs of decision
making about program development, whereas summative evaluation provides a
basis for accountability.
It is apparent that there are few, if any, points of actual conflict in ideas

between the evaluation models of Scriven and Stufflebeam. We note that

"continuous planning" is a major emphasis in the Stufflebeam model, whereas
"verified performance" is the emphasized concern of the Scriven system. Both
models appear to view evaluation in a highly comprehensive manner, and both
 Evaluating Instruction 335

are most obviously relevant to the "large" decisions about educational pro-
cedures that must be made bv the people responsible for the management of
total school systems, on the one hand, or for the support of programs of
widespread educational innovation on the other.

EVALUATION OF INSTRUCTION: TWO MAJOR ROLES

The view of evaluation assumed in the remainder of this chapter is more
circumscribed than those of the general models alreadv mentioned but is other-
wise not in conflict with them. Here, we shall examine the logic and the
procedures of evaluation as thev applv to a single course of instruction. Such a
course, we assume, would have been designed in accordance with the principles
described in previous chapters of this volume. The questions to be addressed
are: How does one whether the design process is working so as to achieve a
tell

worthwhile result? How does one tell whether the product designed has made a
desirable difference in educational outcome?
The account of instructional evaluation to be given here is based upon the
premise that a course (or smaller unit) of instruction is being designed, or has
been designed, to meet certain specified objectives. Thus, the evaluation pro-
cedures to be described are concerned primarily with the performance aspects of
Scriven's model and with process and product evaluation as these terms are used bv
Stufflebeam. At the same time, we emplov the customary distinction between
formative evaluation and summative evaluation as defined bv Scriven (1967).
These two roles of evaluation lead to decisions about program revision, in the
former case, and about program adoption and continuation, in the latter.

Formative Evaluation

Evidence of an instructional program's worth is sought for use in making

decisions about how to revise the program while it is being developed. In other
words, the evidence collected and interpreted during the phase of development
is used to form the instructional program itself. If one discovers, by means of an

evaluation effort, that a lesson is not feasible or that the newly designed topic
falls short of meeting its objectives, this information is used to revise the lesson
or to replace portions of the topic in the attempt to overcome the defects that
have been revealed.
The decisions made possible bv formative evaluation mav be illustrated in a
number of ways. For example, suppose that a lesson in elementary science has
called for the employment of a particular organism found in fresh-water ponds.
But when the lesson is tried in a school, it is found that without taking some
elaborate precautions, this particular organism cannot be kept alive for more
than two hours when transplanted to a jar of ordinary water. Such an instance
calls into question the practical feasibility of the lesson as designed. Since
336 Principles of Instructional Design

evaluation has in this instance revealed the specific difficulty, it may be possible
to revise the lesson by simply substituting another organism and changing the
instructions for student activities appropriately. Alternatively, the lesson mav
have to be rewritten completely or even abandoned.
Another type of example, illustrating effectiveness, may be provided bv an
instance in which a topic such as the "use of the definite article with German
nouns" fails to meet its objective. Evidence from a formative evaluation studv
indicates that students use the definite article correctly in a large proportion of
instances but not in all. Further examination of the evidence reveals that the
mistakes students are making center on the identification of the gender of the
nouns. The designer of instruction for the topic is consequently led to consider
how the lesson, or lessons, on the gender of nouns can be improved. He finds,
perhaps, that some necessary concept has been omitted or inadequately pre-
sented. This discovery' in turn leads him to revise the lesson or possibly to
introduce an additional lesson, designed to ensure the attainment of this sub-
ordinate objective. A detailed description of such procedures is given bv Dick
(1977a).
As described by Dick and Carey (1985), the procedures of formative evalua-
tion involve three stages. Each stage consists of a tryout of the instructional
material orprogram with a different sample of potential students, representative
of the targeted student audience.

One-to-One Testing

In this stage, each student is presented with the instructions one at a time while
the evaluator watches closely the student's performance. If the content of the
instruction is presented by a computer screen, for example, the evaluator sits
with the student while he works through the lesson or module. Another
participant in this stage of evaluation is the subject-matter expert. This person is
made thoroughly acquainted with the performance objectives of the instruction
and with the test items or observations employed as performance indicators.
also
The questions being asked pertain to the validity of objectives and to the
accuracy and claritv of materials and test items.
The types of information obtained in one-to-one testing include evidence of
the following features: (1) errors in estimates of the entry capabilities of stu-
dents, (2) lack of clarity in the presentation of instruction, (3) unclear test
questions and directions, and (4) inappropriate expectations of learning out-
comes. On the basis of such information, systematic revisions of the instruction-
al content can be made.

Small-Group Testing

A second stage of formative evaluation uses a small group of students who

represent the target population. Typically, such testing begins with a pretest of
the skills and knowledge to be taught during instruction. The instruction is then
 Evaluating Instruction 337

presented, followed by the administration of a posttest. Additionally, an attitude

questionnaire seeks to assess student attitudes toward various aspects of the
instructions. Students may also be asked to discuss the instruction, the pretest,
and the posttest.
Information obtained from small-group testing begins to answer questions
* about the occurrence of learning and its amount, based on comparison of pretest
and posttest scores. Other results may provide indications about the clarity of
presentations and questions, which will be used to guide revision.

Field Trial

The instructional program is next tried out with an appropriate sample of the
population intended as its audience. With this larger group, a pretest and a
posttest (revised on the basis of small-group testing) are given, framing the
presentation of the instruction itself. Attitude surveys are administered to learn-
ers and to participating instructors. Observations are made during this trial
regarding the adequacy of the presentation of materials and their directions. In
addition, information is collected on the quality and adequacy of instructors'
performances in using the materials.
The field trial is designed to be a critical test of the instruction, its feasibility of
use, and its effectiveness. Student and instructor behavior and attitudes yield
valuable information that can make possible a near-final revision and improve-
ment of the lessons and modules. Regarding effectiveness, the test scores and
gains in achievement of students in this representative group, under near- typical
conditions of use, are, of course, of crucial interest and importance.

Interpretation of the Evidence

These various kinds of evidence, collected by means of observational records,
questionnaires, and tests, are employed throughout the stages of formative
evaluation to draw conclusions as to whether a lesson needs to be kept as is,
revised, reformulated, or discarded.
The question offeasibility may be decided, for example, by considering reports
of the difficulties experienced by instructors or students in the conduct of the
lesson. The question of effectiveness is a somewhat more complex judgment. It
may depend, in part, on the reports of an observer that the materials could not
be used in the manner intended or that the instructor did not carry out the
intended procedures. It may also depend, in part, on student attitudes in-
cidentally establishedby the lesson, as revealed by answers to questionnaires by
both instructors and students. And, of course, it may depend to a most impor-
tant degree upon the extent to which the performance of students, as revealed by
tests, is successful.

Referring to the three questions at the beginning of this chapter, it will be

evident that formative evaluation is most cogendy concerned with question
1 —To what extent have the stated objectives of instruction been met? This is
338 Principles of Instructional Design

one of the principal kinds of evidence that may be brought to bear on the
revision and improvement of the designed instruction. On an occasion, evidence
may also become available that permits comparison with an alternative or
supplanted instructional entity (question 2), and such evidence may also be
utilized for formative purposes. Similarly, observations that reveal unanticipated
effects (question 3), good or bad, may surely have an effect on decisions about
revision or refinement of instruction. However useful these additional pieces of
evidence may be, it remains true that question 1 defines an essential kind of
evidence leading to decisions about revising and improving the instructional
unit that is being developed.

Summative Evaluation
Summative evaluation is usually undertaken when development of an instruc-
tional entity is in some sense completed rather than ongoing. Its purpose is to
permit conclusions to be drawn about how well the instruction has worked.
Such findings permit schools to make decisions about adopting and using the
instructional entity (cf. Dick, 1977b; Dick and Carey, 1985).
In general, summative evaluation concerns itself with the effectiveness of an
instructional system, course, or topic. Individual lessons may, of course, be
evaluated as components of these larger units but rarely as separate entities. The
evaluation is called summative because it is intended to obtain evidence about the
summed effects of a set of lessons making up a larger unit of instruction.
Naturally, though, such evidence may include information pointing to defects
or positive accomplishments of particular lessons, and this can be used in a
formative sense for the next development or the next revision.
The main kind of decision for which the evidence of a summative evaluation is
useful is whether a new course (or other unit) is better than one it has replaced

and, therefore, should be adopted for continued use. Conceivably, it may be no

better, in which case considerations other than effectiveness (such as cost) will
come to determine the choice. Also conceivably, it might be worse than what it

has replaced, in which case the decision would likely be an easy one to reach.
Suppose that newly designed course in American government has replaced
a
one of the same and has been adopted by a school. A summative evaluation
title

finds that student enthusiasm for the new course is little changed compared with
that for the old; that 137 of the 150 defined objectives of the new course are
adequately met by students (the previous course did not have defined objectives
nor means of assessing them); and that a test on American government given at
the end of the semester yields an average score of 87 as opposed to 62 on the
same test in the previous year. The new course is liked by teachers for the
specific reason that it permits them to take more time for individual student
conferences. Now, provided that the new course does not cost more than the
old, this setof evidence would very likely lead to a decision to adopt and
continue the new course and to abandon the old.
 Evaluating Instruction 339

In contrast to formative evaluation, summative evaluation usually has many

formal features, some of which are indicated by this example. Measures of
student attitudes, for example, are likely to be based upon carefully constructed
questionnaires, so that they can be directly and validly compared with those of
last year's students. The assessment of mastery of each objective is also systemati-
cally done in order that there will be a quantitative indication of the accomplish-
ments of the entire course. In addition, measures of achievement are taken from
a test serving as a semester examination. As is true of formative evaluation, each
of these summative measures needs to be obtained with the use of methods that
make possible the collection of convincing evidence of effectiveness.

Evidence Sought

Summative evaluation of a topic, course, or instructional system is primarily

concerned with evidence of learning outcomes. As will be discussed in the next
section of this chapter, obtaining such evidence requires the collection of data
on "input measures" and "process measures" as well as on those measures that
directly assess outcomes. Learning outcomes are assessed by means of observa-
tions or tests of human capabilities, as reflected in the objectives specified for the
instruction. Accordingly, the measures of outcomes might consist of any or all
of the following types:

1 Measures indicating the mastery of intellectual skills, assessing whether or not

particular skills have been acquired. Example: A test requiring solutions for
designated variables in linear algebraic equations.
2. Measures of problem-solving ability, assessing the quality or efficiency of the
student's thinking. Example: Exercises requiring the design of a scientific
experiment to test the effect of a particular factor on some natural phenom-
enon, in a situation novel to the student.
3. Tests of information, assessing whether or not a specified set of facts or gener-
alizations has been learned. Example: A test requiring the student to state the
names and roles of the principal characters in a work of literature. Alternatively,
tests assessing the breadth of knowledge attained by the student. Example: A
test that asks the student to describe the major antecedents of a historical event.
4. Observations or other measures of the adequacy of motor skills, usually with
reference to a specified standard of performance. Example: An exercise in which
the child is asked to print the alphabet in capital letters.

5. Self- report questionnaires assessing attitude. Example: A questionnaire asking

the student to indicate "probability of choice" for actions concerned with the
disposal of personal trash.

Interpretation of Summative Evidence

The various measures appropriate for the outcomes of learning are interpreted
primarily in comparison with similar measures obtained on an instructional
entity representing an alternative mode of instruction. Referring again to the
340 Principles of Instructional Design

questions at the beginning of this chapter, the primary emphasis of evidence

obtained for summative purposes is on the answer to question 2 — In what ways
and to what degree is this unit better than some other? Usually, the comparison
to be madeis with a topic or course that the newly designed unit is intended to

replace. Sometimes, two different newly designed instructional entities may be

compared with one another. In either case, such comparisons require methods
of data collection that can demonstrate that "all other things are equal," which is
by no means an easy thing to do.
Answers to questions 1 and 3 are also desirable outcomes of a summative
evaluation. One wants to determine, as a minimal condition, whether the
objectives of the new instructional unit have been met (question 1). Should it
turn out that they have not, this result will obviously affect the possible con-
clusions to be drawn from comparison with an alternative unit. In addition, it is
always of some importance to explore whether the newly designed instruction
has had some unanticipated effects (question 3). A topic designed to teach basic
concepts of weather, for example, might turn out to have some unexpected
effects on attitudes toward disposal of personal trash.

EVALUATION OF INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAMS

Evaluation methods may be applied to lessons or courses and also to entire

programs of instruction. A program may consist of a number of different courses,
which can be viewed as contributing to a common purpose and may have a
duration of months or vears. The various measures of outcomes of instruction
that were described in Chapter 12 may be employed in program evaluation
studies. Often, the measures of outcome must be separately developed to meet
the needs of an evaluation effort. In some instances, however, the required
measure, tests, observation schedules, or questionnaires are commercially avail-
able or can be adapted from commerciallv available instruments.
Besides the development of tests or other types of measures, the enterprise of
evaluation requires careful, scientificallv based methods that serve to ensure that
the evidence obtained is truly convincing. To describe these methods in full
detail would require at least a separate volume; in fact, a number of books are
available that dealwith the design of evaluation studies (for example, Fitz-
Gibbon and Morris, 1978; Popham, 1975; Thorndike and Hagen, 1986). In
this chapter, we can deal only with the logic of evaluation studies, beginning
with the logic of data collection and interpretation already introduced. Beyond
this, however, is the rationale for identifying and controlling variables in evalua-

tion efforts so that valid conclusions can be drawn about instructional out-
comes.

The Variables of Evaluation Studies

The intention of studies to evaluate an instructional program is to draw con-

clusions about the effects of the instruction —
on learning outcomes on the
 Evaluating Instruction 341

human capabilities the instruction has been designed to establish or improve.

But these capabilities are affected bv other factors in the educational setting, not
only by the instruction itself. It is, therefore, necessary to control or otherwise
account for these other variables in order to draw valid conclusions about in-
structional effectiveness. Considered as a whole, the educational situation into
* which instruction is introduced contains the classes of variables described in the

following paragraphs.

Outcome Variables

We begin to list the variables of the educational situation with outcome var-
iables, the dependent or measured variables diat are the primary focus of
interest. These have alreadv been described as measures of the human capabili-
ties intended to be affected by instruction. The classes of variables that influence
educational outcomes, and their various sources, are shown in Figure 16-1.

Process Variables

What factors in the school situation might influence the outcomes, given the
existence of an instructional program? Obviously, there may be some effects on
how the instructional entity (topic, course, system) is conducted. Outcomes
may be influenced, in other words, by the operations carried out to put the
instruction into effect, typically by the teacher (cf. Astin and Panos, 1971). For
example, the instruction as designed may type and frequency
call for a particular

of teacher questioning. To what extent has this been done? Or, the designed
course may call for a particular sequence of intellectual skills, some to be
mastered before others are undertaken. To what extent has this operation been

STUDENT

Aptitude Variables

Support Variables > Outcomes

SCHOOL

Process Variabl

COMMUNITY

'Instruction

FIGURE 16-1 Variables Influencing the Outcomes of an Instructional Program

342 Principles of Instructional Design

carried out? As still another example, the designed instruction may specify that a
particular sort of feedback is to be incorporated in each lesson (see Chapter 9).
Has been systematically and consistently done?
this
One cannot simply assume that process variables of the sort specified by the
designed instruction or intended by the designer will inevitably occur in the way
they are expected to. Of course, well-designed instruction provides for whatever
action may be required to ensure that the program operates as planned; for
example, provisions are often made to train teachers in these operations. Never-
theless, such efforts are not always fully successful —teachers are no more free of
human inadequacies than are the members of any other professional group.
Designers of new programs of individualized instruction, for example, have
rather frequently found that the operations specified for these programs are not
being executed in the manner originally intended. As a consequence, it is

essential that assessments of process variables be made, and this is particularly so

when the newly designed instructional entity is being tried out for the first time.
Process variables comprise many factors in the instructional situation that may
directly affect student learning. Such factors, then, may concern matters of
sequence or matters of the institution and arrangement of the events of instruction,
both of which are described in Chapter 10. Another factor is the amount of time
devoted bv students to particular lessons or portions of a course. Naturally, one
of the major variations to be found in topics or courses of instruction is the
degree to which these classes of process variables are specified. A textbook, for
example, may implv a sequence for instruction in its organization of chapters,
but mav leave the arrangement of events of instruction entirely to the teacher or
to the learner himself (as does this book). In contrast, a topic designed for
instruction in language skills for the sixth grade mav not only specif)' a sequence
of subordinate skills but also particular events, such as informing the learner of
objectives, stimulating recall of prerequisite learning, providing learning guid-
ance, and providing feedback to the learner, among others. Regardless of the
extent to which process variables are prescribed by the designed entity, it is

necessary to take them into account in a well-planned evaluation study. After all,

the outcomes observed mav be substantially affected by the ways a new in-

structional program is operated, whatever its designed intentions.

Typically, process variables are assessed by means of systematic observations
in the classroom (or another educational setting). This is the function of the
observer, not the teacher, in the conduct of the evaluation.The observer may
employ a checklist or observation schedule as an aid in recording his observa-
tions. Such instruments normally have to be specially designed to meet the
purposes of each particular evaluation study.

Support Variables

Still another class of variables, occurring partly in the student's home and

community, has to be considered as potentially influential in the outcomes of an

instructional program. These include such factors as the presence of adequate
 Evaluating Instruction 343

materials (in the classroom and the school library), the availability of a quiet
place for study, the "climate" of the classroom with reference to its encourage-
ment of good achievement, the actions of parents in reinforcing favorable
attitudes toward homework and other learning activities, and manv others. The
number of different variables in this class is quite large, and not enough is
* known about them to make possible a confident differentiation among them
with regard to their relative importance.
The general nature of this class of variables is to be seen in their effects on the
opportunities for learning. Materials in the classroom, for example, may present
greater or fewer opportunities for learning, depending on their availability;
parents may make opportunities for adequate attention to homework more or
less available; and so on. In contrast to process variables, support variables do not
directly influence the process of learning, as the former set of factors is expected
to do. Instead, they tend to determine the more general environmental con-
ditions of those times during which process variables may exert their effects. For
example, the designed instruction may call for a period of independent study on
the part of the student. In operation, the teacher may make suitable time
provisions for this independent study, thus ensuring that the process variable
has been accounted for. But what will be the difference in the outcome for (1) a
student who has a relatively quiet place in which to pursue his learning un-
interrupted and for (2) a student who must perform his independent study in an
open corner of a noisy classroom? This contrast describes a difference in a
support variable. The opportunities for learning are presumably less in the second
case, although the actual effects of this variable on the outcome cannot be stated
for this hypothetical example.
Support variables require various means of assessment. What parents do in
encouraging the completion of homework may be assessed by means of a
questionnaire. The availability of materials relevant to a topic or course may be
assessed by counting books, pamphlets, and other reference sources. The climate
of a classroom may be found by the use of a systematic schedule of observations.
Other measures of this class, such as number of students or the pupil to teacher
ratio, may be readily available at the outset of the study. For any of a number of
support variables, it is likely to be necessary to select or develop the technique of
assessment best suited to the particular situation.

Aptitude Variables

It is of great importance to note that of all the variables likely to determine the

outcomes of learning, the most influential is probably the students aptitude for
learning. Such aptitude is usually measured by means of an intelligence test or a
test of scholastic aptitude. This kind of intelligence, sometimes called crystallized
intelligence (Cattell, 1963; see also Corno and Snow, 1986), is found to be
highly correlated with achievement in school subjects. Whatever may be accom-
plished by improved methods of instruction, by arrangements of process vari-
ables, and by ensuring the best possible support for learning, this entire set of
344 Principles of Instructional Design

favorable circumstances cannot influence learning outcomes as much as can

students' aptitude for learning.
Aptitude for learning is undoubtedly determined in part bv genetic inheri-
tance as well as bv environmental influences occurring before birth (such as
nutrition). An individual's aptitude is partly determined also bv the kinds of
prior learning accomplished and bv opportunities to learn. It should be clear,
then, that aptitude is a variable that has its own multiple determinants. As it

enters an evaluation studv, however, aptitude is usuallv an input variable (Astin

and Panos, 1971). In this role, aptitude is not subject to alteration bv the
evaluation; it can onlv be measured, not manipulated. Many studies have shown
that aptitude for learning, as measured bv intelligence tests, mav account for as
much as 50 percent of the variations in learning outcome, measured as student
achievement in capabilities falling in the categories of verbal information, in-
tellectual skills, and cognitive strategies.
The aptitude for learning that a student brings to the instructional situation is

likely to have a verv great effect on learning when learning is assessed in terms of
its outcomes. Thus, if the effectiveness of an instructional program is to be
assessed, the effect of instruction itself must be demonstrated by instituting
controls that make possible the separation of the influence of the students'
entering aptitudes for learning. Evaluation studies having particular purposes
may require that learner characteristics identified as prerequisites be treated as
input variables. For example, an instructional program devoted to teaching
adult basic might be concerned with the question of the effectiveness of the
skills

m vlv designed instruction independent from the entering skills of the students.
In such a case, an evaluation studv would take account of prerequisite skills
(such as are described in Chapter 6) as input variables.
Although measures of learning aptitude are often most conveniently identi-
fied bv scores on intelligence tests, other measures are sometimes employed. A
combination of several aptitude tests mav be used to yield a combined score to
assess learning aptitude. (Actually, most intelligence tests are themselves col-
lections of subtests sampling several different aptitudes.) Another procedure
involves the use of measures that are known to correlate with intelligence scores
to a fairlv high degree. Previous school grades exhibit such high correlations,
particularly in subjects such as reading comprehension and mathematics. Still

another correlated measure is family income or family socioeconomic status

(SES). seems reasonable, though, that although correlated measures are
It

sometimes useful, thev are not to be preferred in evaluation studies over mea-
sures that attempt to assess learning aptitude in the most direct manner possible.

INTERPRETING EVALUATIVE EVIDENCE

We have pointed out that measures of the outcomes of an instructional pro-

gram — that is, measures of learned intellectual skills, cognitive strategies, in-
 Evaluating Instruction 345

formation, attitudes, and motor skills — are influenced bv a number of variables

in the educational situation besides the program itself. Process variables in the
operation of the instructional program may directly affect learning and, thus,
also affect its outcomes. Support variables in the school or in the home de-
termine the opportunities for learning and, thus, influence the outcomes of
learning that are observed. And most prominentlv of all, the learning aptitude of
students strongly influences the outcomes measured in an evaluation study.
If the effectiveness of the designed instruction is to be evaluated, certain
controls must be instituted over process, support, and aptitude variables to
ensure that the "net effect" of the instruction is revealed. Procedures for accom-
plishing this control are described in this section. Again, it may be necessary to
point out that only the basic logic of these procedures can be accounted for here.
However, such logic is of critical importance in the design of evaluation studies.

Controlling for Aptitude Effects

The assessment of outcomes of instruction in terms of question 1 (To what

extent have objectives been met?) needs to take account of the effects of aptitude
variables. In the context of this question, it is mainlv desirable to state what is

the level of intelligence of the students being instructed. This may be done most
simply by giving the average score and some measure of dispersion of the
distribution of scores (such as the standard deviation) on a standard test of
intelligence.However, correlated measures such as SES are frequentiv used for
this purpose. Supposing that 117 out of 130 objectives of a designed course are
found to have been met, it is of some importance to know whether the average
IQ of the students is 115 (as might be true in a suburban school) or 102 (as
might occur in some sections of a city or in a rural area). It is possible that, in the
former setting, the number of objectives achieved might be 117 out of 130,
whereas in the latter, this might drop to 98 out of 130. The aims of evaluation
may best be accomplished bv trving out the instructional entity in several
different schools, each having a somewhat different range of student learning
aptitude.
When the purposes of question 2 (To what degree is it better?) are being
served in evaluation, one must go bevond simply reporting the nature and
amount of the is to show whether any
aptitude variable. In this case, the concern
difference exists between the new instructional program and some other in —
other words, to make a comparison. Simply stated, making a comparison requires
the demonstration that the two groups of students were equivalent to begin
with. Equivalence of students in aptitude is most likely to occur when successive
classes of students in the same school, coming from the same neighborhood, are
employed as comparison groups. This is the case when a newly designed course
is introduced in a classroom or school and is to be compared with a different

course given the previous year.

346 Principles of Instructional Design

Other methods of establishing equivalence of initial aptitudes are often em-

ployed. Sometimes, it is possible to assign students randomly to different
classrooms within a single school, half of which receive the newly designed
instruction and half of which do not. When such a design is used, definite
administrative arrangements must be made to ensure randomness — it cannot be
assumed. Another procedure is to select a set of schools that are "matched,"
insofar as possible, in the aptitudes of their students and to trv out the new
instruction in half of these, making
comparison with the outcomes obtained in
a
those schools not receiving the new instruction. All of these methods contain
certain complexities of design that necessitate careful management if valid
comparisons are to be made.
There are also statistical methods of control for aptitude variables methods —
that "partial out" the effects of aptitude variables and, thus, reveal the net effect
of the instruction. In general, these methods follow this logic: If the measured
outcome is produced by A and I, where A is aptitude and I is instruction, what
would be the effect of I alone if A were assumed to have a constant value rather
than a variable one? Such methods are of considerable value in revealing
instructional effectiveness, bearing in mind particularly the prominent influence
the A variable is likely to have.
Whatever particular procedure is emploved, it should be clear that any valid
comparison of the effectiveness of instruction in two or more groups of students
requires that equivalence of initial aptitudes be established. Measures of in-
telligence, or other correlated measures, mav be employed in the comparison.
Students may be randomly assigned to the different groups or their aptitudes
may be compared when assignment has been made on other grounds (such as
school location). Statistical means mav be employed to make possible the
assumption of equivalence. Any or all of these means are aimed at making a
convincing case for equivalence of learning aptitudes among groups of students
whose capabilities following instruction are being compared. No study evaluat-
ing learning outcomes can provide valid evidence of instructional effectiveness
without having a way of controlling this important variable.

Controlling for the Effects of Support Variables

For many purposes of evaluation, support variables may be treated as input

variables and, thus, controlled inways similar to those used for learning apti-
tude. Thus, when interest is centered upon the attainment of objectives (ques-
tion 1), the measures made of support variables can be reported along with
outcome measures so that they can be considered in interpreting the outcomes.
Here again, a useful procedure is to try out the instruction in a variety of schools
displaying different characteristics (or different amounts) of support.
Similarly, the comparisons implied by question 2 and part of question 3
require the demonstration of equivalence among whose
the classes or schools
learning outcomes are being compared. Suppose that outcome measures are
obtained from two different aptitude-equivalent groups of students in a school,
 Evaluating Instruction 347

one of which has been trying out a newly designed course in English composi-
tion, while the other continues with a different course. Assume that, despite
differences in the instruction, the objectives of the two courses are largely the
same and outcomes is based on these common objectives.
that assessment of
. Class M found to show significant^ better performance, on the average, than
is

does class N. Before the evidence that the new instruction is "better" can be truly
convincing, it must be shown that no differences exist in support variables. Since
the school is the same, manv variables of this sort can be shown to be equivalent,
such as the librarv, the kinds of materials available, and others of this nature.
Where might differences in support variables be found? One possibilitv is the
—
climate of the two classrooms one mav be more encouraging to achievement
—
than the other. Two different teachers are involved one may be disliked, the
—
other liked. Student attitudes mav be different more students in one class may
seek new opportunities for learning than do students in the other. Variables of
this sort that affect opportunities for learning mav accordingly affect outcomes.
Therefore, it is quite essential that equivalence of groups with respect to these
variables be demonstrated or taken into account by statistical means.

Controlling for the Effects of Process Variables

The assessment and control of process variables is of particular concern in

seeking evidence bearing on the attainment of stated objectives (question 1).
Quite evidently, an instructional entity may work either better or worse depend-
ing upon how the operations it specifies are carried out. Suppose, for example,
that a new course in elementary science presumes that teachers will treat the
directing of students' activities as something left almost entirelv to the students
themselves (guided by an exercise booklet). Teachers find that under these
circumstances, the students tend to raise questions to which they (the teachers)
don't always know the answers. One teacher mav deal with this circumstance by
encouraging students to see if they can invent a way of finding the answer.
Another teacher may require that students do only what their exercise book
describes. Thus, the same instructional program may lead to quite different
operations. The process variable differs markedly in these two instances, and
equallv marked effects mav show up in measures of outcome. If the evaluation is
of the formative type, the designer may interpret such evidence as showing the
need for additional teacher instructions or training. If summative evaluation is
being conducted, results from the two groups of students must be treated
separately to disclose the effects of the process variable.
In comparison studies (question 2), process variables are equally important.
As in the case of aptitude or support variables, they must be controlled in one
wav or another in order for valid evidence of the effectiveness of instruction to
be obtained. Equivalence of groups in terms of process variables must be shown,
either bv exercising direct control over them by a randomizing approach, or bv
statistical means. It mav be noted that process variables are more amenable to

direct control than are either support or aptitude variables. If a school or class is
348 Principles of Instructional Design

conducted environment (a support variable), the means of changing

in a noisy
the noise level may not
be readily at hand. If, however, a formative evaluation
study shows that some teachers have failed to use the operations specified by the
new instructional program (a process variable), instruction of these teachers can
be undertaken so that the next trial starts off with a desirable set of process
variables.
Unanticipated outcomes (question 3) are equally likely to be influenced by
process variables and accordingly require similar control procedures. A set of
positive attitudes on the part of students of a newly designed program could
resultfrom the human modeling of a particular teacher and, thus, contrast with
less favorable attitudes inanother group of students who have otherwise had the
same instruction. It is necessary in this case, also, to demonstrate equivalence of
process variables before drawing conclusions about effects of the instructional
entity.

Controlling Variables by Randomization

It is generally agreed that the best possible way to control variables in an

evaluation study is to ensure that their effects occur in a random fashion. This is

the case when students can be assigned to control and experimental groups in a
truly random manner or when an entire set of classes or schools can be divided
into such groups randomly. In the simplest case, if the outcomes of group A (the

new compared with those of group B (the previously

instructional entity) are
employed instruction), and students drawn from a given population have been
assigned to these groups in equal numbers at random, the comparison of the
outcomes may be assumed to be equally influenced by aptitude variables.
Similar reasoning applies to the effects of randomizing die assignment of
classrooms, teachers, and schools to experimental and control groups in order to
equalize process and support variables.
Randomization has the effect of controlling not only the specific variables
that have been identified, but also other variables that may not have been singled
out for measurement because their potential influence is unknown. Although
ideal for purposes of control, in practice, randomizing procedures are usually
difficult to arrange. Schools do not customarily draw their students randomly
from a community or assign them randomly to classes or teachers. Accordingly,
the identification and measurement of aptitude, support, and process variables
must usually be undertaken as described in the preceding sections. When
random assignment of students, teachers, or classes is possible, evaluation
studies achieve a degree of elegance they do not otherwise possess.

EXAMPLES OF EVALUATION STUDIES

The four kinds of variables in evaluation studies — aptitude, support, process,

and outcome — are typically given careful consideration and measurement in any
 Evaluating Instruction 349

evaluation study, whether formative or summative. Interpretation of these

measures differs for the two evaluation roles, as will be seen in the following
examples.

i Evaluation of a Program in Reading for Beginners

A varied set of lessons in reading readiness and beginning reading was de-
veloped and evaluated over a two-year period by the Educational Development
Laboratories of McGraw-Hill, Inc., and by the L. W. Singer Company of
Random House, Inc. This system of instruction is called Listen Look Learn. In
brief, the instructional materials include (1) a set of filmstrips accompanied by
sound, designed to develop listening comprehension and oral recounting, (2) an
eye-hand coordination workbook dealing with the identification and printing of
letters and numerals, (3) a set of filmstrips providing letter- writing tasks,
accompanying the workbook, (4) letter charts for kinesthetic letter identifica-
tion, (5) picture sequence cards, and other cards for "hear and read" practice,
and (6) a set of colored filmstrips for the analysis of word sounds and the
presentation of words in story contexts.
As reported by Heflin and Scheier (1968), a svstematic formative evaluation
of this instructional svstem was undertaken, which at the same time obtained
some initial data for summative purposes. Table 16-1 summarizes some of the
main points of the study, abstracted from this report. The purpose of the table is
to illustrate how the major classes of variables were treated and interpreted;
naturallv, manv details of the studv covered in the report cannot be reported in
the brief space of such a table.
Classes of first-grade pupils from schools located in 11 states were included in
the evaluation study. A group of 40 classes comprising 917 pupils were given
instruction provided by the Listen Look Learn system, and a group of 1,000
pupils in 42 classes served as a control group. Control-group classes used the
"basal reading" instructional system. Each school district was asked to provide
classes for the experimental and control groups that were as equivalent as
possible in terms of characteristics of teachers and pupils.

Aptitude Variables

Owing to differences in the availability of aptitude scores in the various schools,

no measures of aptitude were emploved. Instead, information was ob-
initial

tained concerning the socioeconomic status of the pupils' families, as indicated

in Table 16-1. When aptitude measures were administered during the second
year of the studv (Metropolitan Readiness, Pintner Primarv IQ), verification
was obtained of a broad range of aptitude as well as of equivalence of the
experimental and control groups.
For purposes of formative evaluation, it is necessarv to know that the classes
selected for instruction included a range of student aptitudes that is representa-
tive of schools in the country as a whole since that is the intended usage for the
350 Principles of Instructional Design

Table16-1 Variables Measured and Their Interpretation for Formative and Summative Evaluation in a
Study of a System of Instruction for Beginning Reading (Listen Look learn)*
Type of
Variable How Measured Interpretation

Aptitude Initially, by socioeconomic status (SES), a Formative: A vanety of classes providing a

correlated measure. During second year, by range of SES from high to low

standardized test scores for IQ and Reading Summative: Equivalence of SES, and later of

Readiness aptitude, shown for expenmental and con-

trol groups

Support 1 Level of formal education of teachers Formative: Range of these variables typical of

2. Amount of teacher education 'in reading most elementary schools

methods Summative: Reasonable equivalence of ex-

3. Years of teaching experience perimental and control groups on these var-

iables

Process 1 . Appropriateness of lessons as Formative: Judgments of appropriateness

judged by teachers used to test feasibility

2. Success of program components as Indirect indications of effectiveness of pupil

judged by teachers learning, based on teachers' estimates

3. Strength and weaknesses of individual

lessons as judged by teachers

Outcome Metropolitan Pnmary I Summative: Achievement scores on standard-

Achievement word knowledge means: ized tests indicate scores on component

ILL group—25.5 reading skills significantly higher than those

Control group—24.1 of an equivalent control group

Word discrimination means:

LLL group—25.9
Control group—24.7
Reading means:
LLL group—27.3
Control group—25.2

'Information and results abstracted from Heflin and Scheier (1968), The Formative Period of Listen Look Learn, a Multi-Media

Communication Skills System. Huntington, N.Y.: Educational Development Laboratones, Inc.

system being evaluated. From the report (Heflin and Scheier, 1968), it would
appear that the schools taking part in the study represented a great majority of
U.S. elementary schools, although by no means all of them. For example,

inner-city schools were apparently not included. Nevertheless, the study offers
reasonably good evidence that a broad range of pupil aptitudes was represented.
In addition, it is clear from the reported data that the two groups of pupils were
reasonably equivalent in aptitude.

Support Variables

The range of SES of pupils' families provides the additional indication that
support for learning, insofar as it may be assumed to originate in the home
 Evaluating Instruction 351

environment, exhibited a suitable range of variation for the study. Other evi-

dences of learning support are inferred from measures of the characteristics of

teachers, as indicated in Table 16-1. The is that teachers having a
inference
typical range of educational backgrounds conduct themselves in ways that
will
provide a range of differential opportunities for learning. A reasonable degree of
equivalence is also demonstrated on these variables between experimental and
control groups.
Other measures of support for learning, not svstematically obtained in this
study, are perhaps of greater relevance to summative evaluation.Such variables
of reading materials," "encouragement of independent reading,"
as "availability
and others of this general nature would be examples. In the Listen Look Learn
study, incomplete evidence was obtained of the number of books read by
individual children, and this number was found to vary from to 132 (Heflin
and Scheier, 1968, p. 45).

Process Variables

As Table 16-1 indicates, a measure of the feasibility of the various parts of the
program was obtained by asking teachers to judge the appropriateness of the
materials for groups of fast, medium, and slow learners. Various features of the
individual lessons might have contributed to appropriateness, such as the famil-
iarity of the subject of a storv or the difficulty of the words employed. Teacher's
judgments led to conclusions about feasibility that resulted in elimination or
revision of a number of elements of the program.
Teachers' estimates also formed the bases for evidence of the success of the
various activities constituting the Listen Look Learn program. Such measures are
of course indirect evidence bearing on process variables as contrasted with such
indicators as how manv exercises were attempted by each student, how long a
time was spent on each, what feedback was provided for correct or incorrect
responses, and other factors of this nature. The materials of this program do not
make immediatelv evident what the desired process variables may have been.
Consequently, teachers' reports about "how effective the lesson was" were
probably as good indicators of these variables as could be obtained in this
instance.

Outcome Variables

Learning outcomes for this program were assessed by means of standardized

tests of word knowledge, word discrimination, and reading (portions of the

Metropolitan Primarv I Achievement Test). As can be seen from Table 16-1,

mean scores on these three kinds of activities were higher for the experimental
group than for the control group, which had been shown to be reasonably
equivalent, with regard to the operation of aptitude and support variables.
Statistical tests of the difference between the various pairs of means indicated
that these differences were significant at an acceptable level of probability.
352 Principles of Instructional Design

It should be pointed out that the evidences of learning outcome obtained in

this study were considered by its authors as no more than initial indications of
the success of the Listen Look Learn program. Further studies were subsequently
conducted to evaluate learning outcomes in a summative sense (Brickner and
Scheier, 1968, 1970; Kennard and Scheier, 1971). In general, these studies
have yielded data and conclusions that show improvements in earlv reading
achievement considerably greater than are produced bv other instructional
programs they are designed to supplant (usually basal reading approaches).

Evaluation of an Individualized Arithmetic Program

A second example of an evaluation study, summative in character, is provided by

an investigation of an individualized instruction system developed by the Learn-

ing Research and Development Center, University of Pittsburgh (Cooley,
1971). In this study, a program of individualized instruction in arithmetic for
the second grade of the Frick School was compared with the previously used
program. The new program had undergone several years of formative evaluation
and development. It provided for individual progress of pupils in attaining
arithmetic skills, based upon mastery of prerequisite skills.

Table 16-2 summarizes the treatment of variables in this evaluation study and
presents the major outcome findings.

Table16-2 Variables and Their Interpretation in an Evaluation of an Individualized Program in Arithmetic

for the Second Grade, Frick School

Variable How Controlled or Measured Interpretation

Aptitude Classes of pupils used in control and ex- Aptitude of classes of pupils remains un-
penmental groups equivalent in aptitude changed in this school from year to year

when they entered school

SES of pupils in both groups shown to be

equivalent

Support Same school facilities present for both groups Specific support variables of the school and
and same teachers involved the home are equivalent

SES of pupils equivalent

Process Contrasting process in individualized and reg- Effects of process vanables in individualized

ular instruction instruction to be examined; other specific

Same teachers involved in both groups process vanables equivalent in both groups

Outcome Wide Range Achievement JesX—Anthmetlc Significant differences obtained in outcome

Mean Scores in second grade: scores for equivalent groups

Expenmental group (19711—25.22

Control group (1970^-23.40

Information and results abstracted from Cooley (1971). Methods of Evaluating School Innovations. Pittsburgh. Pa.: Learning Research

and Development Center, University of Pittsburgh.

 Evaluating Instruction 353

Aptitude Variables

First, it will be seen from the table that aptitude variables were measured from
year to year at the time the children first entered the school. Over a period of
several years, the aptitude was found to be essentially the
of entering classes
isame. In addition, the correlated variable of socioeconomic status (SES) was
found to remain stable. Accordingly, it was considered a reasonable assumption
in this study that successive classes of pupils would have the same initial

aptitudes. An experimental group (individualized instruction) in the second

grade in 1971 could be compared with a control group (regular instruction)
who were in the second grade in 1970.

Support Variables
Support variables were not specifically singled out and measured individually.
Instead, there was a demonstrated equivalence of classrooms and teachers.
Under these circumstances, particular support variables were assumed to be
equivalent for both groups. Similarly, those support variables originating in the
home could be assumed equivalent in view of the demonstrated absence of
differences in SES variables for the two classes.

Process Variables

The most important process variables, those associated with the specific tech-
nique of individualized instruction, were deliberately contrasted in the two
groups, and this variation was verified by classroom observations. Other process
encouragement provided by teachers to pupils) could be
variables (such as the
assumed to be equivalent because the same teachers were involved for both
experimental and control groups.

Outcome
As a consequence of this study design, certain influencing variables in the
categories of aptitude, support, and process are either shown to be, or reason-
ably assumed to be, equivalent in their effects on both groups of pupils.
Outcome variables are, therefore, expected to reflect the effects of the changes in
instruction in an unbiased manner. Measures of arithmetic achievement, as
shown in the final row of the table, indicate a significant improvement when the
new (individualized) instruction is compared with the previously used instruc-
tion.

A Generalized Example

Every evaluation study presents the evaluator with a different set of circum-
stances to which he must apply the logic we have described. In practice, com-
354 Principles of Instructional Design

promise must sometimes be made because of the existence of inadequate mea-

sures of learning outcomes, the difficulties of achieving equivalence in groups to
be compared, the occurrence of particular events affecting one school or class
without affecting others, and many other possibilities too numerous to men-
tion. Part of the evaluator's job, of course, is to judge the severity of these
occurrences and the ways in which they must be taken into account to arrive at
convincing evidence.
A reference set of representative evaluation situations is shown in Table 16-3,
together with their most likely interpretations. These situations serve as one
kind of summary of our previous discussion of the types of variables affecting
learning outcomes.
The hypothetical comparisons of Table 16-3 suppose that School A has been
trying out a newly developed course (A) and that its outcomes are being
compared with those from School B, which has been using a different course
(B). In all cases, it is further supposed, the measures of outcome have been
found superior in School A to what they are in School B.
Situation 1 is that in which support variables and process variables have been
controlled, that is, shown to be equivalent. Aptitude variables indicate higher
intelligence, on the average, in School A than in School B. Since this variable is
such a powerful one, the effects of instruction cannot be expected to show up,
and the likely interpretation is as shown in the final column. Situation 2 is one in
which all influencing variables have been shown equivalent except for the
support variables. Differences in outcomes may be caused by these variables, by
the instruction, or by both in some unknown proportion. Similarly, situation 3,
in which process variables differ, can lead only to the conclusion that either
process or instruction, or both, have produced the observed differences in
outcome.
Situation 4 is what is aimed for in studies of summative evaluation. Here, all

Tablel 6-3 Comparison of Learning Outcomes in School A (Using Course A) and School 6 (Using Course
B) and Their Interpretation
Outcome
Situation Comparison Most Likely Interpretation

1 Aptitude variables: A > B A>B Most of the outcome differences, if not all, attributable to

Support vanables: A = B aptitude differences

Process variables A = B

2 Aptitude variables: A = B A>B Differences may be caused by instruction, by support, or

Support vanables: A > B both

Process variables: A = B
3 Aptitude variables: A = B A>B Differences may be caused by instruction, by process

Support vanables: A = B differences, or both

Process variables: A > B

4 Aptitude variables: A = B A>B Difference is attributable to effects of instruction

Support variables: A = B
Process variables: A = B
 Evaluating Instruction 355

the influencing variables have been shown to be equivalent by one method or

another. This situation is one that makes possible the interpretation that out-
come differences are attributable to the instruction itself.

^SUMMARY
Evaluation of courses, programs, and instructional programs usually has at least
the following questions in view: (1) have the objectives of instruction been met?
(2) is the new program better than one it is expected to supplant? and (3) what
additional effects does the new program produce?
Formative evaluation is new unit
undertaken while the is being developed. Its

purpose is to provide evidence on feasibility and effectiveness so that revisions

and improvements can be made. It seeks evidence from observers, teachers, and
students.
Summative evaluation is concerned with the effectiveness of the course or
program once it has been developed. Mainly, the evidence sought is in terms of
student performance. Measures are taken of the kinds of student capabilities the
program is intended to establish, as described in Chapters 3 through 6.
Summative evaluations mav be undertaken to compare an entire instructional
program with another. A number of kinds of variables must be taken into
account. The outcomes of the program are influenced by variables whose effects
must be controlled (or factored out) in order to test the effects of instruction.
These variables include:

1. Aptitude variables: Reflecting the students' aptitude for learning

2. Process variables: Arising from the manner of operation of instruction in the
class or school
3. Support variables: Conditions in the home, school, workplace, and community
that affect opportunities for learning

Evaluation studies use various means to control these influencing variables to

demonstrate the of the newly designed instruction. Sometimes, the
effects
operation of these variables can bemade equivalent by assigning students,
schools, or communities in a randomized way to different groups to be in-
structed. More frequendy, means must be employed to establish the
statistical

equivalence of the groups to be compared. If two courses or programs of

instruction are to be evaluated to determine which is better, evaluation logic
requires that control be exercised over these other variables. Ideally, everything
should be equivalent except the instructional programs themselves.

References

Astin, A.W., &

Panos, R. J. (1971). The evaluation of educational programs. In R. L.
Thorndike (Ed.), Educational measurement (2d ed.). Washington, DC: American
Council on Education.
356 Principles of Instructional Design

Brickner, A., & Scheier, E. (1968). Summative evaluation of Listen Look Learn, Cycles
R-40, 1967-68. Huntington, NY: Educational Development Laboratories, Inc.
Brickner, A., & Scheier, E. (1970). Summative evaluation of Listen Look Learn 2nd year
students, Cycles R-70, 1968-69. Huntington, NY: Educational Development Labora-
tories, Inc.
Carroll, J. B. (1963). A model of school learning. Teachers College Record, 64, 723-733.
Cattell, R. B. (1963). Theory of fluid and crystallized intelligence: A critical experiment.
Journal of Educational Psychology, 54, 1-22.
Cooley, W. W. (1971). Methods of evaluating school innovations. Pittsburgh, PA: Learning
Research and Development Center, University of Pittsburgh.
Corno, L., &
Snow, R. E. (1986). Adapting teaching to individual differences among
learners. In M. C. Wittrock (Ed.), Handbook of research on teaching (3rd ed.). New
York: Macmillan.
Dick, W. (1977a). Formative evaluation. In L. J. Briggs (Ed.), Instructional design:
Principles and applications. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publica-
tions.
Dick, W. (1977b). Summative evaluation. In L. J. Briggs (Ed.), Instructional design:
Principles and applications. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational Technology Publica-
tions.
Dick, W., & Carey, L. (1985). The systematic design of instruction (2nd ed.). Glenview, IL:
Scott, Foresman.
Fitz-Gibbon, C. T., & Morris, L. L. (1978). How to design a program evaluation. Beverly
Hills, CA: Sage.
Heflin, V. B., & Scheier, E. (1968). The formative period of Listen Look Learn, and
multi-media communication skills systems. Huntington, NY: Educational Development
Laboratories.
Kennard, A. D., & Scheier, E. (1971). An investigation to compare the effect of three

different reading programs on first-grade students in Elk Grove Village, Illinois, 1969-1970.
Huntington, NY: Educational Development Laboratories.
Popham, W. J. (1975). Educational evaluation. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Scriven, M. (1967). The methodology of evaluation. In R. Tyler, R. M. Gagne, and M.
Scriven, Perspectives of curriculum evaluation (AERA Monograph Series on Curriculum
Evaluation, No. 1.). Chicago: Rand McNally.
Scriven, M. (1974). Evaluation perspectives and procedures. In W. J. Popham (Ed.),
Evaluation in education. Berkeley, CA: McCutchan.
Stufflebeam, D. L. (1974). Alternative approaches to educational evaluation: A self-

study guide for educators. In W. J. Popham (Ed.), Evaluation in education. Berkeley,

CA: McCutchan.
W. J., Gephart, W. R., Guba, E. G., Hammond, R. L.,
Stufflebeam, D. L., Foley,
Merriman, H. O., 8c Provus, M. M. (1971). Educational evaluation and decision
making. Itasca, IL: Peacock.
Thorndike, R. L., 8c Hagen, E. (1986). Measurement and evaluation in psychology and
education (5th ed.). New York: Wiley.
Name Index

Abelson, R. P., 105, 106, 120 Britton, B. K., 269, 276

Adams, J. A., 93, 97 Brophv, J. E., 116, 120
Alessi, S. M., 300 Brown, A. L., 67, 75, 157, 164
Allen, V. L., 285, 301 Bruner, J.44, 52, 63, 66, 75, 133, 144
S.,
Anastasi, A, 108, 119 Buckley, N. K., 326, 329
Anderson, J. R., 43, 52, 77, 97, 104, 106, Burkman, E., 33, 35
114, 119, 134, 144, 165, 183, 187, Burns, R. B., 298, 300
203 Burton, J. K., 21, 35
Anderson, L. W., 261, 276, 297, 300
Anderson, R. C, 232, 252, 300 Carey, J., 30, 35, 214, 221, 223
Anderson, R. H., 216, 222 Carev, L., 21, 30, 35, 125, 144, 256, 259,
Anderson, T. H., 295, 300 276, 336, 338, 356
Applefield,J., 18, 19 Carroll, J. B., 256, 331
Aronson, D., 33, 35, 210, 222, 304, 305, Case, R., 157, 164
322, 329 Cattell, R. B., 343, 356
Asarnow, J., 67, 76 Clark, R. E., 80, 97, 210, 223
Astin, A. W., 341, 344, 355 Cloward, R. D., 287, 301
Atkinson, R. C, 45, 52, 66, 75 Cook, J. M., 154, 164
Austin, G. A., 45, 52 Coolev, W. W., 352, 356
Ausubel, D. P., 8, 18, 70, 75, 84, 85, 97, Corno, L., 108, 109, 113, 120, 343, 356
231, 232, 252 Cronbach, L. J., 106, 107, 108, 109, 115,
120, 275, 276
Baker, E. L., 42, 52, 127, 144 Crovitz, H. E., 231, 252
Bandura, A, 89, 97, 109, 119 Czanyi, A. P., 326, 329
Barth, R., 5, 19
Beard, J. G., 268, 277 Dale, E. A., 213, 223
Berk, R. A, 263, 276 Dalgaard, B. R., 300
Biddle, W. B., 300 Dansereau, D. F., 67, 75, 84, 97
Bisbicos, E. E., 310, 330 Davton, D. K., 216, 223
Black, J. B., 269, 276 Deese, J., 81, 97
Block, J. H., 261, 276, 297, 300 Delaney, H. D., 81, 98, 231, 253
Bloom, B., 5, 42, 48, 52, 86, 97, 143, 144, Derrv, S. J., 70, 71, 72, 75
156, 163, 260, 261, 276, 284, 293, Devin-Sheehan, L., 285, 301
297, 298, 301, 302, 329 Dick, W., 21, 30, 35, 256, 259, 276, 336,
Bork, A., 327, 329 338, 356
Bover, E. L., 40, 52 Driscoll, M. P., 9
Branson, R. K., 23, 30, 35
Bretz, R., 80, 97, 216, 223 Earle, R., 18, 19
Brickner, A., 352, 356 Edling, J. V., 304, 329
Briggs, G. E., 94, 98 Egeth, H., 81, 97
Bnggs, L. J., 23, 26, 30, 33, 35, 86, 87, 97, Ellson, D. G, 285, 287, 301
135, 144, 156, 159, 163, 164, 168, Ericsson, K. A., 71, 75
179, 183, 184, 206, 210, 211, 213, Estes, W. K., 187, 203
214, 221, 223, 225, 229, 234, 251,
252, 253, 259, 276, 304, 305, 310, Farmer, J. A, 67, 76, 107, 120
314, 322, 329 Feldman, R., 5, 285, 301

357
358 Name Index

Festinger, L., 86, 97 Jones, M. K., 311, 329

Fishbein, M. A., 270, 276 Joyce, B., 292, 301
Fitts, P.M., 47, 52, 93, 94, 97, 105, 116,
120, 158, 164 Kaufman, R. A., 21, 35
Fitz-Gibbon, C. T., 340, 356 Kausler, D. H, 81, 97
Flagg, P. W., 84, 98 Keele, S. W., 93, 97, 105, 120
Flanagan, J. C, 29, 35 Keisler, E. R, 63, 76
Flavell, J. H., 71, 75 Keller, F. S., 309, 329
Foley, W. J., 350 Keller, J. M., 92, 93, 117, 120
Frase, L. T., 85, 97, 232, 253, 310, 329 Kemp, J. E., 216, 223
Friedenberg, E. Z., 5, 19 Kennard, A D., 352, 356
Kidder, R C., 253, 264
Gage, N. L., 282, 301 Klatzkv, R. L., 187, 204
Gagne, E. D., 77, 83, 97, 104, 120 Klemt,' L. L., 300
Gagne, R. M., 6, 8, 9, 11, 13, 19, 23, 28, Kohler, M., 285, 287, 301
35, 43, 52, 66, 69, 72, 75, 76, 84, Krathwohl, D. R., 48, 52, 86, 97, 143, 144
85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 93, 96, 97, Kyllonen, P. C., 80, 114, 120
104, 109, 110, 111, 115, 120, 131,
132, 133, 134, 144, 152, 154, 155, Lathrop, R. L., 264, 277
157, 164, 178, 180, 181, 184, 187, Levin, J. R., 66, 76, 98, 231, 253
189, 200, 203, 204, 208, 209, 217, Li, Z., 311, 329
220, 221, 222, 223, 234, 245, 250, Lohman, D. F., 71, 76, 114, 120
253, 259, 266, 268, 270, 276, 277,
293, 301 Machen, E., 327, 330
Gall, P., 291, 292, 301
J. Madaus, G. F., 42, 52, 143, 144, 261, 276
Gall, M. D., 291, 292, 301 Madsen, C. H, Jr., 326, 329
Gartner, A., 285, 287, 301 Madsen, C. K, 326, 329
Gephart, W. R., 356 Mager, R. F., 42, 48, 52, 53, 87, 97, 127,
Glaser, R., 72, 76, 80, 97, 198, 204 136, 144, 156, 164
Golinkoff, R. A., 67, 76 Maier, N. R. F., 292, 301
Gonzales, M. A, 326, 329 Martin, B. L., 86, 87, 97, 135, 144, 156,
Good, T. 120 L., 116, 164, 179, 184, 234, 253
Goodlad, J. I., 40, 52 Masia, B. B., 48, 52, 86, 97, 143, 144
Goodnow, J. J., 45, 52 Maver, R. E., 66, 76, 85, 97
Greeno, J. G., 107, 120, 148, 164, 266, 277 McClelland, D. C., 109, 120
Grow, G., 30, 35 McCombs, B. L., 67, 76
Guba, E. G., 356 McGuire, W. J., 87, 97
Guilford, J. P., 106, 108, 120, 267, 277 McLeish,J., 295, 301
Gustafson, K. L., 225, 252 Meichenbaum, D., 67, 76
Merrill, M. D., 69, 76, 180, 181, 184, 245,
Hagen, E., 108, 120, 275, 277, 340, 356 253, 311, 329
Hammond, R. L., 356 Merrill, P. F., 21, 35, 148, 164
Hanesian, H., 8, 18, 70, 75, 84, 85, 97 Merriman, H. O., 356
Hannum, W. H., 148, 164 Mever, B. J. F., 67, 76, 84, 97
Hastings, J. T., 42, 52, 143, 144, 261, 276 Morris, L. L., 340, 356
Hefiin, V. B., 349, 350, 351, 356 Murphv, D. A., 70, 71, 72, 75
Heinich, R, 20, 33, 35 Murray, H. T., 309, 329
Heller, J. J., 107, 120
Hiller, J. H, 310, 329 Naylor, J. C., 94, 97
Hills, J. 277
R., 274, Newell, A., 101, 120
Hollev, C. D., 84, 97 Norman, D. A., 180, 184
Homme, L., 326, 329 Novak, J. D., 8, 18, 70, 75, 84, 85, 97, 309,
Hulse, S. H, 81, 97 329
Hunt, E. B., 100, 120
O'Neil, H. G., 66, 76, 113, 120
76
Jeffries, R., 72,
Johnson, D. M., 198, 204, 267, 277 Paden, D. W., 300
Jonassen, D. H, 148, 164 Palincsar, A. S., 157, 164
 Name Index 359

Panos, R. J., 341, 344, 355 330

Skinner, B. F., 45, 52, 88, 98, 326,
Park. D., 327, 329 Smock. H. R., 300
Pavne, D. A., 274, 277 Snow, R. E., 108, 109, 113, 114, 120, 343,
Perkins, D. N., 182, 184 356
Piaget, J., 58, 76, 157, 164 Spielberger, C. D., 66, 76
Polanvi. M., 80, 98 Spiro, R. J., 84, 98
* Poison, P. G., 72, 76 Stein, F. S., 165, 170, 184
Popham, W. J., 16, 19, 42, 52, 126, 127, Stufflebeam, D. L., 333, 334, 356
144, 256, 277, 332, 340, 356 Suppes, P., 327, 330
Posner, M. I., 47, 52, 93, 94, 97, 105, 116, Surber, J. R., 300
120, 158, 164
Postlethwait, S. N., 309, 329 Tallmadge, G. K., 31, 36
Premack, D., 8, 19 Talmage, H., 303, 330
Pressev, S. L., 310, 330 Tennvson, R. D., 195, 204, 311, 330
Presslev,M., 81, 98, 231, 253 Tessmer, M., 148, 164
Provus, M. M., 356 Thorndike, E. L., 8, 19
Thomdike, R. L., 108, 120, 275, 277, 340,
Rasch, M., 311, 330 356
Ravner, R., 88, 98 Thurstone, L. L., 108, 120
Rechs, J. R., 326, 329 Tobias, S., 104, 106, 109, 120
Reigeluth, C. M., 165, 170, 184 Torrance, E. P., 267, 277
Reiser, R A., 208, 209, 217, 220, 221, 222, Tnandis, H. C, 87, 98, 270, 277
223, 250, 253, 304, 322, 330 Tvler, L. E., 70, 76, 275, 277
Resnick, L. B., 148, 164 Tyler, R. W., 170, 184
Reynolds, A. G.. 84, 98
Reynolds, J. H., 198, 204 Wager, W. W., 18, 19, 23, 35, 159, 163,
Riessman, F., 285, 287, 301 168, 183, 184, 200, 204, 210, 211,
Rilev, M. S., 107, 120 213, 223, 229, 251, 252, 253
Rohwer, W. D., Jr., 81, 98, 133, 144, 157, Walberg, H. J., 282, 301
164, 313, 330 Walbesser, H. H., 154, 164
Rojas, A., 200, 204 Wald, A., 264, 277
Ross, S. M., 327, 330 Walker, H. M., 326, 329
Rothkopf, E. Z., 45, 52, 232, 253, 310, 330 Watson, J. R, 88, 98
Rubinstein, M. F., 71, 76 Weil, M., 292, 301
Rumelhart, D. E., 105, 120, 180, 184 Weiner, B., 109, 120
Ryan, B. A., 309, 330 Weinstein, C. E., 66, 76
Weisgerber, R. A, 21, 30, 36, 303, 304,
Salomon, G,
80, 97, 182, 184, 210, 223 316, 330
Schank, R. C, 105, 106, 120 West, E. K., 67, 76, 107, 120
Scheier. E., 349, 350, 351, 352, 356 White, R. T., Ill, 120, 115, 164
Schramm, W., 211, 223 Wickelgren, W. A., 72, 76
Scriven, M., 332, 333, 335. 356 Wietecha, E. J., 300
Sharan, S., 285, 301 Wittrock, M. C, 195, 204
Shulman, L. S., 63, 76 Wolff, P. M., 67, 76
Simon, H. A, 71, 75 Womer, F. G, 40, 52
Singer, R. N., 47, 52, 94, 95, 98 Worthen, B. R., 63, 76
Subject Index

Abilities Concrete concept, assessment, 264—265

learner characteristics, 107-108 sample lesson, 238
in new learnings, 111-112 Conditions of learning, 8-11
Affective domain, 48 Contiguity, learning principle, 7
Aptitudes, variables in evaluation, 343-344 Control processes, 10—11
ARCS, 117, 118 Course
Assessment objectives, 167-170
performance, 323-324 organization, 167
performance objectives, 142-143 purposes, objectives, 126
student progress, 322-323 Criterion- referenced testing, 26
Attention, event of instruction, 190-191
Attitudes Declarative knowledge, 46
assessment, 269-270 Defined concept, assessment, 264
learner characteristic, 104-105 sample lesson, 240
learning outcome, 48—49 Delivery system
new learning, 115 alternatives, 32
performance objective, 135 choice, 28
prerequisites, 158 Diagnosis, entry skills, 284
sample lesson, 244 Discriminations, 56-57
sequence in learning, 233 assessment, 266
156
as supportive prerequisite, performance objective, 130
Audio-Tutorial Approach, 309 Discussion, in small groups, 291-292

Capabilities Educational outcomes, 40

course goals, 49 Educational system design, 31-34
in course planning, 43 installation, diffusion, 33 — 34
designing instruction, 50 resources, constraints, 32
educational outcomes, 40 stages, 31
Cardinal principles, 40 teacher preparation, 32
Cognitive strategies English education, examples of objectives,
assessment, 266 138-140
induction, 45 Evaluation
functions of, 68 controlling variables, 345-348
learner characteristic, 101 field trial, 337
learning, 70 formative, 30, 335
learning outcomes, 44 generalized example, 353-355
metacognition, 71 instructional programs, 340
new learning, 113 interpretation, 337, 344
performance objective, 133 one-to-one testing, 336
prerequisites, 155 program, arithmetic, 352-353
problem solving, 72 program, beginning reading, 349-352
sequence, 229 Scriven's procedures, 332-333
varieties, 66-69 small-group testing, 336
Concepts Stufflebeam's methods, 333-335
concrete,57-59 summative, 31, 338-340
denned, 59-61 two major roles, 335 — 340
demonstrating performance of, 58, 60 variables, 340-344
object properties, 57 aptitude, 343
performance objective, 130-132 outcome, 341

361
362 Subject Index

process, 341 varieties, 310-311

support, 342 varieties of activities, 305
Events of instruction, 185-198 young learners, 312-315
assessing performance, 197 Individually Guided Instruction (IGE), 21,
computer-based lesson, 200-201 310-311
eliciting performance, 196 Individually Prescribed Instruction (IPI), 21
enhancing retention, transfer, 198 Information {see Verbal information)
gaining attention, 190 Instruction (see also Events of instruction)
group instruction, 283-284 definition, 11, 185
individualized instruction, 306-309 educational goals, 39-41
informing learner of objective, 191 goal schema, 182
large group, 293-295 learning, 186-189
in a lesson, 200-201, 238, 240-244 learning processes, 11-12
list,190, 237 nature of, 185-189
older students, 200 purpose, 4, 28
presenting stimulus, 193 teaching, 3
providing feedback, 196 Instructional analysis, 23 — 24
providing learning guidance, 194 information processing, 23
relation to learning processes, 187-189 Instructional curriculum maps (ICM), 158 —
small group, 275-276 162
stimulating recall of prerequisites, 192 computer course, 172-174
tutoring, 285-286 diagramming, 159—162
lesson, computer course, 173—176
Facts, learning, 81-83 sex-linked traits. 246
Feedback, instructional event, 196 subordinate and entry skills, 162
Flowchart, in task analysis, 148-149 text editing, 162
word processing, 161
Goals Instructional design, 21-31
contemporary educational, 39 assumptions, 4-6
educational outcomes, 40 computer-based lesson, 201
Group instruction (see also Small group in- with human capabilities, 50
struction) learner differences, 110-117
diagnosing entry capabilities, 284 lesson, 224
lecture, 295 media model, 217-218
modes of instruction, 282 module, 225
patterns of interaction, 282 - 283 new learning, 110—116
recitation, 296 performance objectives, 141-142
two-person group, 284 rationale, 14-16
variations in events, 283 systems approach model, 22
by teachers, 206
Individualized Instruction, 302-329 Instructional development, roles, 251
adaptive materials, 225-226, 311 Instructional events {see Events of instruction)
adult learners, 315 Instructional goals,21-22
assessing student performance, 323 Instructional materials,28-30
Audio-Tutorial Approach, 309 Instructional outcomes, 39-52
classroom control, 325 courses and objectives, 41-43
instructional events, 306-309 goals, 40
Keller Plan, 309 Instructional sequence (see Sequence)
developed. 304
locally Instructional strategy, 27-28
management, 311-312 Instructional systems
materials, 316-322 delivery. 32
media development, 326-327 design teams, 29
modules, 317 diffusion, 33
nationallv diffused, 303 installation, 33
PLAN system, 316 steps in derivation, 15-16
systems for older students, 309 Instructional technology, 20
teacher training, 322 Intellectual skills, 53-66
typical daily activities, 324-325 building blocks for instruction, 13-14
 Subject Index 363

concrete concepts, 57-59 intellectual skills, 43-44

defined concepts, 59-61 lesson planning, 234-237
discriminations, 56-57 motor skills, 47-48, 92-95
hierarchical relationships, 159 performance objectives, 125—143
higher order rules, 63-66 uses of taxonomy, 51
learner characteristic, 100-101 verbal information, 46-47, 77-80
x learning hierarchy, 152-154 Learning processes, 9—11
learning outcomes, 43-44 control, 10-11
learning task analysis, 154-156 information, 9-10
of complexity, 55
levels instruction, 11-12
new learning, 111 Learning-task analysis, 24
prerequisites, 55, 151-156 Lesson
problem solving, 63-66 attitude, 244
rules, 61-63 cognitive strategy, 236
school subjects, 73-74 concrete concept, 238
sequence in lesson, 226—229 defined concept, 240
supportive prerequisites, 154-156 identifying in topic, 173
types, 54 integrative goals, 245 — 250
motor skill, 230
Joint Dissemination Review Panel (JDRP), problem solving, 242
31, 33 rule, 241
sequence of skills, 174—177
Keller Plan, 309 verbal information, 243
Knowledge, organized, 83- 85 Lesson planning, 225, 234
choosing media and instructional activities,
Labels, learning, 80 239, 245
Learned capability verb, in objective, 128 effective learning conditions, 234-235
Learner, participant in instruction, 110-117 establishing sequence, 228—234
Learner characteristics, 100- 105 246
instructional activities,
abilities, traits, 25 integrative goals,245
application to instructional design, 117, learning outcomes, 239
119 objectives, 226, 237
attitudes, 104 sequencing activities, 226, 250
cognitive strategies, 101-103, 113 sex-linked traits, 246-250
entry behaviors, 24 sheet, 239, 248
intellectual skills, 101
motivation, 116—117 Mastery learning
motor skills, 105 assessment, 260-262
nature of learner qualities, 100 criteria, 263-271
verbal information, 103 tutoring, 298
Learning Materials
conditions, 8-11 individualized instruction, 316-320
instruction, 186-189 PLAN system, 316-320
model, 9 Media decisions, 205-208
principles, 7-8 design by teachers, 206
Learning guidance development environment, 214
instructional event, 194-196 learning environment, 214
Learning hierarchy learning situation, 207—208
diagnosis and relearning, 229 selection vs. development, 205
prerequisites, 150-156 Media selection, 205-222
sequence, 177—179 adapting selection model, 221
subtraction, 153, 227 Dale's cone of experience, 213
vectors of forces, 177 example, 217-220
Learning outcomes factors in selection, 211-216
attitudes,48-49, 85-92 learning outcomes, 220
cognitive strategies, 44-46, 66-69 model, 217
examples, 44 practical factors, 215, 221
five categories, 43-49 procedures, 210
364 Subject Index

Memory test situation, 258-259

contents, 12 validitv, 257
learned capabilities, 12-13 verbal information, 268
Memory organization, 105 Performance objectives, 25-26, 125-143
107
abilities, achieving precision, 126-127
schemas, 106 assessment, 142—143
107, 108
traits, attitudes, 135
Metacognition, 71 balance in instruction, 141
problem solving strategies, 72 cognitive strategy, 133
Model components, 127— 129
Educational Systems Design, 31 concrete concept, 130
Instructional Design, 22 conditions of learning, 127
Learning and Memory, 9 course purposes, 126
Media Selection, 217 criteria of performance, 1 36
Motor skills defined concept, 131
assessment, 270 discrimination, 130
characteristics, 92 English instruction, 138
learner characteristics, 105 instructional planning, 141 — 143
learning conditions, 94—95 integrating multiple, 179
learning outcomes, 47—48 motor skills, 134
new learning, 114 problem solving, 132—133
performance objective, 130-131 rule, 131-132
sequence in learning, 225 — 226 science instruction, 137
social studies,140
National Diffusion Network (NDN), 34 standard verbs, 128
Needs analysis, 21-22 verbal information, 134
PLAN system, 316-323
Object, in performance objective, 129 materials, 316
Objectives (see also Performance objectives) modules, TLU's, 316, 317
assessment criteria, 257 Prerequisites
course, 41-43, 167-168 attitudes, 156, 158
informing learner, 191 cognitive strategies, 155, 156
integrating multiple, 179 essential, 151
lifelong, 167 intellectual skills, 56, 151-156
specific performance, 168 learning hierarchy, 177-179
topic, 170-171 motor skills, 158
unit, 168 recall, as instructional 192 event,
Outcome variables, in evaluation, 341 skills, in 150
task analysis,
subtracting whole numbers, 153
Performance supportive, 150, 154
assessing, instructional event, 197 types, 150-151
assessment, student, 254-276 verbal information, 157
eliciting, instructional event, 196 Problem solving
Performance assessment assessment, 263
attitudes, 269 higher order rules, 63-66
cautions, 259 performance objective, 132-133
cognitive strategies, 266 sample lesson, 242
diagnosis, 255 strategies, 72
evaluation of instruction, 256 Process variables, in evaluation, 341-342
263-266
intellectual skills, Productive thinking, assessment, 267
masterv, 260-263 Project PLAN, 21, 29, 316-323
motor skills, 270-271
norm-referenced, 273
objective-referenced, 263 Randomization, evaluation studies, 348
reliability, 271 Reinforcement, learning principle, 8
standardized tests, 274 Repetition, learning principle, 8
student placement, 255 Retention, enhancing, as instructional event,
teacher-made tests, 274 198
 Subject Index 365

Rules, 61-63 learning-task, 150

assessment, 263-264 procedural, 147
higher-order, 63-66 target objectives, 145
performance objective, 131 -
132 types, 147
sample lesson, 241 Task classification, 23-24
Teachers
^khemas instructional designers, 206-207
* goal schema, 180-183 preparation, 33
learner characteristics, 106-107 Testing {see also Performance assessment)
School subjects, 73-74
intellectual skills, designing the situation, 259
Science education, examples of objectives, norm-referenced, 273-275
137-138 standardized tests, 274
Self- instruction, 186 teacher-made tests, 274
Sequence Tests, criterion-referenced, 26, 263
attitude learning, 233 Tools, constraints, in performance objectives,
cognitive strategies, 229 129
computer usage course, 171 Traits
course, 165-166, 170-177 learner characteristics, 107- 108
intellectual skills, 226 in new learning, 111
learning hierarchy, 177—179 Transfer, enhancing, instructional event, 198
lesson, 174-175, 228 Tutoring, 284-288, 297, 298
levels, 169 comparison with other methods, 298
motor skills,232 events of instruction, 285 - 286
skills in lesson, 174 features in large groups, 297
topic, 171 flow of instruction, 287
verbal information, 230 mastery learning, 297
Situation, performance objectives, 127
Skills, sequence in topic, 171
Small group instruction, 288-291 Validity, performance assessment, 257-259
discussion, 291-292 Verb, in performance objective, 128
events of instruction, 289-291 Verbal information, 77-85
recitation, 296-297 assessment, 268-269
Social studies, examples of objectives, 140 facts, 81
Subject matter, as educational goals, 40 labels, 80
Support variables, in evaluation, 342 - 343 learner characteristic, 103
learning, 80-85
Task analysis, 23 learning outcomes, 46—47
course purposes, 146—147 new learning, 114-115
enabling objectives, 145 organized knowledge, 83-85
flowchart, 148 performance objective, 134
information-processing, 147, 148-149 prerequisites, 157
instructional curriculum maps (ICM), 158- sample lesson, 243
162 sequence in learning, 230—231
intellectual skill, 151-156 as supportive prerequisite, 155
Harcourt Brace Jovanovich is pleased to offer
the ideal companion:

A Learner's Guide to accompany

PRINCIPLES OF
INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN
Walter Wager, Florida State University

James Applefield and Rodney S. Earle,

University of North Carolina

John V. Dempsey, University of South Alabama

Designed to help the reader study and apply the

principles discussed in the text, this learner's guide is

the ideal companion to the successful Principles of

Instructional Design. Each chapter has objectives for

the corresponding text chapter, structured practice

exercises over the content of the text, and application

exercises to real instructional problems. Includes

samples of student work that may be used as models

for the practical exercises.

paper, 1 75 pages ISBN 0-03-033982-2 1 990

ISBN 0-03-034757-2
90000>

9 780030"347573